LECTURES
ON
THE THEORY OF FUNCTIONS OF
REAL VARIABLES
VOLUME II
BY
JAMES PIERPONT, LL.D.
PROFESSOR OF MATHEMATICS IN YALE UNIVERSITY
GINN AND COMPANY
BOSTON • NEW YORK • CHICAGO • LONDON .
COPYRIGHT, 1912, HY
JAMES PIERPONT
ALL RIGHTS RESERVED
912.3
Qfl
•5
tgftt fltftenaum grtgg
(ilNN AND CoMl'ANY- PRO-
PRIETORS • BOSTON • U.S.A.
TO
ANDREW W. PHILLIPS
THESE LECTURES
ARE INSCRIBED
WITH AFFECTION AND ESTEEM
PREFACE
THE present volume has been written in the same spirit that
animated the first. The author has not intended to write a
treatise or a manual ; he has aimed rather to reproduce his uni-
versity lectures with necessary modifications, hoping that the
freedom in the choice of subjects and in the manner of presenta-
tion allowable in a lecture room may prove helpful and stimulating
to a larger audience.
A distinctive feature of these Lectures is an attempt to develop
the theory of functions with reference to a general domain of
definition. The first functions to be considered were simple
combinations of the elementary functions. Riemann in his great
paper of 1854, " Ueber die Darstellbarkeit einer Function durch
eine trigonometrische Reihe," was the first to consider seriously
functions whose singularities ceased to be intuitional. The re-
searches of later mathematicians have brought to light a collection
of such functions, whose existence so long unsuspected has revolu-
tionized the older notion of a function and made imperative the
creation of finer tools of research. But while minute attention
was paid to the singular character of these functions, practically
none was accorded to the domain over which a function may be
defined. After the epoch-making discoveries inaugurated in 1874
by G. Cantor in the theory of point sets, it was no longer neces-
sary to consider a function of one variable as defined in an in-
terval, a function of two variables as defined over a field bounded
by one or more simple curves, etc. The first to make use of this
new freedom was C. Jordan in his classic paper of 1892. He
has had, however, but few imitators. In the present Lectures the
author has endeavored to develop this broader view of Jordan,
persuaded that in so doing he is merely carrying a step farther
the ideas of Dirichlet and Riemann.
Often such an endeavor leads to nothing new, a mere statement
for any n of what is true for n = 1, or 2. A similar condition
vi PREFACE
prevails in the theory of determinants. One may prefer to treat
only two and three rowed determinants, but he 'surely has no
ground of complaint if another prefers to state his theorems and
demonstrations for general n. On the other hand, the general
case may present unexpected and serious problems. For example,
Jordan has introduced the notion of functions of a single variable
having limited variation. How is this notion to be extended to
two or more variables ? An answer is far from simple. One was
given by the author in Volume I ; its serviceableness has since
been shown by B. Camp. Another has been essayed by Lebesgue.
The reader must be warned, however, against expecting to find
the development always extended to the general case. This,
in the first place, would be quite impracticable without greatly
increasing the size of the present work. Secondly, it would often
be quite beyond the author's ability.
Another feature of the present work to which the author would
call attention is the novel theory of integration developed in
Chapter XVI of Volume I and Chapters I and II of Volume II.
It rests on the notion of a cell and the division of space, or in fact
any set, into unmixed partial sets. The definition of improper
multiple integrals leads to results more general in some respects
than yet obtained with Riemann integrals.
Still another feature is a new presentation of the theory of
measure. The demonstrations which the author has seen leave
much to be desired in the way of completeness, not to say rigor.
In attempting to find a general and rigorous treatment, he was
at last led to adopt the form given in Chapter XI.
The author also claims as original the theory of Lebesgue
integrals developed in Chapter XII. Lebesgue himself considers
functions such that the points e at which a <f(x) <6, for all a, b
form a measurable set. His integral he defines as
n
lim ^ilme'm
n=oo 1
where lm<f(x)<lm+l in em whose measure is e'm, and each
lm+1 — lm= 0, as n = oo. The author has chosen a definition which
occurred to him many years ago, and which to him seems far
more natural. In Volume I it is shown that if the metric field 91
PREFACE vii
be divided into a finite number of metric sets Bv 82-" of norm d,
then
Min
f /= Max 2wt8t , f /= Mi
3I •/H
where wt, J!f, are the minimum and maximum of/ in 8,. What
then is more natural than to ask what will happen if the cells
Bv BZ"- are infinite instead of finite in number? From this
apparently trivial question results a theory of Z-integrals which
contains the Lebesgue integrals as a special case, and which,
furthermore, has the great advantage that riot only is the relation
of the new integrals to the ordinary or Riemannian integrals
perfectly obvious, but also the form of reasoning employed in
Riemann's theory may be taken over to develop the properties
of the new integrals.
Finally the author would call attention to the treatment of
the area of a curved surface given at the end of this volume.
Though the above are the main features of novelty, it is hoped
that the experienced reader will discover some minor points, not
lacking in originality, but not of sufficient importance to em-
phasize here.
It is now the author's pleasant duty to acknowledge the in-
valuable assistance derived from his colleague and former pupil,
Dr. W. A. Wilson. He has read the entire manuscript and
proof with great care, corrected many errors and oversights in
the demonstrations, besides contributing the substance of §§ 372,
373, 401-406, 414-424.
Unstinted praise is also due to the house of Ginn and Com-
pany, who have met the author's wishes with unvarying liberality,
and have given the utmost care to the press work.
JAMES PIERPONT
NKW HAVKN, December, 1911
CONTENTS
CHAPTER I
POINT SETS AND PROPER INTEGRALS
ARTICLES
PA<;K
1-10.
Miscellaneous Theorems
1
11-15.
Iterable Fields ...........
14
16-25.
Union and Divisor of Point Sets
22
CHAPTER II
IMPROPER MULTIPLE INTEGRALS
26-28.
Classical Definition
30
29.
Definition of de la Valle"e-Poussin
31
30.
Author's Definition ... .......
32
31-61.
General Theory
32
62-69.
Relation between Three Types
59
70-78.
Iterated Integrals
63
CHAPTER III
SERIES
79-80.
Preliminary Definitions and Theorems ......
77
81.
Geometric, General Harmonic, Alternating, and Telescopic Series .
81
82.
Dini's Series ...........
86
83.
Abel's Series ... ....
87
84.
Trigonometric Series .........
88
85.
Power Series ... .......
89
86.
Cauchy's Theorem on the Interval of Convergence ....
90
87-91.
Tests of Convergence. Examples
91
92.
Standard Series of Comparison . . . .
101
93-98.
Further Tests of Convergence .
104
99.
The Binomial Series .
110
100.
The Hypergeometric Series ........
112
101-108.
Pringsheiin's Theory
113
H)!)-li:>,.
Arithmetic Operations on Series .......
125
114-115.
Two-way Series
133
ix
CONTENTS
CHAPTER IV
MULTIPLE SERIES
ARTICLES
1HM25.
PAGE
137
120-133.
148
CHAPTER V
SERIES OF FUNCTIONS
134-145.
146.
147-149.
General Theory. Unjform Convergence
The Moore-Osgood Theorem
. 156
. 170
. 173
150-152.
153-156.
Termwise Integration
Termwise Differentiation
. 177
. 181
CHAPTER VI
POWER SERIES
157-158.
159.
160.
161-162.
163.
Termwise Differentiation and Integration ....
Development of log (1 -f a;), arcsin x, arctan x, &, sin a:, cos x
Equality of two Power Series .......
Development of a Power Series whose Terms are Power Series
. 187
. 188
. 191
. 192
. 1!»(i
164-165.
Undetermined Coefficients .......
. 197
166-167.
168.
Development of a Series whose Terms are Power Series .
Inversion of a Power Series .......
. 200
. 203
169-171.
172.
Taylor's Development ........
Forms of the Remainder
. 206
. 208
173.
174.
175-181.
Development of (!+Z)M ........
Development of log (1 + X), etc
Criticism of Current Errors .......
. 210
. 212
. 214
182.
183.
Pringsheim's Necessary and Sufficient Condition
Circular Functions .........
. 220
. 222
184.
185-192.
193.
Hyperbolic Functions ........
Hypergeometric Function .......
Bessel Functions
. 228
. 229
. 238
CHAPTER VII
INFINITE PRODUCTS
195-202.
203-206.
207-212.
213-218.
General Theory
Arithmetical Operations .
Uniform Convergence .
Circular Functions .........
. 242
. 250
. 254
. 257
CONTENTS
XI
ARTICLES
219. Bernouillian Numbers
220-228. B and T Functions .
PAGE
266
267
CHAPTER VIII
AGGREGATES
2-_". 1-230. Equivalence
2:J1. Cardinal Numbers ....
•_'::•_' L'tl. Enumerable Sets ....
242. Some Space Transformations .
243-250. The Cardinal c ....
251-261. Arithmetic Operations with Cardinals
2U2-264. Numbers of Liouville
276
278
280
286
287
292
299
CHAPTER IX
ORDINAL NUMBERS
265-267. Ordered Sets .
268-270. Eutactic Sets .
271-279. Sections .
280-284. Ordinal Numbers
285-288. Limitary Numbers
289-300. Classes of Ordinals
302
304
307
310
314
318
CHAPTER X
POINT SETS
301-312. Pantaxis 324
313-320. Transfinite Derivatives . . . t 330
321-333. Complete Sets 337
CHAPTER XI
MEASURE
334-343. Upper Measure ....'. 343
344-368. Lower Measure 348
369-370. Associate Sets 365
371-376. Separated Sets 366
CHAPTER XII
LEBES&UE INTEGRALS
377-402. General Theory 371
403-406. Integrand Sets .... 385
Xll
CONTENTS
ARTICLES
407-409.
410.
411-413.
Measurable Functions
Quasi and Semi Divisors
Limit Functions ...... . .
PAGE
. 388
. 390
39J|
414-424.
. 3U4
IMPROPER Z,-!NTEGRALS
42:>-428.
429-431.
Upper and Lower Integrals
. 402
405
432-436.
Iterated Integrals
. 409
CHAPTER XIII
FOURIER'S SERIES
436-437.
438.
Preliminary Remarks
Summation of Fourier's Series . ......
. 415
. 420
439-442.
443_446.
447_448.
Validity of Fourier's Development
Limited Variation
. 424
. 429
437
449-46(5.
Uniqueness of Fourier's Development
. 438
CHAPTER XIV
DISCONTINUOUS FUNCTIONS
457-462.
463-464.
465-473.
474-489.
Properties of Continuous Functions ......
Pointwise and Total Discontinuity
Examples of Discontinuous Functions .....
Functions of Class 1 .........
. 452
. 457
. 459
. 468
490-497.
Semicontinuous Functions
. 486
CHAPTER XV
498-518.
DERIVATES, EXTREMES, VARIATION
Derivates ........
493
619-525.
526-534.
Maxima and Minima
Variation .......
. 521
531
635-537.
Non-intuitional Curves
. 537
638-539.
640-642.
Pompeiu Curves .........
Faber Curves ..........
. 542
546
CHAPTER XVI
643-650.
SUB- AND INFRA-UNIFORM CONVERGENCE
Continuity ..........
555
651-666.
562
667-661.
Differentiability . •
. 670
CONTENTS
CHAPTER XVII
GEOMETRIC NOTIONS
AKTICLE8 PAO*
502-563. Properties of Intuitional Plane Curves . . . . . . 678
504. Motion 679
605. Curve as Intersection of Two Surfaces 579
560. Continuity of a Curve 580
567. Tangents 580
568-572. Length 581
673. Space-filling Curves 588
574. Hilbert's Curve 690
675. Equations of a Curve . . . . 593
576-580. Closed Curves 694
581. Area .699
682. Osgood's Curve . .600
683. Re'sume' 603
584-585. Detached and Connected Sets 603
586-591. Images 605
592-597. Side Lights on Jordan Curves 010
698-000. Brouwer's Proof of Jordan's Theorem 614
601. Dimensional Invariance ......... 619
602. Schonfliess' Theorem 621
603-008. Area of Curved Surfaces .623
Index 639
List of Symbols . 644
FUNCTION THEORY OF REAL
VARIABLES
CHAPTER I
k
POINT SETS AND PROPER INTEGRALS
1. In this short chapter we wish to complete our treatment of
proper multiple integrals and give a few theorems on point sets
which we shall either need now or in the next chapter where we
take up the important subject of improper multiple integrals.
In Volume I, 702, we have said that a limited point set whose
upper and lower contents are the same is measurable. It seems
best to reserve this term for another notion which has come into
great prominence of late. We shall therefore in the future call
sets whose upper and lower contents are equal, metric sets. When
a set 21 is metric, either symbol ,
I or 21
expresses its content. In the following it will be often con-
venient to denote the content of 21 by
i.
This notation will serve to keep in mind that 21 is metric, when
we are reasoning with sets some of which are metric, and some
are not.
The frontier of a set as 21, may be denoted by
Front 21.
2. 1. In I, 713 we have introduced the very general notion of
cell, division of space into cells, etc. The definition as there
2 POINT SETS AND PROPER INTEGRALS
given requires each cell to be metric. For many purposes this
is not necessary ; it suffices that the cells form an unmixed divi-
sion of the given set 21. Such divisions we shall call unmixed di-
visions of norm S. [I, 711.] Under these circumstances we have
now theorems analogous to I, 714, 722, 723, viz :
-. Let 33 contain the limited point set 21. Let A denote an un-
mixed division of 33 of norm 8. Let 2la denote those cells of 33 con-
taining points of 21. Then
limI5 = 2l.
5=0
The proof is entirely analogous to I, 714.
3. Let 33 contain the limited point set 21. Let f(x^ • • • xni) be
limited in 21- Let A be an unmixed division of 33 of norm 8 into
cells 8r S2, •••. Let 9JJt, mt be respectively the maximum and mini-
mum off in 8L. Then
lim S& = lim 29ftt£t = I f</9U (1
5=0 5=0 »/H
lira S± = lim 2mA = f/^2l. (2
5=0 5=0 ȣ2t
Let us prove 1) ; the relation 2) may be demonstrated in a similar
manner. In the first place we show in a manner entirely analo-
gous to I, 722, that
cj ., ^ /^Q
"* 0* V
The only modifications necessary are to replace 8t, 5[, 8t(C, by their
upper contents, and to make use of the fact that A is unmixed, to
establish 5).
To prove the other relation
e, 8<8Q, (4
we shall modify the proof as follows. Let E be a cubical division
of space of norm e < eQ. We may take e0 so small that
PROPER INTEGRALS 3
The cells of E containing points of 21 fall into two classes.
1° the cells elK containing points of the cell St but of no other cell
of A ; 2° the cells e{ containing points of two or more cells of A.
Thus we have
SE =
where MIK, M{, are the maxima of / in e^ e(. Then as above we
have
%<£9ta. + |, e<e0, (6
if e0 is taken sufficiently small.
On the other hand, we have
Now we may suppose £0, eQ are taken so small that
differ from 21 by as little as we choose. We have therefore for
properly chosen 80, e0,
This with 6) gives
> Of — H'
which with 5) proves 4).
4. Let f(xi • • • xm~) be limited in the limited field 21. Let A be
an unmixed division of 21 of norm 8, into cells 8V S2 • • • . Let
where as usual m^ Mt are the minimum and maximum of f in 8t.
Then „ ~
I /^2t = Max 8* I fd%. = Min SA.
i/» J% »
The proof is entirely similar to I, 723, replacing the theorem
there used by 2, 3.
5. In connection with 4 and the theorem I, 696, 723 it may be
well to caution the reader against an error which students are apt
to make. The theorems I, 696, l, 2 are not necessarily true if /
4 POINT SETS AND PROPER INTEGRALS
has both signs in 21. For example, consider a unit square $
whose center call O. Let us effect a division E of S into 100
equal squares and let 21 be formed of the lower left-hand square «
and of C. Let us define / as follows :
/ = 1 within s
= - 100 at O.
For the division E,
Hence,
On the other hand, j-m g __ _ i
d=0
The theorems I, 723, and its analogue 4 are not necessarily true
for unmixed divisions of space. The division A employed must
be unmixed divisions of the field of integration 21. That this is
so, is shown by the example just given.
6. In certain cases the field 21 may contain no points at all.
In such a case we define ~
f/=o.
«/5t
7. From 4 we have at once :
Let A be an unmixed division of 21 into cells &v S2, • • • Then
I = MinS8t,
with respect to the class of all divisions A.
8. We also have the following :
Let D be an unmixed division of space. Let dr £?2< '" denote those
cells containing points of 21- Then
with respect to the class of the divisions D.
For if we denote by 8t the points of 21 in c£t we have obviously
Also by I, 696, I = Min
PROPER INTEGRALS 5
with respect to the class of rectangular division of space JE = \e^\.
But the class E is a subclass of the class D.
Thus
M in 2St < Min 2< < Min 2et.
A D K
Here the two end terms have the value 31.
3. Letf(xl ••• rrm), ff(_xl ••• #m) be limited in the limited field 31.
We have then the following theorems :
1. Letf = g in 31 except possibly at the points of a discrete set £).
Then,
For let |/|, \g \ < M. Let D be a cubical division of norm d.
Let MU Nt denote the maximum of/, y in the cell d,. Let A de-
note the cells containing points of £), while A may denote the
other cells of 3l/>-
Then, ^MA = 2JK& +
Hence, | 2Af^ _ 2^ < 1 1 M, - NL \ d, <
and the term on the right = 0 as d = 0.
2. Letf > g in 31 except possibly at the points of a discrete set
Then
For let 31
,£/
But in ^., f>g, hence
The theorem now follows at once.
6 POINT SETS AND PROPER INTEGRALS
3.7/00,
Ccf=cCf
Jmv «/*r
For in any cell d^
Max • cf = c Max /; Min • cf = e Min /
when c > 0 ; while
Max • <?/=<? Min/; Min •<?/=<? Max/
when c < 0.
4. If g is integrable in 21,
/(/+</) =//+JV a
»/2l «/5j c/gj
For from
Max /+ Min #< Max (/+#)< Max/ + Max #,
we have
fc+f»^&f+o^f*f+fc- (2
But ^ being integrable,
Hence 2) gives
which is the first half of 1). The other half follows from the
relation
Min/ + Min g < Min (/ + #) < Min / + Max g.
5. The integrands /, # 6em^ limited,
For in any cell dt
Min (/ + ^) < Min/ + Max #< Max (/ + #).
PROPER INTEGRALS
6. Let f = g + h, \h\<H a constant, in 31. Then,
For
Then by 2 and 4
-S*H+f*^&^fff+Sff'
21 — 21 51 **^ 91 *^9f
or r r r
-#21+) g<\ f<\ </ + m.
—21 _?l _2l
4. Letf(^xl ••• xm~) be limited in limited 31. Then,
I//
(3
I/ 1 ^ M, we have also,
(5
Let us effect a cubical division of space of norm 8.
To prove 1) let JVt = Max|/j in the cell dt. Then using the
customary notation,
- ^ < m, < Mt < N..
Hence
_ ^^ < 2mt^ < 2^^ < SJV^.
Letting 8=0, this gives
-f I/I <//</!/!,
^st ^« ^a
which is 1).
8 POINT SETS AND FUOl'KU INTEGRALS
To prove 3), we use the relation
Hence
r r
~I/I<J /<J I/I,
% J% J^
from which 3) follows on using 3, 3.
The demonstration of 4) is similar.
To prove 5), we observe that
5. 1. Let f>Qbe limited in the limited fields 53, (5. Let 51 be
the aggregate formed of the points in either 53 or (£. Then
This is obvious since the sums
may have terms in common. Such terms are therefore counted
twice on the right of 1) and only once on the left, before passing
to the limit.
Remark. The relation 1) may not hold when fis not > 0.
Example. Let $ = (0, 1), 53 = rational points, and (E = irra-
tional points in 51. Let/= 1 in 53? and — 1 in (£• Then
and 1) does not now hold.
2. Let 51 be an unmixed partial aggregate of the limited field 53-
Let (5 = 53 - 51. If
g =f in 51
= 0 in g,
then
PROPER INTEGRALS 9
For
^7, by I, 728.
But
and obviously
3. The reader should note that the above theorem need not be
true if 21 is not an unmixed part of $&.
Example. Let 21 denote the rational points in the unit square
33.
Let /. i • at
/=#=-! m 21.
Then
4. Let 21 be a part of the limited field 33. Letf^_ 0 6e limited in
21. ie£ = tw 21 and = 0 in @ = # - «.
- (2
For let MH Nt be the maxima of/, ^ in the cell c?t. Then
. +
a
21
Passing to the limit we get 1).
To prove 2) we note that in any cell containing a point of Si
Min/> Min <?.
6. 1. Let f (x^ ••• xm~) be limited in the limited field 21. Let <J3.,
be an unmixed part of 21 such that 33K = 21 as u = 0. Then
f/=limjf/.
»/ «=
10 POINT SETS AND PROPER INTEGRALS
For let | / 1 < M in 21- Let £M = 51 - $„. Then
if-Lf+L* byl'728- (2
But
\Lf
by 4, 1), 5).
Hence passing to the limit u = 0 in 2) we get 1).
2. We note that 1 may be incorrect if the $&u are not unmixed.
For let 21 be the unit square. Let 33M be the rational points in a
concentric square whose side is 1 — u. Let/= 1 for the rational
points of 21 and = 2 for the other points. Then
.£/-»• -I/-1-
«.
7. In I, 716 we have given a uniform convergence theorem
when each 23tt < 21- A similar theorem exists when each 33a >:2l,
Let %u < $„, if u < u'. Let 21 be a part of each $„. Let JBtt =
21 as u = 0. Then for each e> 0, there exists a pair w0, dQ such that
^«o ^ ^ + o' wo sufficiently small.
Also for any division D of norm c? < some d0.
But
Hence
ifw<M0.
8. 1. Let 21 be a point set in m = r -f * way space. Let us set
certain coordinates as xr+i • • • xm = 0 in each point of 2t. The
resulting points 53 we call a projection of 21- The points of 21
PROPER INTEGRALS 11
belonging to a giveji point b of 33, we denote by (56 or more shortly
by (5. We write
21 = 33 • (5,
and call 33i S components of 21.
We note that the fundamental relations of I, 733
hold not only for the components £, ^J, etc., as there given, but
also for the general components 21, 33.
In what follows we shall often give a proof for two dimensions
for the sake of clearness, but in such cases the form of proof will
admit an easy generalization. In such cases 33 will be taken as
the a>projection or component of 21-
2. If 21 = 33 • (E is limited and 33 is discrete, 21 is also discrete.
For let 21 lie within a cube of edge ^ (7 > 1 in m = r + s way
space. Then for any d < some d^
Then S
3. That the converse of 2 is not necessarily true is shown by
the two following examples, which we shall use later :
Example 1. Let 21 denote the points aj, y in the unit square
determined thus :
For
x = ™-, w=l, 2, 3, -.., m odd and < 2",
2n
let 1
0<y< — '
~2n
Here 21 is discrete, while 33 = 1, where 33 denotes the projection
of 21 on the z-axis.
4. Example 2. Let 21 denote the points re, y in the unit square
determined thus :
12 POINT SETS AND PROPER INTEGRALS
For
x = — , wi, n relatively prime,
n
let -,
0<y<--
w
Then, 33 denoting the projection of 31 on the rr-axis, we have
1=0, » = 1.
9. 1. -£e£ 21= 33 • (£ fo # limited point set. Then
21 < (*€<«. (1
For let/=l in 51. Let # = 1 at each point of 21 and at the
other points of a cube A = B • 0 containing 21, let g = 0. Then
Byl'783'
But by 5, 4,
Thus
which gives 1), since
2. Jw ca*e 21 is metric we have
£=J8S, ' (2
(5 is an integrable function over 33.
This follows at once from 1).
PROPER INTEGRALS 13
3. In this connection \ve should note, however, that the converse
of 2 is not always true, i.e. if (£ is integrable, then 21 has content
and 2, 2) holds. This is shown by the following :
Example. In the unit square we define the points a;, y of 21 thus :
For rational x, 0 < • < 1
For irrational #, t < < 1
Then (5 = \ for every x in 33 Hence
21 = 0, 21 = 1.
10. 1. Letf(^x1 •-• xm~) be limited in the limited field 21 = 33 • (£.
(i
/< f/-
&S ~ Jyf
•^J8J/- c«
Let us first prove 1). Let 21, 33, (£ lie in the spaces 9?m, $ftr, 9?8,
r + « = m. Then any cubical division D divides these spaces into
cubical cells dt, d(, d[' of volumes d, d' , d" respectively. Ob-
viously d = d'd". D also divides 33 and each (5 into unmixed cells
S', 8". Let M, = Max/ in one of the cells dt, while 7Hft" = Max/
in the corresponding cell 8". Then by 2, 4,
J>*
t£S
since J/[, MJ > 0. Hence
.< f/ <
»^(lf
*
Letting the norm of D converge to zero, we get 1). We get
2) by similar reasoning or by using 3, 3 and 1).
14 POINT SETS AND PROPER INTEGRALS
•2. To illustrate the necessity of making/ >0 in 1), let us take
21 to be the Pringsheim set of I, 740, 2, while / shall = - 1 in 51.
Then
On the other hand
Hence
and the relation 1) does not hold here.
Iterdble Fields
11. 1. There is a large class of limited point sets which do not
have content and yet —
21= f £. (1
JSQ
Any limited point set satisfying the relation 1) we call iterable,
or more specifically iterable with respect to 33.
Example 1. Let 21 consist of the rational points in the unit
square. Obviously -_ —
21= f(S> 18-1,
J% */<£
so that 21 is iterable both with respect to 53 and (5.
Example 2. Let 21 consist of the points x, y in the unit square
defined thus :
For rational a; let §<y<\>
For irrational a; let 0 < y < 1.
Here 21=1.
Thus 21 is iterable with respect to (5 but not with respect to 53-
ITEKABLE FIELDS 15
Example 3. Let 31 consist of the points in the unit square de-
fined thus : „ . , ,
t or rational a; let 0 < y < f .
For irrational a; let £• < y < 1.
Here 21 = 1, while —
Hence 21 is iterable with respect to (£ but not with respect to $&.
Example 4- Let 21 consist of the sides of the unit square and
the rational points within the square.
Here 21 = 1, while
and similar relations for (L Thus 21 is not iterable with respect
to either 33 or (£.
Example 5. Let 21 be the Pringsheim set of I, 740, 2.
Here 21 = 1, while
Hence 21 is not iterable with respect to either 33 or (g.
2. Every limited metric point set is iterable with respect to any of
its projections.
This follows at once from the definition and 9, 2.
12. 1. Although 21 is not iterable it may become so on remov-
ing a properly chosen discrete set £).
Example. In Example 4 of 11, the points on the sides of the
unit square form a discrete set £> ; on removing these, the deleted
set 21* is iterable with respect to either SQ or (5.
2. The reader is cautioned not to fall into the error of suppos-
ing that if 2lj and 2^ are unmixed iterable sets, then 21 = 2^ + 2la
is also iterable. That this is not so is shown by the Example in 1.
For let 2li = 21*, 2(2 = 1) in that example. Then 1£) being dis-
crete has content and is thus iterable. But 21 = 2tx -I- 2la is not
itcmble with respect to either 53 or (5.
16 POINT SETS AND PROPER INTEGRALS
13. 1. Let 21 be a limited point set lying in the m dimensional
space 9?m. Let 33, & be components of 21 in 9?r, 9^, r + 8 = m.
A cubical division D of norm 8 divides 9?OT into cells of volume
d and 9?r and SR, into cells of volume dfr, c?4, where d = drds. Let
b be any point of 33, lying in a cell dr. Let ^ds denote the sum
6
of all the cells d,, containing points of 21 whose projection is b.
Let ^.ds denote the sum of all the cells containing points of 21
dr
whose projection falls in c?r, not counting two da cells twice.
We have now the following theorem :
If 21 is iteroble with respect to 33,
6=0 $ dr
F°r
Hence
93
Let now 8=0. The first and third members = 21, using I, 699,
since 21 is iterable. Thus, the second and third members have
the same limit, and this gives 1).
2. //"21 is iterable with respect to 33*
Km 2<fr2<f. = I.
«=o 33 b
This follows at once from 1).
3. Let 21 = 33 • <5 be a limited point set, iterable with respect to 33-
Then any unmixed part & of 21 is also iterable with respect to the
^8-component of '(§.
For let 5 = a point of 33 ; (£' points of 21 not in (§ ; (76 = points
of gfc in g, •<?£ = points of £6 in <g'. Then for each /3>0 there
exist a pair of points, b^ 52, distinct or coincident in any cell dr
such that as b ranges over this cell,
C = Min C + /3', C = Max O
ITERABLE FIELDS 17
Let 8 denote, as in 13, 1, the cells of 2t?. which contain points of (5',
«r
and F the cells containing points of both (5, (5' whose projections
fall in dr. Then from
we have
f Ci < Min Ob + /3' + S< Max Ob + ft" •
Multiplying by rfr and summing over 33 we have,
<2dr Min Cb + 2 0'dr + (^ < 2 dr Max ^6 +
Passing to the limit, we have
' + e'< f Cf + 77" + e<l, (2
c/
the limit of the last term vanishing since (5, (5' are unmixed parts
of 51. Here ?/, 77" are as small as we please on taking ft sufficiently
small. From 2) we now have
f C = I-(S' = (5.
«£SB
4. JC<?£ 51 = 33 • (£ 5e iterable with respect to 33- -Z/e£ B be a part
of 33 «wt? ^4. all those points of 51 whose projection falls on B. Then
A is iterable with respect to B.
For let D be a cubical division of space of norm d. Then
1 = lira Ib = lim {~AD+"S,dr- dt\, (1
d=0 d=0 *• r,«
where the sum on the right extends over those cells containing
no point of A. Also
S= f I = lim{2dr(5 + 2;dr(5\, (2
^33 d=« l B
where the second sum on the right extends over those cells dr
containing no point of B.
•Subtracting 1), 2) gives
0 = lim { AD - 2dr(f \ + lim { ?drdt - ^
d=0 ( B > rf=0 ^r,* T
18 POINT SETS AND PROPER INTEGRALS
As each of the braces is > 0 we have
A=
14. We can now generalize the fundamental inequalities of I,
733 as follows :
Let f(xl "• XM) be limited in the limited field 51 = 33 • (E, iterable
with respect to 33- Then
For let us choose the positive constants A, B such that
f+A>0, /-£<0, in SI.
Let us effect a cubical division of the space of 9$m of norm S into
cells d. As in 13, this divides 9^, 9?, into cells which we denote,
as well as their contents, by c?r, ds. Let b denote any point of 33.
As usual let m, M denote the minimum and maximum of / in the
cell d containing a point of 21. Let w', M' be the corresponding
extremes of / when we consider only those points of 21 in d whose
projection is b. Let |/| < F in 21.
Then for any 5, we have by I, 696,
^* S f T)\ 7 -x
z,(m' — B)dt<
or
- 5(2^, - g) + 2wwZ, < )^/, (2
since m> m'.
In a similar manner
< SJfrf, + A(2rf. - (5). (3
Thus for any 5 in 33, 2), 3) give
, < f /< 2MS, + ^l(2rf, - <£). (4
*^ff 6 6
Let y9 > 0 be small at pleasure. There exist two points br b2 dis-
tinct or coincident in the cell d-, for which
ITERABLE FIELDS 19
where | fa |, | /9a | < £ and G:, and (£2 stand for (£6i, (56j, and finally
where
y = Min f /, .7= Max (/
_S — C
for all points b in c?r.
Let c = Min (5 in c?r, then 4) gives
— B(^ds — c) + ^mds <j + ySj < «7+ y82 < ^.Md, + A(TLd, — c)
11 22
where the indices 1, 2 indicate that in 2 we have replaced b by
ii 6
ftp 63.
Multiplying by dr and summing over all the cells dr containing
points of 53, the last relation gives
t- c) + 'S.
1 93 1 93 93
93 93"' 932 93^2*
Now as 8 = 0, vvvj-o? vjvj-o? u-ior
Z.d,.2,ds = Si, 2ar2as = 21, by 13, 2.
93 1 93 2
= I (5 = 21, since 51 is iterable.
si
Thus the first and last sums in 5) are evanescent with B. On
the other hand
93 d, 1
= 0 as 8=0, by 13, 1.
Thus r
dr-Zdtm=J^f. (6
lim
5=0
Hence passing to the limit 8=0 in 5) we get 1), since
2/32c?r have limits numerically <ySS which may be taken as small
as we please as $ is arbitrarily small.
20 POINT SETS AND PROPER INTEGRALS
2. If 21 is not iterable with respect to 33, let it be so on remov-
ing the discrete set £). Let the resulting field A have the com-
ponents .B, 0. Then 1 gives
f/< f f /<
-5/ i//f L/C"
since
3. The reader should guard against supposing 1) is correct .if
only 21 is iterable on removing a discrete set £). For consider
the following :
Example. Let the points of 21 = 2lx + £) lie in the unit square.
Let 2lj consist of all the points lying on the irrational ordinates.
Let £> lie on the rational ordinates such that, when
x = — , m, n relatively prime,
n
Let us define/ over 21 thus :
/=! in ^
/=0 in $).
The relation 1) is false in this case. For
/=!,
^/j
while
/* f*
/=0.
15. 1. Let /(«! ••• #OT) be limited in the limited point set 21.
Let D denote the rectangular division of norm d. All the points
of 210 except possibly those on its surface are inner points of 21.
[I, 702.]
The limits lim C f ^ \{m Cf (1
d=0 */9l d=0 */9[
--D -D
exist and will be denoted by
(TV , /*/ , (2
— 21 *^2l
and are called the inner, lower and upper integrals respectively.
ITERAHLK FIELDS
21
To show that 1) exist we need only to show that for each e > 0
there exists a rf0 such that for any rectangular divisions D', D" of
norms < dQ
A =
/ -
<€.
To this end, we denote by E the division formed by superimpos-
ing D" on D'. Then E is a rectangular division of norm < dQ.
91—91 - A' 9T — 9f - A"
*±E — ±i/)' — •"• i **£ — *±D' — ** •
If cL is sufficiently small, A, *,,
A. i A. <^T)i
an arbitrarily small positive number. Then
A =
C -C \(f _f ]< C + C
J*D Z*M 9 \£*v *** ) x* aL-
<e
if rj is taken small enough.
2. The integrals
ff, f
Jn J%
heretofore considered may be called the outer, lower and upper in-
tegrals, in contradistinction.
3. Let f be limited in the limited metric field 9J(. Then the inner
and outer lower (upper) integrals are equal.
For 9J0 is an unmixed part of 91 such that
Cont 91^ = 1, asd=0.
Then by 6, i, ^ 7s
limj /=)/.
d=o JWD Jy.
But the limit on the left is by definition
4. When 91 has no inner points,
22 POINT SETS AND PROPER INTEGRALS
For each 21^ = 0, and hence each
Point Sets
16. Let 21 = $8 + (S be metric. Then
21 = 33 + £. (1
For let D be a cubical division of space of norm d. The cells
of Sl^ fall into three classes : 1°, cells containing only points of 53 ;
these form 53^. 2°, cells containing points of (S ; these form (j.D.
3°, cells containing frontier points of 53, not already included in 1°
or 2°. CaU these fo. Then
*/, = «/, + 6* +7*. (2
Let now t? = 0. As 21 is metric, \D = 0, since \D is a part of
Front 21 and this is discrete. Thus 2) gives 1).
17. 1. Let 21, 53, 6 ••• (1
be point sets, limited or not, and finite or infinite in number.
The aggregate formed of the points present in at least one of the
sets 1) is called their union, and may be denoted by
*7(2l, 53, <S •••),
or more shortly by sw <>& K \
\&t -Oi vi '**/•
If 21 is a general symbol for the sets 1), the union of these sets
may also be denoted by 77 5 an
U i Aj,
or even more briefly by r«j>
If no two of the sets 1) have a point in common, their union
may be called their «wm, and this may be denoted by
* + » + €+•»
The set formed of the points common to all the sets 1) we call
their divisor and denote by
POINT SETS 23
if 21 is a general symbol as before.
2. Examples.
Let 21 be the interval (0, 2); $8 the interval (1, oo). Then
Z7(«, «) = (0, oo), D»(«, ®) = (1, 2).
211 = (0, 1), a^aa)".
, 212-) = (0*, 1),
Then
2l>2t1>2l2>l3>
£)
T pf
21
Then 5(
Let us first exclude the = sign in 1). Then every element of
21 which is not in £) is in some 2tn but not in 2ln+1. It is therefore
in (5n+1 but not in Sn+2, (£n+8, ••• The rest now follows easily.
4. Some writers call the union of two sets 31, -33 their sum,
whether 21, 53 have a point in common or not. We have not done
this because the associative property of sums, viz. :
does not hold in general for unions.
24 POINT SETS AND PROPER INTEGRALS
Example. Let 51 = rectangle (1234),
Then
and (*7(2l, 33)-£), (2
are different.
Thus if we write + for t/", 1), 2) give
18. 1. Let $ j > $2 > 9I3 ••« 6e a se£ o/ limited complete point
aggregates. Then
Moreover $8 is complete.
Let an be a point of 2ln, w = 1, 2, ••• and 51 = a\, «2i «3 •••
Any limiting point a of 21 is in every 2ln. For it is a limit-
ing point of
ami am+H am+1l '"
But all these points lie in 2lm, which is complete. Hence a lies in
2lm, and therefore in every Stj, 3I2, ... Hence a lies in 33, and
8>0.
^3 is complete. For let yS be one of its limiting points. Let
As each bm is in each 5ln, and 2(n is complete, /3 is in 2ln. Hence /3
is in 33.
2. Let ty. be a limited point set of the second species. Then
is complete.
For 3l(n) is complete and > 0. Also 2l(n) ^
19. iei Slj, §12 ... fte m 4B; let%= U\W.n\. Let An be the com
plement of 5ln with respect to 33^ so that An + S(n = 33- £e
^1 = Dy J An\ . Then A and 51 are complementary, so that A + 21 = 33
POINT SETS 25
For each point b of $8 lies in some 2ln, or it lies in no 2l», and
hence in every An. In the first case b lies in 21, in the second in
A. Moreover it cannot lie in both A and 21-
20. 1. Let Sli^a^s ... (1
be an infinite sequence of point sets whose union call 21. This
fact may be more briefly indicated by the notation
Obviously when 21 is limited,
l>lim!n. (2
That the inequality may hold as well as the equality in 2) is
shown by the following examples.
Example 1. Let 2ln = the segment f-, 1
\n
Then U = (0*, 1).
Example 2. Let on denote the points in the unit interval whose
abscissae are given by
x = — , m < n = 1, 2, 3, ••• m, n relatively prime.
n
2ln = a1 + ... + an.
21= *7{2U
is the totality of rational numbers in (0*, 1*).
AH
21 = 1 and 2ln = 0, we see
t > lim In.
2. Let #i>l#a^- (3
Let 53 be their divisor. This we may denote briefly by
Obviously when ^ is limited,
JB < lim «,.
26 POINT SETS AND PROPER INTEGRALS
Example 1. Let $&n = the segment (0, -V
\ nj
Then 33 = #v 5 $n | = (0), the origin.
Here # = 0. lim$n=limi = 0,
n
and « = lim #n.
Example 2. Let 2In be as in 1, Example 2. Let bn = 21 — 2ln.
Let «„ = (!, 2) + bn.
53 = the segment (1, 2) and ^n = 2.
Hence ® < lim »a.
3. Let 53j < 532 < ••• 60 unmixed parts of 21. ie£ 53n = 21. igi
«B = U { $„} . Then £ = 21 - S3 w discrete.
For let 21 = 23n + (£n ; then (£n is an unmixed part of 21- Hence
Passing to the limit n = oo, this gives
lim (fn = 0.
Hence (5 is discrete by 2.
4. We may obviously apply the terms monotone increasing,
monotone decreasing sequences, etc. [Cf. 1, 108, 211] to sequences
of the type 1), 3).
21. Let (£ = 21 + 55. If 21, 55 are complete,
For 8 = Dist(2l, 33
since 21, 55 are complete and have no point in common. Let D be
a cubical division of space of norm d. If d is taken sufficiently
small 2l/>, 53/> have no cells in common. Hence
Letting d = 0 we get 1).
POINT SETS 27
22. 1. If 21, 33 are complete, so are also
£ =(21,33), £)
Let us first show that (S is complete. Let c be a limiting point
of (J. Let <?j, <?2, ••• be points of (£ which = c. Let us separate
the cn into two classes, according as they belong to 21, or do not.
One of these classes must embrace an infinite number of points
which = c. As both 21 and $3 are complete, c lies in either 21 or
33- Hence it lies in (£.
To show that $) is complete. Let dv dv ••• be points of £) which
= d. As each dn is in both 21 and 33, their limiting point d is in
21 and 33, since these are complete. Hence d is in £).
2. _Z/ 21, 33 are metric so are
l, 33).
For the points of Front (5 lie either in Front 21 or in Front 33*
while the points of Front £> < Front 21 and also < Front SQ. But
Front 21 and Front 33 are discrete since 21, 33 are metric.
23. Let the complete set 21 have a complete part 33- Then how-
ever small e > 0 is taken, there exists a complete set (5 in 21, having no
point in common with 33 such that
Moreover there exists no complete set 0>, having no point in common
with 33 such that
The second part of the theorem follows from 21. To prove 1)
let D be a cubical division such that
^,= I + e', », = » + €", 0<e', €"<e. (2
Since 33 is complete, no point of 33 lies on the frontier of 33/>-
Let (5 denote the points of 21 lying in cells containing no point of
33. Since 21 is complete so is (5, and 33? (5 have no point in common.
Thus
«/,= »!>+ (Si,. (3
28 POINT SETS AND PROPER INTEGRALS
But the cells of (£0 may be subdivided, forming a new division A,
which does not change the cells of 33^, so that $QD = $Q&, but so that
6A = 6 + 6'", 0<e'"<e. (4
Thus 2), 3), 4) give
24. Let 21, 33 be complete. Let
Forlet U = 2t + A
Then ^4 contains complete sets (7, such that
-e, (2
but no complete set such that
(7>U-t, (3
by 23. On the other hand,
Hence ^4 contains complete sets (7, such that
£>«-£>-e, (4
but no complete set such that
£>$-£). (5
From 2), 3), and 4), 5) we have 1), since e is arbitrarily small.
25. Let
2ln fom# complete and such that 2ln > sowe constant k.
POINT SETS 29
For suppose l=k-®>0.
Let l = c+rj, e, 77 >0.
Then by 23 there exists in 5lj a complete set Sji having no point
in common with £) such that
(Ii > 1] - © - e ;
or as 51, > A;, such that ~ ^
lii^7?-
T *><-
S,
Then by 24,
Thus
Thus 212 contains the non-vanishing complete set (52 having no
point in common with £). In this way we may continue. Thus
Slj, 512, ••• contain a non-vanishing complete component not in £),
which is absurd.
Corollary. Let 31 = ( 2lj < 2I2 < • • • ) be complete. Then IB = U.
This follows easily from 23, 25.
CHAPTER II
IMPROPER MULTIPLE INTEGRALS
26. Up to the present we have considered only proper multiple
integrals. We take up now the case when the integrand f(x1 ••• xm)
is not limited. Such integrals are called improper. When m = 1,
we get the integrals treated in Vol. I, Chapter 14. An important
application of the theory we are now to develop is the inversion
of the order of integration in iterated improper integrals. The
treatment of this question given in Vol. I may be simplified and
generalized by making use of the properties of improper multiple
integrals.
27. Let 51 be a limited point set in m-way space 9?m. At each
point of 51 let f(xl •••xm) have a definite value assigned to it.
The points of infinite discontinuity of f which lie in 21 we shall
denote by $. In general $ is discrete, and this case is by far the
most important. But it is not necessary. We shall call $ the
singular points.
/*Y)
Example. Let 51 be the unit square. At the point 2; = —,
y = -, these fractions being irreducible, let/= ns. At the other
s
points of 51 let /= 1. Here every point of 51 is a point of infinite
discontinuity and hence $ = 51-
Several types of definition of improper integrals have been
proposed. We shall mention only three.
28. Type I. Let us effect a division A of norm 8 of 9?m into
cells, such that each cell is complete. Such divisions may be
called complete. Let 51$ denote the cells containing points of 51,
but no point of $ > while 51^ may denote the cells containing a
point of $. Since A is complete, / is limited in 5l«. Hence /
admits an upper and a lower proper integral in 5l«. The limits,
when they exist, —
lim f /, lim f /, (1
8=0 ilStg 8=0 i^tfi
30
GENERAL THEORY 81
for all possible complete divisions A of norm 8, are called the
lower and upper integrals of / in 21, and are denoted by
(2
«a ia
or more shortly by
f/
Ja
When the limits 1) are finite, the corresponding integrals 2)
are convergent. We also say/ admits a lower or an upper improper
integral in 3(. When the two integrals 2) are equal, we say that
/ is integrable in 51 and denote their common value by
("./»« or by (f. (3
Ja »/a
We call 3) the improper integral of f in 21 ; we also say that
/ admits an improper integral in 21 and that the integral 3) is
convergent.
The definition of an improper integral just given is an extension
of that given in Vol. I, Chapter 14. It is the natural develop-
ment of the idea of an improper integral which goes back to the
beginnings of the calculus.
It is convenient to speak of the symbols 2) as upper and lower
integrals, even when the limits 1) do not exist. A similar remark
applies to the symbol 3).
Let us replace /by |/| in one of the symbols 2), 3). The
resulting symbol is called the adjoint of the integral in question.
We write
(4
When the adjoint of one of the integrals 2), 3) is convergent,
the first integral is said to be absolutely convergent. Thus if 4) is
convergent, the second integral in 2) is absolutely convergent, etc.
29. Type II. Let \, /t*>0. We introduce a truncated func-
tion /v defined as follows :
f^ =/Oi •••*„) when - X </< n
= — \ when/< — \
= p when /> ft.
32 IMPROPER MULTIPLE INTEGRALS
We define now the lower integral as
A similar definition holds for the upper integral. The other
terms introduced in 28 apply here without change.
This definition of an improper integral is due to de la VallSe
Powssm. It has been employed by him and R. G-. D. Richardson
with great success.
30. Type III. Let a, £ > 0. Let 5la/3 denote the points of 51
at which
We define now
f/ = lira f / ; f / = lim f /. (1
--• J?l —
The other terms introduced in 28 apply here without change.
This type of definition originated with the author and has been
developed in his lectures.
31. When the points of infinite discontinuity $ are discrete
and the upper integrals are absolutely convergent, all three defini-
tions lead to the same result, as we shall show.
When this condition is not satisfied, the results may be quite
different.
Example. Let 51 be the unit square. Let 5lj, 2I2 denote respec-
tively the upper and lower halves. At the rational* points 33,
2; = — , « = -, in 21,, let/= ns. At the other points (£ of 5L, let
n ' s
/=-2. In5l2let/=0.
1° Definition. Here $ = %r
Hence
f/=0.
_9I
2° Definition. Here
= -1, f/= + oo.
*^9T
* Here as in all following examples of this sort, fractions are supposed to be
irreducible.
GENERAL THEORY 33
3° Definition. Here 21,^ embraces all the points of 212, 6 and a
finite number of points of $3 for a> 2, $ arbitrarily large. Hence
and thus
~
(/=-!.
•V
32. In the following we shall adopt the third type of definition,
.•is it seems to lead to more general results when treating the im-
portant subject of inversion of the order of integration in iterated
integrals.
We note that if /is limited in 21,
lini | f = the proper integral I f.
a, /3=o°Vl2l ^L.n
For a, $ being sufficiently large, 2ta/3 = 21-
Also, if 21 is discrete,
__'=//=0-
For 2la8 is discrete, and hence
Hence the limit of these integrals is 0.
33. Let m=\Minf\ , Jf=|Max/| in 21.
Then
lim /=lim I /, infinite.
=«a =<x»
im I / = lim I /, M finite.
= » =»
lim
For these limits depend only on large values of a, $, and when
m is finite. .
2lm,^ = 5t0^ ' forall«>7n.
Similarly, when M is finite
2ta,8 = 2l«,* , fornU/8>lf.
84 IMPROPER MULTIPLE INTEGRALS
Thus in these cases we may simplify our notation by replacing
2L, M •> 2lm/3
by 8L« , ^ ,
respectively.
2. Thus we have:
/ = lim { /, when Min/ is finite.
*/2i /s=»^
I / = lim I / , when Max/ is finite.
•1%. a=ooi/2l_a
3. Sometimes we have to deal with several functions /,#, •••
In this case the notation 5la/3 is ambiguous. To make it clear we
let 2l/t Oj 0 denote the points of 21 where
Similarly, 2l?, a, /s denotes the points where
— a <_y <_/3, etc.
34. I / is a monotone decreasing function of a for each {3.
\ f is a monotone increasing function of ft for each a.
**a.p
If Max / ^s finite
Xf are monotone decreasing functions of a.
- J-.
If Min / is finite
I / are monotone increasing functions of /3.
ii2l/3
Let us prove the first statement. Let a! > a.
Let D be a cubical division of space of norm d.
Then ft being fixed,
Xf= lim 2 mtdt, (1
-~a/J *=» SSa/J
f /=Km2wX, (2
J^Sla'/S ^=<> ««'p
using the notation so often employed before.
GENERAL THEORY 85
But each cell dt of 3L0 lies among the cells dj of 5l« ft. Thus we
can break up the sum 2), getting
• Here the second term on the right is summed over those cells
not containing points of 21,^. It is thus < 0. In the first term
on the right ?»,•'< wit. It is thus less than the sum in 1). Hence
W 9(
Thus r r
L ^ L » a/>a-
^/aa'o -¥%aB
In a similar manner we may prove the second statement ; let
us turn to the third.
We need only to show that
Xf is monotone decreasing.
**_a
Let «'>a. Then
-~
I = lim 2JM&. (3
^a_a d=° «_a
C =\{mZMt'dJ. (4
»/Sl_a, rf=o a_a.
As before ^M(d( = S^dJ + ZM'Jd'J. (5
But in the cells dt, MJ = Mt. Hence the first term of 5) is
the same as 2 in 3). The second term of 5) is <0. The proof
follows now as before.
35. If Max /i* finite and \ f are limited, ( f is convergent and
^a_a *W
f/< f /
*f« js/«_0
/f Min f is finite and I are limited, j / i« convergent and
f /< f /.
^stfi ^a
.!•; IMPROPER MULTIPLE INTEGRALS
For by 34
/^ /*
f / , f /
*J*-m J*f
are limited monotone functions. Their limits exist by I, 277, 8.
36. If M= Max/ is finite, and \ f is convergent, the correspond-
ing upper integral is convergent and
where f > — a in 2La.
Similarly, if m — Miii/ is finite and I f is convergent, the
sponding lower integral is convergent and
----- - corre-
9
Let us prove the first half of the theorem.
We have ~ -~
J /" IL^Jgj
Now r r r
I ./< I < I
»/5t ~vl2l_a — ^31- a ~
We have now only to pass to the limit.
37. If \ f is convergent, and 53 < 51,
does not need to converge. Similarly
does not need to converge, although I / does.
Example. Let 21 be the unit square ; let 55 denote the points
for which x is rational.
GENKRAL THEORY 37
/= 1 when x is irrational
= - when x is rational.
y
Then r
£/-! ; hence
On the other hand,
Hence ~ ~
\ = lim I = lira log $ = + oo
J® 0=» •A*
is divergent.
38. 1. In the future it will be convenient to let *$ denote the
points of 21 where /> 0, and 9? the points where/ <. 0. We may
call them the positive and negative components 0/31.
2. If \ f converges, so do I /.
If \ f converges, so do I /.
For let us effect a cubical division of space of norm d. Let
ft' > ft. Let e denote those cells containing a point of ^ ; e'
those cells containing a point of ^ but no point of ^ ; 8 those
cells containing a point of 21^ but none of typ.
Then ~
I =lin
^SLfl' d=
f =li
»/2 d
'%# d=o
Obviously M' > 1W
Hence
f -
^a'
38 IMPROPER MULTIPLE INTEGRALS
We find similarly
XT*
- I =lim
Jfl' «%« d=0
Now
I • •
< €
for a sufficiently large a, and for any /3, /3' > £0.
Hence the same is true of the left side of 1).
As corollaries we have :
3. If the upper integral off is convergent in 51, then
If the lower integral off is convergent in 21,
For
L < f < f etc.
•/'a — "typ *^^P
4. J// >> 0 and \ f is convergent, so is
f/ , »<«.
c/^
Moreover the second integral is < the first.
This follows at once from 3, as 21 = ty.
39. If I / <md I / converge, so do If.
»/<p J_n ti3r
WeshowthatJ /converges; a similar proof -holds forj . To
this end we have only to show that
e>0; a,y3>0; J* f
GENERAL THEORY 39
Let D be a cubical division of space of norm d. Let typ , *$£••
denote cells containing at least one point of 2ta^- , 2lai</3" at which
/>0. Let it,,- » tta" denote cells containing only points of 2ta'/j' ,
210"0" at which/< 0. We have
V* TI/€" 7 ^? i ^* ^* 1 / 1 ^T* • ^*
2.Midi = 2+2 ; 27lalal =2 + 2
Subtracting,
*a'S'1 ' 8U"B" ' 3Jfl' ' ' ¥0"' na' ' * na" '
Let Jf[ = Max / for points of %l in dt. Then since / has one
sign in 9£,
Letting d = 0, 2) and 3) give
Now if /3 is taken sufficiently large, the first term on the right is
< e/2. On the other hand, since j / is convergent, so is I / by
«/«> »/ 5j
36. Hence for a sufficiently large, the last term on the right is
<e/2. Thus 4) gives 1).
40. 7f/ is inteyrdble in 21, it its in any 53 < 21.
Let us first show it is integrable in any 21^.
Let D be a cubical division of space of norm d.
Then A^ = Km 2®^ , o\ = £)sc/ in d,.
Let ^ > a, /8' > /8. Then
A-s- — Aag = Hm
40 IMPROPER MULTIPLE INTEGRALS
Now any cell dt of 5l0/3 is a cell of St^', and in d^ o)[ > a>t.
Hence Aa>p> > Aap. Thus Aaft is a monotone increasing function
of a, $. On the other hand
lim Aaft = 0,
by hypothesis. Hence Aap = 0 and thus/ is integrable in ${0/3.
Next let/ be limited in 53, then |/|<some 7 in 53. Then
33 < %y, r Kut / being integrable in 5lv, v, it is in 53 by I, 700, 3.
Let us now consider the general case. Since / is integrable in 51
f / , f/,
c/« ««
both converge by 38. Let now P, .ZV be the points of <$, 9? lying
in 53. Then
f/< ff , f / < f/
JP Jty Jjf %/V)J
Thus f f C f
JpJ JN
both converge. Hence by 39,
both converge. But if 53a, b denote the points of 53 at which
f / = lim f /,
^J m T ^J \n
by definition.
But as just seen, C _ C
Hence f f = f f>
»/93 »^S3
and /is integrable in 53.
41. As a corollary of 40 we have :
1 . Iff is integrable in 51, it admits a proper integral in any part
of 51 in which f is limited.
2. If f is integrable in any part of 51 in which f is limited, and if
either the lower or upper integral off in 51 is convergent, f is integra-
ble in 51.
GENERAL THEORY 41
For let
f/=lim f/ (1
%x \)| o ,f \s M Q
I -/ -
8 « •'SI
f/=limf/ (2
—21 — 2lafl
exists and 1), 2) are equal.
exist. Since
necessarily
42. 1. In studying the function/ it is sometimes convenient to
introduce two auxiliary functions defined as follows : .
g=f where/>0,
= 0 where /<0.
h=-f where /<0,
= 0 where />0.
Thus #, h are both > 0 and
/ = 9 ~ h,
I/I-IP + *.
We call them the associated non-negative functions.
2. As usual let 3laj3 denote the points of 21 at which — a </</3.
Let 510 denote the points where g < /3, and 2la ^Ae points where h < a.
A (1
= lim I A. (2
For - -
J 9 = J 9, by 5, 4.
Letting «, /8 = oo, this last gives 1).
A similar demonstration establishes 2).
3. We cannot say always
Xc c c
# = lim I g ; I /« = lim I A,
» «=r, J<H* ~ «79r fl=.-« »^9f „
_«
as the following example shows.
42 IMPROPER MULTIPLE INTEGRALS
Let / = 1 at the irrational points in 21 = (0, 1),
= — w, for x = — in 21.
n
Then ~ ~
fg-O , f f-L
Again let /= — 1 for the irrational points in 51,
= n for the rational points x = — •
n
Then ^ ^
I A=0. I h=l.
_2ta — 2to6
43. 1.
J) I^=I/; Si^Sj* v
3) f * = - f/i f^<- f/; (4
^st %oi •£« *^«
provided the integral on either side of the equations converges, or
provided the integrals on the right side of the inequalities converge.
Let us prove 1); the others are similarly established. Effecting
a cubical division of space of norm J, we have for a fixed /3,
//-*
2lg d-v, ^p
w-jT/. (5
Thus if either integral in 1) is convergent, the passage to. the
limit /3 = oo in 5), gives 1).
2. If \ fis convergent, \ g converge.
If \ f is convergent, I h converge.
This follows from 1 and from 38.
GENERAL THEORY 43
3. If I / is convergent, we cannot say that I / is always con-
9f *^ vl J
vergent. A similar remark holds for the lower integral.
/= 1 at the rational points of 51 =(0, 1)
= at the irrational points.
Then
//=' • J/=-°°-
4. That the inequality sign in 2) or 4) may be necessary is
shown thus :
Let ..
/ = — - for rational x in 21 = (0, 1)
= for irrational x.
Then r r
J/=° ' J/=2'
44. 1. f/= fa- lim f h, (1
21 21 o. /3=ac*^2l
c c r
Ja/= lim Js g-jjt* (2
provided, 1° the integral on the left exists, or 2° the integral and the
limit on the right exist.
For let us effect a cubical division of norm d. The cells con-
taining points of 51 fall into two classes :
a) those in which / is always < 0,
6) those in which /is >0 for at least one point.
In the cells a), since /=</— A,
Max/= Max(# — h~)= Max^ — MinA, (3
as Max <7 = 0. In the cells 5) this relation also holds as Min h = 0.
Thus 3) gives
£/-£/-£*• (4
44 IMPROPER MULTIPLE INTEGRALS
Let now a, $ = ao. If the integral on the left of 1) is conver-
gent, the integral on the right of 1) is convergent by 43, 2. Hence
the limit on the right of 1) exists. Using now 42, 2, we get 1).
Let us now look at the 2° hypothesis. By 42, 2,
lim <7= I a.
*,*-•> J*J J*
Thus passing to the limit in 4), we get 1).
2. A relation of the type
ff= Cff- fh
«V «V Jx
does not always hold as the following shows.
Example. Let/ = n at the points x — ^-
£ m
= — n for x = — — ,
f)2n+l
= — 1 at the other points of 51 = (0, 1).
Then f/=-l ftf = 0 f A = 0.
J* J% Jgc
45. If I f is convergent, it is in any unmixed part 33 0/21.
*£*
Let us consider the upper integral first. By 43, 2,
exists. Hence a fortiori,
exists. Since 21 = 53 + & is an unmixed division,
f h= C h+ f h.
Jwaft J®ali J^
Hence j h < \ h.
«^»» „ «^ar _
-»<x/3
GENERAL THEORY 45
As the limit of the right side exists, that of the left exists also.
From this fact, and because 1) exists,
exists by 44, l.
A similar demonstration holds for the lower integral over $&.
46. If&i, 912 ••• Wmform an unmixed division 0/21, then
= ff + ... + f /,
•/ J2l
provided the integral on the left exists or all the integrals on the
right exist.
For if 2lTOi a/3 denote the points of 3la/3 in 2lw, we have
f = f + ~ + f - (2
J«U J%lap ^8t«a3
Now if the integral on the left of 1) is convergent, the integrals
on the right of 1) all converge by 45. Passing to the limit in 2)
gives 1). On the other hypothesis, the integrals on the right of
1) existing, a passage to the limit in 2) shows that 1) holds in
this case also.
47. If I f and \ f converge, so does | I/ 1, and
Jy JSR c/st
f I/I </>-// (1
J »/$ «A
. ' ? (2
For let Aft denote the points of 51 where
0<|/|</3.
I/I = <7 + A,
f 1/1= f (0+A)< fff+f*
*/Aa *^A *^
<ff- ff by 43, 1. (4
J«p JSR
Passing to the limit in 3), 4), we get 1), 2).
46 IMPROPER MULTIPLE INTEGRALS
48. 1. If f |/ 1 converges, both \ /converge..
«/JJ _5/2l
For as usual let ty denote the points of 21 where />0.
Then 7; 7;
/= fj/l
is convergent by 38, 3, since j |/| is convergent.
J<&
Similarly, -
f (-/)=- f/
t/g .AH
is convergent. The theorem follows now by 39.
2. If ( |/| converges, so do
Jli
(9 <
j/2l
For by 1,
both converge. The theorem now follows by 43, 2.
3. For
f/
Ja
to converge it is necessary and sufficient that
z» convergent.
For if 3) converges, the integrals 2) both converge by 1.
On the other hand if both the integrals 2) converge,
// , f/
J$ J<31
converge by 38, 2. Hence 3) converges by 47.
4. Iff is integrable in 21, so is \f\.
For let Aft denote the points of 21 where 0 < |/| < /8. Then
fl/l =lim f |/|,
i^r 0=»Jv
and the limit on the right exists by 3.
GENERAL THEORY 47
Hut by 41, l,/ is integrable in Ap. Hence |/| is integrable in
ft by I, 720. Thus
49. From the above it follows that if both integrals
J/
converge, they converge absolutely. Thus, in particular, if
// ' rli
converges, it is absolutely convergent.
We must, however, guard the reader against the error of sup-
posing that only absolutely convergent upper and lower integrals
exist.
Example. At the rational points of 21 = (0, 1) let
/C*>-
Z
~At the irrational points let
Here —
)/•=! f/=_oo.
Jr sor
Thus, / admits an upper, but not a lower integral. On the
other hand the upper integral of f does not converge absolutely.
For obviously
50. We have just noted that if
f |/| = + 00.
is convergent, it is absolutely convergent. For m = 1, this result
apparently stands in contradiction with the theory developed in
Vol. I, where we often dealt with convergent integrals which do
not converge absolutely.
48 IMPROPER MULTIPLE INTEGRALS
Let us consider, for example,
sin -
J = I dx = I fdx.
Jo x Jw
If we set x = -, we get
which converges by I, 667, but is not absolutely convergent by
I, 646.
This apparent discrepancy at once disappears when we observe
that according to the definition laid down in Vol. I,
J= Mlim I fdx,
a=0 •'a
while in the present chapter
J= lim I fdx.
a, /3 = oc»^2la|3
Now it is easy to see that, taking a. large at pleasure but fixed,
fdx = GO as /8 = oo,
J*&
so that <7does not converge according to our present definition.
In the theory of integration as ordinarily developed in works
on the calculus a similar phenomenon occurs, viz. only absolutely
convergent integrals exist when m > 1.
51. 1. If I |/| is convergent,
Iff </|/|. (1
IJ »/3i
For 5t0/s denoting as usual the points of 51 where — «</<
we have . — — —
/ < r 1/1 <r i/i.
„ »/9r „ JM
- **a/3
Passing to the limit, we get 1).
GENERAL THEORY 49
2. If | )/ 1 is convergent, ( f are convergent for any 33 <9l.
»/j( ^/$j
For j |/| is convergent by 38, 4.
Hence
converge by 48, 3.
3. If, 1°, | |/ 1 w convergent and Mm f is finite, or if, 2°, j / is
JK Jfc
convergent and Max. f is finite, then
t» convergent.
This follows by 36 and 48, 3.
52. ie£/>0 iw 91. Let the integral
Cf " ": ' •' V
Jn
converge. If T:
r/=r/+a, a
^/a ^
then for any unmixed part 33 < 91.
', (2
where 0 < «' <. a. (3
For let 91 = 53 + (5. Then 9(0=$0 + (S0 is an unmixed division.
Also
- f + f
«
= f + a by 1)
50 IMPROPER MULTIPLE INTEGRALS
Hence f + f = f + f + «. (4
_»/33 *J (£ _?/$ : _ £
From 2)
«' = f C
_»/!g _"/33s
(7* /*" 1
= a — j — by 4)
Ug ygp J
which establishes 3).
53. If the integral J I/I C1
converges, then ^
€>0, (7>0, I / <€ (2
/or awy 33 < 21 «wcA that
53 ><r. (3
Let us suppose first that / > 0. If the theorem is not true,
there exists, however small <r>0 is taken, a 53 satisfying 3) such
that
<*
Then there exists a cubical division of space such that those
points of 31, call them (5, which lie in cells containing a point of
53, are such that (5<<r also. Moreover (g is an unmixed part of 21.
Then from 4) follows, as f> 0, that
also.
Let us now take yS so that
f=f + «•
<J% Jftp
Then
and 0<^«'<^«
by 52. But ^
I < /3(5« < /
*^CF»~
GENERAL THEORY 51
Let now J3<r < e, then
£<«•
*/ffa
which contradicts 5).
Let us now make no restrictions on the sign of/. We have
But since 1) converges, the present case is reduced to the pre-
ceding.
54. 1. Let \ \f\
^
converge.
Let as usual 2laj3 denote the points of 21 at which — «</<$. Let
Aab be such that each 2ltt0 lies in some Aab in which latter f is limited.
Let 3X0 = Aab — 2la/s and let a, b = ao with a, ft. Then
lim 5X0 = 0.
For if not, let
llm £)«0 = I, I > 0.
«, £=*>
Then for any 0 < X < Z, there exists a monotone sequence |an, $„}
such that
3Xn0n > X f or w > some w.
Let /in=Min(an, /8,), then |/| > /ttn in D.,^, and /*„=<».
Hence x,
J |/|>^X=QO. (1
•'
But ®aB^ being a part of 21
by 38, 3. This contradicts 1).
2. Definition. We say A0t b is conjugate to 31^ with respect to/.
55. 1. As usual let - a <f < ft in 2l0/3. Let Q<f<ft in 3lp.
Let ACJ, be conjugate to 2la/s with reference to /; and Ab conjugate
to 5(<j with respect to |/|.
52 IMPROPER MULTIPLE INTEGRALS
If, 1°, r
lim JL i/i'
0=00 ^a^
or z/, 2°,
a, 6=00
For, if 2° holds, 1° holds also, since
77 7?
im J /-J~/ 0
6=00 «£-^a, 6 ~.»
Thus case 2° is reduced to 1°. Let then the 1° limit exist.
We have — —
f /= f g- ( A, (2
\t J*a/ ^
as 4) in 44, l shows. Let now
3X/3 = Agj, — vla/3.
Then,
JL 9<\A 9<\ 9+ I 9- (3
•/*^ ''^•l ^^ */2)ap
But jDas = 0, as a, (3 = oo, by 54. Let us now pass to the limit
«, ft = QO in 3). Since the limit of the last term is 0 by 53, 54, we
get — -i
lim L #=lim J 0- (4
a, p=oo*/2laj3 a, 6=»c/^a,6
Similarly, ,, ~
lim I A = lim I h. (5
a, |3=cc ^ajS a, 6=00 i£-^a6
Passing to the limit in 2), we get, using 4), 5),
f /= lim | f g- C h I
«/*« a, 6=«) (^^aft Si^aft
a, 6=c
In a similar manner we may establish 1) for the lower integrals.
GENERAL THEORY 53
2. The following example is instructive as showing that when
the conditions imposed in 1 are not fulfilled, the relation 1) may
not hold.
Example. Since ~j 7
I -=+oo,
»/0 x
there exists, for any in>0, a 0<6B+1<6W, such that if we set
then (2 <6r < ••• =00
as bn = 0. Let now
/ = 1 for the rational points in 21 = (0, 1),
= - for the irrational.
x
Then r 1
A/1 ~0'
Let ~dx
Let An denote the points of 21 in (5n, 1) and the irrational points
in (in+V ^n)'
Then C >a = + ^
»/^n
But obviously the set A* is conjugate to 2l/j. On the other hand,
while
f
lim
n-cc i£^n
56. 7j^ tAe integral
converges, then
e>0, <r>0,
(2
/or any unmixed part $Q of 21
54 IMPROPER MULTIPLE INTEGRALS
Let us establish the theorem for the upper integral ; similar
reasoning may be used for the lower. Since 1) is convergent,
(3
and X = lim J h (4
exist by 44, 1. Since 3) exists, we have by 53,
<7' (5
for any $&< 21 such that $8 < some <r'.
Since 4) exists, there exists a pair of values a, b suqji that .
\=j* h + r) , 0<77<|, (6
since the integral on the right side of 4) is a monotone increasing
function of a, b.
Since 21 = 93 + (£ is an unmixed division of 21,
f h = C h + C h.
J
Since h > 0, and the limit 4) exists, the above shows that
fi= lim j h , v— lim j h
a, p=<x> ^33afl a, /3=co *£Saj3
exist and that
(7
Then a, b being the same as in 6),
r 7, , i f*
a = I n -f- « ', (8
— ®ab
and we show that
as in 52. Let now c > a, 5 ; then
if we take
GENERAL THEORY 55
. ' (11
by 44, 1. Thus 2) follows on using 5), 11) and taking a- < a-', a".
57. If the integral \ f converges and $&u is an unmixed part of
21 such that $gu = 21 as u = 0, then
limf/=f/. (1
«-o J%u J%
For if we set 21 = $8U + (5tt, the last set is an unmixed part of 21
and (5M = 0. Now
r/-r + r.
»/2l «/»tt Je«
Passing to the limit, we get 1) on using 56.
. i.
, 1°, the upper contents of
= 0 as a, ft = oo ,
t/, 2°, ^Ae upper integrals off, g->f+g are convergent, then
' (2
If\° holds, and if, 3°, the lower integrals off, g,f-\-g are conver-
gent, then
' (3
Let us prove 2) ; the relation 3) is similarly established. Let
A,, ft be a cubical division of space. Let Qzap denote the points of
lying in cells of D^, containing no point of the sets 1). Let
56 IMPROPER MULTIPLE INTEGRALS
Then Daft may be chosen so that ga/s = 0.
Now T: r r
f = I +1
Jtfi J Jea{i J^
since the fields are unmixed. By 56, the second integral on the
right = 0 as a. ft = oo . Hence
lim
im f /= lim f /.
=a>«/2l a 3=» ^©
Similar reasoning applies to g and/+ <?.
Again,
Thus, letting «, /3 =00 we get 2).
2. TFAew £^e singular points of f, g are discrete, the condition 1
holds.
3. .7/# is integrable and the conditions 1°, 2°, 3° are satisfied,
4. If f, g are integrable and condition 1° is satisfied > f + g is in-
tegrable and
5-
provided the integral off in question converges or is definitely infinite.
For ~ r r
L (/+ o) = J /+ f a
~-2>a/3 ^®a^ ^2)ap
Also
lim £)„£ = lim 2la/3
where 3la/3 refers to/.
6. When condition 1° is not satisfied, the relations 2) or 3)
may not hold.
GENERAL THEORY 57
Example. Let 21 consist of the rational points in (0, 1).
Let f = l + n = 1 - n
at the point x = — . Then
n
/ + <7 = 2 in 21.
Now gr ™
embrace only a finite number of points for a given a, ft. On the
other hand,
2l/+fl,a0 = 2l foryS>2.
Thus the upper content of the last set in 1) does not= 0 as
«, /3 = oo and condition 1° is not fulfilled. Also relation 2) does
not hold in this case. For
= 2 , Jf/=0 ,
59. Ifc>0, then L^"*L/« C1
if c < 0, then / = /, (2
provided the integral on either side is convergent.
For - -
J ^/ = 4 / if*>0 (3
»/9f «/3l
/ ifc<0. (4
«c/,a0
Let c > 0. Since
- a < cf < /3 in 2lc/, op,
therefore R
--</<- in this set.
c c
Hence any point of 2lc/, 0/s, is a point of H/, ?• f and conversely.
ThuS 3la3 = 2I«.§ whenc>0.
f,S IMPROPER MULTIPLE INTEGRALS
Similarly ««,. *-«,,§,; when c < 0.
Thus 3), 4) give
We now need only to pass to the limit a, /8 = oo .
60. Let one of the integrals
// • /.' v
converge. If f = g, except at a discrete set 5) m 51, 6o£A integrals
converge and are equal. A similar theorem holds for the lower
integrals.
For let us suppose the first integral in 1) converges. Let
2l = A + £);
J/=J / + !/=(/• (2
•'a ^ ^s) ^A
then
Now
^ = lim J
ap «
Thus the second integral in 1) converges, and 2), 3) show that
the integrals in 1) are equal.
61. 1. Let f /, f<7 (1
±121 ^a
converge. Let f '> g except possibly at a discrete set. Let
= 0, gaj3 =0, as a, ^ = QO,
RELATION BETWEEN THE INTEGRALS OF TYPES I, II, III 59
For let (5o/j be defined as in 58, 1. Then
Let «, $ = oo, we get 2) by the same style of reasoning as in
58.
2. If the integrals 1) converge, and their singular points are dis-
crete, the relation 2) holds.
This follows by 58, 2.
3. If the conditions of 1 do not hold, the relation 2) may not
be true.
Example. Let 21 denote the rational points in (0*, 1*). Let
f=n &tx = — in 21.
n
g=l in 21.
Then /.,. -or
f>g in 21.
But
/=0
Relation between the Integrals of Types /, //, ///
62. Let us denote these integrals over the limited field 21 by
C« , V* , P«
respectively. The upper and lower integrals may be denoted by
putting a dash above and below them. When no ambiguity arises,
we may omit the subscript 21. The singular points of the inte-
grand/, we denote as usual by $.
63. If one of the integrals P is convergent, and $ is discrete, the
corresponding O integral converges, and both are equal.
Pa = p%s + Paj, using the notation of 28,
= t\ + Pw, -
P«; = 0 as 8 = 0 by 56.
60 IMPROPER MULTIPLE INTEGRALS
Hence P.-limCV
5-0
= C'sfc by definition.
64. If G is convergent, we cannot say that P converges. A
similar remark holds for the lower integrals.
Example. For the rational points in 21 = (0, 1) let
for the irrational points let
Then
<7« = lim
a=0
On the other hand,
= lim f /
a,/3=o> »/2la/3
does not exist. For however large ft is taken and then fixed,
= — oo as a = oo .
65. If O is absolutely convergent and $ is discrete, then both P
converge and are equal to the corresponding G integral*.
For let D be any complete division of 21 of norm 8. Then
3, S •'Vfa 8
using the notation of 28. Now since
converges, (7^ |/| == 0 as B = 0.'
Again, D being fixed, if «0/30 are sufficiently large,
f /=Cas/
*
RELATION BETWEEN THE INTEGRALS OF TYPES I, II, III 61
Hence 1), 2) give
I /= C"a6 + e' |e'j < - for any & < some 80.
*^«0 2
On the other hand, if 8Q is sufficiently small,
CTa=C\ + e" |«"|<! forS<S0.
Hence =C* + e"' «"'<e.
Passing to the limit a, /3 = oo, we get
66. If Fa/ is absolutely convergent, the singular points $ are
discrete.
For suppose $ > 0- Let 53 denote the points of 31 where
|/|>£. Then $ > 3 for any £. Hence
as $ = oo unless Q = 0.
67. If Fa/ t's absolutely convergent, so is O.
For let D be a cubical division of space of norm d.
Then
(/ 1 <some y8 in Sid-
Hence
Hence (7 is absolutely convergent.
68. Letf> 0. If Fa/ «« convergent, there exists for each e>0,
a o- > 0 »McA that
/or any 53
(2
62 IMPROPER MULTIPLE INTEGRALS
for X sufficiently large. Let X be so taken, then
Also, C f < \<R < - T4
if <r is taken sufficiently small in 2).
From 3), 4) follows 1).
69. If V%,f is absolutely convergent, both C converge and are
equal to the corresponding V integrals.
For by 67, C is absolutely convergent. Hence C converge by 65.
Thus f .
t%/ =. I / + a , | « i < 5 for some a.
— ^rf "
Also r e
Vyj = I fa + p , I p | < - for some X, /*.
Hence r C „
rj = C%f — V%f = \ f — I f^ + (a — /3). (1
Now ff-Cf-Cf
I J Au, I J Ait r I J AIL*
»/2t J<% Jjft
But
and 7 < | if d is sufficiently small, and for any X, p, by 68.
o
Taking a division of space having this norm, we then take X,
so large that
/AM=/ m ?k
Then
77 = « - /3 - 7,
and hence
|7/| <e.
From this and 1) the theorem now follows at once.
ITERATED INTEGRALS 63
Iterated Integrals
70. 1. We consider now the relations which exist between the
integrals
and
/' (2
.
where 31 = 93 • (£ lies in a space 9?m, m =p + q, and S3 is a projection
of 21 in the space 9?p.
It is sometimes convenient to denote the last q coordinates of a
point x = (#! ••• xp xp+l ••• xp+q) by ^ ••• t/9. Thus the coordinates
#! ••• xp refer to 33 and yl ••• yq to (5. The section of 51 correspond-
ing to the point x in S3 niay be denoted by Gix when it is desirable
to indicate which of the sections (£ is meant.
2. Let us set
then the integral 2) is
(4
It is important to note at once that although the integrand / is
defined for each point in 21, the integrand </> in 4) may not be.
Example. Let 21 consist of the points (#, y) in the unit square :
n n
Then 21 is discrete. At the point (a;, y)in 21, let
/ = -•
Then
On the other hand
for each point of S3- Thus the integrals 2) are not defined.
64 IMPROPER MULTIPLE INTEGRALS
To provide for the case that <f> may not be defined for certain
points of 53 we give the symbol 2) the following definition.
7* 7* • c r
L L/= lim J J/< (5
%x >H ax LS A ft en *^3^ *•' r
where F = (5 when the integral 3) is convergent, or in the con-
trary case F is such a part of & that
(6
and such that the integral in 6) is numerically as large as 6) will
permit.
Sometimes it is convenient to denote F more specifically by Fa(3.
The points 53a/3 are the points of 53 at which 6) holds. It will
be noticed that each 53a^ in 5) contains all the points of 53 where
the integral 3) is not convergent. Thus
Hence when 53 is complete or metric,
lim »ap=S- (7
a, /3=co
Before going farther it will aid the reader to consider a few
examples.
71. Example 1. Let 51 be as in the example in 70, 2, while/ = n2
at x = — . We see that
n
f/=0.
c/2T
On the other hand 53a0 contains but a finite number of points
for any a, ft. Thus
I I /=0. (2
i/iB^cr
Thus the two integrals 1), 2) exist and are equal.
Example 2. The fact that the integrals in Ex. 1 vanish may
lead the reader to depreciate the value of an example of this kind.
This would be unfortunate, as it is easy to modify the function so
that these integrals do not vanish.
ITERATED INTEGRALS 65
Let 51 denote all the points of the unit square. Let us denote
the discrete point set used in Ex. 1 by £>. We define / now as
follows : /shall have in £> the values assigned to it at these points
in Ex. 1. At the other points A = 21 — £),/ shall have the value 1.
Then r r r r
J.J+J. .J.L (3
On the other hand SQ^ consists of the irrational points in SB and
a finite number of other points. Thus
-1. - (4
Hence again the two 3), 4) exist and are equal.
Let us look at the results we get if we use integrals of types I
and II. We will denote them by 0 and F as in 62.
We see at once that
Let us now calculate the iterated integrals
CfeCfc, (5
and FSB Fg. (6
We observe that
Cs = 1 for x irrational
= +00 for x rational.
Thus the integral 5) either is not defined at all since the field
SB« does not exist, or if we interpret the definition as liberally as
possible, its value is 0. In neither case is
Let us now look at the integral 6). We see at once that
does not exist, as Fe = 1 for rational z, and = +.00 for irrational
x. On the other hand
Hence in this case
66 IMPROPER MULTIPLE INTEGRALS
Example 8. Let SI be the unit square.
Let
/f in
= n for x = — n even
n
= — n for x = — n odd.
n
At the other points of SI let/ = 1.
Then ~ r r
( f= \ I /=!.
Ja^ Jswe
Here every point of 31 is a point of infinite discontinuity and
thus ^ = «.
Here (7a is not defined, as Slfi does not exist; or giving the
definition its most liberal interpretation,
The same remarks hold for O^Og.
On the other hand fr
V* = + oo,
while Y Y
does not exist, since T7- c m
V = ±n for x = —
n
= 1 for irrational x.
Moreover rr V V V
Example 4. Let SI denote the unit square. Let
9 f in A ^ ^ 1
f=nz IOTX = — , w even, 0<y<-
= — n2 for # = — , n odd, 0 < y < — ,
n n
At the other points of SI let /= 1.
Then
ITERATED INTEGRALS 67
Let us look at the corresponding C and V integrals.
We see at once that
ri . _ jr __ 1
°«- >«- l«
Again the integral C^Cg does not exist, or on a liberal interpre-
tation it has the value 0. Also in this example
C/gCg and (/^Cg
do not exist or on a liberal interpretation, they = 0.
Turning to the V integrals we see that
while V%V<z does not exist finite or infinite.
Example 5. Let our field of integration SI consist of the unit
square considered in Ex. 4, let us call it (§, and another similar
square ft, lying to its right. Let / be defined over (g as it was
defined in Ex. 4, and let/= 1 in ft.
Then
I /= I (=2.
•V •/»•/<£
Also „ _ v 9
°«- r«SBjfc
Then r> f —1
0»°s— A'
while r^Fff does not exist,
3D ^
-
72. 1. In the following sections we shall restrict ourselves as
follows:
1° 21 shall be limited and iterable with respect to S3.
!2° 53 shall be complete or metric.
3° The singular points $ of the integrand /shall be discrete.
2. Let us effect a sequence of superposed cubical divisions of
ace
A !>*-•
whose norms £?„ = 0.
68 IMPROPER MULTIPLE INTEGRALS
Let 2ln = 53B • (£„ denote the points of 21 lying in cells of I)n
which contain no point of $. We observe that we may always
take without loss of generality
For let us adjoin to 51 a discrete set £) lying at some distance
from 21 such that the projection of £> on 1RP is precisely $Q.
Let 4 = 2l + £) = 53-Cf , <?=g+c , c = 0.
We now set , /• • «r
9 =/ m 21
= 0 in £).
Then
=//•
Similarly
Hence
3. The set Sn being as in 2, we shall write
73. Let BV n denote the points of 53 at which cn > cr. Then if 21
is iterable, with respect to 53,
lim^.^O. (1
n=»
For since 21 is iterable,
2t = f (| by definition.
Js
Hence (S considered as a function of x is an integrable function
in 53.
Similarly ^ _
*•-.£«•
and Sn is an integrable function in 53.
ITERATKD INTEGRALS C
We have now 8-S. + e. , c.>0
us c5n, cn are unmixed. Hence cn is an integrable function in 53.
But
-2tn= f (G
cAy
-ft..
•'*>
As the left side = 0 as n = oo ,
lim£e.-0. (2
But
As the left side = 0, we have for a given cr
lim Ban = 0,
which is 1).
74. Let 91 = 35 • (£ be iterable. Let the integral
ff , />0 (1
convergent and limited in complete 33. l/tf£ (5n denote the points
of $8 a£ which
(2
lim fn = <8. - (3
»i=»
For let . A
o-1><r2> ••• =0.
Since ^^ = 0 as M = QO by 48, we may take v1 so large, and
then a cubical division of 9?p of norm so small that those cells con-
taining points of Ba^ have a content <7//2. Let the points of
53 lying in these cells be called Br and let 53i = 53 — Br Then
Bv 53X form an unmixed division of 53 and
is complete since 53 is.
70 IMPROPER MULTIPLE INTEGRALS
We may now reason on 53t as we did on 93, replacing i)/2 by rj/22.
We get a complete set 532-^.^i sucn
Continuing we get ~ > „,
*vJfi ^""^ "C/7i — 1
Thus
Let now b = Dv \ 93n | .
Then b><8-7, (4
by 25.
Let bn denote those points of b for which 2) does hold. Then
fo = j&n|. For let b be any point of b. Since 1) is convergent,
there exists a <rt such that
at 5,
for any c such that t<<TL. Thus b is a point of b^t and hence of
fbn|. Thus bn = b as b is complete. But @n>bn.
Hence lim!n>~b,
which with 4), gives 3).
75. Let 31 = 53 • (£ be iterable. Let the integral
6e convergent and limited in complete S3.
Then r -^
lira I /=0. (1
n=o> !d33 «2c»
For let D be a cubical division of 9?p of norm d.
Then _ -^ -5-
I /=lim2rftMin 1 / = lim^.
il35 J.Cn <f=o i iiCn f/=0
Let d{ denote those cells of D containing a point of (Sn where (5n
is defined as in 74.
ITERATED INTEGRALS 71
Let d" denote the other cells containing points of 33. Then
Sd<Zd[e+2d['M,
where —
0< \f<M.
~s& '
Hence
Sd<eD 4
Letting d = 0, we get
£ f/<
«/jy «£c«
Letting now n = QO and using 3) of 74, we get 1), since e is
small at pleasure.
76. Let 31 = SB • @ fo iterable with respect to SB, wfo'eA Ja«£ i«
or metric. Let the singular points $ of f be discrete. Then
< r r/< r/. ci
~^» ._£<£ J*r
<& r/<r r/< r/. (2
^/a1 —J*J'' —Jm
Here any one of the members in 1) may be infinite. Then all
that follow are also infinite. A similar remark applies to 2).
Let us first suppose :
f> 0 , 33 is complete , I I / is convergent.
«/33 «^S
We have by 14, r -~ -. -~
Ja/<L L/<Ja/
tlwn ilSBifli/j «^a7i
Passing to the limit gives
f/<limf f /. (3
J<&- J<®J<Zn
and also C C C
lim I /<_ I / , finite or infinite. (4
^Si/Sn »^a
Now e > 0 being small at pleasure, there exists a O-Q such that
7-2 IMPROPER MULTIPLE INTEGRALS
1 5 ut for a fixed n
is limited in 93.
Hence for GrQ sufficiently large,
f /< f / , at each point of S3, #0< #• (6
«<LSn* «£T
(T
where Fn, yn are points of F in (£„, cn.
Hence
J%oJ.yn
Now 33e may not be complete; if not let .5ff be completed $8a.
As 53 is complete,
c //= /; //.
*/>Og*'y *'B(<¥yn
We may therefore write 8), using 5)
- • + J Af / + J A// +/ / •
^3 S ^89/J— Cn J? cin -6— Sn /? r In
By 75, the last* term on the right = 0 as n = oo. Thus passing
to the limit,
f f/<Hni f f/, (9
«/^«/g n=oo*'56ilSn
since e > 0 is small at pleasure.
On the other hand, passing to the limit Gr = oo in 7), and then
n = QO, we get
limCC ^LC (10
,^=30 »/ JD •_(£« tiS3 »/ S
Thus 3), 10), 9), and 4) give 1).
Let us now suppose that the middle term of 1) is divergent.
We have as before
f f<limf f<f/.
ffi c/ r «=**/^33_Srt 31
Hence the integral on the right of 1) is divergent.
ITERATED INTEGRALS 73
Let us now suppose 93 is metric. We effect a cubical division
of iftp of norm c?, and denote by Bd those cells containing only
points of 93« Then Bd is complete and
d=0
Let Ad denote those points of 51 whose projections fall on Bd.
Then Ad is iterable with respect to Bd by 13, 3, and we have as
in the preceding case
f <//</- en
*lAd i^B^e JAd
If the middle integral in 11) is divergent, I is divergent and 1)
holds, also if the last integral in 11) is divergent, 1) holds. Sup-
pose then that the two last integrals in 11) are convergent.
Then by 57
Kmf N
d=B
limf' = f.
d=«^Ad ^n
Thus passing to the limit d = 0 in 11) we get 1).
Let us now suppose f> — G-, Q > 0.
Then
and we can apply 1) to the new function g.
Thus 02
Now fff= f/+ffi, (is
<^& ^a
by 58, 6, since ^ is discrete. Also by the same theorem ,
Cg=
»/(£ .
./g y-oo
denoting by (Sy the points of (5 where
and setting
T = lim dy.
y — 03
74 IMPROPER MULTIPLE INTEGRALS
Now for any n
XS* S* f*
G<J J&<J&-
HPTIPP r C n C —
Cr2l = Inn ! I G- = G- Inn I Gn,
nr C—
n = Imi J £„. (15
Now for a fixed w, 7 may be taken so large that for all points
of 33,
Hence
(5 > lim
y^co
Hence 1= I ^> I i-
Hence S^-fj1, (16
Jv
and thus F is integrable in 53-
This result in 14) gives, on using 58, 3,
f f</= f f/H-^a. (n
JSB ^ie ^:s ?/s
From 12), 13), and 17) follows 1).
77. As corollaries of the last theorem we have, supposing 51 to
be as in 76,
1. Iff is integrable in 21 andf> — (r, then
Iff <G, then f/= f
2. /f / > — Q- and ( is divergent, then
— ?l
fjf
_ 9) _S
are divergent
ITERATED INTEGRALS
75
3. lff> — & and one of the integrals j ( f is convergent, then
*/$)•/<£
t* convergent.
78. Let 31 = 53 • Gi be iterable with respect to 53, which last is com-
plete or metric. Let the singular points $ be discrete. If
• (2
both converge, they are equal.
For let Dv Dz ••• be a sequence of superimposed cubical divisions
as in 72, 2. We may suppose as before that each 33n = 93-
Since 1) is convergent
€ > 0,
W,
ff-Cf
JSl J%n
<l
n<nn.
Since /is limited in 51B, which latter is iterable,
This shows that
*
(3
(4
(5
is an integrable function in 33, and hence in any part of
From 3), 4) we have
I/ -XI
I »/a */<B j§n
We wish now to show that
n > nn.
(6
SS-
*/vwc/(if
<l
When this is done, 6) and 7) prove the theorem.
To establish 7) we begin by observing that
J7=lim/«
•/S^C a S-oo»^3J,
76 IMPROPER MULTIPLE INTEGRALS
Now for a fixed w, a, ft may be taken so that F shall embrace all
the points of (SB for every point of SB. Let us set
Then
iiii
+
A o <id — en
2\ S "OaB — ~Ot
lira f f = f f by I, 724.
o, ()=&> *^^BOj3 *^(S 33 S
On the other hand,
Thus 7) is established when we show that
|Jj/|<| «>»„• (9
To this end we note that | / j is integrable in 21 by 48, 4. Hence
by 77, i,
Also by I, 734,
.. f^y\=fj^
From 10), 11) we have for n > w0,
J I/I -/ 71 = / / 1/| - f / |/|< I (12
*^3l *^2l ^^*^g •^33*^0? 2
since the left side = 0.
But as in 8)
Passing to the limit # = <x> gives
This in 12) gives 9).
CHAPTER III
SERIES
Preliminary Definitions and Theorems
79. Let aj, a2, «3 •• • be an infinite sequence of numbers.
The symbol A = ai + a2+ a3+ • •• (1
is called an infinite series. Let
An = a1 + a^-\ ----- h«n. (2
lim AH (3
«=oo
is finite, we say the series 1) is convergent. If the limit 3) is infi-
nite or does not exist, we say 1) is divergent. When 1) is conver-
gent, the limit 3) is called the sum of the series. It is customary
to represent a series and its sum by the same letter, when no con-
fusion will arise. Whenever practicable we shall adopt the fol-
lowing uniform notation. The terms of a series will be designated
by small Roman letters, the series and its sum will be denoted by
the corresponding capital letter. The sum of the first n terms of a
series as A will be denoted by AH. The infinite series formed by
'removing the first n terms, as for example,
will be denoted by -4n, and will be called the remainder after n
terms.
The series formed by replacing each term of a series by its nu-
merical value is called the adjoint series. We shall designate it
by replacing the Roman letters by the corresponding Greek or
German letters. Thus the adjoint of 1) would be denoted by
A= ^ + 02 + 03+...= Adj A (5
where i_ i
«» = !<*n|-
77
78 SERIES
If all the terms of of a series are > 0, it is identical with its
adjoint.
A sum of ft consecutive terms as
«••+! + «m-H ----- \-n+p
we denote by An< p.
Let
be the series obtained from A by omitting all its terms that vanish.
Then A and B converge or diverge simultaneously, and when conver-
gent they have the same sum.
For 7? - - A
**» — -»**•
Thus if the limit on either side exists, the limit of the other side
exists and both are equal.
This shows that in an infinite series we may omit its zero terms
without affecting its character or value. We shall suppose this
done unless the contrary is stated.
A series whose terms are all > 0 we shall call a positive term
series; similarly if its terms are all < 0, we call it a negative term
series. If an > 0, n > m we shall say the series is essentially a pos-
itive term series. Similarly if an < 0, n>m we call it an essen-
tially negative term series.
If A is an essentially positive term series and divergent,
lim An = + co ; if it is an essentially negative term series and di-
vergent, lim An = — oo.
When lim An = ± oo, we sometimes say A is ±00.
80. 1. For A to converge, it is necessary and sufficient that
e>0, m, \An.p\<e, n>m, j» = 1, 2, ... (1
For the necessary and sufficient condition that
lim An
n=°o
exists is A . 0
e>0, m, I Av — An I < e, v, n>m. (%
But if v = n + p
Av-An = An>p =an+l+ an+z + ••• + an+p.
Thus 2) is identical with 1).
PRELIMINARY DEFINITIONS AND THEOREMS 79
2. The two series A, At converge and diverge simultaneously.
When convergent,
A = A.+ A.. (3
For obviously if either series satisfies theorem 1, the other
must, sinSe the first terms of a series do not enter the relation 1).
On the other hand, . A A
•"•t+p — •"•• T -"-I, p-
Letting p = co we get 3).
3. If A is convergent, An = 0.
For lim An = lira (A - .4n)
= A — lim An = A — A
= 0.
For A to converge it is necessary that an = 0.
For in 1) take p = 1 ; it becomes
I «*+i 1 < e n > m
We cannot infer conversely because an = 0, therefore A is con-
vergent. For as we shall see in 81, 2,
1 + 1 + 1+ -
is divergent, yet lim an = 0.
4. The positive term series A is convergent if An is limited.
For then lim An exists by I, 109.
5. A series whose adjoint converges is convergent.
For the adjoint A of A being convergent,
6>0, m, |ABp|<e, n>m, p =1, 2, 3 —
But
n, p =
Thus
An,p= «„+! + «n+2
A I
-"-n, p\
and A is convergent.
Definition. A series whose adjoint is convergent is called
absolutely convergent.
80 SERIES
Series which do not converge absolutely may be called, when
necessary to emphasize this fact, simply convergent.
6. Let A = al + «2 -{- •••
be absolutely convergent.
•
Let # = «,,+ a^+ ••• ; i1<iz< •••
fo any series whose terms are taken from A, preserving their relative
order. Then B is absolutely convergent and
F°r |£m|<Bm<An<A, (1
choosing n so large that An contains every term in Bm. Moreover
for m > some m', An — Bm > some term of A. Thus passing to the
limit in 1), the theorem is proved.
7. Let A = al + az + ••• The series B=kal + ka2 + ••-, &=£0,
converges or diverges simultaneously with A. When convergent,
B = kA.
For B -kA
-°n — K&*'
We have now only to pass to the limit.
From this we see that a negative or an essentially negative term
series can be converted into a positive or an essentially positive
term series by multiplying its terms by k = — 1.
8. If A is simply convergent, the series B formed of its positive
terms taken in the order they occur in A, and the series 0 formed of the
negative terms, also taken in the order they occur in A, are both
divergent.
If B and 0 are convergent, so are B, F. Now
An = Bni + Fn2, n = wj + w2.
Hence A would be convergent, which is contrary to hypothesis.
If only one of the series B, 0 is convergent, the relation
shows that A would be divergent, which is contrary to hypothesis.
PRELIMINARY DEFINITIONS AND THEOREMS 81
0. The following theorem often affords a convenient means of
estimating the remainder of an absolutely convergent series.
Let A = al + a2+ ••• be an absolutely convergent aeries. Let
B = bl + bz + ••• be a positive term convergent series whose sum is
known either exactly or approximately. Then if \ an \ < Jn, n > m
\An\<Bn<B.
+«
n+p
Letting p= oo gives the theorem.
EXAMPLES
81. 1. The geometric series is defined by
The geometric series is absolutely convergent when \g\< 1 and di-
vergent when |#|>1. When convergent,
Hence -, „
a. — _£
•
When |^|<1, lim#n = 0, and then
1
lim 6rn =
When \g\ >1, lim gn is not 0, and hence by 80, 3, Q- is not conver-
gent.
2. The series rr -• . 1 . 1 . 1 ,. ... (3
82 SERIES
is called the general harmonic series of exponent p. When /*=!,
it becomes j_1 + t + t + 1 + ... (4
the harmonic series. We show now that
The general harmonic series is convergent when n > 1 and is di-
vergent for /*< 1.
Let /z>l. Then
1 1 1 1 21
2* 3* < 2* 2* < 2" 2"-1 ~ 9
i+i+!+i<i+i+i+_L=4 ,
4/* 5*1 6>* 7*1 4/* 4<* 4/4 4^ 4*1
1 111 1 8 ,
8* *&<&&* f8"~8^~^'
Let n<2". Then
Thus lim Hn exists, by I, 109, and
-*±
Let *<!. Then
Thus 3) is divergent for /*< 1, if it is for /A = 1.
But we saw, I, 141, that
lim Jn = oo,
hence «7is divergent.
It is sometimes useful to know that
log n
In fact, by I, 180,
lim — ^— = lim 2^ — *=* — — = lim
log n log n — log (n — 1)
L —~ -L
(6
= 1.
PRELIMINARY DEFINITIONS AND THEOREMS S:J
Since * n > log n > l^n • •• we have
(7
n • lrn
Another useful relation is
/(
(8
For log(l + m) -logw = log (! + -]< — .
V mj m
Let w = l, 2---W. If we add the resulting inequalities we
get 8).
3. Alternating Series. This important class of series is defined
as follows. Let a1 > a2 > ag > • • • = 0.
Then A = a1 — az + ag — «4 + • • • (9
whose signs are alternately positive and negative, is such a series.
The alternating series 9) is convergent and
For let p > 3. We have
If p is even,
P = On+l - «»+a) + •" + On+p-1 - «.+p)-
If jo is odd,
P = («n+l - «»+2> -I" "• +(«n+P-2-«n+p-l)+«»+p-
Thus in both cases,
P>an+1-an+2>0. (11
Again, if p is even,
In I, 461, the symbol " lim " in the first relation should be replaced by lim.
84 SERIES
If p is odd,
P = an+l — On+2 - «n+3) ~ "« ~ («n+p-l ~ «n+p)-
Thus in both cases,
P < «n+ 1 - («n+2 - «n+3) < ««+!•
From 11), 12) we have
0 < an+l — «n+2 < ! ^n, p I < «n+l ~ («n+2 ~ ^n+s)'
Hence passing to the limit p = GO,
moreover, _._ f
an+1 — u.
Example 1. The series
1-I+J-J+- (13
being alternating, is convergent. The adjoint series is
l + i + J + i+~
which being the harmonic series is divergent. Thus 13) is an
example of a convergent series which is not absolutely convergent.
Example 2. The series
A
V2-1 V2 + 1 V8-1 V3 + 1
is divergent, although its terms are alternately positive and nega-
tive, and an = 0.
For A -
"
2 w — l
If now A were convergent,
lira ^4n = lim
by I, 103, 2.
ritKLIMINAKY DEFINITIONS ANI> TIIKORKMS
4. Telescopic Series. Such series are
A = (rtj - <ra) + O2 - <ia) + (as - </4) + •••
We note that
Thus the terms of any An cancelling out in pairs, An reduces to
only two terms and so shuts up like a telescope.
The relation 14) gives us the theorem :
A telescopic series is convergent when and only when lim an exists.
Let
A = «j + fl2 + '" denote any series.
an = An-An_, , A0 = 0.
A = ^- A)) + (^2 - A) + (4i - A) + "•
This shows us that
Any series can be written as a telescopic series.
This fact, as we shall see, is of great value in studying the
general theory of series.
Sxampkl.
n —
Thus A is a telescopic series and
-1---1.
Example 2. Let «j, a2, aa, ••• > 0. Then
j _ -^ _ an
"
1 __ 1 1 =()
!+«,) ... (1 +0..,) (1 + a,) .- (1 + a.) /'
is telescopic. Thus
and A is convergent and < 1.
86 SERIES
Examples. A = 2- = z=£(), —1, —2, ...
**(x + n — ^^f~-L-'"^
x + n — 1 rc + w
is telescopic.
A -1- 1 -i.
-fl-n —
a; re -j- w re
82. Din? s Series. Let A = al + az+ ••• be a divergent positive
term series. Then
is divergent.
~^"^m. j3 ~ A
Am+l Am+p
>-7 Om+l + •" +am+p)
A A
^ 'a-m, p __ 1 -"-IB
-^•m + -<4-m, p -«-m-)-p
Letting w remain fixed and ^9 = 00, we have Dm>l, since
•^-m+p == °°- Hence D is divergent.
Let A 1.1.1.
Hence D= l + 1 +| 4-- is divergent.
Let j. _ i + i + i + .
Then
D=-4-- i --«-• =y~
" 1 "^ 2(1 + i) "^ 3(1 + J + i) ^ nA,
is divergent, and hence, a fortiori,
S-J—
But ^4.n_1 > log n.
Hence <». 1 i i
21og2 31og3
is divergent, as Abel first showed.
PRELIMINARY DEFINITIONS AND THEOREMS 87
83. 1. Abel" 8 Series.
An important class of series have the form
B = afa
As Abel first showed how the convergence of certain types of
these series could be established, they may be appropriately called
in his honor. The reasoning depends on the simple identity
(Abel's identity),
•L>n,p = tn+\An^ i + ^n+2\AntZ — An< j) + *" + tn + p(An p — An^ p_j)
p^n, pi (.2
where as usual An^m is the sum of the first m terms of the re-
mainder series An. From this identity we have at once the fol-
lowing cases in which the series 1) converges.
2. Let the series A = a1 + az + ••• and the series 2|fn+1 — tn\
converge. Let the tn be limited. Then B = a1t1 + «2£2 + ••• converges.
For since A is convergent, there exists an m such that
jt? = l, 2, 3...
Hence
\Bn,p\<e{\tn+l-tn+,\ + \tn+2-tn+3\ + .- +\tn+p\}.
3. Let the series A = a^ + «2 + ••• converge. Let tv t2, t3 ••• be a
limited monotone sequence. Then B is convergent.
This is a corollary of 2.
4. Let A = «! + a2 + • • • be such that An\ <6r, n= 1, 2, ••• Let
2 1 tn+l — tn \ converge and tn = 0. Then B is convergent.
For by hypothesis there exists an m such that
I tn+l - «n+2| + K,+2 - tn+3\ +••• + ! tn+t,\ < e
for any n > m.
5. Let | An | < G- and ^ > «2 > t8 > • • • = 0. Then B is convergent.
This is a special case of 4.
88 SERIES
6. As an application of 5 we see the alternating series'
Jj = Cj t<} + fg
is convergent. For as the A series we may take A = \ — 1 + 1-
1+ ..- as \An\<l.
84. Trigonometric Series.
Series of this type are
C = «0 + aj cos x + a2 cos 2 # + a3 cos 3 2; -f- • • • (1
$ = flj sin # + «2 sin 2 x + a3 sin 3 a; + • • • (2
As we see, they are special cases of Abel's series. Special cases
of the series 1), 2) are
F = ! + cos x + cos 2 x + cos 3 # + • • • (3
2 = sin x + sin 2x + sin 3 # + ••• (4
It is easy to find the sums Fn, 2n as follows. We have
. , 2w-l 2w+l
2 sin mx sin A x = cos — — x — cos — — x,
2 2
Letting m = 1, 2, ••• w and adding, we get
o • 1 -^ 2 n + 1 ,c
2 sin ^ x -2,n = cos -| rr — cos — -1 — x. (5
Keeping # fixed and letting n = oo, we see 2n oscillates between
fixed limits when x =£• 0, ± 2 TT,
Thus S is divergent except when x= 0, ± TT, •••
Similarly we find when x ^ 2 m?r,
r _sin(>i- i)a; ,fi
2 sin 1 x
Hence for such values Tn oscillates between fixed limits. For
the values x = 2 mir the equation 3) shows that Tn = + oo.
From the theorems 4, 5 we have at once now
If S | an+l — an | converges and an = 0, and hence in particular if
ai>az— "' = ^' the series 1) converges for every x, and 2) converges
for x^=2 mir.
I f in 3) we replace x by x + TT, it goes over into
A = ^ — cos x + cos 2 x — cos 3 x + -•• (7
PRELIMINARY DEFINITIONS AND THEOREMS 89
Thus AB oscillates between fixed limits if x^ ± (2 m — l)-7r,
when n = oo . Thus
If 2 1 an+i + an | converges and an = 0, and hence in particular if
al>az> ••• =0, the series a0 — al cos x + ^ cos 2 x — a8 cos 3
converges for x=£(2m — I)TT.
85. Power Series.
An extremely important class of series are those of the type
P = aQ + al(x — a) + a^ (x - a)2 + as (x - a)3 + .-. (1
called power series. Since P reduces to a0 if we set x = a, we see
that every power series converges for at least one point. On the
other hand, there are power series which converge at but one
point, e.g.
ao + l!(a:_a) + 2!(>-a)2 + 3!(>-a)3+ ... (2
For if x^= a, lira n\ \ x — a n = ao, and thus 2) is divergent.
1. If the power series P converges for x = b, it converges absolutely
within -. , N , ,
Z>A(a) , \= \a — b \.
If P diverges for x=b, it diverges without Z>A(a).
Let us suppose first that P converges at b. Let # be a point in
DA, and set | x — a \ =f. Then the adjoint of P becomes for this
point
/£\2 /£\
f ) +«3^3' |
\ A,/ \A./
But lim«BX« =
since series P is convergent for x = b.
Hence
and II is convergent. X
If P diverges at x = 6, it must diverge for all b' such that
| b' — a | > X. For if not, P would converge at b by what we have
just proved, and this contradicts the hypothesis.
90 SERIES
2. Thus we conclude that the set of points for which P con-
verges form an interval (a — p, a + p) about the point a, called
the interval of convergence ; p is called its norm. We say P is
developed about the point a. When a = 0, the series 1) takes on
the simpler form ^ + ^ + ^ + ...
which for many purposes is just as general as 1). We shall
therefore employ it to simplify our equations.
We note that the geometric series is a simple case of a power
series.
86. Cauchy's Theorem on the Interval of Convergence.
The norm p of the interval of convergence of the power series,
P = a0 + a±x + aza? + •••
is given by 1 P~ «/—
- = limV«n ««=«•»•
P
We show II diverges if £>/>. For let
Then by I, 338, 1, there exist an infinity of indices iv *2 ••• for
which
Hence
and thus
«tBr»>(£/3)tn>l»
since £$>!. Hence v fctn
„ "•*
is divergent and therefore II.
We show now that II converges if £ < p. For let
*<!</..
Then there exist only a finite number of indices for which
Let m be the greatest of these indices. Then
V«n < /3 n>m.
TESTS OF CONVERGENCE FOR POSITIVE TERM SERIES 91
Hence
h
and II is convergent.
Example 1. »
1_i_ ^ _i_ __ __
l~l! + 2!~"3!~
Here «/ — 1 . n u T ior
V«n = — — = 0 by I, 185, 4.
VWJ
Hence /a = oo and the series converges absolutely for every x.
Example 2. * *
V^n = = l by I, 185, 3.
vw
Hence /a = 1, and the series converges absolutely for | x |< 1.
Tests of Convergence for Positive Term Series
87. To determine whether a given positive term series
A= a^ + az + "•
is convergent or not, we may compare it with certain standard
series whose convergence or divergence is known. Such com-
parisons enable us also to establish criteria of convergence of
great usefulness.
We begin by noting the following theorem which sometimes
proves useful.
1. Let A, B be two series which differ only by a finite number of
terms. Then they converge or diverge simultaneously.
This follows at once from 80, 2. Hence if a series A whose
convergence is under investigation has a certain property only
92 SERIES
after the with term, we may replace A by Am^ which has this
property from the start.
2. The fundamental theorem of comparison is the following :
Let A = a1 + a^ + •••, B = b1 + b2 + -•• be two positive term series.
Let r>0 denote a constant. If an < rbn, A converges if B does and
A < rB. If an > rbn, A diverges if B does.
For on the first hypothesis
An<rBn.
On the second hypothesis
An>rBn.
The theorem follows on passing to the limit.
3. From 2 we have at once :
Let A = a1 + a2 + •>•, B = bt + b2 + -•• be two positive term series.
Let r, s be positive constants. If
or if
lira ^
°n
exists and is =£ 0, A and B converge or diverge simultaneously. If
B converges and -* = 0, A also converges. If B diverges and -? =00,
°n on
A also diverges.
4. Let A = «j + «2 + ••••> B = bl + b%+ ••• be positive term series.
If B is convergent and
«2±l<*s±l w=l, 2, 3-
"
A converges. If B is divergent and
an,t _ b.
an ~ b.
A diverges.
For on the first hypothesis
«n+l/
TESTS OF CONVERGENCE FOR POSITIVE TERM SERIES 93
We may, therefore, apply 3. On the second hypothesis, we
have
and we may again apply 3.
Example 1. A= —-\ 1- —
1 • 2 2 • ft ft
is convergent. For
1 .
and V — is convergent. The series A was considered in 81, 4, Ex. 1.
^ n2
Example 2. A = e~x cos x + e~** cos 2 x + • •• .
is absolutely convergent for x > 0.
For „ 1
which is thus < the nth term in the convergent geometric series
Example 3. A = V - log
is convergent.
n
Thus ^1 is comparable with the convergent series 2~1"
/?•
88. We proceed now to deduce various tests for convergence
and divergence. One of the simplest is the following, obtained
by comparison with the hyperharrnonic series.
Let A = al + a2 + ••• be a positive term series. It is convergent if
lim a^ < oo , /* > 1,
and divergent if
lim nan > 0.
94 SERIES
For on the first hypothesis there exists, by I, 338, a constant
# > 0 such that
an<^ n = l, 2, ...
Thus each term of A is less than the corresponding term of the
convergent series &Z-/ — •
On the second hypothesis there exists a constant c such that
an>- w — 1, 2, ...
* n
and "each term of A is greater than the corresponding term of the
divergent series c V - .
** n
Example 1. A— V w>0.
^ log™ n
Here wan = — ^— = + oo, by I, 463.
log"* n
Hence A is divergent.
Example 2. A = V — .
-^ w log n
Here _ 1 ^_ Q
log w
Thus the theorem does not apply. The series is divergent
by 82.
Example 3.
where fi is a constant and | On \ < Q-.
From I, 413, we have, setting r = 1 + s,
Hence nln = p , if /* ^= 0,
TESTS OF CONVERGENCE FOR POSITIVE TERM SERIES 95
and L is divergent. If ft>0, L is an essentially positive term
series. Hence L = + cc. If /*< 0, L = — oo.
Let /i = Or Then
which is comparable with the convergent series
Thus L is convergent in this case.
Example 4- The harmonic series
1 + 1 + J+
is divergent. For Urnno.
Example 5. -,
yS arbitrary.
Here 1_a
nan = ; — s— = °° » « < 1
by I, 463, l. Hence A is divergent for a < 1.
Example 6.
Here -<
nan = -^- = 1 by I, 185, Ex. 3.
7.
logw
Here, if /t > 0,
log w log n
(1\n
1 +- ) = «•
w/
Hence A is divergent.
96 SERIES
89 D* Alembert* s Test. The positive term series A = a1 -f a2H —
converges if there exists a constant r < 1 for which
.ft diverges if
«s±l>l.
«n
This follows from 87, 4, taking for J? the geometric series
l + r + rz + r3+ •••
Corollary. Let -£±l=Z. 7/^ Z < 1, A converges. If Z>1, it
an
diverges.
Example 1. The Exponential Series.
Let us find for what values of x the series
is convergent. Applying D'Alembert's test to its adjoint, we find
a*.
ar,
•£ ^ *-
n
Thus .# converges absolutely for every x.
Let us employ 80, 9 to estimate the remainder En. Let x > 0.
The terms of E are all > 0. . Since
JC X X jx- •C / •*/
(n-|-jt?)! n\ n -f 1 • n + 2 • ••• n -\-p ~~ n\ \n +
we have
(2
However large x may be, we may take n so large that x < n + 1 .
Then the series on the right of 2) is a convergent geometric series.
Let x<0. Then however large \x\ is, En is alternating f or
some m. Hence by 81, 3 for n > w,
i«
(3
TESTS OF CONVERGENCE FOR POSITIVE TERM SERIES 97
Example 2. The Logarithmic Series.
Let us find for what values of x the series
.- , — ,- > , t
~r JU A/ . JU mt *
= 1 ~ 2" ~*~ 3" ~ 4~ "
is convergent. The adjoint gives
•fl-i^r1"*"1-
Thus L converges absolutely for any |a:|<l, and diverges for
When x = 1, L becomes
1-J+J-J+-
which is simply convergent by 81, 4.
When x = — 1, L becomes
which is the divergent harmonic series.
Examples. A = -+- + -+-
^±i=^_^-r = i.
a.
As A is convergent when /*>! and divergent if p<li we see
that D'Alembert's test gives us no information when 1 = 1. It is,
however, convergent for this case by 81, 2.
Example 4-
nl _ Q
Here
'*±i « n^ _ = 1,
an n + 1 + x
and D'Alembert's test does not apply.
Example 5.
A = 2w"a:*.
Here ^=r-^n*: =
a.
98 SERIES
Thus A converges for|#|<l and diverges for |#|>1. For
| a; | =1 the test does not apply. For x = l we know by 81, 2
that A is convergent for //,< — !, and is divergent for /x > — 1.
For x = — 1, A is divergent for p ^ 0, since an does not = 0. A
is an alternating series for /* < 0, and is then convergent.
90. Oauchy's Radical Test. Let A = al + az + ••• be a positive
term series. If there exists a constant r < 1 such that
-\/an<r n = 1, 2, •••
A is convergent. If, on the other hand,
V^>1
A is divergent.
For on the first hypothesis,
an<rn
so that each term of A is <, the corresponding term in
r + r2 + r3 +••• a convergent geometric series. On the second
hypothesis, this geometric series is divergent and an ;>rn.
Corollary. If lim Van = Z, and I < 1, A is convergent. Ifl>\,
A is divergent.
Example 1. The series
* + a + •••
log" n
is convergent. For
n/ - 1 . A
Van = -- = 0.
log n
Example 2.
is convergent. For
*!<!.
H)
Example 3. In the elliptic functions we have to consider series
of the type
0(v) = l-|-2 i0n> cos 2 Trnv 0
i
TESTS OF CONVERGENCE FOR POSITIVE TERM SERIES 99
This series converges absolutely if
Iocs. But here
= -v^"' = 0» = 0.
Thus 0(v) converges absolutely for every v.
Example 4- Let 0 < a <5 < 1. The series
is convergent. For if
n=2m
, w+1
VaB = VaJm+1 = a.
Thus for all n
V «„ < i < 1.
Let us apply D'Alembert's test. Here
=00
Thus the test gives us no information.
91. Cauchy's Integral Test.
Let <£ (#) be a positive monotone decreasing function in the interval
[a, oo ). The series
4> = (#»(!) +<£ (2) +
'.<•• convergent or divergent according as
w convergent or divergent.
For in the interval ("w, n 4- 1), n > m > a,
100 SERIES
Hence rn+}
<KM + 1)< I <
»' n
Letting n = m, m + 1, ••• m+ p, and adding, we have
Xm+p
0&<*«-l,*.l'
Passing to the limit jt? = oo, we get
which proves the theorem.
Corollary. When <I> is convergent
Example 1. We can establish at once the results of 81, 2. For,
taking #
is convergent or divergent according as /* > 1, or /* < 1, by I,
635, 636.
We also note that if
j4 = _iL + i_]L+JL + ...
— /»'•*> 1 1 ]
then -4 < I -^- = - • — .
Example 2. The logarithmic series
2 jr 8 = 1' 2' •"
are convergent if /* > 1; divergent if n < 1.
We take here -,
and apply I, 637, 638.
TESTS OF CONVERGENCE FOR POSITIVE TERM SERIES 101
92. 1. One way, as already remarked, to determine whether
;i Ljiven positive term series A = al + a^ + ••• is convergent or
divergent is to compare it with some series whose convergence or
divergence is known. We have found up to the present the
following standard series S:
The geometric series
The general harmonic series
The logarithmic series
— + — + -+••• (2
(3
2-JL-, (4
^^ til r>7 vil^-vt
We notice that none of these series could be used to determine
by comparison the convergence or divergence of the series follow-
ing it.
In fact, let an, bn denote respectively the wth terms in 1), 2).
Then for g < 1, /* > 0,
7, 1 ,,-nlogy
A_ = _J_ = ! = 00 by I, 464,
or using the infinitary notation of I, 461,
bn > an.
Thus the terms of 2) converge to 0 infinitely slower than the
terms of 1), so that it is useless to compare 2) with 1) for conver-
gence. Let g > 1. Then
?»±l = n"g* = oo,
°n
an>bn.
This shows we cannot compare 2) with 1) for divergence.
102 SERIES
Again, if an, bn denote the wth terms of 2), 3) respectively, we
have, if /* > 1,
^ = -^- = 00 by I, 463,
an log" n
or T .
°n > «n-
-5 = log n = oo,
or ,
Thus the convergence or divergence of 3) cannot be found
from 2) by comparison. In the same way we may proceed with
the others.
2. These considerations lead us to introduce the following
notions. Let A = al + «2 + ••••> B = b-^ + 52 + ••• be positive term
series. Instead of considering the behavior of «„/&„, let us gen-
eralize 'and consider the ratios An : Bn for divergent and An : Bn
for convergent series. These ratios obviously afford us a measure
of the rate at which An and Bn approach their limit. If now A,
B are divergent and D
A-n ~ -Dn,
we say A, B diverge equally fast ; if
A diverges slower than B, and B diverges faster than A. From
I, 180, we have :
Let A, B be divergent and
According as I is 0, =£ 0, 00 , A diverges slower, equally fast, or
faster than B.
If A, B are convergent and
we say A, B converge equally fast ; if A converges and
B, <An,
TESTS OF CONVERGENCE FOR POSITIVE TERM SERIES 103
B converges faster than A, and A converges slower than B. From
I, 184, we have:
Let A, B be convergent and
lim -5 = I.
°n
According as I is 0, =£ 0, oo, A converges faster, equally fast, or slower
than B.
Returning now to the set of standard series *ST, we see that each
converges (diverges) slower than any preceding series of the set.
Such a set may therefore appropriately be called a scale of con-
vergent (divergent) series. Thus if we have a decreasing positive
term series, whose convergence or divergence is to be ascertained,
we may compare it successively with the scale S, until we arrive
at one which converges or diverges equally fast. In practice such
series may always be found. It is easy, however, to show that there
exist series which converge or diverge slower than any series
in the scale S or indeed any other scale.
F°rlet ABO CS.
A, J3, O, ••• {2,
be any scale of positive term convergent or divergent series.
Then, if convergent,
if divergent, An> Bn> Cn> ...
Thus in both cases we are led to a sequence of functions of the
type /iOO>/2O)>/8(>0> -
Thus to show the existence of a series SI which converges (di-
verges) slower than any series in 2, we have only to prove the
theorem : •
3. (Du Bois Reymond.^) In the interval (a, ao) let
denote a set of positive increasing functions which =00 as x = 00.
Moreover, let f
J\
104 SERIES
Then there exist positive increasing functions which = oc slower than
anyfn.
Foras/1>/2 there exists an at>a such that f1>fz + 1 for
x> ar Since /2 >/8, there exists an «2 > a1 such that /2 >/3 + 2
for x>az. And in general there exists an an>an_1 such that
/« >/n+i + w for x > «n. Let now
#O) =/»00 +n-l in («„_!, an).
Then <? is an increasing unlimited function in (a, ao) which
finally remains below any /TO(V) + m — 1, m arbitrary but fixed.
Thus
0<lim =lim - <lim «+* = 0.
a-=^> /mO) /m + m-l /m + m-l
Hence g<fm.
93. From the logarithmic series we can derive a number of
tests, for example, the following :
1. (Bertram's Tests.') Let A = ai + a^+ ••- be a positive term
series.
Let 1
log
... , N annLn ••• I, ,n
<?.(»)= - V4 8 = 1,2,... I0n=l.
ts+l'i
If for some s and m,
&O) > ^ > 1 w > w, (1
A is convergent. If, however,
<?.(») <1, (2
.4 zs divergent.
For multiplying 1) by ls+ln, we get
or a
log -- r~ — ; -- > /A log ^w = log ;
ajilfi •>• It.-^n
Hence .,
or
TESTS OF CONVERGENCE FOR POSITIVE TKKM SKRIKS 105
Thus A is convergent.
The rest of the theorem follows similarly.
2. For the positive term series A=al + a% + ••• to converge it is
necessary that, for n = ao,
lim aB = 0, lim nan = 0, lim nanl^n = 0, lim na^nl^n = 0, •••
We have already noted the first two. Suppose now that
YimnaJiti ••• ltn > 0.
Then by I, 338 there exists an m and a c > 0, such that
nanl^n ••• ltn > c , n > m,
or e
an>
^n ••• ltn
Hence A diverges.
Example 1.
A —
na log3 n
We saw, 88, Ex. 5, that A is divergent for a < 1. For a= 1,
A is convergent for /3 > 1 and divergent if /3 ^ 1, according to
91, Ex. 2.
Then if £ > 0, ,
a=-
and A is convergent since ^ — is. If y3 < 0, let
£=-£' , /8'>0.
Then , # .,
a°= n«' ' n^'
But log"' n < na' by I, 468, l ;
and A is convergent since 5J — r; is.
*•* wa
106 SERIES
Example 2.
w"ev 2
Here .,
log—
by 81, 6).
7 I r^ * i
lzn ( log n
Hence A is convergent for /*>0 and divergent for /*< 0. No
test for /* = 0.
But for /* = 0, -|
Ln Ln
o o
— 1&. \ _1_^ + ^1
I3n I ZjW ZjW J
= -00,
since lzn > lsn. Thus A is divergent for /* = 0.
94. A very general criterion is due to Kummer, viz.:
Let A = aj + a2 + ••• be a positive term series. Let &,, JL* ••• fc 4
«e£ of positive numbers chosen at pleasure. A is convergent, if for
some constant k > 0.
n+l
»+l
^1 i« divergent if
R.iii
F+F+
*i ^
18 divergent and
Kn<0
For on the first hypothesis
£(
TESTS OF CONVERGENCE FOR POSITIVE TERM SERIES 107
Hence adding,
0 <An<al + l(klal - *„<)<
and A is convergent by 80, 4.
On the second hypothesis,
or
Hence -4 diverges since 72 is divergent.
95. 1. From Rummer's test we may deduce D'Alembert's test
at once. For take
1e — Je — — 1
n/l ^— A'Q ~~ "^ -t- •
Then A = al + «2 + ••• converges if
i.e. if
Similarly A diverges if -s±i>l.
2. To derive Raabe's test we take
Then A converges if
Kn = w-^- - (w + 1) > k > 0,
i.e. if
Similarly A diverges if
108 SERIES
96. 1. Let A = al + #2 + ••• be a positive term series. Let
A converges if there exists an s such that
Xg(w) > 8 > 1 for some n>m;
it diverges if % /• N ^ 1 f
^«(w) < 1 for n > m.
We have already proved the theorem for X0(n). Let us show
how to prove it for X1(w). The other cases follow similarly.
For the Kummer numbers kn we take
kn=n log n.
Then A converges if .
kn = n log n • -^- - (w + 1) log (w + 1) > k > 0.
«n+i
As / -I
-
n
= X1(w)-(l + a) a>0.
Thus ^4 converges if Xj(w) > 8 > 1 for n>m.
In this way we see that A diverges if Xj(w) < 1, n>m.
2. Cohen % Test. For the positive term series to converge it is
necessary that
--l]-l = +00.
n+l
TESTS OF CONVERGENCE FOR POSITIVE TERM SERIES 109
For if this upper limit is not + co,
for all n. Hence w
> /• \ ^ i(>cr w sv
xi(w) < - • Cr.
n
But the right side =0. Hence \l(n')<l. for n>some m, and
A is divergent by 1.
Example. .We note that Raabe's test does apply to the harmonic
series i + j + 5 + .- (i
Here
nl
Hence Pn = 0, and
lim Pn = 0.
Hence the series 1) is divergent.
97. Grauss' Test. Let A = «j + a^+ ••• be a positive term series
such that
-
n+1
where «, «x ••• ij ••• rfo wo^ depend on n. Then A is convergent if
a1 — 6j > 1, andf divergent if a1 — b1 < 1 .
Using the identity I, 91, 2), we have
. 1
J «• 1^1 ' 1 n -
= n(* l)== i
x +1 1 + -{&i + •••!
n
Thus lim X0(/i) = al — br Hence, if a1 — ^ > 1, A is conver-
gent; if al — 6j<l, it is divergent. If a1 — b1 = 1, Raabe's test
does not always apply. To dispose of this case we may apply
the test corresponding to \j(w). Or more simply we may use
Cahen's test which depends on X^w). We find at once
lim Pn = a2 — i2 — ij < QO ;
and A is divergent.
110 SERIES
98 Let A = a1 + a2 + ••• be a positive term series such that
n _;[ | | n
*n+l
, /3n<oo.
-4 z» convergent if a > 1 and divergent {/*«<!.
For
if a > 1 and diverges if a < 1. If a = 1,
and A converges
X
ffV
and A is divergent.
EXAMPLES
99. The Binomial Series. Let us find for what values of x and
p the series
-1 -I O
B=l +
1-2
1.2.3
JL • Z J. • Z • O
converges. If p is a positive integer, B is a polynomial of degree /*.
For /x = 0, .6=1. We now exclude these exceptional values of ft.
Applying D'Alembert's test to its adjoint we rind
fln + 1 W — 7i+ 1 , | . | 1
n+i = £- : — \x \ = \x \.
Thus B converges
: = 1. Then
n
absolutely for \x\ < 1 and diverges for \x\ > 1.
Here D'Alembert's test applied to its adjoint gives
= 1.
K
As this gives us no information unless /*< — !, let us apply
Raabe's test. Here
n[ — *- — 1 ]= - Z_^ — ,
\an+1 ) 1 1 + ^
for sufficiently large n
TESTS OF CONVERGENCE FOR POSITIVE TERM SERIES 111
Thus B converges absolutely if /*>0, and its adjoint diverges
if fi<0. Thus B does not converge absolutely for /i<0.
But in this case we note that the terms of B are alternately
positive and negative. Also
1-
so that the |an| form a decreasing sequence from a certain term.
We investigate now when an = 0. Now
-
1 • 2 • — n
In I, 143, let a = — ft, /9 = 1. We thus find that lim an = 0 only
when /x > — 1. Thus B converges when /it > — 1 and diverges
when fji< — 1.
Letx=-\. Then
S
If /* > 0, the terms of B finally have one sign, and
Hence B converges absolutely.
If /* < 0, let /A = — \. Then 5 becomes
Here
1-2
1-2-3
f an -,\ 1-X .
n(fT ~ / x-i =
n
Hence B diverges in this case. Summing up :
The binomial series converges absolutely for \x\<1 and diverges
for \x\ > 1. When x = 1 it converges for /i > — 1 and diverges for
/A < - 1 ; it converges absolutely only for /A > 0. When x = — 1, it
converges absolutely for /A > 0 and diverges for /A < 0.
112 SERIES
100. The Hyper geometric Series
-7
,
2 • 7 • 7 +
1. 2-8-7-7
-7
o
Let us find for what values of x this series converges. Passing
to the adjoint series, we find
'n+1
Thus F converges absolutely for | x \ < 1 and diverges for \x > 1.
Let x = 1. The terras finally have one sign, and
an+i _ n2 + n(l + 7) + 7
an+2 n* + W(« + /3) + «/3
Applying Gauss', test we find F converges when and only when
« + /3-7<0.
Let x = — 1. The terms finally alternate in sign. Let us find
when a_ = 0. We have
Now
^«/3 (a + l).,.O + ro)08+l)...Q8 + n)
" 7 ' (1 + 1)... (l + w)(7 + l)--(7 + w)
m
Thus
1 +
i 7
1 +
But by I, 91, 1),
1
w
m
w.
mm2
w
where <rm = 1, rm = y2 as m = oo.
PRING8HEQT8 TIIKORY 113
Hence
«+£-7-l ,
Hence
and thus „
L = Um log | an+2 \ = ^lm.
i
Now for an to = 0 it is necessary that Ln = — oo. In 88, Ex. 3,
we saw this takes place when and only when « + /8 — 7— 1<0.
Let us find now when | an+1 1 < | an |. Now 1) gives
= 1 + « + ff-1Tr_= _ + _*.
w nz
Thus when a + /3-7-l<0, | an+2 1 < | an+1 1. Hence in this
case F is an alternating series. We have thus the important
theorem :
The hyper geometric series converges absolutely when \ x \ < 1 and
diverges when \x > 1. When x = 1, F converges only when a -f- /9
— 7<0 and then absolutely. When x = — 1, F converges only
when a + J3 — 7 — 1<0, and absolutely if a + y8 — 7 < 0.
Pnngsheim's TJieory
101. 1. In the 35th volume of the Mathematische Annalen
(1890) Pringsheim has developed a simple and uniform theory ot
convergence which embraces as special cases all earlier criteria,
and makes clear their interrelations. We wish to give a brief
sketch of this theory here, referring the reader to his papers for
more details.
Let Mn denote a positive increasing function of n whose limit
is + oo for n =00 . Such functions are, for example, /* > 0,
114 SERIES
Ani where A is any positive term divergent series.
l?n~M where B is any positive terra convergent series.
It will be convenient to denote in general a convergent positive
term series by the symbol
C=cl + cz+ • ••
and a divergent positive term series by
D=sd1 + d2 + —
2. The series
a
~ MM
1 •Lrj-nlrj-n+\
is convergent, and conversely every positive term convergent series
may be brought into this form.
For
•"*»•*•!
1 1
j. i
and O is convergent.
Let now conversely C=cl-\- <?2 •+- •.- be a given convergent
positive term series. Let
tf«-i = — .
Then 1 j
Cn==W~Mr~'
1YLn 1YLn+\
3. ^Ae series
L-^n) (2
is divergent, and conversely every positive term divergent series may
be brought into this form.
For
PRINGSHEIM'S THEORY 115
Let now conversely D = dl + </2 + ••• be a given positive term
divergent series. Let ,.. n
Mn = ^n- I-
Then , «- -,-
d* = M»+i - M*.
102. Having now obtained a general form of all convergent
and divergent series, we now obtain another general form of a
convergent or divergent series, but which converges slower than
1) or diverges slower than 101, 2). Let us consider first con-
vergence. Let M'n < JHfn, then
n
is convergent, and if M'n is properly chosen, not only is each
term of 1) greater than the corresponding term of 101, 1), but 1)
will converge slower than 101, 1). For example, for M'n let us
take M*i 0 < /* < 1. Then denoting the resulting series by
C' = 20J,, we have
C
Thus C' converges slower than (7. But the preceding also
shows that C' and
+4 M- M*
•LU»+\.lu-n
converge equally fast. In fact 2) states that
§J~*M-*.
Since Mn is any positive increasing function of n whose limit
is QO, we may replace Mn in 3) by lrMn so that
is convergent and a fortiori
^lrMn+}-lTMn ,r==i, 2, ... (4
A n+*M
lr •iu»+l
is convergent.
116 SERIES
Now by I, 413, for sufficiently large w,
log MH+l - log Mn = - log(l - Mn+i~Mn} > Mn+*~Mn-
1Un + l J 1YJ-n+l
Replacing here Mn by log Mn, we get
7 M 1 M ^ log Mn+i - log Mn Mn+l - Mn
log^fn+1 >Mn+l\ozMn+l>
and in general
7 M - i M ^ _ ^+1 ~ ^» __
V^n+l VKY» -' M i M , M
-'«7i+l(l/"n + l lr-l-Lt-in + l
Thus the series
y _ Mn+, - Mn __ 6
" M^M^ -. l^M^l^M^
converges as is seen by comparing with 4). We are thus led to
the theorem :
The series ' n/r i\/r iw nr
y 3fn+1 - Mn y Mn+l — Mn ,„
^ MM ' ^ y)f M*
•LT-L-Lrj- ^•L -L'J-
=l, 2, .-.,
form an infinite set of convergent series; each series converging
slower than any preceding it.
The last statement follows from I, 463, 1, 2.
Corollary 1 (Abel). Let D = d1 + d% + ••• denote a positive term
divergent series. Then
z« convergent.
Follows from 3), setting Mn+l = Dn.
Corollary 2. If we take Mn = n we get the series 91, Ex. 2.
Corollary 3. Being given a convergent positive term series
C = cl + c2+ .•• we can construct a series which converges slower
than C.
PRINGSIIEIM'S THEORY 117
For by 101, 2 We may bring C to the form
y Mn+l - Mn
* MnSfn^ '
Then any of the series 7) converges slower than C.
103. 1. Let us consider now divergent series. Here our
problem is simpler and we have at once the theorem :
TJie series «. **• M
diverges slower than
-Mn-) = Zd'n. (2
That 1) is divergent is seen thus : Consider the product
Mm M
which obviously = oo.
2
Hence Z)n = oo and D is divergent.
As
we see that 1) converges slower than 2).
2. Any given positive term series D = dl 4- c?2 -f- ••• caw 5e jtm< i'w
the form 1^).
For taking .flfj > 0 at pleasure, we determine Mv Mz ••• by the
relations TIT
118 SERIES
Then Mn+1 > Mn and
, _ MH+l - Mn
Mn
Moreover Mn = oo. For
> 1 4- Dn by I, 90, l.
But A, = 00.
3. The series
00 7
V _ !±n _ r— 0 1 2 -
^ Ml M --IM
1 lr-/ntllr-£n M'-'n
/orra an infinite set of divergent series, each series divergent slower
than any preceding it. lQMn = Mn.
For log M^ - log Jf. = log (l + ^rr-
This proves the theorem for r = 0. Hence as in 102 we find,
replacing repeatedly Mn by log Mm
Corollary 1. If we take Mn = w, we get the series 91, Ex. 2.
Corollary 2 {AbeT). Let D = d1 + d% -f- ••• be a divergent positive
term series. Then
is divergent.
We take here Mn = Dn.
Corollary 3. Being given a positive term divergent series D, we
can construct a series which diverges slower than D.
For by 101, 3 we may bring D to the form
Then 1) diverges slower than D.
PRINGSHEIM'S THEORY 119
104. In Ex. 3 of I, 454, we have seen that MH+l is not always^-
Mn. In case it is we have
1. The series
is convergent.
Follows from 102, 3).
2. The series
is convergent if fi > 0; it is divergent if /i< 0.
For e*Mn > i i#Ml ^Ml /* > 0.
Thus
M
m
3. If Mn+l ~ Mn, we have
I M -I M-
(,M i-M
For by 102, 5), 103, 3),
7 M — 7 M —
r+lMn
i if _/
r+ n+
_
r+l n+l r+1 *'
•iun+lll2Un+l '
Now since Mn+l~ Mn, we have also obviously
lmMn~lmMn+1 m=l, 2,-r.
105. Having obtained an unlimited set of series which converge
or diverge more and more slowly, we show now how they may be
employed to furnish tests of ever increasing strength. To ob-
tain them we go back to the fundamental theorems of comparison
of 87. In the first place, if A = ^ + (%+ ••• is a given positive
term series, it converges if
120 SERIES
It diverges if
%><*• (2
In the second place, A converges if
-Jj±l--s±J<0, (3
**n ^n
and diverges if -,
an dn
The tests 1), 2) involve only a single term of the given series
and the comparison series, while the tests 3), 4) involve two
terms. With Du Bois Reymond such tests we may call respec-
tively tests of the first and second kinds. And in general any
relation between p terms
of the given series and p terms of a comparison series,
Cni Cn+\i '" Cn+p~\i O1' **ni **n+l '" ^n+p-\
which serves as a criterion of convergence or divergence may be
called a test of the pth kind.
Let us return now to the tests 1), 2), 3), 4), and suppose we
are testing A for convergence. If for a certain comparison
series O
— not always <_ 6r , n > m
it might be due to the fact that cn = 0 too fast. We would then
take another comparison series C'= ^c'n which converges slower
than (7. As there always exist series which converge slower than
any given positive term series, the test 1) must decide the con-
vergence of A if a proper comparison series is found. To find
such series we employ series which converge slower and slower.
Similar remarks apply to the other tests. We show now how
these considerations lead us most naturally to a set of tests which
contain as special cases those already given.
106. 1. General Criterion of the First Kind. The positive term
series A = a1 + a% + • • • converges if
(1
n+l - n
PRINGSHEIM'S THEORY 121
It diverges if ^ M^_ Q (2
•"*n+l ~ •««•»
This follows at once from 105, 1), 2); and 101, 2; 103, 1.
2. To get tests of greater power we have only to replace the
just employed in 1), 2) by the series of 102 and 103, 3 which con-
verge (diverge) slower. We thus get from 1 :
The positive term series A converges if
Mn^Mt p— MnLMn ••• lr,Mn^l].+ltMn
Una- —a. orlim— -2a_<ao.
Mn+l-Mn Mn+1-Mn
It diverges if }.^ Mnl,Mn- lrMn a > Q
Mn+1 - Mn
Bonnet's Test. The positive term series A converges if
tlim nl^n ••• l^^ill^n • an < oc , /x > 0.
I diverges if Hm M^n - ^i • a.>0.
Follows from the preceding setting Mn = n.
3. The positive term series A converges or diverges according as
**"na" < 1 , ^>0, (3
For in the first case
and in the second case
The theorem follows now by 104, 2.
4. The positive term series A converges if
122 SERIES
It diverge* if
Mn+, - Mn , Mn+l - Mn
<0
r = 0, 1, 2, ••• and as before lQMn = Mn.
For taking the logarithm of both sides of 3) we have for con-
vergence Jfn+] - Jfn
As /* is an arbitrarily small but fixed positive number, A con-
verges if lim q > 0. Making use of 104, 3 we get the first part
of the theorem. The rest follows similarly.
Remark. If we take Mn = n we get Cauchy's radical test 90
and Bertram's tests 93.
n
it is necessary that n,— < -,
Also if
annlfi-
•lrn_ *a,
XiW-Zr-i
- T ^
O 7
lrn
lr+ln
lr+ln
Inor
1
lr+ln
it is necessary that j
log - ; -- ; -
lr+ln
107. In 94 we have given Kummer's criterion for the conver-
gence of a positive term series. The most remarkable feature
about it is the fact that the constants kv kz->- which enter it are
subject to no conditions whatever except that they shall be positive.
On this account this test, which is of the second kind, has stood
entirely apart from all other tests, until Pringsheim discovered its
counterpart as a test of the first kind, viz. :
PRINGSHEIM'S THEORY 123
Pringsheims Criterion. Let pv pz--- be a set of positive numbers
chosen at pleasure, and let Pn = p^ + • • • + pn. The positive term
series A converges if
log fJL
lirn__f!L>0. (1
Pn
For A converges if
lim - -^ - >0 , by 106, 4. (2
lun
But Mn+l — Mn = dn is the general term of the divergent series
= d1 + dt+ —
Thus 2) may be written
log^
lim_^>0. (3
-^n
Moreover A converges if
that is, if v cn A
lim -^ > 0,
where as usual C= c^ + c2 + ••• is a convergent series.
Hence A converges if Cn
lim — g >0. (4
But now the set of numbers pv pz "-gives rise to a series
P = pl-\- pz + ••• which must be either convergent or divergent.
Thus 3), 4) show that in either case 1) holds.
108. 1. Let us consider now still more briefly criteria of the
second kind. Here the fundamental relations are 3), 4) of 105,
which may be written :
cn+l — — — cn > 0 for convergence; (1
an+l
dn+1 — - — dn <^0 for divergence. (2
1:24 SERIES
Or in less general form :
TJie positive term aeries A converges if
lira ( c an _£ ]->0
\ Ln+l °n / •** v* V"
V «»+!
It diverges if
0. (4
Here as usual C=cl + cz+ ••• is a convergent, and D=d1
a divergent series.
2. Although we have already given one demonstration of
Kummer's theorem we wish to show here its place in Pringsheim's
general theory, and also to exhibit it under a more general form.
Let us replace cn, cn+l in 1) by their values given in 101, 2.
We get
M-M a M-M
n+l Mn
or snce
or by 103, 2
n+1 Mn
,
an
where D = dl + d% 4- ••• is awj/ divergent positive term series.
Since any set of positive numbers kl, k2, ••• gives rise to a series
&i + ^2 ~^~ "' whic^1 must be either convergent or divergent, we see
from 1) that 5) holds when we replace the d's by the Fs. We
have therefore:
The positive term series A converges if there exists a set of positive
numbers k±, kz — such that
klt+1^--kH>0. (6
an+l
It diverges if
where as usual d1 + dz + ••• denotes a divergent series.
ARITHMETIC OPERATIONS ON SERIKS 125
Since the k's are entirely arbitrary positive numbers, the rela-
tion 6) also gives
A converges if
le a* — If ^> 0 •
"•* "n+1 -^ v >
0»+l
as is seen by writing
*-F
«n
reducing, and then dropping the accent.
3. From Rummer's theorem we may at once deduce a set of
tests of increasing power, viz.:
The positive term series A is convergent or divergent according an
M^M^ ... lrMn+l an+1 M^M* ... lrMn
is > 0 or is < 0.
For &p &2 ... we have used here the terms of the divergent
series of 103, 3.
Arithmetic Operations on Series
109. 1. Since an infinite series
A = al + o,j -f- as * • (1
is not a true sum but the limit of a sum
A— li
we now inquire in how far the properties of polynomials hold for
the infinite polynomial 1). The associative property is expressed
in the theorem :
Let A = al + a2 + «" be convergent. Let bl = al+'-- + a^,
bz = a,ni+i+ '•' +*»<,'••• Then the series B = bl + b2+ ••• is con-
vergent and A = B. Moreover the number of terms which bn em-
braces may increase indefinitely with n.
For B-A
Vn - Amn
and lim^lm =A by I, 103, 2.
126 SERIES
This theorem relates to grouping the terms of A in parentheses.
The following relate to removing them.
2. Let B = b1 + 62 4- • • • be convergent and let b1 = a^ + • • • + am ,
*2 = am1+i + •" + amti '" If 1° A = al + az + ••• is convergent,
A — B. 2° If the terms an > 0, A is convergent. 3° If each
mn — mn_i < p a constant, and an = 0, A is convergent.
On the first hypothesis we have only to apply 1, to show
A = B. On the second hypothesis
e > 0, m, Bn<e, n>m.
Then B-A.<* s>mn.
On the third hypothesis we may set
A, = Br+b'r+1
where b'r+1 denotes a part of the a-terms in br+1. Since br+l con-
tains at most p terms of A, b'r+1 = 0.
Hence
lim^ , or A = B.
Example 1. The series
is convergent. The series obtained by removing the parentheses
•
is divergent.
Example 2.
1,1 1,1 1
rz^. +9~9~T^ ^ 3~z^- '" ; x ' '"
X ~T~ J(s £4 +1 "y" •*/ O O ^| •6'
As ^ is comparable with ^-7,, it is convergent. Hence A is
^w2
convergent by 3°.
110. 1. Let us consider now the commutative property.
Here Riemann has established the following remarkable
theorem :
ARITHMETIC OPERATIONS ON SERIES 127
The terms of a simply convergent series A = al + a^ + • • • can be
arranged to form a series S, for which lim 8n is any prescribed
number, or ± ao.
For let
be the series formed respectively of the positive and negative
terms of A, the relative order of the terms in A being preserved.
To fix the ideas let I be a positive number ; the demonstration
of the other cases is similar. Since £n= + 00, there exists an ml
such that
B^ > I (1
Let ml be the least index for which l)is true. Since <7n= — oo,
there exists an wa such that
(2
Let ?n2 be the least index for which 2) is true. Continuing,
we take just enough terms, say ms terms of B, so that
kj^3*+ ??*«*>*•
Then just enough terms, say w4 terms of (7, so that
Bmi+Cmt + Smi,m3+ On,,^ < Z,
etc. In this way we form the series
8=JBmi+Cm, + Bmi,mt+ -
whose sum is I. For
| a. | < e « > o- ;
2. Let A = al + a%+ -•• be absolutely convergent. Let the terms
of A be arranged in a different order, giving the series B. Then B
is absolutely convergent and A = B.
For we may take m so large that
128 SERIES
We may now take n so large that An — Bn contains no term
whose index is <_ m. Thus the terms of An — Bn taken with
positive sign are a part of Am and hence
An — Blt | < Am < e n> m.
Thus B is convergent and B = A.
The same reasoning shows that B is convergent, hence B is
absolutely convergent.
3. If A = al + a2 + ••• enjoys the commutative property, it i*
absolutely convergent.
For if only simply convergent we could arrange its terms so as
to have any desired sum. But this contradicts the hypothesis.
Addition and Subtraction
111. Let A = a-^-^- a2 + ••• , B = 1^ + />2 4- ••• be convergent.
The series
are convergent and C=A±B.
For obviously Cn = An ± Bn. We have now only to pass to the
limit.
Example. We saw, 81, 3, Ex. 1, that
is a simply convergent series. Grouping its terms by twos and
by fours [109, 1] we get
-l 2
Let us now rearrange A, taking two positive terms to one nega-
tive. We get
ADDITION AND SUBTRACTION 129
We note now that
n-3 4w-2 4w-l 4n '2\:>n-l 2n
[- i
* - « 4 w - 2 4 w - 1 4 n \4 w - 2 4 n
• — 1 ' 4 n - 3 2 n
= B by 109, 2.
Thus B = I A.
This example, due to Dirichlet, illustrates the non-commutative
property of simply convergent series. We have shown the con-
vergence of B by actually determining its sum. As an exercise let.
us proceed directly as follows :
The series 1) may be written :
8--3
^ 8w— 3 >-A 1 n
\ nj\ nj
Comparing this with
we see that it is convergent by 87, 3. Since 1) is convergent, B
is also by 109, 2.
112. 1. Multiplication. We have already seen, 80, 7, that we
may multiply a convergent series by any constant. Let us now
consider the multiplication of two series. As customary let
2 aJ)K i, K = 1, 2, 3, ••• (1
IK
denote the infinite series whose terms are all possible products
at • bK without repetition. Let us take two rectangular axes as in
analytic geometry ; the points whose coordinates are a; = t, y — tc
are called lattice points. Thus to each term a,bf of 1), cor-
130 SERIES
responds a lattice point t, K and conversely. The reader will find
it a great help here and later to keep this correspondence in mind.
Let A = «! + «2 H — •> B = bl + b% + ••• be absolutely convergent.
Then C = ^a,bK is absolutely convergent and A • B — C.
Let m be taken large at pleasure ; we may take n so large that
» — J
Then
in-Amtfm <a1am + (%ttm+ •••
+ PlAm + pnA.m + '•• + PmA,
Fn — Am • Bm contains no term both of whose indices are < m.
Tn - AmBm < apm + «2Bm + - . + «mBm
< e for w sufficiently large.
Hence
and O is absolutely convergent.
To show that C= A • B, we note that
\Cn-AmBn\<Tn-AmBm<€ n>n0.
2. We owe the following theorem to Mertens.
If A converges absolutely and B converges (not necessarily abso-
lutely^), then
0= albl + (aj&g + a^j) + (a^ + «252 + azb{) + •••
is convergent and 0= A • B.
We set (7= cl + <?2 + cz+ —
where cl = a1b1
c2 = a^ + azb1
cs = alb8 + a262 + «3Jj
Cn = «1» + «2
Adding these equations gives
••• + anBr
ADDITION AND SUBTRACTION 131
Bm = B-Bm w = l,2, .-
Hence
where
The theorem is proved when we show dn = 0. To this end let
us consider the two sets of remainders
7> /> T>
-£>i . .On * • • • J5n
-"«!+! » -nt+2
Let * each one in the first set be | < | Mv and each in the second
set | < | MY Then since
+ M < Jf2A + JfjA.,. (1
A
Now for each e > 0 there exists an n^ such that
also a v, such that
Thus 1) shows that
3. When neither ^4. nor 5 converges absolutely, the series C
may not even converge. The following example due to Cauchy
illustrates this.
VI V2 V3 V4
5 = -l__JL + _L__L+...=A
VI V2 V8 V4
•The symbols |< |, | < | mean numerically <, numerically <.
132 SERIES
The series A being alternating is convergent by 81, 3. Its
adjoint is divergent by 81, 2, since here /n = £. Now
+O-
VI Vl Wl \ -1
^Vl V3 ' V2 V2 ' V3 VI
= c2 4-
and
Vl Vw - 1 V2 -Vn - 2 Vw - 1 Vl
By I, 95,
m{n — m) _ -•
Hence • rt
Hence C is divergent since cn does not = 0, as it must if C
were convergent, by 80, 3.
4. In order to have the theorems on multiplication together,
we state here one which we shall prove later.
If all three series A, £, C are convergent, then 0= A • B.
113. We have seen, 109, l, that we may group the terms of a
convergent series A = ax + «2 + ••• into a series B — b-^ + b^+ •••
each term bn containing but a finite number of terms of A. It is
easy to arrange the terms of A into a finite or even an infinite
number of infinite series, B' , B", B'" ••• For example, let
= al + ap+l -f azp+l + •••
ap+2 + a2p+2 H ----
Then every term of A lies in one of these p series B. To decom-
pose A into an infinite number of series we may proceed thus :
In B' put all terms an whose index n is a prime number ; in B"
put all terms whose index n is the product of two primes ; in
TWO-WAY SERIES 133
B(m) all terms whose index is the product of m primes. We ask
now what is the relation between the original series A and the
series B', S" —
If A = al + a2 + ••• is absolutely convergent* we may break it up
into a finite or infinite number of series B\ £", B'", • •« Each of
- these series converges absolutely and
That each B(m) converges absolutely was shown in 80, 0. Let
us suppose first that there is only a finite number of these series,
say p of them. Then
An = £; + B^ + -. + J5g> »«,%*•".+ n,.
As n=oo, each nv nz---=<x>. Hence passing to the limit
n = oo , the above relation gives
A= B' + B" + ••• +#(p).
Suppose now there are an infinite number of series B(m).
Set £ = £' + £" + £'" + -.
We take v so large that A — Bn, n>v, contains no term an of
index <?», and m so large that
Aro<€.
Then
Two-ivay Series
114. 1. Up to the present the terms of our infinite series have
extended to infinity only one way. It is, however, convenient
sometimes to consider series which extend both ways. They are
of the type
•••a_3 + a_2 +a_l + a0 + «i +«2 + a3 + "'
which may be written
ao + ai + aa+ ---- ha.! +a_2+ •'•
134 SERIES
Such series we called two-way series. The series is convergent
if
lim 2an (2
y, s=cc ?i=— r
is finite. If the limit 2) does not exist, J. is divergent. The ex-
tension of the other terms employed in one-way series to the
present case are too obvious to need any comment. Sometimes
n = 0 is excluded in 1) ; the fact may be indicated by a dash,
at
thus 2' an.
— 00
2. Let m be an integer ; then while n ranges over
... _3, -2, -1,0,1,2,3...
v = n + m will range over the same set with the difference that v
will be m units ahead or behind n according as m ^ 0. This
shows that
00 00
2an = 2an+ro.
«=. — 00 M= — 00
Similarly, | _ *
^a» — ^«_n.
W=— oo 7|= — CO
3. Example 1. @ = |gn!e+aB,
= 1 + g*+« + e2*+4a + g3x+9a + ...
i g—x+a I g— 2i+4a i g-3z+!)a ...
This series is fundamental in the elliptic functions.
Example 2. -.
n n
+ 1
The sum of this series as we shall see is IT cot
TWO-WAY SERIES 1:;;.
115. For a two-way series A to converge, it is necessary and
sufficient that the series B formed with the terms with negative indices
(i n<l the series C formed tvith the terms with non-negative indices be
convergent. If A is convergent, A = B + C.
It is necessary. For A being convergent,
if «, «' > some <r and r > some p. Hence adding,
|tf.-<Vf<«,
which shows C is convergent. Similarly we may show that B is
convergent.
It is sufficient. For B, C being convergent,
\B-Br\<e/2 , \C-C.\<e/2
for r, 8 > some p. Hence
or
Thus
Example 1. The series
x r^ \x + n
is absolutely convergent if x =£ 0, ±1, ±2,
For
x + n n
Hence s
2an and
o
00 "J
are comparable with V-s-
+ nx
i
Example 2. The series
B(:r) = 2en*+on> a; arbitrary (2
—00
is convergent absolutely if a < 0. It diverges if a > 0.
136 SERIES
ii f*T*f*
n > 0, -v/a« = erean = 0 if a < 0
= 00 if a >0;
n = — w', w'>0 r(/~an = g-*^"' = 0 ifa<0
= 00 if a > 0.
The case a = 0 is obvious.
Thus the series defines a one- valued function of x when a < 0.
As an exercise in manipulation let us prove two of its properties.
1° ®(:c) is an even function.
For
— oo
If we compare this series with 2) we see that the terms corre-
sponding to n = m and n = — m have simply changed places, as the
reader will see if he actually writes out a few terms of 2), 3).
Qf. 114, 2.
2° ©O + 2ma')=e-m(x+ma)®(x). m = ± 1, ±2, ...
For we can write 2) in the form
_
=e 4a 2e 4a
n = — oo
which with 4) gives 3).
CHAPTER IV
MULTIPLE SERIES
116. Let x = x^ --'Xm be a point in w-way space 9?m. If the
coordinates of x are all integers or zero, x is called a lattice point,
and any set of lattice points a lattice system. If no coordinate of
any point in a lattice system is negative, we call it a non-negative
lattice system, etc. Let f(x^ ••• xm~) be defined over a lattice
system i = il,-"im. The set {/(^---Ol ig called an m-tuple
sequence. It is customary to set
f(i,
J \ 1
Then the sequence is represented by
-j-K-ii-
The terms v r= — A v A
lim A , lim A , Inn A
as tj ••• tm converges to an ideal point have therefore been defined
and some of their elementary properties given in the discussion
of I, 314-328 ; 336-338.
Let x = x1---xm y = y\---ym be two points in SRm. If
y\ > #1 ••• ym ^ xm we shall write more shortly y > x. If a;
ranges over a set of points x' > x" > x'" ••• we shall say that x is
monotone decreasing. Similar terms apply as in I, 211.
If now
when y >_ x, we say / is a monotone increasing function. If
we say/ is a monotone decreasing function.
Similar terms apply as in I, 211.
137
138 MULTIPLE SERIES
117. A very important class of multiple sequences is connected
with multiple series as we now show. Let atl...lm be defined over
a non-negative lattice system. The symbol
2a.t...M,. ^ = 0,1,...^ , ---im=0, 1, •••vm (1
or 2alt...lm , or AVl...Vm
o
denotes the sum of all the a's whose lattice points lie in the rec-
tangular cell Q<XI<VI ...Q<xm<Vm.
Let us denote this cell by RVl...Vm or by Rv. The sum 1) may be
effected in a variety of ways. To fix the ideas let m = 3. Then
etc. In the first sum, we sum up the terms in each plane and
then add these results. In the second sum, we sum the terms on
parallel lines and then add the results. In the last sum, we sum
the terms on the parallel lines lying in a given plane and add the
results ; we then sum over the different planes.
Returning now to the general case, the symbol
oo,
or A — 2atl...lm
o
is called an w-tuple infinite series. For m = 2 we can write it
out more fully thus
20
4-
In general, we may suppose the terms of any m-tuple series dis-
played in a similar array, the term atl...ln, occupying the lattice
point t = (t1---tm). This affords a geometric image of great
service. The terms in the cell Rv may be denoted by Av.
If lira AVl...Vm = lira Av (2
GENERAL THEORY 139
is finite, A is convergent and the limit 2) is called the sum of the
series A. When no confusion will arise, we may denote the series
and its sum by the same letter. If the limit 2) is infinite or does
not exist, we say A is divergent.
Thus every w-tuple series gives rise to an ?n-tuple sequence
\AVl...vml. Obviously if all the terms of A are >0 and A is diver-
gent, the limit 2) is + oo. In this case we say A is infinite.
Let us replace certain terms of A by zeros, the resulting series
may be called the deleted series. If we delete A by replacing all
the terms of the cell RVl...Vm by zero, the resulting series is called
the remainder and is denoted by AVt...vm or by Av. Similarly if
the cell Rv contains the cell R^ the terms lying in Rv and not in
RH may be denoted by A^ „.
The series obtained from A by replacing each term of A by its
numerical value is called the adjoint series. In a similar manner
most of the terms employed for simple series may be carried over
to w-tuple series. In the series 2atl...lmthe indices t all began
with 0. There is no necessity for this; they may each begin with
any integer at pleasure.
118. The Geometric Series. We have seen that
1
— _ = l + a + a2 + ... |«|<li
l-b
Hence -.
(1 _ a)(l _ 6) o
for all points a, b within the unit square.
In general we see that
0 «•£*?«$• ...4$,
is absolutely convergent for any point x within the unit cube
0 < | XL | < 1 i = 1, 2, ••• n,
and
140 MULTIPLE SERIES
119. 1. It is important to show how any term of A = 2a(i...lm can
be expressed by means of the AVj...Vm.
Let Av2 ••••'„,_! = •^••v2-"« ~~ •^•vz- %,_!•
Then &*i*,—*u-i-i = A,,lV.,...Vm_l-}t,m — Av^... Vm_1_ L Vm_r ^(2
Let •^•^•••"m-a = •^•'i^ — Vm-i — -*'>>i'>i — VM-l-r
Similarly
•" "m-3 ~~ -^>'il'2 '" "m-3~l '
Finally DVi = D,,,, - D^^, (6
and «^s. •-,„,= At- A,-I. (7
If now we replace the D's by their values in terms of the vl's,
the relation 7) shows that aVj ...,,m may be expressed linearly in
terms of a number of Alll...fJLm where each pr = vr or vr — 1.
For w = 2 we find
2. From 1 it follows that we may take any sequence \A^...lm\
to form a multiple series
^ = 2atl.,,m.
This fact has theoretic importance in studying the peculiarities
that multiple series present.
120. We have now the following theorems analogous to 80.
1. For A to be convergent it is necessary and sufficient that
e>0, p, I^J <e EP<R^<RV.
2. If A is convergent, so is A^ and
A^ = A — A,,. = lim A^ „.
v=oo
Conversely if A^ is convergent, so is A.
GENERAL THEORY 141
3. For A to converge it is necessary and sufficient that
lim Av = 0.
v—ao
4. A series whose adjoint converges is convergent.
5. Let A be absolutely convergent. Any deleted series B of A is
absolutely convergent and \ B \ < A.
6. If A = 2atl...,m is convergent, so is B = 2&at)...l)n and
B = kA, k a constant.
121. 1. For A to converge it is necessary that
DVlVt. ..,„_! , D^.-.^.j , —&Vl , a^2...,2 = 0,a« v=co.
For by 120, 1
-
Thus by 119, 1)
I !>„„,. ..,„_! | <e
Hence passing to the limit p = oo ,
lim DVl ..,„„_,<.€.
•• = 00
As e is small at pleasure, this shows that DVi...^ml = 0. In this
way we may continue.
2. Although
hma,i...,m = 0
"t ••• "m=rj
when ^4 converges, we must guard against the error of supposing
that av= 0 when v = (yl ••• i/m) converges to an ideal point, all of
whose coordinates are not oo as they are in the limits employed
in 1.
This is made clear by the following example due to Pringsheim.
Let
Then by 119, 8) 1.1
ar. — — I — •
ar a'
142 MULTIPLE SERIES
As
r, *=«
A is convergent. But
lim | aftS | = — , lim \an\ = — •
r=<o a* f=a> ar
That is when the point (r, «) converges to the ideal point
(oo, «), or to the ideal point (r, oo ), art does not = 0.
3. However, we do have the theorem :
A = ^...im at>0
converge. Then for each e > 0 there exists a \ such that «, ... t < e
for any t outside the rectangular cell JSA.
This follows at once from 120, l, since
122. 1. Letf(x^ ••• #TO) be monotone. Then
•
••• x,n) = 1 xl < «j, ••• xm < am, a way be ideal. (1
exists, finite or infinite. If f is limited, I is finite. If f is unlim-
ited, I = + oo when f is monotone increasing, and I = — oo whenf is
monotone decreasing.
For, let /be limited. Let A = «j < a% < ••• = a.
Then v /-^ \ 7
lim/(«n) = I
n=&>
is finite by I, 109.
Let now B = ySj, /82, ••• = a be any other sequence.
Let
Then there exists by I, 338 a partial sequence of B, say
(7=7j, 72 ••• such that
lim/(7n)=[,
also a partial sequence D— B1, 32 ••• such that
= I
GENERAL THEORY 143
But for each «, there exists a
hence
and therefore / _> L (2
Similarly, for each dn there exists an a<B > 8n ;
hence */•* \ ^ *f \
/(S«) </(««„)
and therefore 7 < 7 rq
Thus 2), 3) give iim/(~) = ,.
B
Hence by I, 316, 2 the relation 1) holds.
The rest of the theorem follows along the same lines.
2. As a corollary we have
The positive term series A = '2ali...lM is convergent if Av^,.Vm is
limited.
123. 1. Let A = Sati ... tj = Eat , B = 26^...^ = 2it be two non-
negative term series. If they differ only by a finite number of
terms, they converge or diverge simultaneously.
This follows at once from 120, 2.
2. Let A, B be two non-negative term series. Let r > 0 denote
a constant. If at < rbt , A converges if B is convergent and A j< rB.
If at > rbi, A diverges if B is divergent.
For on the first hypothesis
and on the second
3. Let A, B be two positive term series. Let r, s be positive
constants. If
^ a\ ^
r<-±<8
Ot
or if
i- #t
lirn — l
c=oo 64
exists and is =£ 0, A and B converge or diverge simultaneously. If
B converges and^ = 0, A is convergent. If B diverges and -? = oo,
&» b*
A is divergent.
MULTIPLE SERIES
4. The infinite non-negative term series
2at|...t< and 2 log (1 + «t, ...,.)
converge or diverge simultaneously.
This follows from 2.
5. ie£ the power series
— 5!/> Tmlrw), ... ~.mt
— •^C"-'f' X
converge at the point a = («j, ••• a,), £Aen it converges absolutely for
all points x within the rectangular cell R whose center is the origin,
and one of whose vertices is a; that is for \x^\ < | at | , 4=1, 2, ••• s.
For since P converges at a,
lim cmjTO2...a™t...<"=0.
771=00
Thus there exists an M such that each term
Hence
= c.
<M
I
-,.
1
»
•
«!
TO,
^.
Thus each term of P is numerically < than Jf times the cor-
responding term in the convergent geometric series
We apply now 2.
We shall call R a rectangular cell of convergence.
124. 1. Associated with any w-tuple series A = Sa(i ... ln are
an infinite number of simple series called associate simple series,
as we now show.
R R R
be an infinite sequence of rectangular cells each lying in the
following. Let
o a, , a0 , ••• a,.
be the terms of A arranged in any order lying in
Let
GENERAL THEORY 145
be the terms of A arranged in order lying in 72Aj — 72Ai, and so on
indefinitely.
Then a = ai + fla+... + «., + flt|+1 + •
is an associate simple series of A.
2. Conversely associated with any simple series 21 = 2an are an
infinity of associate m-tuple series. In fact we have only to arrange
the terms of 21 over the non-negative lattice points, and call now
the term an which lies cat the lattice point il ••• im the term «,,...,„,-
3. Let 31 be an associate series of A = Sati ... ,m. If 21 is convergent,
so is A and A = W.
For ^...vm=2In.
Let now v = oo, then n = oo. But 2tn = 21, hence AVl...Vm = 21.
4. If the associate series 21 is absolutely convergent, so is A.
Follows from 3.
5 If A = 2aVi ... Vm is a non-negative term convergent series, all its
associate series 21 converge.
For, any 2lmip lies among the terms of some A^ „. But for X
sufficiently large ^ „ < € \<n<v.
Hence
2lm,p<f m>mQ.
6. Absolutely convergent series are commutative.
For let B be the series resulting from rearranging the given
series A.
Then any associate 53 of B is simply a rearrangement of an
associate series 21 of A. But 21 = 53, hence A = B.
1. A simply convergent m-tuple series A can be rearranged,
producing a divergent series.
For let 21 be an associate of A. 21 is not absolutely convergent,
since A is not. We can therefore rearrange 21, producing a series
53 which is divergent. Thus for some 53
Iim53n
does not exist. Let 53' be the series formed of the positive, and
53" the series formed of the negative, terms of 53 taken in order.
146 MULTIPLE SERIES
Then either 93J, = + <x> or SB" = - <x, or both. To fix the ideas
suppose the former. Then we can arrange the terms of 33 to
form a series (5 such that (£„ = + oo. Let now (£ be an associate
series of O. Then
Cv = CVlVi... „„, = (£n
and thus
lim Gv = lim (£„ = + oo.
Hence 0 is divergent.
8. If the multiple series A is commutative, it is absolutely con-
vergent.
For if simply convergent, we can rearrange A so as to make the
resulting series divergent, which contradicts the hypothesis.
9. In 121, 2 we exhibited a convergent series to show that
ati <lm does not need to converge to 0 if tj ••• im converges to an ideal
point some of whose coordinates are finite. As a counterpart we
have the following :
Let A be absolutely convergent. Then for each e > 0 there exists
a \, such that any finite set of terms B lying without R^ satisfy the
relation \ T>\ ^
\B\<ti (1
and conversely.
For let 21 be an associate simple series of Adj A. Since 51 is
convergent there exists an n, such that
But if \ is taken sufficiently large, each term of B lies in 5IB,
which proves 1).
Suppose now A were simply convergent. Then, as shown in 7,
there exists an associate series 5D which is infinite.
Hence, however large n is taken, there exists a p such that
Hence, however large X is taken, there exist terms B= 3X,P which
do not satisfy 1).
10. We have seen that associated with any m-tuple series
GENERAL THEORY 147
extended over a lattice system 3ft in 9tm is a simple series in 9^.
We can generalize as follows. Let 3ft = \i\ be associated with a
lattice system 3ft = \j\ in 9tn such that to each i corresponds a.; and
conversely.
If i~j we set a*-'- = ajl...jn'
Then A gives rise to an infinity of n-tuple series as
B = 2a. . . .
il —Jn
We say B is a conjugate n-tuple series.
We have now the following :
Let A be absolutely convergent. Then the series B is absolutely
convergent and A = B.
For let A', B' be associate simple series of A, B. Then A', B'
are absolutely convergent and hence A'=B'. But A = A', B = B'.
Hence A = B, and B is absolutely convergent.
11. Let A = 2atl ... lm be absolutely convergent. Let B= Sa^...^
be uny p-tuple series formed of a part or all the terms of A. Then
B is absolutely convergent and
For let A', B' be associate simple series of A and B. Then B'
converges absolutely and |l?'|<Adj A.
125. 1. Let ^ = 2«lt ....... ' , (1
Set /Cv<0= «„•••«.
in the cell
tj — 1 <xl<il, — im-l <xm<im.
Then
Let jR denote that part of 9?m whose points have non-negative
coordinates. Let ^
J= I fdxv — dxm. (3
*J R
If «7is convergent, -4 = J. We cannot in general state the con-
verse, for A is obtained from Av by a special passage to the limit, viz.
148 MULTIPLE SERIES
by employing a sequence of rectangular cells. If, however,
av>_Q we may, and we have
For the non-negative term series 1) to converge it is necessary and
sufficient that the integral 3) converges.
2. Let f{xl ••• ZM) > 0 be a monotone decreasing function of
x in 72, the aggregate of points all of whose coordinates are non-
negative. Let _ ff
"ii im — J \ll '" lm)-
The series j _ v ,
is convergent or divergent with
J= ( fdx1 — <lzm.
J R
For let J?j, 722, ••• be a sequence of rectangular cubes each Rn
contained in 72n+1.
Let En,s=Es-En s>n.
Then \, /x being taken at pleasure but > some v, there exist an
Z, m such that- /»
•a+p < \ fim-
*/ R
But the integral on the right can be made small at pleasure if J
is convergent on taking I > m > some n. Hence A is convergent
if J"is. Similarly the other half of the theorem follows.
Iterated Summation of Multiple Series
126. Consider the finite sum
Sa,,...,™ *!=(), 1, — Wj ••• im = 0, 1, ••• nm. ' (1
One way to effect the summation is to keep all the indices but
one fixed, say all but tj, obtaining the sum
Then taking the sum of these sums when only i2 is allowed to
vary obtaining the sum m m
ITERATED SUMMATION' OF MULTIPLE SERIES 149
and so on arriving finally at
">n m,
(2
whose value is that of 1). We call this process iterated summa-
tion. We could have taken the indices i1"- tm in any order
instead of the one just employed; in each case we would have
arrived at the same result, due to the commutative property of
finite sums.
Let us see how this applies to the infinite series,
^ = 2V--.»' «i-*« = 0, I,-- oo. (3
The corresponding process of iterated summation would lead us
to a series H=2 2-..fa . (4
.m=olra_,=o ll=otl
which is an m-tuple iterated series. Now by definition
21 = lim 2~ lira ? %• lim 2ati...,m (5
"m=» <m=" ^m-^* H»-l=° >'l=3t 'i=0
= lim lim •••lim -A.,. „ , (6
* 1 vm *.
VM=<* Pm-l3130 vt—'-f-
while ,„
A= hm A^...^. ^
v\ -".vm
Thus A is defined by a general limit while 31 is defined by an
iterated limit. These two limits may be quite different. Again
in 6) we have passed to the limit in a certain order. Changing
this order in 6) would give us another iterated series of the type
4) with a sum which may be quite different. However in a large
class of series the summation 'may be effected by iteration and this
is one of the most important ways to evaluate 3).
The relation between iterated summation and iterated integra-
tion will at once occur to the reader.
127. 1. Before going farther let us note some peculiarities of
iterated summation. For simplicity let us restrict ourselves to
double series. Obviously similar 'anomalies will occur in 7n-tuple
series.
150 MULTIPLE SERIES
A = aw + «01 + a02 + ••• + aio + an + a
be a double series. The rath row forms a series
R(m) = am,Q + aml+ ...= fa,,,;'
»=o
and the wth column, the series
I Mt'Tl
72=
m=0
OO 00 00
tf= 2tf-> = 2 2a
«=0 »=0 "'=0
are the series formed by summing by rows and column*, respec-
tively.
2. A double series may converge although every row and every
column is divergent.
This is illustrated by the series considered in 121, 2. For A
is convergent while 2o^, 2«rjt are divergent, since their terms are
not evanescent.
3. A double series A may be divergent although the series R ob-
tained by summing A by rows or the series C obtained by summing
by columns is convergent.
Forlet Ars=Q if r or 8 = 0
= - if r, s > 0.
r -f «
Obviously by I, 318, lim Ars does not exist and A = 2ar, is di-
vergent.
On the other hand,
R = lim lim ATS = 0,
(7= lim \i
t=xo r=oo
Thus both R and C are convergent.
ITERATED SUMMATION OF MULTIPLE SERIES 151
4. In the last example R and C converged but their sums were
different. We now show :
A double series may diverge although both R and C converge and
have the same sum.
For let Artt = 0 if r or « = 0
r% if r, «>0.
Then by I, 319, lim Ari does not exist and A is divergent. On
the other hand, 72 = lim lim X = 0,
(7= lim Iim4r.= 0.
Then R and S both converge and have the same sum.
128. We consider now some of the cases in which iterated sum-
mation is permissible.
00
Let A = 2a, ..., be convergent. Let i'r t'2, ••• i'm be any permutation
of the indices iv *2, ••• im. If all the m — l-tuple series
2 2 ••• 2 «.. .
are convergent, A = ,2 ••• ,2 ,«,,...,„•
This follows at once from I, 324. For simplicity the theorem
is there stated only for two variables ; but obviously the demon-
stration applies to any number of variables.
129. 1. Let f^xl---xm) be a limited monotone function. Let the
point a= (a1---aro) be finite or infinite. When f is limited, all the
s-tuple iterated limits jjm ... \{mf n
*il=0i, •ru=ai»
exist. When s = TW, these limits equal
lim/(*j •••*„,)• (2
x=a
In these limits we suppose x<a.
152 MULTIPLE SERIES
For if /is limited, Hm/ ^ ^^ (3
exists by 122, 1. Moreover 3) is a monotone function of the re-
maining m — 1 variables.
Hence similarly Hm Um f
Ti«_l=ai,_t zi,=ai,
exists and is a monotone function of the remaining m — 2 vari-
ables, etc. The rest of the theorem follows as in I, 324.
2. As a corollary we have
Let Abe a nonsnegative term m-tuple series. If A or any one of
its m-tuple iterated series is convergent, A and all the ml iterated
m-tuple series are convergent and have the same sum. If one of these
series is divergent, they all are.
3. Let a be a non-negative term m-tuple series. Let s<m. All
the s-tuple iterated series of A are convergent if A is, and if one of
these iterated series is divergent, so is A.
v
130. 1. Let A = 2a(i...tm be absolutely convergent. Then all its
s-tuple iterated series s=}, 2 ••• m, converge absolutely and its
m-tuple iterated series all = A.
For as usual let «li...tm= | alt...lm|. Since A = Adj A is con-
vergent, all the 8-tuple iterated series of A are convergent.
30 3C
Thus sl = 2 «,,....„ is convergent since 2 «H. . ,m = <rr Moreover
i,=0 ' t,=0
I 8i I < °V Similarly 2 2atl...l|B = 2^ is convergent since
it=0 it=0 ij
2 S« .... = Scrj is convergent; etc. Thus every s-tuple iter-
<t=0 'i=<> i,
ated series of A is absolutely convergent. The rest follows now
by 128.
2. Let A = 2att...,m. If one of the m-tuple iterated series B
formed from the adjoint A of A is convergent, A is absolutely con-
vergent.
Follows from 129, 2.
3. The following example may serve to guard the reader against
a possible error.
ITERATED SUMMATION OF MULTIPLE SERIES 153
Consider the series
Here
and R = e" + e*> + e*> +
This is a geometric series and converges absolutely for a < 0.
Thus one of the double iterated series of A is absolutely conver-
gent. We cannot, however, infer from this that A is convergent,
for the theorem of 2 requires that one of the iterated series formed
from the adjoint of A should converge. Now both those series
are divergent. The series A is divergent, f or | an \ = oo , as
r, s = oo .
131. 1. Up to the present the series
have been extended only over non-negative lattice points. This
restriction was imposed only for convenience ; we show now how
it may be removed. Consider the signs of the coordinates of a
point x— (xv ••• zm). Since each coordinate can have two signs,
there are 2m combinations of signs. The set of points x whose-
coordinates belong to a given one of these combinations form a
quadrant for m = 2, an octant for ra = 3, and a 2m-tant or polyant
in 9?m. The polyant consisting of the points all of whose coordi-
nates are > 0 may be called the first or principal polyant.
Let us suppose now that the indices i in 1) run over one or more
polyants. Let R^ be a rectangular cell, the coordinates of each of
its vertices being each numerically < X. Let A^ denote the terms
of A lying in R^ Then I is the limit of A^ for X = oo, if for each
e > 0 there exists a X0 such that
|A-^J<e X>X0. (2
154 MULTIPLE SERIES
If lim A*. (3
A=«
exists, we say A is convergent, otherwise A is divergent. In a
similar manner the other terms employed in multiple series may
be extended to the present case. The rectangular cell R^a which
figures in the above definition may without loss of generality be
replaced by the cube
K|<XO ••• \xm\<\0.
Moreover the condition necessary and sufficient for the exist-
ence of the limit 3) is that
\Ai,-Ali\<e \, p > \0.
132. The properties of series lying in the principal polyant
may be readily extended to series lying in several polyants. For
the convenience of the reader we bring the following together,
omitting the proof when it follows along the same lines as before.
1. For A to converge it is necessary and sufficient that
lim X = 0.
2. A series whose adjoint converges is convergent.
3. Any deleted series B of an absolutely convergent series A is
absolutely convergent and
| B | < Adj A.
4. If A = 2«,j ... ln is convergent, so is B = 2&<ztl ... tn and A = kB.
5. The non-negative term series A is convergent if A^ is limited,
\ = <x>.
6. If the associate simple series 21 of an m-tuple series A converges,
A is convergent. Moreover if 21 is absolutely convergent, so is A.
Finally if A converges absolutely, so does 21.
7. Absolutely convergent series are commutative and conversely.
8. Let f(x1 •'•zm)>_Q be a monotone decreasing function of the
distance of x from the origin.
Let „
ITERATED SUMMATION OF MULTIPLE SERIES 155
Thc" A = 2
converges or diverges with
the integration extended over all space containing terms of A.
133. 1. Let B, (7, D ••• denote the series formed of the terms of A
//////// in the different polyants. For A to converge it is sufficient
although not necessary that B, C, ••• converge. When they do,
For if _SA, (7A ••• denote the terms of 5, C ••• which lie in a
rectangular cell .BA,
A = #A+CA + ~.
Passing to the limit we get 1).
That A may converge when B, <?, ••• do not is shown by the
following example. Let all the terms of A = 2ati...,m vanish ex-
cept those lying next to the coordinate axes. Let these have the
value +1 if tr t2--- tm>0 and let two a's lying on opposite sides
of the coordinate planes have the same numerical value but opposite
signs. Obviously, A^ = 0, hence A is convergent. On the other
hand, every J5, C ••• is divergent.
2. Thus when B, C ••• converge, the study of the given series
A may be referred to series whose terms lie in a single polyant.
But obviously the theory of such series is identical with that of
the series lying in the first polyant.
3. The preceding property enables us at once to extend the
theorems of 129, 130 to series lying in more than one polyant.
The iterated series will now be made up, in general of two-way
simple series.
CHAPTER V
SERIES OF FUNCTIONS
134. 1. Let i = (tj, i2 ••' ip) run over an infinite lattice system g.
Let the one-valued functions
A ... ipOi • • • O = /O) = /
be defined over a domain 21, finite or infinite. If the jt?-tuple series
extended over the lattice system 8 is convergent, it defines a one-
valued function F(xl • • • xm~) over 21. We propose to study the
properties of this function with reference to continuity, differen-
tiation and integration.
2. Here, as in so many parts of the theory of functions depend-
ing on changing the order of an iterated limit, uniform convergence
is fundamental.
We shall therefore take this opportunity to develop some of its
properties in an entirely general manner so that they will apply
not only to infinite series, but to infinite products, multiple inte-
grals, etc.
3. In accordance with the definition of I, 325 we say the series
1) is uniformly convergent in 21 when F^ converges uniformly to its
limit F. Or in other words when for each e>0 there exists a X
such that ,,-, rr i ^ -^ ^
I F — F^ \ < e p > X,
for any x in 21. Here, as in 117, F^ denotes the terms of 1) lying
in the rectangular cell R^, etc.
As an immediate consequence of this definition we have :
Let 1) converge in 21. For it to converge uniformly in 21 it is
necessary and sufficient that \ FK \ is uniformly evanescent in 21, or in
other words that for each e > 0, there exists a X such that \FIL\^e for
any x in 21, and p > X.
166
GENERAL THEORY 157
135. 1. Let
Km/Oi "•x* «i"-<») = </>Oi •"*.»)
t — T
in 91. Here SI, r may be finite or infinite. If there exists an
i} > 0 such that / = $ uniformly in F^(a), a finite or infinite, we
shall say / converges uniformly at a; if there exists no 17 <0, we
say / does not converge uniformly at a.
2. Let now a range over 31. Let 33 denote the points of SI at
which no 77 exists or those points, they may lie in SI or not, in
whose vicinity the minimum of 17 is 0. Let D denote a cubical
division of space of norm d. Let 33/> denote as usual the cells of
D containing points of 33. Let &D denote the points of 81 not in
33^. Then / = <£ uniformly in &D however small d is taken, but
then fixed. The converse is obviously true.
3. Iff converges uniformly in 21, and if moreover it converges at a
finite number of other points 33, it converges uniformly in 21 + 33.
For if/= <f> uniformly in 21,
|/-0|<e x in 21, tin F,O*(T).
Then also at each point b, of 33,
\f- <£!<€ x=b. «inFi/(T).
If now B < S0, 8r S2 ••• these relations hold for any x in 21 + 33
and any t in V6*(r).
4. Let /(#! ••• xm, t1 ••• £„) = <f> (a^ ••• xm~) uniformly in 21. Let
fbe limited in 21 for each t in Fa*(r). Then <f> is limited in 21-
For £=/(*, 0+e' !«'!<« C1
for any x in 21 and t in FV(T). Let us therefore fix t. The
relation 1) shows that <f> is limited in 21.
5. If 2 |/tl ... ^(rcj ;•• a;w) | converges uniformly in 2(, so does 2/tl ... v
For any remainder of a series is numerically < than the corre-
sponding remainder of the adjoint series.
6. Let the «-tuple series
158 SERIES OF FUNCTIONS
converge uniformly in 51. Then for each e > 0 there exists a X
such that i -r, |
I-*/*"] < e (1
for any Rv > R,,. > R^. When s = 1, these rectangular cells re-
duce to intervals, and thus we have in particular
| /„(#! ••• #m) | < e for any n > n'.
When « > 1 we cannot infer from 1) that
for any i lying outside the above mentioned cell R\.
A similar difference between simple and multiple series was
mentioned in 121, 2.
However if ft > 0 in 51, the relation does hold. Cf. 121, 3.
136. 1. Let f (#! • • • xm , tl ••• tn~) be defined for each x in 51, and t
in £. Let
fn t sy* . • • 'V i ?wVl
TV 1 m) " ***
T finite or infinite. The convergence is uniform if for any x in 51
while limi/r=0.
For taking e > 0 at pleasure there exists an 77 > 0 such that
| i/r | < e , (in V,,* (T).
But then if S< 77,
for any t in Fa*(r) and any a; in 51.
Example.
1 • Sill tf/ Ol II if f\ t • CW x r\ x
lim f- = 0 = d>, in 51 = (0, QO).
H l + a;tan2«/
2
Is the convergence uniform ?
Let
7T
then u = 0, as y =
2
GENERAL THEORY 159
Then
sin x cos u
+X COt2 M
sin x cos u sin2 u \
sin3 w + x cos3 M j
sin x
X COS2 U
Hence the convergence is uniform in SI.
2. As a corollary we have
Weierstrass"1 Test. For each point in SI, let |/lt...tl,|<
*en«* S/,,.. .,„(#! •••£,„) i* uniformly convergent in 31 */
is convergent.
Example 1.
Here
and ^ is uniformly convergent in 2J since
2L
£4 2n
is convergent.
Example 2.
F(x) = 2an sin
is uniformly convergent for ( — 00, oo) if
*-W
is convergent.
137. 1. 7%e power series P = '2ami..,mpx™t ••• x%p converges
uniformly in any rectangle R lying within its rectangle of con->
vergence.
For let b = (5r ••• 6P) be that vertex of R lying in the principal
poly ant. Then P is absolutely convergent at 6, i.e.
is convergent. Let now x be any point of R. Then each term in
2< ...*,„#"-£"
is < than the corresponding term in 1).
160 SERIES OF FUNCTIONS
2. If the power series P = a0 4- a^x + a^c2 + ••• converges at an
end point of its interval of convergence, it converges uniformly at
this point.
Suppose P con verges .at the end point x = R > 0. Then
\am+1Rm+l + - + anRn\<e
however large n is taken. But for 0 < x < R
Jt
<e by Abel's identity, 83, l.
Thus the convergence is uniform at x — R. In a similar
manner we may treat x = — R.
3. Let/B(a;1 ••• zm~), n = 1, 2 ••• be defined over a set 21. If each
\fn \ <some constant cn in 21, /„ is limited in 21. If moreover the
cn are all < some constant (7, we say the fn(x) are uniformly
limited in 21. In general if each function in a set of functions
\f | defined over at point set 21 satisfy the relation
\f | < a fixed constant C, x in 21,
we say the/'s are uniformly limited in 2t.
The series F= ^gnhn is uniformly convergent in 21, if G =gl +g2 + •••
is uniformly convergent in 21, while 2 1 hn+1 — hn \ and \ hn \ are
uniformly limited in 21.
This follows at once from Abel's identity as in "83, 2.
4. The series F=2gnhn is uniformly convergent in 21, if in 21,
2 | hn+l — hn | is uniformly convergent, hn is uniformly evanescent,
and the Grn uniformly limited.
Follows from Abel's identity, 83, 1.
5. The series F= ^gnhn is uniformly convergent in 2t if
G- = g1+ gz+ ••- is uniformly convergent in 21 while hr A2 ••• are
uniformly limited in 21 and \hn\ is a monotone sequence for each
point of 21-
For by 83, l, , ,., i
GENERAL THEORY Kll
6. The series F = 2gnhn is uniformly convergent in 31 if Gl = g^
#2 = gi + gT ••• are uniformly limited in 31 and if hr hv ••• not only
form a monotone decreasing sequence for x in 31 but also are uni-
formly evanescent.
For by 83, l, . „ , , , , a
\Jfrn. \ <\ ^n-t-i fcr.
n, p
Example. Let J. = al + az -f ••• be convergent. Let bv
be a limited monotone sequence. Then
converges uniformly in any interval 31 which does not contain a
point of I .
[ba )
For obviously the numbers
form a monotone sequence at each point of 31. We now apply 5.
7. As an application of these theorems we have, using the re-
sults of 84,
The series 0
cos 2x + •••
0 1
converges uniformly in any complete interval not containing one of
the points ± 2 mtr provided 2 | an+l — an \ is convergent and an = 0,
and hence in particular if ax > a2 >_ ••• = 0.
8. The series
«0 — a1 cos x+ az cos 2x— •••
converges uniformly in any complete interval not containing one of
the points ± (2 m — I)TT provided 2 | an+1 -f an \ is convergent and
an = 0, and hence in particular if al > a.2 > • • • =0.
9. The series . . 0 . 0
a1 sin x 4- aa sin 2 x + a3 sm 3 x + • • •
converges uniformly in any complete interval not containing one of
the points ± 2 TTITT provided 2 | an+l — an \ is convergent and an = 0,
and hence in particular if al >_ aa >^ ••• =0.
162 SERIES OF FUNCTIONS
10. The series . . 0 o • 0
al sin x — a2sm 2 a; + a3 sin 3 x — •••
converges uniformly in any complete interval not containing one of
the points ±(2m — I)TT provided £ | an+l+an \ is convergent and
an = 0, and hence in particular if a1 >_ a2 >. ••• =0.
138. 1. Let F_^f (
f — A/II — i,\xl "' Xm)
be uniformly convergent in 21. Let A, B be two constants and
= ^
18 uniformly convergent in 21.
For.then
But F being uniformly convergent,
JJU<*
2.
^=S/tt...ls(^-^) /t>0
converge uniformly in 31.
z« uniformly convergent in 21. Moreover if F is limited in 21,
z« i.
i > 0 in 21, hence
for any t outside some rectangular cell R\.
Thus for such i
^/l in 21.
139. 1. Preserving the notation of 136, let g^ g^, ••• gm be chosen
such that if we set
; = (o;1 ••• a:TO) Zie8 in 31 «8 ^ = (^ ••• £n) = r. 7f f=(f> uni-
formly in 21,
lira A = lira {/(^ ... <jrm, «, ... «.)- *(*i "• Ol = 0-
<— T
GENERAL THEORY !•;:{
For if /= <j> uniformly in ?l,
€>0, S>0 |/_^|<€
for any x in 31 and any t in F«*(T), 8 independent of x.
But then | A | < e t in F8*(r).
2. As a corollary we have :
Let ax, «2, ... = a. ie< .F = £/, fo uniformly convergent at a.
^n 15,00= 0.
140. Example 1.
T /. v sin u sin 2 u (2for:r=0,
lim/=hm— =<f>(x»=J
M=o u=* sin2 M -|- a; cos^ M [ 0 for x ^= 0.
The convergence is not uniform at x = 0. For
/._ 2cosM
1 + x cot2 w
Hence if we set x = uz
limf= 1, since w2 cot2 M= 1.
«=o
Thus on this assumption
Example 2. F= 1 —x + x(\ — x)+x*(\ - x~)+x*(l -x)-\ ----
I I '* I I ' -f~ —~+ s~4 N.
F= 2(1 — a;) • xn.
o
Hence F is uniformly convergent in any (— r, r), 0 < r< 1, by
136, 2.
We can see this directly. For
Hence ^ is convergent for -l<a;<l, and then
except at x = 1 where ^=0.
Thus | Fn (x) | = | x |n, except at x = 1.
But we can choose m so large that r1" < e.
Then | Fm(x) | < e for any a; in (— r, r).
1(>4 SERIES OF FUNCTIONS
We show now that F does not converge uniformly at x = 1 .
For let
Then
and F does not converge uniformly at x = 1, by 139, 2.
Example 3. «, o
Here -, *
•fn = rr^2~i+(w+
and F is telescopic. Hence
1 + x2 1+O + 1>2
1
~ 1 4. xl ' X
Thus
Let us take
H
Vw -+• 1
Then
and F is not uniformly convergent at x=0. It is, however, in
(—00, GO) except at this point. For let us take x at pleasure
such, however, that | x \ > 8. Then
We now apply 136, 1.
Example 4.
.
22
I)2*2)
GENERAL THKOKY 165
Here
and F is telescopic. Hence
F - x O
-*• M ~ ~ -
= - — in 91 = (-72,72).
1 4- x1
The convergence is not uniform at x — 0.
For set an = . Then
n 4- 1
I Fn(ati) | = .7, does not = 0.
It is, however, uniformly convergent in SI except at 0. For
(n + 1 )x
O
if
< e for n > some m.
141. Let us suppose that the series F converges absolutely and
uniformly in SI. Let us rearrange F, obtaining the series G-.
Since F is absolutely convergent, so is G- and F = G-. We can-
not, however, state that G- is uniformly convergent in 81, as Bocher
has shown.
Example. -, _ .
x
Here F,n = 0.
Hence F is uniformly convergent in 91 =.(0» !)•
Let t
G = -- =^ 1 1 - 1 -f 2: -I- a^ - ar + ^ -I- T4 - r2 + ••• (
x
Then
a;
-f a-2"-1-
166 SERIES OF FUNCTIONS
Let
Then
as n — oo.
e\ e
Hence Q- does not converge uniformly at x = 1.
142. 1. Let /== <£ uniformly in a finite set of aggregates 2^,
2I2, ••• 2lp. Then f converges uniformly in their union (2115 ••• 2lp).
For by definition
6>0,S,>0,|/-<£i<e a: in «., *inra/(T). (1
Since there are only jt> aggregates, the minimum 8 of Sj, ••• 8p
is > 0. Then 1) holds if we replace Ss by 8.
2. The preceding theorem may not be true when the number
of aggregates 2li» 212 ••• is infinite. For consider as an example
which converges uniformly in 51 = (0, 1) except at x= 1. Let
cvf f & ~"~ A « i -in
«.*(- — , - — r « = 1, 2, ... oo.
V 8 • + I/
Then .F is uniformly convergent in each 31,, but is not in their
union, which is 21.
3. Letf= </>, g = i/r uniformly in 21.
TAew /± ^ = </> ± i/r uniformly.
If <^>, -^ remain limited in 21, ,
fg = 4>tfr uniformly. (1
7f moreover | ^ | > sorae positive number in 21,
•£ = ^- uniformly. (2
# -f
The demonstration follows along the lines of I, 49, 50, 51.
GENERAL THEORY 167
4. To show that 1), 2) may be false if ^>, ^ are not limited.
Let
f=g = ±+t, 9l = (0*, 1), r = 0.
X
Then <f> = i/r = and the convergence is uniform.
x
But
Let x = t. Then A = 2 as t = 0, and ^ does not =
uniformly.
Again, let -,
f=~j. + t> 9 = x + t,
the rest being as before.
Then
But setting a; =
A| =
= — QO as t = 0
and •- does not converge uniformly to 5- -
# ^
143. 1. As an extension of I, 317, 2 we have :
uniformly in 91.
••• *„) = 17,.
Let y 3-1) in F*(T).
••• xm, yj ••• yp) = ^(zj ... zm), uniformly.
t=T
The demonstration is entirely analogous to that of I, 292.
' et \imu{x1».xm,tl--tn)=vl(xl-'Xm) , ( = 1,2,
uniformly in 91. -Z/e£ <^« points
168 SERIES OF FUNCTIONS
form a limited set 33. Let F(u^ ••• wp) be continuous in a complete
set containing 33. Then
t=r
uniformly in 21.
For F, being continuous in the complete set containing 33, is
uniformly continuous. Hence for a given e > 0 there exists a
fixed a > 0, such that
| F(u) — F(v} | < e u in V0(v) , v in 33.
But as wt = vt uniformly there exists a fixed 8 > 0 such that
\ul — vl\<e' , x in 21 , £ in F5*(r).
Thus if e' is sufficiently small, u=(u^ ••• wp) lies in
when x is in 21 and t in F"5*(r).
144. 1. ->e i. ^.^
hm/(a:1 - arw, ^ - fn) =
uniformly in 21. ,. ,
' lira g7 =
<=T
uniformly in ty., if <j> is limited.
This is a corollary of 143, 2.
uniformly in 21. -Let 0 be greater than some positive constant in 21-
Then Iimlog/=log4>,
t=r
uniformly in 2t, (/" <f> remains limited in 21.
Also a corollary of 143, 2.
3. Letf = <f> and g = ty uniformly, as t = T.
, T/T 6e limited in 21, awe? </> > some positive number. Then
fa = <£>* uniformly in 21. (1
fo = e°108'. - (2
GENERAL THEORY 169
But by 2), log/=log<£ uniformly in SI; and by 142, 3
log/ = i/r log </>, uniformly in 31. Hence 2) gives 1) by 1.
145. 1. The definition of uniform convergence may be given a
slightly different form which is sometimes useful. The function
is a function of two sets of variables x and t, one ranging in an 9tOT
the other in an $Rn.
Let us set now w = (^x1 ••• xm, t1 ••• £n) and consider w as a point in
m + p way space.
As x ranges over 31 and t over F{*(T)? let w range over $B4.
Then ,. ,.
\imf=<t>
* = T
uniformly in 31 when and only when
e>0, S>0 |/_<£|<€ tv in <Ba, S fixed.
By means of this second definition we obtain at once the follow-
ing theorem:
2. Instead of the variables x1 ••• xm, t^ — tn let us introduce the
variables yl — ym, u^ — un so that as tv ranges over 33a,
ranges over (5a, Mg correspondence between 53s, Sj JezVz^ uniform.
Thenf= <j> uniformly in 2( wAe/i an<£ ow/y w/ien-
e>0, a>0 |/-<f>|<e , zinQi, 8 fixed.
Y) H**
3. Example. Let /(a;, n)=
—
where ; X>0.
Then </>(2;)=lim/(a:, w) = 0 , in 31 = (0, oo).
n=eo
Let us investigate whether the convergence is uniform at the
point x in 31-
First let x > 0. If 0 <a<x <6, we have
170 SERIES OF FUNCTIONS
As the term on the right = 0 as n = oo , we see/=<£ uniformly
in (a, 5).
When, however, a = 0, or b = oo , this reasoning does not hold.
In this case we set _ '^^
which gives j /f
— -
As the point (#, w) ranges over £ defined by
z>0 , %>1,
the point (£, w) ranges over a field % defined by
t>l , w>l,
and the correspondence between £ and £ is uniform. Here
The relation 2) shows that when a: > 0, £ =^= oo asw^oo; also
when a; = 0, t = 1 for any n. Thus the convergence at x = 0 is
uniform when
!>-• (3
£ /*
The convergence is not uniform at x = 0 when 3) is not satisfied.
For take -.
*-•—- , n=l, 2, ...
^A/a
For these values of a; ^
which does not = 0 as n = oo .
146. 1. {Moore, Osgood.*) Let
.-. a;m, ^ ••• tj = ^(^ ••• arm)
=T
uniformly in St. ig^ a be a limiting point of §1
... a;
x=a
for each t in Fj*(r). Then
4>=lim<^(2;1...a;ro) , ¥
ar=a
are equal. Here a, T are /w&e or infinite.
GENERAL THEORY 171
We first show 4> exists. To this end we show that
e>0 , S>0 , | <K*') - <K*") I < « a/, a/' in F,»(a). (1
Now since /(a:, f) converges uniformly, there exists an »;>0
sucli that for any a:', a/' in ?l
</>(*')= /(a;', 0-fe' «iur/(T) (2
On the other hand, since/= ty there exists a 8>0 such that
/(a:', 0 = yfr(t) + e"' (4
for any a;', x" in JV(a) ; t fixed.
From 2), 3), 4), 5) we have at once 1). Having established
the existence of 4>, we show now that 4> = W. For since / con-
verges uniformly to <£, we have
I/O, 0 - <£<» | < I x in 21 , t in K/(T). (6
Since /= ^, we have
| /(a;, <) — ^(0 I <s * ^n P«'*(a) > * fixed in F,,*(T). (7
3
Since ^> = <J>,
i-4>| <§ a: in K«»»(a). (8
Thus 7), 8) hold simultaneously for B < 8', 8".
Hence
or lim
t=T
2. Thus under the conditions of 1)
lim lim / = lim lim/;
as— a <— T <— T a»—tt •
in other words, we may interchange the order of passing to the
limit.
172 SERIES OF FUNCTIONS
3. The theorem in 1 obviously holds when we replace the un-
restricted limits, by limits which are subjected to some condition ;
e.g. the variables are to approach their limits along some curve.
4. As a corollary we have :
Let F = 2/,(^i • • • Xm) be uniformly convergent in 21, of which x = a
is a limiting point. Let limfs = ls, and set L = 2Zg. Then
lim F = L ; a, finite or infinite,
or in other words
lim £/„ = 2 lim fB.
Example 1.
converges uniformly in 21 = (0, oo) as we saw 136, 2, Ex. 1. Here
1
lim/» = — = ?„,
and i = 2ZB=5)— =1.
Hence lim F(x)= 1.
85 = 00
Also R lim /„ = 0 ;
hence R lim F(x)=0.
3! = 0
Example 2.
converges uniformly in any interval finite or infinite, excluding
x = 0, where F is not defined. For
\fn\< — ,
and . i i V !_ —
^ n \
Hence lim F(x~) = e.
«_n
QENBRAL THKORY 17:!
Example 3.
for x =jfc 0
= 0 fora:=0.
Here
while Slim /„(*) = 20 = 0.
a>-o
Thus here Hm 2^ Slim
ir-O ai-0
But F does not converge uniformly at x = 0. On the other
hand, it does converge uniformly at x= ± oo.
T(a:) = 0 , lim/n(aO=0,
as— ±»
2/n(X> = 21im/n(V),
fl5—±» a- = J;»
as the theorem requires.
Example 4. Wf \—^ (nx* Cn
"***
which converges about x = 0 but not uniformly.
However, v ^*s \ vv ^•/'N n
hm 2/fl(a;) = 2 hm/n(x) = 0.
Thus the uniform convergence is not a necessary condition.
147. 1. Let lira /(X •••#„,, ^ ••• O = ^(zj ••• a-m) uniformly at
t=r
x = a. Let /(#, 0 i« continuous at x= a for each t in F"«*(r).
Then <f> is continuous at a.
This is a corollary of the Moore-Osgood theorem.
For by 146, l
lira lim/(a + A, e) = lira lim/(a + A, t).
*-0 t^r «-T **o
lim </>(a + A)
*=o
174 SERIES OF FUNCTIONS
A direct proof may be given as follows :
/(*, 0 = <K*) + *' | e' | < e, a: in
<K*0 -</>(*") =/<X, 0 -/(*". 0
But /*", -/^ <« , ^ *'-
2. .Le£ JF= ^f,l...Sp(xl ••• xm} be uniformly convergent at x = a,
Let each fSl...sp be continuous at a. Then F(xl ••• xm) is continuous
at x = a.
Follows at once from 1).
3. In Ex. 3 of 140 we saw that
is discontinuous at x = 0 and does not converge uniformly there.
In Ex. 4 of 140 we saw that
does not converge uniformly at x = 0 and yet is continuous there.
We have thus the result : The condition of uniform convergence in
1, is sufficient but not necessary.
Finally, let us note that
is a series which is not uniformly convergent at x = 0, although
F(x) is continuous at this point.
4. Let each term of F= '2ftl...llp(xl ••• #„,) be continuous at x = a
while F itself is discontinuous at a. Then F is not uniformly
convergent.
For if it were, F would be continuous at a, by 2.
Remark. This theorem sometimes enables us to see at once
that a given series is not uniformly convergent. Thus 140,
Exs. 2, 3.
GENERAL THEORY 175
5. The power series P= 2,atl...,m x\* ••• x'~ is continuous at any
i/ith'r jxiiiif of its rectangular cell of convergence.
For we saw P converges uniformly at this point.
6. The power series P = a0 + a^x + a^-3 -|- ... it a continuous
function of x in its interval of convergence.
For we saw P converges uniformly in this interval. In par-
ticular we note that if P converges at an end point x=e of its
interval of convergence, P is continuous at e.
This fact enables us to prove the theorem on multiplication of
two series which we stated 112, 4, viz. :
148. Let A = aQ + ai + a^+ ... , s = l>t + l>l + l>i+.~
O = a0b0 + (a^j + afio) + (a0&2 + albl + a,,60) + ...
converge. Then AB = C.
For consider the auxiliary series
Fx = a + a- +
Since -4, J5, C converge, F, (r, H converge for x=\, and hence
absolutely for j x \ < 1. But for all | x \ < 1,
Thus x= Zlim F(x . ilim
x=\ x=l x=l
C=A-B.
149. 1. We have seen that we cannot say that /= <£ uniformly
although f and <f> ;ire continuous. There is, however, an impor-
tant case noted by Dini.
Let f(x^ — xm, t^ .•• £n) be a function of two sets of variables
such that x ranges over $1, and t over a set having r as limiting
point, T finite or ideal. Let
lim/Cr, 0= <K*0 i'1^-
< = T
Then we can set f, . , , , , .
/(a;, 0=0(«)+>/r(a;, 0-
176 SERIES OF FUNCTIONS
Suppose now | ty(x, t')\<\ ty(x, 0 for any t' in the rectangu-
lar cell one of whose vertices is t and whose center is r. We say
then that the convergence of f to <f> is steady or monotone at x.
If for each x in 21, there exists a rectangular cell such that the
above inequality holds, we say the convergence is monotone or
steady in 21.
The modification in this definition for the case that T is an ideal
point is obvious. See I, 814, 315.
2. We may now state Dims theorem.
Let f(x± "- xm, £j ••• £7t) = </>(#! ••• xm) steadily in the limited com-
plete field 21 as t = r; r finite or ideal. Let f and <f> be continuous
functions of x in 21. Then f converges uniformly to <f> in 21.
For let # be a given point in 21, and
, 0-
We may take t' so near r that | ty(x, O I < T*
o
Let x1 be a point in F,(a;). Then
/C^.-O—fC^+tC^O-
As fis continuous in x,
I/WO -/(**>!•< J:
Similarly,
|*(aO-*COI<|-'
Thus |^(a/,O|<e a/inr,(aO.
Hence | T/r(V, t) I < e for any a;' in F,,O)
and for any ^ in the rectangular cell determined by t'.
As corollaries we have :
3. Let Q- = 2 |/tl... igO^i ••• Xm) \ converge in the limited complete
domain 21. Let Q- and each /t be continuous in 21- Then G- and
a fortiori F= 2/'ti...tj converge uniformly in 21, furthermore f^...^^ 0
uniformly in 21.
4. _Le£ Q-= 2 l/ij.-.t.C^i "• ^m) | converge in the limited complete
domain 21, having a as limiting point. Let # and each /t 60 <?0
GENERAL THEORY 177
tini/ous at a. Then G and a fortiori F = 2/tl...t, converge uniformly
at a.
5. Let Cr = 2 j/n-.X^i "• *•») | converge in the limited complete
<{<>imtin 31, having a as limiting point. Let lim G- and each lim/t
exist. Moreover, let
Then Q- is uniformly convergent at a.
For if in 4 the function had values assigned them at x = a dif-
ferent from their limits, we could redefine them so that they are
continuous at a.
150. 1. Let ]imf(xl"-xmitl'"tn~) = <t>('xl--'Xm) uniformly in
<=T
the limited field 31. Let <j> be limited in 21- Then
lim I /= I <£ = j lim/.
For let /= <#> + ^.
Since /= <£ uniformly 1^1 < e
for any t in some F*(T) and for any x in 21.
Thus ....
<e2l.
Remark. Instead of supposing ^> to be limited we may suppose
that /(#, t) is limited in 31 for each t near r.
2. As corollary we have
Let lim/O^ ••• xm, ft ••• fn) = ^(^ ••• XTO) uniformly in the limited
field 31. ie£/ ie limited and integrable in 31 /or eacA f m F«*(T).
i« integrable in 31
lim
im f/= f<*>= flim/.
/-T ^» ^a ^a '-T
3. From 1, 2, we have at once:
Let F='2flt...l,(xl'"Xm) be uniformly convergent in the limited
field 21. Let each /,,...». ^ limited and integrable in 31. Then F is
integrable and
178 SERIES OF FUNCTIONS
Jfthefti...lt are not integrable, we have
Example. xr_
"
does not converge uniformly at x= 0. Cf. 140, Ex. 3.
Here F =1- 1
1 + nx2
and -p, , _ fl for rr^O,
= JO fora; = 0.
Hence f1^,
I Fdx = l,
»/o
1 ^x
1 /*!
JWi"1-J.l
_ ^ _ arctg Vn ^ -.
Vw
Thus we can integrate jP termwise although F does not converge
uniformly in (0, 1).
151. That uniform convergence of the series
with integrable terms, in the interval 51 = (a < b~) is a sufficient
condition for the validity of the relation
X6 (*b S*b
Fdx= I f^x+ I fzdx+
*S a */a
is well illustrated graphically, as Osgood has shown.*
Since 1) converges uniformly in ?l by hypothesis, we have
JU*) = -*W - ^n(^) (2
and
| J^ (a:)|<€ w>m (3
for any x in 51.
* Bulletin Amer. Math. Soc. (2), vol. 3, p. 59.
<;K\I:KAL TIIKOIIY
179
In the figure, the graph of F(x) is drawn heavy. On either
side of it are drawn the curves F— e, F + e giving the shaded
band which we call the e-band.
From 2), 3) we see that the graph of
each JFn, n>m lies in the e-band. The
figure thus shows at once that
f
Jo,
Fdx
and
X6
V.
dx
can differ at most by the area of the
e-band, i.e. by at most
X62edz = 2e(J-
152. 1. Let us consider a case where the convergence is not
uniform, as
If we plot the curves y = -Fn(V), we observe that they flatten
out more and more as n = oo, and approach the a;-axis except
near the origin, where
they have peaks which
increase indefinitely in
height. The curves
J?n(x), n>m, and m suf-
ficiently large, lie within
an e-band about their
limit F(JK) in any inter-
val which does not in-
clude the origin.
If the area of the
region under the peaks
could be made small at
pleasure for m sufficiently large, we could obviously integrate
termwise. But this area is here
180
SERIES OF FUNCTIONS
.
dx
as n = oo .
Thus we cannot integrate the F series termwise.
2. As another example in which the convergence is riot uniform
let us consider
1
Here
nx
The convergence of F is uniform in 21 = (0, 1) except at x — 0.
The peaks of the curves Fn(x) all have the height e~l.
Obviously the area of the
region under the peaks can be
made small at pleasure if m is
taken sufficiently large. Thus
in this case we can obviously
integrate termwise, although
the convergence is not uniform
n
We may verify this analytically. For
Cx-n j Cx nx j 1
I Fndx =| —dx=
Jo »/o enx n
3. Finally let us consider
1 + nx .
ne
nzx
Here
The convergence is not uniform at x = 0.
The peaks of Fn(x) are at the points x = ro~*, at which points
GENERAL THEORY 181
Their height thus increases indefinitely with n. But at the
s;u IK; time they become so slender that the area under them = 0.
In fact
f V.OOcfe = P 1- d log (1 + n'
*/o •/• ZW
We can therefore integrate term wise in (0 < a).
153. 1. Let Urn G(x, ^ ... £„) = g(x) in 21 = (a, a + 8), T
<=T
"/• infinite. Let each Gr'^x, f) be continuous in 21 ; also let &x(x, t)
converge to a limit uniformly in 21 as t = r. Then
t=T
and g' (#) is continuous.
For by 150, 2,
lim f*G-'xdx= film G-'^dx.
t=r **a •'a t=r
By I, 538, -,.
Also by hypothesis, i-<r>s *\ n.f *\<
1 1 IT1 ^ f T" i ^7* i 1 ^^ \T\Ct r t t — ~ fj I y i ft i /T i
«=T
Hence x,x
g(x)—g(a)= I .lim 6^(2;, t)c?a;. (2
»/U ^ r
But by 147, l, the integrand is continuous in 21.
Hence by I, 537, the derivative of the right side of 2) is this in-
tegrand. Differentiating 2), we get 1).
2. Let F(x) = 2/ti ... ,.(x) converge in 21 = (a, a 4- £)•
,'(#) fo continuous, also let
^* J*/ X N
2// ... lt(x)
i uniformly convergent in 21.
This is a corollary of 1.
182 SERIES OF FUNCTIONS
3. The more general case that the terms /(i...l(i are functions of
several variables xv ••• xm follows readily from 2.
154. Example,
Here ^ _ _ n*x°-
a function whose uniform convergence was studied, 145, 3. We saw
F(x) = 0 for any x > 0.
Hence J"(V) = 0 x>0.
/^ f \ ^•ff/' \ /^i
rpi ^ a— I
-L nen /-> ,- «. -m/- x otw 2-
hence F'(x)= 2/i(a;), (2
and we may differentiate the series termwise.
If x = 0, and «= 1, X>0 ; 6rn(0)= — WA = — QO as n = QO.
In this case 2) does not hold, and we cannot differentiate the
series termwise.
For z=0, and «>1, 6rn(0)=0, and now 2) holds; we may
therefore differentiate the series termwise. But if we look at the
uniform convergence of the series 1), we see this takes place only
when
H .
« — 1 X
~~
155. 1.
converge in 51 = (a, 5). .For ever?/ x in 51 £<?£ i //(*)! < <7^ « constant.
Let Gr = 2#t converge. Then F(oi) has a derivative in 31 and
^'(aO-S/V,/*); (1
or we mat/ differentiate the given series termwise.
GENERAL THEORY 183
For simplicity let us take « = 1. Let the series on the right of
1) be denoted by $(x). For each x in 31 we show that
am
For
*F _ y/,Q + As) -
~ ~~
where ^n lies in F
Thus D =
But (^ being convergent, 6rm < e/3 if m is taken sufficiently large.
Hence
m+t
On the other hand, since -^ = /„(#) and since there are only m
terms in Dm, we may take B so small that
Thus |D|<e for|Aa:|<8.
2. Example 1. Let
This series converges uniformly in 21 = (0 < ft), since
1
~nl
( — 1 V
fis~\ V *• )
Also s ^ x B+1
n! (! + «•
Hence
n !
As 2<7n converges, we may differentiate 1) term wise. In
general we have
valid in ?l.
184 SERIES OF FUNCTIONS
3. Example 2. The >9 functions.
These are defined by
*! O) = 2 I ( - 1) "?<»+i>2 sin (2 n + 1) TT*
o
= 2 ji sin 772: — 2 q% sin 3 THC -f •••
,V2 (re) = 2 2^»-H>2 cos (2 n + 1) TTX
o
= 2 5! cos TTX + 2 <£? cos 3 TT.E +
oo
,93 (#) = 1 + 2 2#n2 cos 2 wn-a:
= 1 + 2 g- cos 2 THC + 2 94 cos 4 THE +
#0 (2;) = 1 + 2 2 ( - I)n2n2 cos 2
i
= 1 — 2 g- cos 2 Tra; + 2 q* cos 4 TT.T — • • •
Let us take
1*1 <!•
Then these series converge uniformly at every point x. For
let us consider as an example #r The series
is convergent since the ratio of two successive terms is
0(n+l)2
2_ = ^,;
and this = 0. Now each term in >Vj is numerically
< |^|(n+i)2< | q \n\
and hence < the corresponding term in T.
Thus &i(x) is a continuous function of x for every x by 147, 2.
The same is true of the other .v's. These functions were discovered
by Abel, and were used by him to express the elliptic functions.
Let us consider now their derivatives.
Making use of 155, l it is easy to show that we may differentiate
these series termwise. Then
*{ O) = 2 TT! ( - 1)»(2 n + 1) ^B+«2 cos (2 n + 1) TTX
o
= 2 TT (<£* cos TTX — 3 q* cos 3 TTX + • • • ) .
GENERAL THEORY 185
#i (a;) = - 2 TT! (2 n + 1) ^»+i>' sin (2 n + 1) TTX
o
sin TIM; 4- 301 sin 3 -rrx + •••).
»V3' (x) — — 4 7r2 nqn* sin 2 WTTX
i
= — 47r(^sin 2-rrx + 2^ sin
rt0' (x) = - 4 TT£ ( - l)"/^1*1 sin 2 mrz
i
= + 4 TT (<£ sin 2 ?ra; — 2 §4 sin 4 THE + •••).
To show the uniform convergence of these series, let us con-
sider the first and compare it with
S=l + 3|?| + 5|?|* + 7|?|9+ -
The ratio of two successive terms of this series is
2n + 3 kr1>'^2n + 3 , |2n+1
2w+l \q\»* 2«+.l '
which = 0. Thus S is convergent. The rest follows now as
before.
156. 1. Let
h
uniformly for 0 < j h \ < 17, T finite or infinite.
/or eac^ i near T. 2%era ^'(«) «i«8^8 and
This is a corollary of 146, l. Here
g(a + h, Q-ff(a, Q
A
takes the place of /(», <)•
2. From 1 we have as corollary :
186 SERIES OF FUNCTIONS
converge for each x in 31 which has x = a as a proper limiting point.
Letf((a) exist for each t = (tj, — tn). Let
.converge uniformly with respect to h. Then
J"GO- *£-.(•).
CHAPTER VI
POWER SERIES
157. On account of their importance in analysis we shall
devote a separate chapter to power series.
We have seen that without loss of generality we may employ
the series
instead of the formally more general one
a^ + a^x — a)+ a2(a; — a)2 + —
We have seen that if 1) converges for x = c it converges abso-
lutely and uniformly in (—7,7) where 0<7<|e|. Finally,
we saw that if c is an end point of its interval of convergence, it
is unilaterally continuous at this point. The series 1) is, of course,
a continuous function of x at any point within its interval of
convergence.
158. 1. Let P(x) = a0 + a^x + a^x* + • •• converge in the interval
SI = ( — «, a) which may not be complete. The series
Pn = 1 - 2 . ... nan + 2 • 3 • .-• (w + l)an+1z + -
obtained by differentiating each term of P n times is absolutely and
uniformly convergent in 93 = (— /S, $), ft < a, and
For since P converges absolutely for x = &
Let now x lie within S3. Then the adjoint series of P^(x) is
a1 + 2«2f + 3«8f»+...
Now its rwth term
ft \ft
187
188 . POWER SERIES
But the series whose general terra is the last terra of the pre-
ceding inequality is convergent.
2. Let P = a0 + a^x + a2x2 + •••
converge in the interval 51. Then
Q= I Pdx = I aQdx + j| alxdx+ •••
•/« "a. ^«-
where a, x lie in 51. Moreover Q considered as a function of x con
verges uniformly in 51.
For by 137, P is uniformly convergent in (a, x). We may
therefore integrate termwise by 150, 3. To show that Q is uni
formly convergent in 51 we observe that P being uniformly con
vergent in 51 we may set
P = P -\-P
•* — •* m i -*
Pm < o; m> m0, & small at pleasure
Then
where
Qm\ =
P-dx
<o-5l<e
on taking <r sufficiently small.
159. 1. Let us show how the theorems in 2 may be used to
obtain the developments of some of the elementary functions in
power series.
The Logarithmic Series. We have
1 — x
for any a; in 51 = (— 1*-. !*)• Thus
Jz /7^. C* C*
™- = -log (!-*)= I dx+i xdx+
v 1 — X ^o ^0
Hence
log(l-a;)=
This gives also
a; n
GENERAL THEORY 189
The series 1) is also valid for x = 1. For the series is conver-
p 'tit for j- = 1, and log (1 + x) is continuous at x = 1. We now
apply 147, 6.
For x = 1, we get
log2 = l-J + t-J+-
2. The Development of arcsin x. We have by the Binomial
Series i 1 -i o -i o r.
vT^~? 2 2.4 2.4-6
for x in St = (-!*, 1*). Thus
. (2
l - a? 2-3 2-4.5
It is also valid for x = l. For the series on the right is conver-
gent for x — 1. We can thus reason as in 1.
For x = 1 we get
I"3 1-8-5
2 2-3 2.4.5 2.4.6-7
3. The Arctan Series. We have
for * in SI =(-!*, 1*). Thus
Cx dx C* Cx
\ -- — = arctan x = \ dx — \ x*dx + •••
=*-f+f-"\ • (3
valid in 21. The series 3) is valid for x = 1 for the same reason as
in 2.
For x = 1 we get ,r 11 1
4= '3+5~74
4. The Development of e1. We have seen that
*(«)-' +fi + fj + i!-'--
converges for any #. Differentiating, we get
190 POWER SERIES
Hence E'(x) = E(x) (a)
for any x. Let us consider now the function
ex
We have ™ „.
by (a). Thus by I, 400, /(V) is a constant. For x = 0,/(V) = 1
Hence ^2 ^3
e'=1 + f! + ^+l + -
valid for any x.
5. Development of cos #, sin x.
The series 2 4 «
<7=1-fi+fy-gi+-
converges for every a;. Hence, differentiating,
Hence adding, C+ C" = 0. (b)
Let us consider now the function
f(x) = C sin x + C' cos x.
f'(x) = 0 cos a; + 0' sin x — 0' sin z + (7" cos a;
= ((7+ C")cosz
= 0 by (b).
Thus /(#) is a constant. But (7=1, (7' = 0, for x = 0, hence
/O) = o,
or (7 sin a; + C" cosa;= 0. (c)
In a similar manner we may show that
or #0*0= Ocosx— C' sina;= 1. (d)
MINERAL THEORY 191
If we multiply (c) by sin x and (d) by cos x and add, we get
C— cos x. Similarly we get C' — — sin x. Thus finally
_ X_ Xs 2T
"1! 81 61
valid for any x.
160. 1. Let P = amxm + am+lxm+l + ••• , am=£0, converge in
some interval 31 about the origin. Then there exists an interval
93 < 31 in which P does not vanish except at x = 0.
For
Obviously Q converges in SI. It is thus continuous at x = 0.
Since Q ^= 0 at x = 0 it does not vanish in some interval 93 about
x = 0 by I, 351.
In analogy to polynomials, we say P has a zero or root of order
m at the origin.
2. Let P = a0 + a^x + a^ + ••• vanish at the points bv bv ... = 0.
Then all the coefficients an = 0. The points bn are supposed to be
different from each other and from 0.
For by hypothesis -P(6n) = 0. But P being continuous at x = 0,
P(0)=limP(6B).
Hence P(0)=0,
and thus
a0 = 0.
Hence p = xp^
Thus Pl vanishes also at the points bn. We can therefore
reason on Pl as on P and thus al = 0. In this way we may
continue.
3. If P = a0 + alx+>-''
192 POWER SERIES
be equal for the points of an infinite sequence B ivhose limit is x = 0,
then an = 6n, n = 0, 1, 2 «••
For P — Q vanishes at the points B.
Hence ? f\ 1 n
«»-0n = 0 , n = 0, 1, 2--.
4. Obviously if the two series P, ^ are equal for all # in a
little interval about the origin, the coefficients of like powers are
equal; that is _, -012..
ttn — Un , It — • V, J., Li ••
161. 1. Let y = a0 + alx + ayp*+... (1
converge in an interval 51. As x ranges over 51, let y range over
an interval 93. Let
• -^ + Jjf'+V+"- (2
converge in 33. Then 2 may be considered as a function of x de-
fined in 51. We seek to develop 2 in a power series in x.
To this end let us raise 1) to the 2°, 3°, 4° ... powers ; we get
series „ „
y = «2o + v + a22^ + •••
f = «30 + «31^ + a32x2 + " ' (3
which converge absolutely within 51.
We note that amn is a polynomial.
in «0, ••• an with coefficients which are positive integers.
If we put 3) in 2), we get a double series
(4
If we sum by rows, we get a series whose sum is evidently z,
since each row of 2) is a term of z. Summing by columns we get
a series we denote by
Cf=c0 + c?1a; + caa?H ---- (5
GENERAL THEORY 193
*0 = *o + Vo + Vlo + Vao+"'
' * ' (6
We may now state the following theorem, which is a solution of
our problem.
L't the adjoint y-series^
i7 = «u + «1£ + «a|a+- (7
• rgefor | = £0 to the value y = V)Q. Let the adjoint z series
- (8
converge for tj = IJQ. Then the z series 2) can be developed into a
power series in x, viz. the series 5), which is valid for \ x \ < £0.
For in the first place, the series 8) converges for rj^rjQ. We
show now that the positive term series
converges for £ < f0. We observe that 3) differs from Adj D,
at most by its first term. To show the convergence of *£> we
have, raising 7) to successive powers,
We note that Amn is the same function Fm,n of a0, ap ••• an as
amn is of a0, ••• an, i.e.
Am,n = Fm,n(*oi •••<)•
As the coefficients of Fm,a are positive integers,
(9
194 POWER SERIES
Putting these values of 77, T?2, rf ••• in 8), we get
A = (/30 +
Summing by rows we get a convergent series whose sum is £
or 8). But this series converges for £ < f 0 since then 77 < ?70,
and 8) converges by hypothesis for 77 = T/O. Now by 9) each
term of £) is < than the corresponding term in A. Hence £)
converges for £ < £0.
2. As a corollary of 1 we have :
Let o ,
y = a0 + «!^ + flj2* + •••
converge in SI, <m<?
2 = &0 + Jl^ + V + -•
converge for all — oo < y < + oo. Tftew z caw be developed in a
power series in x,
z = CQ + c^x + <?2a^ + • •• = O
for all x within 21.
3. Let the series
y = amxm + am+lxm+l + •••, w>l
converge for some x > 0. 7f £Ae series
z = bQ + 5l2/ + 622/2 + —
converges for some y > 0, i£ caw Ae developed in a power series
z= CQ+ cvx +
convergent for some x > 0.
For we may take £ = | x \ > 0 so small that
-n = «m£m + «m+1f M+1 + -
has a value which falls within the interval of convergence of
4. Another corollary of 1 is the following :
Let o .
y = a0 + a^x + a^x* + ••>
GENERAL
converge in 8= (— A, A). Then y can be developed in a power
series about <»//// /»>int c of 91,
/cA t« vaJuf tn <w interval $ u>Ao«t; center is c and lying within
162. 1. As an application of the theorem 161, l let us take
, = \+JL + £ + £+ ...
1! 2! 3!
v=^_^+^_ ...
1! 3! 5!
As the reader already knows,
z = e" , # = sin a;,
lu-nce 2 considered as a function of x is
z = e'ln *.
We have
0 - i
Summing by columns, we get
2. As a second application let us consider the power series
z = P(y~) = a0 + a1y + a^ + - (1
convergent in the interval ?( = ( — 72, 7£). Let x be a point in §1.
Let us take 17 > 0 so small that y = a: + A lies within 91 for all
.^ao + a,^ -HA)
+ A2)
4- 3.xAa + A8)
196 POWER SERIES
This may be regarded as a double series. By 161, l it may be
summed by columns. Hence
P(x + A) = a0 + a^x + a%xz + a^x8 -f • • •
4- A(«j 4- 2 a^c + 3 asx* + •••)
.4^+...) (2
+
on using 158, 1.
This, as the reader will recognize, is Taylor's development of
the series 1) about the point x. We thus have the theorem :
A power series 1) may be developed in Taylor's series 3) about
any point x within its interval of convergence. It is valid for all h
such that x+ h lies within the interval of convergence ofY).
163. 1. The addition, subtraction, and multiplication of power
series may be effected at once by the principles of 111, 112. We
have if P = a + a x4
converge in a common interval §1 :
P+ # = Oo + Jo) + Oi + 6i>
P - Q = a060 + (a^o + «<)&!>
These are valid within SI, and the first two in 31.
2. Let us now consider the division of P by R. Since
P=p 1
R ' R
the problem of dividing P by 72 is reduced to that of finding the
reciprocal of a power series.
Let 2 - a =jt 0
converge absolutely in R =(— .#, -B).
$ = 0^+ a2z2+ ...
be numerically < \ aQ \ in 58 = ( — r, r) r < R.
GENERAL THEORY 197
Then \/P can be developed in a power series
valid in 33. The first coefficient CQ = — .
«o
For 1111
o
for all x in 58> We have now only to apply 161, 1.
3. Suppose p = v. + ^^ + ... a^ „
To reduce this case to the former, we remark that
P = xmQ
where ^
Q = an + am+1x+ ...
Then 1 __ Jl_ J_
P a:"1 ' Q'
But l has been treated in 2.
164. 1. Although the reasoning in 161 affords us a method of
determining the coefficients in the development of the quotient of
two power series, there is a more expeditious method applicable
also to many other problems, called the method of undetermined
coefficients. It rests on the hypothesis that /(#) can be developed
in a power series in a certain interval about some point, let us say
the origin. Having assured ourselves on this head, we set
f(x) = a0 + a^x + a^ + •••
where the a's are undetermined coefficients. We seek enough
relations between the a's to determine as many of them as we
need. The spirit of the method will be readily grasped by the
aid of the following examples.
Let us first prove the following theorem, which will sometimes
shorten our labor.
198 POWER SERIES
••• ; - R < x < R, (1
is an even function, the right-hand ftide can contain only even powers
of x; iff(jx) is odd, only odd powers occur on, the right.
For if /is even, /<*)- /(_*). (2
/(— x) = aQ— a^x + azx2 — •>• (3
Subtracting 3) from 1), we have by 2)
0 = 2 (a^x + ag? + a^ + • • •)
for all x near the origin. Hence by 160, 2
«j = a3= afi= ... =0.
The second part of the theorem is similarly proved.
165. Examplel. /(*) = tan *.
Since sin x
tan a: = — — ,
cos x
21/41
we have <j ~5
_ _...
3 ! 5 ! P
tan 2: = - 5 - 7 - = - — . (1
1 x* tf l + Q
~2!+4!~
Since cosa;>0 in any interval S3 = f- ^ + S, ^ — 8J,8>0, it
follows that in 33-
Thus by 163, 2, tan x can be developed in a power series about
the origin valid in 53. We thus set
• (2
(iKNERAL THKnKY 109
since tan a; is an odd function. From 1), 2) we have, clearing
fractions,
Comparing coefficients on each side of this equation gives
a. , a, 1 2
a, "• 4- — L = — . .*. a, = — .
2! 4! 51 6 15
_0g aa_a1_ \_ , 17
** 2! 4! 6!" 7T "7 ~ 3~l5'
1 £»O
n £l 4- £!& £[a 4_ £[l - - bj
9 2!+4! 6! + 8!~9l
Thus
in
7T* 7T*\
"2" ' 2 /
Example 2. *, \ 1
f(x)= cosec x = —
sin x
1
Xs* x* ^ a;^ a;(^l —
SinC6 q=l 8ina;
we see that 1 0 1 < 1
when a; is in 53 = ( — TT + 8, ?r — 8), 8 > 0. Thus xf(x) =
can be developed in a power series in 53. As /(a;) is an odd
function, xf(x) is even, hence its development contains only even
powers of x. Thus we have
200 POWER SERIES
Hence
n
sin 2; 2: b 360 3 • 7 I
valid in (— TT*, TT*).
166. Let JF(a:)=/i(*)+/a(«)+ -
where /. , N o . -• 0
/n(z) = «no + aBla; + an2z2 + ••• w = 1, 2 •••
Let the adjoint series
Comparing like coefficients gives
«0=1.
- .
a<> , an
=
a<5 3~t + 5l V. °* " a<5 3-7!'
Thus 1117 Q1
converge for %= R and have </>„ as sums for this value of £.
converge. Then F converges uniformly in 5l = (— 72, K) and .F
may be developed as a power series, valid in 2(, by summing by
columns the double series
a10 4- aux
«20 + azlx
a
30
j
GENERAL THEORY 201
F converges uniformly in ?t. For as \x\ < £,
N\V now apply 136, 2 as 2<£B is convergent for % = R.
To prove the latter part of the theorem we observe that
is convergent, since summing it by rows it has 3> as sum. Thus
the double series 1) converges absolutely for |a;|<f, by 123, 2.
Thus the series 1) may be summed by columns by 130, 1 and has
F(x) as sum, since 1) has .Fas sum on summing by rows.
167. Example.
This series we have seen converges in 31 = (0, 6), 6 positive and
arbitrarily large.
Since it is impossible to develop the/n(V) in a power series about
the origin which will have a common interval of convergence, let
us develop F in a power series about #0
We have
anx
1 + «
= - |l — -TTT ^- + 7 r~^¥~ '" I
1 + anxQ [ 1 4- anxg (1 + a*^)1
where ^ _ (—!)'«'
202 POWER SERIES
Thus F give rise to the double series
D = A'w + A'01(x - *0) + A'^
where A, _(-l)n A
-"•UK I •**• 1C *
n\
The adjoint series to/n(V) is, setting f = \x —
L ^n^ ^2n
2
ft I
This is convergent if
£ — < 1 or if
1 + a%
that is, if Q o
For any a; such that #0 <_# < 2 #0 , f = z — z0.
Then for such an a;
.
w ! 1 + an(2 a:0 - x
and the corresponding series
is evidently convergent, since ^>n < — -
n I
We may thus sum D by columns ; we get
«=o
where „ _ y C-l)n+<c «n<c
The relation 1) is valid for 0 < x < 2 x0.
+
GENERAL THEORY 203
168. Inversion of a Power Series.
Let the series
have 60^= 0, and let it converge for t— <0. If we set
_v-b0
l — 2rt0, u -- 1 . »
6^0
it goes over into a series of the form
u = x — a^P — a^r3 — ••• (2
which converges for x = l. Without loss of generality we may
suppose that the original series 1) has the form 2) and converges
for x= 1. We shall therefore take the given series to be 2). By
I. 4o7, 2 the equation 2) defines uniquely a function x of u which
is continuous about the point u = 0, and takes on the value x= 0,
for u = 0.
We show that this function x may be developed in a power
series in w, valid in some interval about u = 0.
To this end let us set
X = U + C2W2 + tfgtt3 4- ' • ' (3
and try to determine the coefficient <?, so that 3) satisfies 2)
formally. Raising 3) to successive powers, we get
z2 = w2 + 2 caw3 -|- (c22 + 2 <?8>4 + (2 c4 + 2 cac8)tt6 + •• •
x^ = M3 + 3 <raM4 + (3 c22 + 3 c3)w6 + .- (4
x* = w4 4- 4 f.,?t5 + •••
Putting these in 2) it becomes
u = u + <? — aw2 + c — 2 af — aw8
Equating coefficients of like powers of u on both sides of this
equation gives
ct — a,
cs = 2 o,,^ -f- rt8
*4 = 02( <V* 4- 2 c8) 4- 3 asea 4- «4 (6
c6 = 2 03(6^ 4- <yr8) 4- 3 a8(c2a 4- <?8) 4- 4 «<<-, 4- «6 .
204 POWER SERIES
This method enables us thus to determine the coefficient c in
3) such that this series when put in 2) formally satisfies this
relation. We shall call the series 3) where the coefficients c have
the values given in 6), the inverse series belonging to 2).
Suppose now the inverse series 3) converges for some w0=?tO;
can we say it satisfies 2) for values of u near the origin ? The
answer is, Yes. For by 161, 3, we may sum by columns the
double series which results by replacing in the right side of 2)
X, XZ, 3?, ...
by their values in 3), 4). But when we do this, the right side of
2) goes over into the right side of 5), all of whose coefficients
= 0 by 6) except the first.
We have therefore only to show that the inverse series con-
verges for some u =£ 0. To show this we make use of the fact that
2) converges for x=\. Then an = 0, and hence
|an|<somea w = 2, 3, ••• (7
On the other hand, the relations 6) show that
c«=/n(«2» «8 >—«•») (8
is a polynomial with integral positive coefficients. In 8) let us
replace «2, as ••• by a, getting
7n=/n(«, «»•••«)• (9
Obviously I c« I < 7«- (10
Let us now replace all the a's in 2) by a ; we get the geometric
u= x — ax* — aa? — ax*— ••• (11
ax2
(12
1 — x
The inverse series belonging to 11) is
where obviously the y's are the functions 9).
We show now that 11) is convergent about u = 0. For let us
solve 12) ; we get
-«
2(1 + «)
GENERAL THEORY 205
I,rt us sit 1 — '2{'2 a+ l)w + wa= 1 — v. For u near u = 0,
v | < 1. Then by the Binomial Theorem
VI - v = 1 + d^v + <Va + -•
Replacing v by its value in w, this becomes a power series in u
\vliu:h holds for u near the origin, by 161, 3. Thus 14) shows that
j- ran be developed in a power series about the origin. Thus 13)
converges about u = 0. But then by 10) the inverse series 3)
converges in some interval about u = 0.
We may, therefore, state the theorem :
u = b + b1x + byz* + V + -- , 6^0, (15
i'rae about the point #=0. TJien this relation defines x as a
function of u which admits the development
x = (w -
i
about the point u = b. The coefficients a may be obtained from 15)
by the method of undetermined coefficients.
Example. We saw that
xz . x3 x4 . x* ,+
u = 1 og ( 1 + z) = x - - + - - - + - -
If we set
u= x + a^x2 + a^ + a4x* + ••> (2
we have -, i i
a2 = -£ ' as = i ' a4=~4 ' a5 = t"
If we invert 2), we get
X = U + CyUZ -f CgU3 + •-
where <?'s are given by 6) in 1C8. Thus
— C2 = ~~ S' ' '' cz = 2*
2 '
8 •
206 TOWER SERIES
Thus we get
u , u , M ,
+ + + *"
But from 1) we have
, / i/ -
l+z = e« = l + ~ + ^+ •••
which agrees with 3).
Taylor's Development
169. 1. We have seen, I, 409, that if f(x) together with its
first n derivatives are continuous in 21 = (# < &), then
7> -
/(a + £) = /(«)+ A/ («)
-L .
+ —J("\a
7Z •
where a<a + A<6 , 0 < 6 < 1.
Consider the infinite power series in h.
We call it the Taylor's series belonging to f(x)- The first n
terms of 1) and 2) are the same. Let us set
(3
n
We observe that Rn is a function of w, 7i, a and an unknown
variable 0 lying between 0 and 1.
We have ff ^ m < 7?
/(« + A) = ln + Hn.
*From this we conclude at once :
If 1°, /(#) and its derivatives of every order are continuous in
51 = (a, £), and 2°
lira Rn = lira —, f(n\a + 6K\ = 0 , n = <x, (4
ni
TAYLOR'S DKVKI.OPMKNT L'<>7
•ff ~ i l\ fS~\ i '* Xt / _ \ i '* ^IIS—\ i XC
/(.« + h) mfW + * .f («) +HT/ (a) + "• (5
1 ! 2 !
The above theorem is called Taylor'* tlieorem; and the equa-
tion ")) is the development of /(a:) in the interval 31 by Taylors
teries.
form of 5) is
(«
When the point a is the origin, that is, when a=0, 5) or 6)
gives ,
/(*) =/(0) + 2/'(0) + ~/"(0) + - (7
This is called Maclaurins development and the right side of 7)
Maclaurin's series. It is of course only a special case of Taylor's
development.
2. Let us note the content of Taylor's Theorem. It says :
If 1° /(X) can be developed in this form in the interval
2° if /(x) and all its derivatives are known at the point
then the value of / and all its derivatives are known at every
point x within 31.
The remarkable feature about this result is that the 2° condi-
tion requires a knowledge of the -values of f(x) in an interval
(a, a + 5) as small as we please. Since the values that a func-
tion of a real variable takes on in a part of its interval as (a < <?),
have no effect on the values that^ir) may have in the rest of the
interval (c < 5), the condition 1° must impose a condition on f(x)
which obtains throughout the whole interval 31-
170. Let /(a;) be developable in a power series about the point a,
vi/. let
Then fV(a}
**» ~" i V.
i.e. the above series is Taylor's series.
208 POWER SERIES
For differentiating 1) n times, we get
/-»>(*) =w!an + ?^^an+1(2;- a) + -
A \
Setting here x— a, we get 2).
The above theorem says that if f(x) can be developed in a
power series about x = a, this series can be no other than Taylor's
series.
171. 1. Let f(n)(x) exist and be numerically less than some con-
stant M for all a < x < 5, and for every n. Then f(x) can be
developed in Baylor's series for all x in (a, 5).
For then \En\<M^*
n '.
But obviously •*• Tin _ Q
72=00 n !
2. The application of the preceding theorem gives at once :
x a? , a?
r>-3!+ Tr~
~2 ~4
i-|i+|L-... (2
<Y /yd sy&
1 + + ++- (3
which are valid for every x.
Since a* =
we have
Since a* = e*to««, a>0,
log a , o log2 a ,
ax=\+x —£— + xz -J— + ... (4
1 ! A I
valid for all x and a > 0.
172. 1. To develop (1 -f a;)'1 awe? log (1 + x) we need another
expression of the remainder 72n due to Cauchy. We shall con-
duct our work so as to lead to a very general form for Rn.
From 169, l we have
Kn =/(*) -/(«) - O - a)/ (a) ----- a1/<n"1)(a)-
TAYLOR'S PKVKLOPMENT 209
We introduce the auxiliary function defined over (a, 6).
n — 1 !
Then /., N
9 O)=/O)
and
£(a) =/(a) + /'(«)(*- a) + - 4- /-"(a) (* ' " a)""X .
n — 1 .
Hence r» x \ / x xo
^» = ^(2!)-5r(«)- (2
If we differentiate 1), we find the terms cancel in pairs, leaving
We apply now Cauchy's theorem, I, 448, introducing another
arbitrary auxiliary function Gr(x) which satisfies the conditions
of that theorem.
Then <7<V) -a(a~) g'(c}
'• 5 ~r^ -• a < c < x>
Using 2) and 3), we get, since x = a + A,
where 0 < 0 < 1.
2. If we set (*(*) = (6_*)M,
we have a function which satisfies our conditions. Then 4) becomes
j. ..*•(* -»)-•>.(« + M). (5
W — 1 . /i
11 formula due to Schlffmilch and Roche.
For /* = 1, this becomes
-,
n — 1 !
which is Cauchy\» formula.
210 POWER SERIES
For /x = w, we get from 5)
Rn=~.fn\a
n I
which is Lagrange's formula already obtained.
173. 1. We consider now the development of
(1 + &)* x 5> — 1 , /u, arbitrary.
The corresponding Taylor's series is
m i i A1 i A1 ' A1 — 1- i,.A»!'M~~l*M~~2 o.
L + l + 172"* + 1.2.3
We considered this series in 99, where we saw that :
T converges for | x \ < 1 and diverges for | x \ > 1.
When x= 1, 2* converges only when /i >— 1 ; when a;
T7 converges only when fj, ^ 0.
We wish to know when
_L A * *j
The cases when T diverges are to be thrown out at once. Con-
sider in succession the cases that T converges. We have to
investigate when lira Rn = 0.
Case 1°. 0<|a; <1. It is convenient to use here Cauchy's
form of the remainder. This gives
1 . 2 • ••• n
— ,<? u w
— — on un rvn,
n
setting
.o _/*•/*-!• -^-M + l
" ~~ 1 O 1 '
1 . 2 • ••• n — 1
NowinTFn,
hence lim Wn = 0.
TAYLOR'S DEVELOPMENT 211
|i+te|<i + H,
which is finite. Hence Un is < some constant M.
To show that lira Sn = 0, we make use of the fact that the series
/ onverges for the values of x under consideration. Thus for
every /*
Urn /"M-l--i*-n + 2 0-1 _ 0
1.2- ...n-l
since the limit of the wth term of a convergent series is 0. In
this formula replace /* by /* - 1, then
1 . 2 • ... w — 1
Hen°e
lira 4-0.
Hence 1) is valid for | x \ < 1.
Case 2. x = 1, //, > — 1. We employ here Lagrauge's form of
the remainder, which gives
setting
K.«£l
Consider Wn. Since w increases without limit, /* — w becomes
id remains negative. As 6 > 0
lim Wn = 0.
For Un, we use I, 143. This shows at once that
lim Un = 0.
Hence
lim Rn = 0
md 1) is valid in this case, i.e. for x= 1, /* > — 1.
212 POWER SERIES
Case 3. x = — 1, /* ^ 0. We use here for ^ > 0 the Schlomilch-
Roche form of the remainder 172, 5). We set a = 0,"A = — 1 and get
, -i
— 1 • /* — 2 • ... ^t- n+1
Applying I, 143, we see that lim Rn = 0.
Hence 1) is valid here if /* > 0.
When p = 0 equation 1) is evidently true, since both sides
reduce to 1.
Summing up, we have the theorem :
The development of (1 -f x)* in Taylor's series is valid when
| x | < 1 for all p. When x = + 1 it is necessary that p > — 1 ;
when x= — 1 it is necessary that /u
2. We note the following formulas obtained from 1), setting
x = 1 and — 1.
174. 1. We develop now log (! + #)• The corresponding
Taylor's series is
We saw, 89, Ex. 2, that T converges when and only when
x\ < 1 or x = 1.
0 < a; < 1. We use Lagrange's remainder, which gives here
_= -
71(1
Thus
Hence lim Bn = 0.
TAYLOR'S DEVELOPMENT 213
Let - 1 < x < 0. We use here Cauchy's remainder, which
», sfttinir ar = _ £, o < £ < 1,
Evidently
Also
o-.<-L
Finally
lim Wn = 0 since -in* < i.
We can thus sum up in the theorem :
Taylor's development of log (1 + x~) is valid when and
\x\ < 1 or x = 1. That is, for such values of x
2. We note the following special case :
i-i+i- i + "' =log2.
The series on the left we have already met with.
175. We add for completeness the development of the follow-
ing functions for which it can be shown that lim En = 0.
232-45 2.4-6 7
n
which is valid for (— 1, 1).
arctan x = x — — + — — —
35 7
which is valid for (— 1*, I).
which is valid for (— 1*, 1*).
214 POWER SERIES
176. We wish now to call attention to various false notions
which are prevalent regarding the development of a function in
Taylor's series.
Criticism 1. It is commonly supposed, if the Taylor's series T
belonging to a function /(x) is convergent, that then
That this is not always true we proceed to illustrate by various
examples.
Example 1. For f(x) take Cauchy's function, I, 335,
-i
•r"-+^-
C(x)= lim e
n=oo
For xj=0 C(x)=e~* ; f or x = 0 (7<»=0.
1° derivative. For x =£ 0, C'(x) = ^ C(x).
For x = 0, C' (0) = lim - = lim = 0.
A=O A A
2° derivative. x^Q, C"(x) = C(x) \ 4 - ~ } -
{3r X )
x = 0, G7"(0) = lim ^W~ ^(g) = Hm 2 g-i =
A A4
C o q/> 9^1 -\
3° derivative. x*0, O"' (*) = (7 (ar) -^ ~ ^7 + ^ '
la;9 a;7 ar J
a: = 0, C""(0)= Hm^5i-0.
A
/w general we have :
f 9n
# =^ 0, C(n)(x~) = C(x)-\ — + terms of lower degree
(. yf
x = 0, (7^(0) = 0.
Thus the corresponding Taylor's series is
4- C"(0) + tf"(0) + ...
TAYLOR'S DEVELOPMENT 215
That is, T is convergent for every a;, but vanishes identically.
3 thus obvious that C(x) cannot be developed about the origin
in Taylor's series.
Example 2. Because the Taylor's series about the origin be-
longing to C(x) vanishes identically, the reader may be inclined
to regard this example with suspicion, yet without reason.
Let us consider therefore the following function,
/(*) = C(x) + e* = Q(x) + <7(aO-
Then /(#) and its derivatives of every order are continuous.
f<*\x)=C<*>(x) + tf*>(x)
n = l, 2 ...
(7(n'(0)=0
we have /fO(0)=l.
Hence Taylor's development for f (a;) about the origin is
r=1 + f!+£ + f]+-
This series is convergent, but it does not converge to the right
value since .,.
T=ex.
177. 1. Example 8. The two preceding examples leave noth-
ing to be desired from the standpoint of rigor and simplicity.
They involve, however, a function, namely, (7(a;), which is not
defined in the usual way; it is therefore interesting to have ex-
amples of functions defined in one of the ordinary everyday
ways, e.g. as infinite series. Such examples have been given by
Pringsheim.
The infinite series
defines, as we saw, 155, 2, a function in the interval 21 = (0, i),
b >0 but otherwise arbitrary, which has derivatives in §1 of every
order, viz. :
^-c-iyxi^t;?)- ^ . (2
216 POWER SERIES
The Taylor's series about the origin for F(oc) is
^00 = 1) ^(A)(0) ; X! = lfor\=0,
A=t)X .
and by 2)
Hence
(3
A=O e«
As £x>0 and lim £A = 0, t,,+l<t^, this series is an alternate series
for any x in 21. Hence T converges in 51.
2. Readers familiar with the elements of the theory of func-
tions of a complex variable will know without any further reason-
ing that our Taylor's series T given in 3) cannot equal the given
function F in any interval 2i, however small b is taken. In fact,
F(x} is an analytic function for which the origin is an essentially
singular point, since F has the poles - n= 1, 2, 3 •••, whose
limiting point is 0.
3. To show by elementary means that F(x) cannot be devel-
oped about the origin in a Taylor's series is not so simple. We
prove now, however, with Pringsheim :
If we take a^(--^) =4.68 •••, T(x) does not equal F(x)
\e l/
throughout any interval 21 = (0, 5), however small b > 0 is taken.
We show 1° that if F(x) = T(x) throughout 21, this relation is
true in 53 = (0, 25*).
In fact let 0 < x0 < b.
By 161, 4 we can develop T about #0, getting a relation
Tto^Sc.tx-x,')* (1
0
valid for all x sufficiently near #0. On the other hand, we saw in
167 that
F(x} = ^
o
is also valid for 0<a<2a:0. But by hypothesis, the two power
series 1) and 2) are equal for points near x0. Hence they are
TAYLOR'S DEVELOPMENT 217
equal for 0<x<2x0. As we can take x0 as near b as we choose,
F=T'm SB.
I ly repeating the operation often enough, we can show that F =
Tin any interval (0, £) where £>0 is arbitrarily large.
To prove our theorem we have now only to show F ^ T for
some one x > 0.
Since
*<,)_( i _ i )+a i i *
\l-l-a; 1 + arj \2 I 1 + <ro o . 1 + a
we have 1 n
TT x* x »w * -^- y^f s *\.
l+x 1 + ax
On the other hand
Hence T(x)<l.
e
To find a value of x for which Cr>_- take x= a~*. For this
value of x
Observe that Q- considered as a function of a is an increasing
function. For fe + T\* 1
« = ( - 7) , 6- = -.
\« — I/ e
Hence ^> 7 for a; >a~*.
178. Criticism 2. It is commonly thought if f(x) and its
derivatives of every order are continuous in an interval 31, that
then the corresponding Taylor's series is convergent in St.
That this is not always so is shown by the following example,
due to Pringsheim.
It is easy to see that
converges for every x>_0, and has derivatives of every order for
these values of a;, viz. :
218 POWER SERIES
Taylor's series about the origin is
The series 3T is divergent for a; > 0, as is easily seen.
179. Criticism 3. It is commonly thought if /(#) and all its
derivatives vanish for a certain value of x, say for x = a, that
then/(z) vanishes identically. One reasons thus:
The development of /(a:) about z= a is
As /and all its derivatives vanish at a, this gives
/(*) = 0 + 0 • O- a) + 0 • (x- a)2 + •••
= 0 whatever x is.
There are two tacit assumptions which invalidate this conclusion.
First, one assumes because / and all its derivatives exist and
are finite at x = a, that therefore f(z) can be developed in
Taylor's series. An example to the contrary is Cauchy's function
C(x). We have seen that O(x) and all its derivatives are 0 at
x = 0, yet C(x) is not identically 0 ; in fact C vanishes only once,
viz. at x = 0.
Secondly, suppose /(V) were developable in Taylor's series in a
certain interval 21 = (a— A, a + Ji). Then /is indeed 0 through-
out 31, but we cannot infer that it is therefore 0 outside 51. In
fact, from Dirichlet's definition of a function, the values that /has
in 31 nowise interferes with our giving / any other values we
please outside of 21.
180. 1. Criticism 4- Suppose f(x) can be developed in Taylor's
series at a, so that
for
TAYLOR'S DEVELOPMENT 219
Since Taylor's series T is a power series, it converges not only
in a, but also within 53 = (2 a — 6, a). It is commonly supposed
that /(.r) = T also in 33. A moment's reflection shows such an
assumption is unjustified without further conditions on /(#).
2. Example. We construct a function by the method considered
in I. 333, viz.
xn
Then /(z) = cos x, in SI = (0, 1)
= 1 4- sin x, within S3 = (0, - 1 ).
We have therefore as a development in Taylor's series valid
in H, -r2 T4 r6
/<">-1-31+Sl-57+--'1!
It is obviously not -valid within 33, although T7 converges in 33.
3. We have given in 1) an arithmetical expression for f (#).
Our example would have been just as conclusive if we had said :
Let /(#) = c°s x in SI,
and = 1 + sin x within 33-
181. 1. Criticism 5. The following error is sometimes made.
Suppose Taylor's development
/(*)=/(«) + =*f(a) + *=«/"(«) + ... (1
valid in 2l = (a<ft).
It may happen that T is convergent in a larger interval
One must not therefore suppose that 1) is also valid in 33.
-. Example.
f(x)=e* in 31 = (a, 6),
= e*+ sin O - ft) in 33 = (ft, 5).
Then Taylor's development
is valid for 21. The series T converging for every x converges in
33 but 1) is not valid for 33.
220 POWER SERIES
182. Let /(#) have finite derivatives of every order in
9f = (a<6). In order that/(a;) can be developed in the Taylor's
series ,
valid in the interval 51 we saw that it is necessary and sufficient
that
But Rn is not only a function of the independent variable A, but
of the unknown variable 6 which lies within the interval (0, 1)
and is a function of n and A.
Pringsheim has shown how the above condition may be replaced
by the following one in which 6 is an independent variable.
For the relation 1) to be valid for all h such that Q<h<H, it is
necessary and sufficient that Cauchy* s form of the remainder
,,
n — 1 .
the h and 9 being independent variables, converge uniformly to zero
for the rectangle D whose points (A, 0) satisfy
1° It is sufficient. For then there exists for each e > 0 an m
such that
| -Bn(A, 0) | < e n ^ m
for every point (A, 0) of D.
Let us fix A ; then | Rn \ < e no matter how 0 varies with n.
2° It is necessary. Let A0 be an arbitrary but fixed number in
We have only to show that, from the existence of 1), for A<. A0,
it follows that
Rn(h, 0)=0
uniformly in the rectangle Z>, defined by
0<A<A0 ,
TAYLOR'S DEVELOPMENT 221
The demonstration depends upon the fact that /2B(A, 0) is h
times the nth term /„(«, A*) of the development of /'(a;) about the
point a + a. In fact let h = a + k. Then by 158
/'(a + A) =/'(a + « + *) =/'(« + «)+ .» + — _/<«>(„ + «)+...
n— 1!
whose wlh term is
Let « = 0h, then
Rn(h, «)= A/n(«, k)
as stated.
The image A0, of Dn is the half of a square of side A0, below the
diagonal.
To show that Rn converges uniformly to 0 in D0 we have only
to show that ,. , 7X . n .t -. . A ,n
/„(«, k)= 0 uniformly in A0. (2
To this end we have from 1) for all t in 21
Its adjoint
0(0= I/'OO I +«!/"(«) I + ••• (^
also converges in 21.
By 161, 4 we can develop 4) about t = a, which gives
/i "~~ -L •
Hut obviously 6r(«, k) is continuous in A0, and evidently all its
terms are also continuous there. Therefore by 149, 3,
'* - ^ o uniformly in A0 . (5
ft ^~ A. •
But if we show that
it follows from 5) that 2) is true. Our theorem is then
established.
222 POWER SERIES
To prove 6 ) we have from 1 )
and from 4)
«2
(«) = |/(n)00 +«/(" («) +2T/("
The comparison of 7), 8) proves 6).
Circular and Hyperbolic Functions
183. 1. We have defined the circular functions as the length
of certain lines ; from this definition their elementary properties
may be deduced as is shown in trigonometry.
From this geometric definition we have obtained an arithmeti-
cal expression for these functions. In particular
>y /v-3 f*> -»-7
tH/ M? i *V I /*"!
T ~~ •" •"" !• I ^~ r* •" " * * V
J_. o. O. \ •
1_^ £*_^ (2
2 ! 4 ! 6 !
valid for every x.
As an interesting and instructive exercise in the use of series
we propose now to develop some of the properties of these func-
tions purely from their definition as infinite series. Let us call
these series respectively JS and C.
Let us also define tanrr= , seca; = , etc.
cos x cos x
2. To begin, we observe that both S and O converge absolutely
for every a;, as we have seen. They therefore define continuous
one-valued functions for every x. Let us designate them by the
usual symbols gina. cosa._
We could just as well denote them by any other symbols, as
• . <K*0 •> ^O)-
3. Since ^=0 , (7=1 for x = 0,
vvehave sinO = 0 cos 0 = 1.
CIRCULAR AND HYPERBOLIC FUNCTIONS 223
t. Since S involves only odd powers of x, and C only even
powers,
sin x is an odd, cos x is an even function.
5. Since S and C are power series which converge for every x,
they have derivatives of every order. In particular
^?=1_^^^_^4 n
dx 2! 4! 6!
dC __5,£?._£^,^1 _ a
dx~ 13! 5 ! 7 !
dsinx d cos x
— = cosz , — = — sin a;. (3
az ax
6. To get the addition theorem, let an index as x, y attached to
*S", C indicate the variable which occurs in the series. Then
xy*
— — -|_ — •?. 4. — — 4-
"7l 5T2T 3T4l
Adding,
3!
tj. j
7! 512! 314! 1!6!
^ {
+ y (x 4- y)8 (x 4- 5)5
1! 3! 5!
Thus for every x, y
sin (z 4- y) = sin x cos y -f- cos x sin y.
In the same way we find the addition formula for cos a;.
224 POWER SERIES
7. We can get now the important relation
sin2 x + cos2 x = 1 (4
directly from the addition theorem. Let us, however, find it by
aid of the series. We have
----
7! 3!5! 5!3!
j\_ JLJLJL JL J
V6! 4!2!2! + 4! 6!
V8! + 6!2! + 4!4! + 6!2!+8!
Hence
Now by I, 96,
Thus
-
CQS 2- =
8. In 2 we saw sin a;, cos x were continuous for x\ 4) shows
that they are limited and indeed that they lie between ± 1.
For the left side of 4) is the sum of two positive numbers and
thus neither can be greater than the right side.
9. Let us study the graph of sin #, cos #, which we shall call 2
and F, respectively.
ct m TI f
Since sin x = 0, - - = cos x = 1, for x = 0, S cuts the z-axis at
ax
0 under an angle of 45 degrees.
CIRCULAR AND HYPERBOLIC FUNCTIONS 225
Similarly we see y = 1 for x = 0. F crosses the y-axis there
and is parallel to the z-axis.
Si"ce v ,
= -
and each parenthesis is positive for 0 < a?< 6,
sina;>0 for 0< z<V6= 2.449 ...
Since n i %* . '•
for 0<*<V2 = 1.414...
Since
Q
T-2 y* y6 / -r2 \ ~10 / -r2
= 1 — — +— — — f 1 - —— \— ^— ( 1 -
2! 4! 6!V 7-8; 10!V 11 -
cosa;<0 for x = 2.
Since D^ cos x = — sin a; and sin a: > 0 for 0 < x < V6, we see
cos a; is a decreasing function for these values of x. As it is con-
tinuous and > 0 for x — V2, but < 0 for x = 2, cos x vanishes once
and only once in (V^, 2).
This root, uniquely determined, of cos x we denote by - • As a
first approximation, we have
V2<|<2.
From 4) we have sin2 7-= 1. As we saw sin:r>0 for x< Vt),
we have
Thus sin x increases constantly from 0 to 1 while cos x decreases
from 1 to 0 in the interval (0, ^)= I\- We thus know how sin a:,
0082 In-have in 7j.
From the addition theorem
cos ^ sin x = cos x.
2
]= sin^
J A
( — -f x } =
\* J
cos — -f x = cos — cos x — sin ^ sin x = — sin x.
it 2
226 POWER SERIES
Knowing how sin a;, cos a; march in Jj, these formulae tell us
how they march in 1% = (^p TT
\2
From the addition theorem,
sin (TT + x) =. — sin a:, cos (?r + a:) = — cos x.
Knowing how sin a;, cos x march in (0, TT), these formulae inform
us about their march in (0, 2 TT).
The addition theorem now gives
sin (x + 2 TT) = sin a:, cos (x + 2 TT) = cos a:.
Thus the functions sin ar, cos x are periodic and have 2 TT as period.
The graph of sin a; cos x for negative x is obtained now by
recalling that sin x is odd and cos x is even.
10. As a first approximation of TT we found
V2<!<2.
By the aid of the development given 159, 3
/vO sy£) sv*t
arctg* = *-- + --T+.
we can compute TT as accurately as we please.
In fact, from the addition theorem we deduce readily
• 7T 1 7T 1
sin — = - , cos — = — .
4 V2 • 4 V2
Hence t ^ = 1
This in 5) gives Leibnitz "s formula,
The convergence of this series is extremely slow. In fact by
81, 3 we see that the error committed in stopping the summation
at the ntb term is not greater than - — — . How much less the
*j lv *™~ -L
error is, is not stated. Thus to be sure of making an error less
than — — it would be necessary to take \ (10m + 2) terms.
CIRCULAR AND HYPERBOLIC FUNCTIONS 227
11. To get a more rapid means of computation, we make use
of the addition theorem.
To start with, let
a = arctg £.
Then 5) gives l ia lx ll
a rapidly converging series.
The error E* committed in breaking off the summation at the
nlh term is ., .,
E < —
^-'
By virtue of the formula for duplicating the argument
0 2 tan a
tan 2 « = — — — ,
1 — tan2 a
wehave tan2«=1V
Similarly tan 4 « = 4M.
L I V
Let
£ = 4«-|. (7
The addition theorem gives
tan 4 a — 1 1
tan p =
1 + tan 4 « 239
Then 5) gives 111 1
239 3 239s 5 239s
also a very rapidly converging series.
We find for the error -. -.
(8
The formula 7) in connection with 6) and 8) gives j . The
error on breaking off the summation with the wlh term is
rTT
228 POWER SERIES
184. The Hyperbolic Functions. Closely related with the cir-
cular functions are the hyperbolic functions. These are defined
by the equations
sinh x = • ( 1
•
cosh x = — — • (2
sinh x ex — e~x
tanh x =
cosh x ex
sech x = — - — cosech x=
cosh x sinh x
Since .1
-, x . xz x* .
ex=\ --- -- --- 1- •••
1! 2! ar
we have j r
~+++,.. (3
=l + + + - (4
Z I 4 !
valid for every x. From these equations we see at once :
sinh ( — x~) = — sinh x ; cosh ( — x~) = cosh x.
sinh 0 = 0. cosh 0 = 1.
— sinhz=l + — 7 + -.-;+ ••• =cosh:r. (5
dx 2 ! 4 !
£co8hz-^+^+.^+... -sinh*. (6
Let us now look at the graph of these functions. Since sinh x,
cosh a: are continuous functions, their graph is a continuous curve.
For x > 0, sinh x > 0 since each term in 3) is > 0. The relatior
4) shows that cosh x is positive for every x.
If x1 > x > 0, sinh x' > sinh a;, since each term in 3) is greate]
for x1 than for x. The same may be seen from 5).
THE HYPERGEOMETRIC FUNCTION 229
Evidently from 3), 4)
lim sinli x = + oo , lira cosh x = + ao .
*=+» r=+oo
At x = 0, cosh x has a minimum, and sinh x cuts the ar-axis
at 45°.
Ft )i- x > 0, cosh x > sinh x since
e* + e '> ex — e~*.
The two curves approach each other asymptotically as x= + 00 .
For the difference of their ordinates is e~* which = 0 as x = + oo .
The addition theorem is easily obtained from that of ex. In fact
. i e* — e~* ev+e~v
sinh x cosh y = --- • - -^- —
= }0I+1/ + e*~v ~ e~x+v ~ e ~z~")-
Similarly cogh ^ g.Qh y = ^+v _eX-v + e-x+v_ e-,-vy,
Hence
sinh x cosh y + cosh x sinh y = \(ex+v — e~(x+y}) = sinh (x + y).
Similarly we find
cosh (x + y~) = cosh x cosh y + sinh x sinh y.
In the same way we may show that
cosh2 x — sinh2 x = 1.
The Hyper geometric Function
185. This function, although known to Wallis, Euler, and the
earlier mathematicians, was first studied in detail by Gauss. It
may be defined by the following power series in x:
F («, ft. 7 ; l) =
1 . ry 1 . 2 • 7-7+ 1
g.a+l.q+2./8./3 + l-/3 + 2
1.2.3.7.7+1-7 + 2
The numbers a, y8, 7 are called parameters. We observe that
a, /8 enter symmetrically, also when a = 1, $ = 7 it reduces to
the geometric series. Finally let us note that 7 cannot be zero or
a negative integer, for then all the denominators after a certain
term = 0.
230 POWER SERIES
The convergence of the series F was discussed in 100. The
main result obtained there is that F converges absolutely for all
| x | < 1, whatever values the parameters have, excepting of course
7 a negative integer or zero.
186. For special values of the parameters, F reduces to ele-
mentary functions in the following cases :
1. If a or # is a negative integer — w, F is a polynomial of
degree n.
2. ^(1,1, 2; -:r)=l
JU
F°r
Also
The relation 1) is now obvious.
Similarly we have
,2; :r) = ^ log (I-
x
3.
4. xF(\, ^, |, z2) = arcsin re.
5. a^(£, 1, f, — x2) = arctan x.
6. lim l/a, 1, 1, -J = e*. (2
"flt=-J-QO \ **/
For
j
1-2-3 1.2-3
(3
THE HYPERGEOMETRIC FUNCTION 231
Let 0 < a < /3. Then
l\£r^ / 1 \f f2\Gfi
is convergent since its argument is numerically < 1. Comparing
3), 4) we see each term of 3) is numerically < the corresponding
term of 4) for any \ x \ < Q- and any a > ft. Thus the series 3)
considered as a function of a, is uniformly convergent in the
interval (/S + oo) by 136, 2; and hereby x may have any value
in (_ Q, #). Applying now 146, 4 to 3) and letting a= +00,
we see 3) goes over into 2).
/ 3 2-2 \
7. lim xF( a, a, - ; — — , ) = sin x. (5
a=-H» V 2 4 a2/
For
Let a: = (^ > 0 and a = Gr. Then
is convergent by 185. We may now reason as in 6.
8. Similarly we may show :
f 1 3? \
lim F «, «, s ; — -— ^ = cos a;.
«=+« \ 2 4 «V
/ 3 3.2 \
lim 11 a, a, -, -— - = sinh x.
a=+oo \ 2 4 «V
(1 rr2 \
a, «, :r, -. -, ) = cosh a;.
2 4«-*/
187. Contiguous Functions. Consider two F functions
^(0,^7; x) , JV^y; *).
If a differs from «' by unity, these two functions are said to be
contiguous. The same holds for y9, and also for 7. Thus to
correspond 6 contiguous functions,
^(a ± 1, ft ± 1, 7 ± 1 J *)•
232 POWER SERIES
Between F and two of its contiguous functions exists a linear
relation. As the number of such pairs of contiguous functions is
6-5
1-2
= 15,
there are 15 such linear relations. Let us find one of them.
We set Q = a+l.a+2....«+n-l./8-£ + l--£ + n-2-
1 • 2 • •••n-7'7+l-'
Then the coefficient of xn in Fax is
in F(u. + 1, ft 7, x) it is
(«
in -F(«, ft 7 — 1, z) it is
7-1
Thus the coefficient of zn in
(7 - a - l)jF(a, ft 7, s) + aF(a + 1, ft 7,
is 0. This being true for each w, we have
(7 _ „ _ 1)^(«, /3, 7, x) + aF(a + 1, /3, 7, x)
+ (1-7)^(0, A 7-1, a:) =0. (I
Again, the coefficient of a:n in _F(«, /3 — 1, 7, a;) is «(/3 — l)^n ;
in a^jP(« + 1, /3, 7, «) it is 71(7 + n — 1) <)n.
Hence using the above coefficients, we get
(7 _ a - /8)JF(a, & 7, «) + «(1 ~ *)^(« + 1, A % *)
+ 08-7)^(0,^-1,7,^ = 0. (2
From these two we get others by elimination or by permuting
the first two parameters, which last does not alter the value of
the function F(af3yx').
Thus permuting a, ft in 1) gives
(7 - /3 - 1)^(«, /3, % *0 +#F(«, /3 + 1, 7, *)
+ (1 - 7)^(«- ft 7 - 1. *) = 0. (3
THK HYI'KKCKO.MKTUIC FfXCTION 233
Eliminating F (a, fi, 7 — 1 , #) from 1), 3) gives
(£ - «)^(«, £, 7, x) + «F(u + 1, £, 7, a:)
-/3F(a,{3+ 1, 7, *) = <>• (4
Permuting a, £ in 2) gives
(7 - « - /9)^(«, 0, 7, *) + £(1 - aO^O, /3 + 1, % *)
+ (a - 7)^0 - 1, £, 7, x) = 0. (5
From 3), 5) let us eliminate F(a, ft + 1, 7, x), getting
(„ _ 1 _ (7 _ ft - 1 »,F(a, & 7, x) + (7 - «).F(a - 1, £, 7, x)
+ (1 - 7)(1 - z),F(a, /8, 7 - 1» «)'= 0- (6
In 1) let us replace a by a — 1 and 7 by 7 + 1 ; we get
(7 - « + l).P(a - 1, & 7 + 1, *) + (a - 1)^(«, yS, 7 + 1, *)
-7^(«-l, ^,7, x)=Q. (a)
In 6) let us replace 7 by 7 + 1 ; we get
C«-l-(7-/3X)^(«. £, 7+1, :r) + (7 + l-«)F(«-l,/3, 7 + 1, re)
-7(l-2:)/T(«,/3, 7, *) = (). (b)
Subtracting (b) from (a), eliminates JP(« — 1, /8, 7 + 1, x) and
gives
7(1 - xWafax-) - yF(a - 1, fr 7, a;)
+ (7 - J3)zF(a, /8, 7 + 1, *) = 0. (7
From 6), 7) we can eliminate JP(«— 1, /3, 7, x), getting
7{7-l+(a + /9+l-27)x[F(«, /8, 7,2:)
+ (7 - «)(7 - /8)arJFT(«, /9, 7 + 1, z)
+ 7(l-7)(l-a:)JP(«, ^,7-1, ^;=0. (8
In this manner we may proceed, getting the remaining seven.
188. Conjugate Functions. From the relations between con-
tiguous functions we see that a linear relation exists between any
three functions
J*(o, 0, 7, *) *V, /8', 7', *) ^(«", /3", 7", x)
"whose corresponding parameters differ only by integers. Such
functions are called conjugate.
234 POWER SERIES
For let jt?, j, r be any three integers. Consider the functions
F(afax'), F(a + 1, & 7, x) •- F(a + p, /3, 7, x\
F(a + p, £ + 1, 7, a:), JF(« + jt>, /8 + 2, 7, z) ••. F(a+p, /S + ?, 7, a;),
We have jt? + 9- + r + 1 functions, and any 3 consecutive ones
are contiguous. There are thus p + q + r — 1 linear relations
between them. We can thus by elimination get a linear relation
between any three of these functions.
189. Derivatives. We have
*•<(«, ft 7, «) = »«
1 • 2 • ••• rc • 7 • 7+ 1 . ••• 7 + w- 1
•« + !•••• « + n./8-/8+l-—ff + n
1 • 2 • ... w + 1 • 7 • 7+ 1 • ••• V + n
1.2- ...i
Hence
and so on for the higher derivatives. We see they are conjugate
functions.
190. Differential Equation for F. Since F, F' , F" are conju-
gate functions, a linear relation exists between them. It is found
to be
To prove the relation let us find the coefficient of x* on the left
side of 1). We set
_
n~ 1 • 2 • ••• n - 7 • 7 + 1 - ••• 7 + n—
THE HYPERGEOMETRIC FUNCTION 235
The coefficient of x* in x*F" is
n(n-l)Pw,
in — xP" it is
n(a+ H)(£ + n)
7 + n "
in <« + £ + l}xF' it is
in — yF' it is
in a@F it is
Adding all these gives tlie coefficient of x* in the left side of 1).
We find it is 0.
191. Expression of F^aftyx) as an Integral.
\Ve show that for | x \ < 1,
7 - / -
where -6(^>, <?) is the Beta function of I, 692,
For by the Binomial Theorem
for | xu | < 1. Hence
J=
1-2
7 -, 0) + «xB (/8 + 1, 7 - /8)
2« T - « + - (2
236 TOWER SERIES
Now from I, 692, 10)
7
Hence
7 + 7-7 +
etc. Putting these values in 2) we get 1).
192. Value of F («, £, 7, x) for x = 1.
We saw that the F series converges absolutely for x = 1 if
« + /3 — 7 < 0. The value of J7 when x = 1 is particularly in-
teresting. As it is now a function of «, /3, 7 only, we may denote
it by -F(«, /3, 7). The relation between this function and the T
function may be established, as Gauss showed, by means of 187, 8)
VI 7 *
~
+ (7 ~ «)(7 - @)zF(a, /3, 7 + 1, x)
+ 7(1 - 7) (1 - *W> A 7 - 1, *) = 0. (1
Assuming that
« + /3 — 7<0, (2
we see that the first and second terms are convergent for x = 1 ;
but we cannot say this in general for the third, as it is necessary
for this that a + (3 — (7 — 1) < 0. We can, however, show that
L lim (1 - x) F(a, &, 7 - 1, x} = 0, (3
x=\
supposing 2) to hold. For if | x \ < 1,
JP(«, /3, 7 — 1, #) = a0 + fljz + a2z2 + ••• (4
Now by 100, this series also converges for x = — 1. Thus
lim an = 0. (5
»=00
From 4) we have
(1 — x~)F(a, /3, 7 - 1, a:) = «0 + (ax — a0)z + (a2 — a,) or2 + ...
Let the series on the right be denoted by Q-(x). As
(7n+1(l) = an, we see (7(1) is a convergent series, by 5), whose
sum is 0. But then by 147, 6, G- (x) is continuous at x = 1
Hence ilim £<>
THE HYPEKGEOMETK1C FUNCTION 287
and this establishes 3). Thus passing to the limit x — 1 in 1)
gives
7 (« + ft - 7) F(«i & 7) + (7 - «) (7 - ftF(« ft 7 + 1) = 0,
ft* fr 7) = "" *(«, A 7 +
7(7 - a- £)
Replacing 7 by 7 + 1, this gives
-. Thus in general
* & 7)-
.*•(«,& 7 + n).
Gauss sets now
,-, x v _ n\ nx
"
Hence the above relation becomes
). (6
II (n, 7 — a -
n=oo
For the series
Imi Jf(«, A 7 + ft) = 1. (7
+ 1-<>- + 1+... (8
• 7 »«7«7
converges absolutely when 2) holds. Hence
,
i. a 1-2- fit.
is convergent. Now each term in 8) is numerically < the corre-
sponding term in 9) for any 7 > Q-. Hence 8) converges uni-
formly about the point 7 = + oo. We may therefore apply 146, 4.
As each term of 8) has the limit 0 as 7 = + oo, the relation 7)
is established.
238 POWER SERIES
We shall show in the next chapter that
lim IT (w, x)
M = 00
exists for all x different from a negative integer. Gauss denotes
it by II (a;) ; as we shall see,
r<X> = n<>- 1) , forz>0.
Letting n = oo, 6) gives
*(«, A 7) = no/
We must of course suppose that
7, 7 - «, 7 - /3, 7 - « - &
are not negative integers or zero, as otherwise the corresponding
II or F function are not defined.
Bessel Functions
193. 1. The infinite series
converges for every x. For the ratio of two successive terms of
the adjoint series is \ -2
which = 0 as s = oo for any given x.
The series 1) thus define functions of 'x which are everywhere
continuous. They are called Bessel functions of order
w=0, 1, 2...
In particular we have
x2 x4 Xs
•WO* ~ + ~ +
"/""XL i /"Q
iV = 2 ~ 22 • 4 22 • 42 . 6 ~ 22 . 42 • 62 • 8
Since 1) is a power series, we may differentiate it termwise and
o.^,,
HKSSEL FUNCTIONS 239
J. The following linear relation exists between three consecutive
Bessel functions :
•W*) = — «•)- JUOO » > o. (5
X
*•*—! *> /yju+w— i
•J __ _ * _ , £ /• __ -I N, _ «C _^^__^____ /-O
-»~- ' "-'
_
Ili'iice
+ ^i
_
2- •»(»-!)!
a^*"1 ^ lv a^+*~»
- 2«-i(n - 1) ! } 2»+*-1«!<> +
' Zt+n
= ?. ( — 1 V
./: ; 2
2n , ,
3. We show next that
2 J'(x) = J (x) J (x) n > 0. (S
For subtracting 7) from 6) gives
**-* . v. i^^1-1 n + 2*
= sr iv
'
From 8) we get, on replacing <7n+1 by its value as given by 5) :
J^x) = - V.(x) + «/„_!<», n > 0. (9
•
From 5) we also get
(10
4. The Bessel function Jn satisfies the following linear homo-
geneous differential equation of the 2° order :
.-o. en
240 POWER SERIES
This may be shown by direct differentiation of 1) or more sim-
ply thus : Differentiating 9) gives
r (12
3r x
Equation 10) gives
T' n~^ T T
<A»-1= — Jn-\ — 'Jn-
X
Replacing here Jn-i by its value as given by 9), we get
Putting this in 12) gives 11).
5. ex^~ = !LunJn(x} (13
— cc
for any a;, and for u =£ 0.
For
v— tt-i 1 T
XU 4_
I 2w 22-2!w2
Now for any a; and for any u =£ 0, the series in the braces are
absolutely convergent. Their product may therefore be written
in the form , ,
22 \2/ 2 ! 2 !
1 /r\6
i * / •*-' \
2 2!V2; 3!2!\2>
1 /a:\5
_u-i(x_l
\2 2
3!2!V2
IV ^ _j_
U
BESSEL FUNCTIONS
194. 1. Expression of Jn(x) as an Integral.
1 r'
— I cos (x cos <£) sin:
For
*"
Hence
cos (x cos d> ) = V ^-— =-*- x" cos?
and thus
« / _ jy
(a; cos <f>) = V 'r
•^ / •> u \ I
0 V>-*y"
cos x cos < sin2" > =
00 X ^ "\«
V ^ ~ ^ a^* cos2* ^> sin2" </>.
o C* O '
As this series converges uniformly in (0, TT) for any value of
we may integrate termwise, getting
fcos (x cos^) sin2n cf>d<f> = § ^~1)' a^ fcos2* <^ sin2"
Jo " 2«I »^o
vr iv
= ^~ * ' hv T
We shall show in 225, 6, that
2
Thus the last series above
2
0 ^ "
j cos(a;cos4>)8in2n4)tf</)
'2 n + l\»/o
1 \< ^2*+M
r,-^<«)
CHAPTER VII
INFINITE PRODUCTS
195. 1. Let {atl...tj be an infinite sequence of numbers, the
indices * = (*! •••*,) ranging over a lattice system 8 in s-way
space. The symbol P=slia^ = u^ (1
is called an infinite product. The numbers at are its factors. Let
PH denote the product of all the factors in the rectangular cell
RI" If limPM (2
IX =OO
is finite or definitely infinite, we call it the value of P. It is
customary to represent a product and its value by the same letter
when no ambiguity will arise.
When the limit 2) is finite and =£ 0 or when one of the factors
= 0, we say P is convergent, otherwise P is divergent.
We shall denote by PM the product obtained by setting all the
factors a, = 1, whose indices i lie in the cell R^. We call this the
co-product of P^
The products most often occurring in practice are of the type
(3
The factor P^ is here replaced by
Pm = al • aa- ••• am
and the co-product P^ by
-*» = am+l ' am+2 ' &m+3 ' '"
Another type is +ao
P=nan. (4
The products 3), 4) are simple, the product 1) is s-tuple. The
products 3), 4) may be called one-way and two-way simple product
when necessary to distinguish them.
242
GENERAL THEORY 248
Obviously the product P = 0, as
Pn = 1=0.
n
Hence P = 0, although no factor is zero. Such products are
zero products. Now we saw in I, 77 that the product of a
Unite number of factors cannot vanish unless one of its factors
vanishes. For this reason zero products hold an exceptional posi-
tion and will not be considered in this work. We therefore have
classed them among the divergent products. In the following
theorems relative to convergence, we shall suppose, for simplicity,
that there are no zero factors.
196. 1. For P = natl...tf to converge it is necessary that each P»
is convergent. If one of these PM converges, P is convergent and
P = P - P
J. -- J. ^ -L p .
The proof is obvious.
2. If the simple product P •= a^ • a2 • a3 ••• is convergent, its fac-
tors finally remain positive.
For, when P is convergent, | Pn \ > some positive number, for
n > some m. If now the factors after am were not all positive, Pn
and Pv could have opposite signs v>n, however large n is taken.
Thus Pn has no limit.
197. 1. To investigate the convergence or divergence of an
iniinite product P = IIaH...w when at>0, it is often convenient to
consider the series
called the associate logarithmic series. Its importance in this con-
nection is due to the following theorem :
The infinite product P with positive factors and the infinite series
L converge or diverge simultaneously. When convergent, P = eL,
L = log P.
For logP^L^ (1
PM = e V (2
244 INFINITE PRODUCTS
If P is convergent, P^ converges to a finite limit =£ 0. Hence
L^ is convergent by 1). If L^ is convergent, PM converges to a
finite limit =£ 0 by 2).
2. Example 1.
= l, 2, ...
is convergent for every x.
For, however large j x \ is taken and then fixed, we can take ra
so large that „
->0 n>m.
n
Instead of P we may therefore consider Pm.
n
Hence Ln = ^ Mnx^ • —
which is convergent.
The product P occurs in the expression of sin x as an infinite
product.
Let us now consider the product
n= ±1, ±2, ...
The associate logarithmic series L is a two-way simple series.
We may break it into two parts L', L", the first extended over
positive w, the second over negative n. We may now reason on
these as we did on the series 3), and conclude that Q converges
for every x.
3. Example 2. / 1\«
n
is convergent for any x different from
0, - 1, - 2, - 3, ...
GENERAL THEORY 245
For let p be taken so large that | x \ <p. We show that the
co-product / -. v x
converges for this x. The corresponding logarithmic series is
As each of the series on the right converges, so does L. Hence
G converges for this value of x.
198. 1. When the associate logarithmic series
Z=21ogati...tt , at > 0
is convergent, Um Jog ^ = ^ by 121< ^
|i|=oo
and therefore v -.
lira at,...,. = 1.
|l|=00
For this reason it is often convenient to write the factors
atl...,a of an infinite product P in the form 1 + &,,... v When P is
written in the form
we shall say it is written in its normal form. The series
we shall call the associate normal series of P.
2. 2%e infinite product
and z<« associate normal series
nverge or diverge simultaneously.
246 INFINITE PRODUCTS
For P and T v , ... ,
L = 2 log (1 + at)
converge or diverge simultaneously by 197. But A and L con-
verge or diverge simultaneously by 123, 4.
3. If the simple product P = «j • a2 -,as ••• z* convergent, an= 1.
For by 196, 2 the factors an finally become > 0, say for /i > wi.
Hence by 197, l the series
I log an an > 0
n=m
is convergent. Hence log an = 0. .*. an = 1.
199. Let R^ < RKt < ••• \ | = oo be a sequence of rectangular
cells. Then if P is convergent,
For P is a telescopic series and
200. 1. Let P=n(l+atl...lt).
We call ^=H(l + «tl...l,) , «t = | at |
the adjoint of P, and write
<$ = Adj P.
2. P converges, if its adjoint is convergent. We show that
e>0, X, |PM-P,|<c /*, v>X..
Since ^ is convergent,
is also convergent by 199. Hence
0<^,-^<e
But Pv — Pp is an integral rational function of the a's with
positive coefficients. Hence
IP — P I < <® -<$
I •* v -*• (u. l — -KM -KM."
GENERAL THEORY 247
3. When the adjoint of P converges, we say P is absolutely
convergent.
The reader will note that absolute convergence of infinite
products is defined quite differently from that of infinite
scries. At first sight one would incline to define the adjoint of
P=uall...l.
t-nK-J;
With this definition the fundamental theorem 2 would be false.
For let P=n(-l)»;
its adjoint would be, by this definition,
$=1.1.1. ...
Now *$„ = 1. • '. *$ is convergent. On the other hand,
Pn=(— l)n and this has no limit, as w=oo. Hence P is
divergent.
4. In order that P= TT(1 + «i, ...t,) converge absolutely, it is
necessary and sufficient that ^
converges absolutely.
Follows at once from 198, 2.
Example.
converges absolutely for every x.
Kor
is convergent.
201. 1. Making use of the reasoning similar to that employed
in 124, we see that with each multiple product
are associated an infinite number of simple products
Q=Uan,
and conversely.
248 INFINITE PRODUCTS
We have now the following theorems :
2. If an associate simple product Q is convergent, so is P, and
P=Q.
For since Q is convergent, we may assume that all the a's are
> 0 by 196, 2. Then
£ = e2iog«n by 197, 1,
= <?5iog«,1-i. by 124, 3,
= P by 197, l.
3. If the associate simple product Q is absolutely convergent, so
is P.
For let
«,,...>
an).
Since Q is absolutely convergent,
is convergent. Hence 11(1 + «tl...t ) is convergent by 2.
4. Let P= 11(1 + «tl...im) fo absolutely convergent. Then each
associate simple product Q= 11(1 + an) u absolutely convergent and
P=Q.
For since P is absolutely convergent,
ss...s
converges by 200, 4. But then by 124, 5
is convergent. Hence $ is absolutely convergent.
5. If P= Hatl...t is absolutely convergent, the factors a i...i >0
if they lie outside of some rectangular cell R^.
For since P converges absolutely, any one of its simple associ-
ate products Q= TLan converges. But then an>0 for n>m, by
198, 3. Thus ati...t > 0 if t lies outside of some R^.
6. From 5 it follows that in demonstrations regarding abso-
lutely convergent products, we may take all the factors > 0,
without loss of generality.
GENERAL THEORY 249
For
and all the factors of P^ are > 0, if /* is sufficiently large. This
we shall feel at liberty to do, without further remark.
7. A=U(l + ai ..... ) at>0
"/"/ T V 1 X1 , N
Z= 2 log(l + at| ...,.)
rge or diverge simultaneously.
For if A is convergent,
Sa,,...,.
is convergent by 200, 4. But then L is convergent by 123, 4.
The converse follows similarly.
202. 1. As in 124, 10 we may form from a given w-tuple
Product A^Ua^...^
as infinite number of conjugate w-tuple products
^ = lib, ...j
Sl **
where at = bj if i andj are corresponding lattice points in the two
systems.
We have now :
2. If A is absolutely convergent, so is B, and A = B.
For by 201, 6, without loss of generality, we may take all the
factors > 0.
Then A = e
= e
= B.
be an absolutely convergent m-tuple product.
be any p-tuple product formed of a part of or all the factors of A.
TJtt-n B is absolutely convergent.
250 INFINITE PRODUCTS
For 2 log «t is convergent.
Hence 2 log fy is.
Arithmetical Operations
203. Absolutely convergent products are commutative, and con-
versely.
For let
A = IK...,m
be absolutely convergent. Then its associate simple product
5i=n«B
is absolutely convergent and A = 21, by 201, 4. Let us now re-
arrange the factors of A, getting the product B. To it corre-
sponds a simple associate series 53 and B = 53. But 31 = 53 since
21 is absolutely convergent. Hence A = B.
Conversely, let A be commutative. Then all the factors atl....m
finally become > 0. For if not, let
Rl < Rz < ••• =00 (1
be a sequence of rectangular cells such that any point of $ftm lies
in some cell. We may arrange the factors at such that the partial
products corresponding to 1),
A A A
1 ' -"-2 ' 3
have opposite signs alternately. Then A is not convergent, which
is a contradiction. We may therefore assume all the a's > 0.
Then
A =
remains unaltered however the factors on the left are rearranged.
Hence v ,
21og<v..,m
is commutative and therefore absolutely convergent by 124, 8.
Hence the associate simple series
51 = 2 log an = 2 log (1 + 6n)
is absolutely convergent by 124, 5. Hence
2&
is convergent and therefore A is absolutely convergent.
ARITHMETICAL OPERATIONS 251
204. 1. Let A
«|-"i«
be absolutely convergent. Then the s-tuple iterated product
B=UU .-- II<r
/ , H*"1*
»i h ».
/.< absolutely convergent and A = B where i\ • •• ij is a permutation of
iv 4 ... i,.
For by 202, 3 all the products of the type
;uv absolutely convergent, and by I, 324
n = nn.
«.-|'l '.-I '.
Similarly the products of the type
n
are absolutely convergent and hence
n= n n n.
In this way we continue till we reach A and B.
2. We may obviously generalize 1 as follows :
Let
be absolutely convergent. Let us establish a 1 to 1 correspondence
between the lattice system 8 over which i = (il ••• O ranges, and the
I -I ft ice system 2ft over which
3 =O 11.7 12 "'^21.^22 "' 3r\3rt '"Jrp)
ranges. Then the p-tuple iterated product
= V ' V ' ' r*W**b
is absolutely convergent, and
A = B.
252 INFINITE PRODUCTS
3. An important special case of 2 is the following:
Let A = Uan , n=l, 2, ...
converge absolutely. Let us throw the an into the rectangular array
arl
Then ^ = n
converge absolutely, and
4. The convergent infinite product
associative.
For let
= GO.
We have to show that
Q=(l +
is convergent and P = Q.
This, however, is obvious. For
Hut when n = QO so does v.
Hence v ^ ,. D
lira ^n = lim jPn.
Remark. We note that wm+1 — mm may = oo with n.
ARITHMETICAL OPERATIONS 253
205. Let A = II<i,, ..... , B=Hbtt...
be convergent. Then
C=Ual-b. , 'J)=U^
Oi
are convergent and
Moreover if A, B are absolutely convergent, so are (?, D.
Let us prove the theorem regarding C ; the rest follows simi-
larly. We have C1 A Tt
Now by hypothesis A^ = A, B^ = B us fi = oo.
Hence C = A B
To show that 0 is absolutely convergent when A, B are, let us
write a, = 1 + at , bt = 1 + bt and set | ot | = «c , | bt | = ft.
Since A, B converge absolutely,
2 log (1 -f- «t) , 2 log (1 + ft)
are convergent. Hence
2 jlog(l + «0 + log(l + ft) | = 21og(l + «.)(! -f ft)
is absolutely convergent. Hence C is absolutely convergent
by 201, 7.
206. Example. The following infinite products occur in the
theory of elliptic functions :
They are absolutely convergent for all | 0| < 1.
For the series 2 I o2" I , 21 q**~l \
are convergent. We apply now 200, 4.
As an exercise let us prove the important relation
INFINITE PRODUCTS
For by 205,
P = n (1 + ^(l + ^"'^(l - ?2n~1)
Now all integers of the type 2 w, are of the type 4 n — 2 or 4 n.
Hence by 204, 3,
n (i - ?2n) = n (i - ?4n) n (i - g4»-2),
1 — g4" 1 -
= 1.
Uniform Convergence
207. /w £Ae limited or unlimited domain 91, fc?
i^Slog/.,...^...^,) , /t>0
uniformly convergent and limited. Then
is uniformly convergent in 91.
For F i
Now Lx = L uniformly. Hence by 144, l, F is uniformly con-
vergent.
208. If the adjoint of
is uniformly convergent in 91 (finite or infinite"), F is uniformly
convergent.
For if the adjoint product,
is uniformly convergent, we have
|^-^|<e n, v>\
for any a; in 51-
UNIFORM CONVERGENCE 256
But as already noticed in 200, 2, 1)
IP -- P I < I * — SB I
I •* M •* V I -i I TV Vf [•
Hence F is uniformly convergent.
209. TV,, product
F= no +/„... ..Ov-.o)
is unifonnlif convergent in the limited or unlimited domain ?(, if
^=^(l ..... (*,». *„) , £=1/1
is limited and uniformly convergent in 9L
For by 138, 2 the series
is uniformly convergent and limited in 8f- Then by 207, the
adjoint of F is uniformly convergent, and hence by 208, F is.
210. Let T-T , \
F(«, -••xm)
/" uniformly convergent at x = a. If each fi is continuous at a, JP
in also continuous at a.
This is a corollary of 147, 1.
211. 1. Let G = 2 | /,,...,.(*! '"xm) I converge in the limited
complete domain $1 having a as a limiting point. Let G and each
/t be continuous at a. Then
F(x, ... *„,)- 11(1 +/„...,.(*! - *„))
is continuous at a.
For by 149, 4, (7 is uniformly convergent. Then by 209, F is
uniformly convergent, and therefore by 210, Fis continuous.
2. Let G =2 | /,,...,.(:£! ••• £,„) | converge in the limited complete
domain SI, having x = a as limiting point. Let
Then lim n(l+/,1...,.(afl...ar1.)-n(l+ «,,.,.). (1
256 INFINITE PRODUCTS
For by 149, 6, Q- is uniformly convergent at x — a. It is also
limited near x = a. Thus by 209,
is uniformly convergent at a. To establish 1) we need now only
to apply 146, 1.
212. 1. Let J^n/^/aO , /t>0 (1
converge in 21= (a, a + 8). Then
log^=i = 21og/l. (2
If we can differentiate this series termwise in 51 we have
Thus to each infinite product 1) of this kind corresponds an infi-
nite series 3). Conditions for termwise differentiation of the series
2) are given in 153, 155, 156. Other conditions will be given in
Chapter XVI. '
2. Example. Let us consider the infinite product
0O) =1q*Q sin 7ncft(l - 2 f cos 2 TTX + ?4n) (1
i
which occurs in the elliptic functions.
Let us set
1 — un= 1 — 2 f* cos 2 TTX + q*n-
Then \un < 2 j q |2*+ | q |4n.
Thus if | q \ < 1, the product 1) is absolutely convergent for any x.
It is uniformly convergent for any x and for | q \ < r< 1.
If it is permissible to differentiate termwise the series obtained
by taking the logarithm of both sides of 1), we get
= 7T COt
fl .
^ 1 - 2 <?n cos 2 TTz + qin
If we denote the terms under the 2 sign in 2) by vn we have
—a
-
TIIK CIRCULAR FUNCTIONS
Now the series 2an converges if | q \ < 1. For setting bn=
tin- series Sft, is convergent in this case. Moreover,
lira £-" = 1.
"*=«&»
Thus we may differentiate term wise.
TJie Circular Functions
213. 1. Sin x and cos x as Infinite Products.
From the addition theorem
sin (mx + x) = sin (m + 1)# = sin mx cos x + cos mx sin x
m = 1, 2, 3 • • • we see that for an odd n
sin nx = a0 sin" x + al sin""1 x + ••• + an_j sin x
\\ lu*re the coefficients a are integers. If we set t = sin a:, we get
sin nx = Fn(t) = a0£" + a^"'1 + • • • + «„_!*. (1
Now Fn being a polynomial of degree w, it has n roots. They are
0,
. 7T . 2 TT
±sm— , ±sm — ,
n n
. w — 1 TT
± sin
~2~n'
corresponding to the values of x which make sin nx = 0. Thus
(2
Dividing through by
. « 71* . n
sin2 — sma
n
sin2
n-l
7T
n«7
ti
and denoting the new constant factor by a, 1), 2) give
a sin x
1-
sin2:c"
. «7T
sin2 —
j
sin^
. 2W— 1 7T
8111 - TT
n 2
(3
258
INFINITE PRODUCTS
To find a we observe that this equation gives
sin wz
sn a;
1-
Letting x= 0 we now get « = n. Thus putting this value of «
X
in 3), and replacing x by -, we have finally
sin x = n sin - P (x. n)
n
where
• *> *
in*
sin
1-
Bin—
=l, 2,
We note now that as n =00,
Similarly
. x
sin -
. x n ,
n sin - = x = x.
n x
n
W . X*
ir.2
sin
It seems likely therefore that if we pass to the limit n = <x> in
4X we shall get . n/- N
sinx = xP(x) (5
where -n, N -i
The correctness of 5) is easily shown.
Let us set
L (x, w) = log P (x, n) = 2 log
1-
in2
sn
n j
= logP(2;) = 21og(l-
THE CIRCULAR FUNCTIONS
We observe that
,11m P(x, n) = lim e**<n) = eUx) = P (a:)
259
provided
lim L(x, n) = L(x).
We have thus only to prove 7). Let us denote the sum of the
lirst m terms in 6) by Lm(x, w) and the sum of the remaining
by Lm(x, n). Then
n)-L(x)\<\Lm(x,n)-Lm(x)\+ \Lm(x,n) \ + |im(a:)|. (8
- < sin x < x,
2
Since for
we have
sin2-
z2
and hence for an ml so large that < 1, we have,
m1
I?"1
//
• a7"71"
in^ -
n J
log 1-
But the series
iis convergent. Hence for a sufficiently large m
Now giving m this fixed value, obviously for all n > some v the
first term on the right of 8) is < c/3, and thus 7) holds.
260 INFINITE PRODUCTS
2. In algebra we learn that every polynomial
aQ + alx + a2xz + •- + anxn
can be written as a product
«»(» - «i)(* - «2> ••• (*-«»)»
where 04, «2 ••• are its roots. Now
• x y/ . Ju
* t\
is the limit of a polynomial, viz. the first n terms of 9). It is
natural to ask, Can we not express sin x as the limit of a product
which vanishes at the zeros of sin x ? That this can be done we
have just shown in 1.
3. If we set x = ?r/2 in 5), it gives,
Hence ^ 2r-2r = 2 . 2 . 4 . 4 . 6 . 6 ...
2 (2r-l)(2r + l) 1 - 3 . 3 • 5 . 5 . 7 ...'
a formula due to Wallis.
4. From 5) we can get another expression for sin a;, viz. :
f x\ -
smx = xU(l- — }erw r = ± 1, ±2, ... (11
For the right side is convergent by 197, 2. If now we group
the factors in pairs, we have
x \ - — x*
rir) r*7r'2
This shows that the products in 5) and 11) are equal.
5. From 5) or 11) we have
sin x = lim Pn(#) = lim x YL' -
n=oo f=—n 87T
where the dash indicates that « = 0 is excluded.
THE CIRCULAR FUNCTIONS 261
214. We now show that
To this end we use the relation
sin 2 x = 2 sin x cos x.
Hence
cos x = ~
SB
(2w-l)27rV
'
from which 1) is immediate.
From 1) we have, as in 213, 4,
cosx=n(l- „ 2x' — Va*"w* " = 0, ±1» ±2,.- (2
V (2 n — I)TT/
215. From the expression of sin a:, cos x as infinite products,
their periodicity is readily shown. Thus from 213, 12)
Bufc
(^) x-ntr
Hence lim p^x + ^ = _ Hm p^^^
sin (a: + TT) = — sin x.
Hence BraCr + 2ir):-8in*
and thus sin 2; admits the period 2 TT.
216. 1. Infinite Series for tan #, cosec a;, ei<?.
If O<X<TT, all the factors in the product 213, 5) are positive.
llUS -- , 0<a-<7r.
262 INFINITE PRODUCTS
Similarly 214, 1) gives
log cos* = f log (l__l^ \ , Q<x<^. (2
To get formula} having a wider range we have only to square
the products 213, 5) and 214, 1). We then get
logr sin2 x = log £ + I log (l - -1 LY (3
i V rir*/
valid for any x such that sin x =£ 0 ; and
/ 4a^ \2
logcos^ = Slog^l-(28_1)Vj.
valid for any x such that cos x =£ 0.
If we differentiate 3), 4) we get
<6
2*EI^I^
2 ;
tw 3), 4).
Remark. The relations 5), 6) exhibit cot a:, tana; as a series of
rational functions whose poles are precisely the poles of the given
functions. They are analogous to the representation in algebra
of a fraction as the sum of partial fractions.
2. To get developments of sec a;, cosec #, we observe that
cosec x = tan | x -f- cot x.
Hence
cosec a: =22 -TO ^ 5H 5
= 1+ V
^
2
= |
a;
THE CIRCULAR FUNCTIONS
3. To get sec x, we observe that
fir \
cosec f — — x j = sec x.
Now
263
Hence
cosec — — x \ =
t
( «TT — x STT + x \
1 1
«TT — + ^ «TT + -
Let us regroup the terms of S, forming the series
T =
As
31 n
7T OTT
~2~ • ~2~
= o,
-7T — X
we see that T7 is convergent and = S. Thus
valid for all a; such that cos x 3= 0.
217. As an exercise let us show the periodicity of cot x from
216, 5). We have
n ^
cot x = lim Fn(x} = lim V
Now
x — mr
Letting n = oo we see that
lim F»(x + TT) = lim ^(x)
cot (x + TT) = cot a;.
and hence
264 .
INFINITE PRODUCTS
218. Development of log sin #, tan x, etc.* in power series.
From 216, 1)
i
log
sn x
-
x
(1
If we give to - —its limiting value 1 as x = 0, the relation 1)
x
holds for | x \ < TT.
Now for x < 7T
1 a;4
Thus
sin x _ a^ 1 a;4 1 z6
^2 9 _4 Q lie
a/ 7T •-> 7T O 7T
3267T6
1 r4
327T2 2347T4 3367T6
provided we sum this double series by rows. But since the series
is a positive term series, we may sum by columns, by 129, 2.
Doing this we get
1 » " -^ TT * |_ 1 ZT ~ l_l If ~ I
lub ~ -"8 2 "• 2 -"4 4 """ 5 6 fi '
a; 7T^ 7T* 7T0
where 1111
2%e relation 2) is valid for \ x \ < vr.
In a similar manner we find
24 x^ 26 a
7T4 7T6
(2
valid for \ x \ < ^- Here
A
.
ln 3n 5n
THE CIRCULAR FUNCTIONS 265
The terms of #„ are a part of Hn. Obviously
Tlu'se coefficients put in 3) give
7T 7T
valid for | x \ < ^- If we differentiate 4) and 2), we get
tanx= 2(2^-1)^ + 2(2*- l)54 + 2(2«-l)JH6+... (5
7T'
valid for \ x \ < ^ :
valid for 0 < \x\ < TT.
Comparing 5) with the development of tan x given 165, 3)
gives
JT 1.14-1. =^ = ! 2-^=B *^
~ 12 "*" 2s 32 "6 6 2!" 2!
1 ,
I+I+
7T4 1 23 7T4
B • ^
1
24 34
1+1.1
90 30 4 !
7T6 1 26 7T6
3 4!
1
2« 3eT
^k1-!
945 42 6!
7T8 1 27 ,r8
6 6!
fi •
9450 30 8 !
1 8!
is set
17.
- -**~lTTin D
(7
2n = -TO ^T -"2»-r (^
Then 5) gives
valid for |*|<^- The coefficients ^, -B8 ••• are called
nouillian numbers. From 7) we see
266 INFINITE PRODUCTS
From 6), 8) we get
cotan x - - = - V Tl^-^n-i*2"-1 (10
x £=! (/ n) ;
valid for 0 < \ x \ < TT.
219. Recursion formula for the Bernouillian Numbers.
If we set y(^) = tan x,
we have by Taylor's development
= 2(22" - I)g2n= 22»(22" - 1) ^
" 2»
Now by I, 408,
2n-l)(0)_(2W2-
From 1), 2) we get
9 ^
* / W — 1
_ 1\ 92n-5AO2n-4_1 -\
4
.-5~- =(-!)"-'. (3
We have already found JSV J53, B^ B~t ; it is now easy to find
successively :
Thus to calculate -B9, we have from 3)
29(210 - 1) ^ _ 9.8 27(28 - 1) JL .9-8.7.6 25C26 - 1) _!_
5 9 1-2 4 *30 1 . 2 . 3 • 4 " ' 3 42
Thus
*- 512^028 !'- 9 + «8- 2016
5 • 7936 _6^
512 . 1023 66'
THE B AND T FUNCTIONS 267
T/te B and F Functions
220. In Volume I we defined the B and F functions by means
of integrals:
F(w) = f e-'x«-ldx (2
»/o
which converge only when w, v > 0. Under this condition we saw
•
We propose to show that F(w) can be developed in the infinite
product / i\u
(4
i I
n
This product converges, as we saw, 197, 3, for any w=^0, — 1,
- 2, ••• From 201, 7 and 207 it is obvious that G- converges abso-
lutely and uniformly at any point u different from these singular
points. Thus the expression 4) has a wider domain of definition
than that of 2). Since G = F, as we said, for w > 0, we shall ex-
tend the definition of the F function in accordance with 4), for
negative u.
It frequently happens that a function f(x) can be represented
by different analytic expressions whose domains of convergence
are different. For example, we saw 218, 9), that tan x can be de-
veloped in a power series
valid for | x | < ^ . On the other hand,
__ _
1 ! 3 ! 5 ! sin x
tan x = - -5 - -j - = -
1 _ ar a?* cos x
21"1"!!"
268 INFINITE PRODUCTS
and
o
216, 6)
are analytic expressions valid for every x for which the function
tan x is defined.
221. 1. Before showing that Gr and F have the same values for
u > 0, let us develop some of the properties of the product Q- given
in 220, 4). In the first place, we have, by 210:
The function G~(u) is continuous, except at the points u = 0, — 1,
-2,...
Since the factors of 4) are all positive for u > 0, we see that
6r(w) is positive for u>0.
2. In the vicinity of the point x= — m, m = 0, 1, •••
n /- \ HCu)
Q-(u) = — ^
x + m
where H(ii) is continuous near this point, and does not vanish at
this point,
For /
m
where H is the infinite product Gr with one factor left out. As we
may reason on H as we did on 6r, we see H converges at the point
x = — m. Hence H^ 0 at this point. But ^Talso converges uni-
formly about this point ; hence H is continuous about it.
222. -j -I 9 f
6r=lim-
u (u + l)(w + 2) -"(u + n — 1)
To prove this relation, let us denote the product under the limi
sign by Pn. We have
34 » V A, . 1VA, . IV
THE B AND T FUNCTIONS 269
Also
Thus Pn = Grn. But #„ = 6r, hence Pw, is convergent and (r =
HIM 1\.
223. Eulers Constant. This is defined by the convergent series
It is easy to see at once that
by 218, 7). By calculation it is found that
C=. 577215-.
224. Another expression of Gr is
-Cu
(7 «* ?Ae Eulerian constant.
For when a > 0, a" = eu loga.
Hence
1+1*
-n
u
Now
and
-]e
w>
270 INFINITE PRODUCTS
are convergent. Hence
uIl(l+-\ *
\ *J
from which 1) follows at once, using 223.
225. Further Properties of G-.
Let us use the product
p /y> = l (
u (u + 1)
employed in 222. Then
As
— 1)
u
= u as n = oo
we get 1) from 2) at once on passing to the limit.
This follows from 1) by repeated applications.
where n is a positive integer.
4. &(
For
— , by 224, 1).
Sill 7TU
n.
Hence
1 1
u
e-CueCu
(1
(2
(5
THE B AND T FUNCTIONS 271
We now use 213, 5).
Let us note that by virtue of 1, 2 the value of Q- is known for
all ii >0, when it is known in the interval (0, 1). By virtue of
f>) (r is known for w<0 when its value is known for w>0.
Moreover the relation 5) shows the value of # is known in (£, 1)
wlu'ii its value is known in (0, £).
As a result of this we see O- is known when its values in the
interval (0, |) are known ; or indeed in any interval of length £.
Gauss has given a table of log Gr(u) for l<w<1.5 calculated
to ^0 decimal places. A four-place table is given in "A Short
Table of Integrals " by B. 0. Peirce, for 1 < u< 2.
5. ff(i) = V£. (6
For in 5) set u = ^. Then
Hence #(*) = ±VTT.
must take the plus sign here, since Q- > 0 when u > 0, by 221.
where n is a positive integer.
, by 1.
Similarly ff = - «- etc.
,-2n+ \ 2n-l 2m-3 3
Thus
226. Expressions for log (T(M), awe? t<« Derivatives.
From 224, 1) we have for w > 0,
i(u) = log a (M) = - CW-logu + 2f--log(l +
V *-w V
Differentiating, we get
(3
w
That this step is permissible follows from 155, 1.
272 INFINITE PRODUCTS
We may write 2)
Hl_- J- 1
(n u + n— 1J
(3
That the relations 2), 3) hold for any M=£ 0, — 1, — 2 ••• follows
by reasoning similar to that employed in 216. In general we have
In particular,
= - 0. (5
= (-l)'(r- 1)! J2,.
n'
227. Development of log 6r(w) in a Power Series. If Taylor's
development is valid about the point u = 1, we have
log 000 = I
or using 226, 5), and setting u = 1 -I- z,
log
We show now this relation is valid for — ^ < x < 1, by proving
that
•1
converges to 0, as 8 = oo .
For, if 0<z<l, then
Also if -
1 ,
The relation 1) is really valid for — 1 <rc< 1, but for our pur
pose it suffices to know that it holds in 31 = (— £, 1). Legendr
THE B AND T FUNCTIONS 273
has shown how the series 1) may be made to converge more
rapidly. We have for any x in ?l
2 n
This on adding and subtracting from 1) gives
log #(i + *) = - i«g(i + *) + (!- 0>+2(
2
Changing here x into — x gives
log (7(1 - *) = - log (i - x) - (i - o +
Subtracting this from the foregoing gives
log (7(1 + a?) - log
' l-x
From 225, 4
log (7(1 + x) + log (7(1 - a:) = log -
sin Tra:
This with the preceding relation gives
log (7(1 + x)
.d-O-Jlogl^+log^-ji^.,-!)^ (2
valid in SI.
This series converges rapidly for 0<a;<£, and enables us to
compute Gr(u) in the interval l<w<f. The other values of (7
may be readily obtained as already observed.
228. 1. We show now with Pringsheim* that (7(w) =F(w),/or
M>0.
We have for 0<r w<.l,
T(w + ri)=
= f
*/o
Annalen, vol. 31, p. 456.
274 INFINITE PRODUCTS
Now for any x in the interval (0, w),
since u > 0 and M — 1 < 0.
Also for any x in the interval (w, oo )
xu<xnu~l , xu>nv.
Hence
/»»» /**>
Jo Jn
fn f*>
< nu I e~xxn~1dx + nu-1 I e~xxndx.
«/0 »/n
Thus
Wu
/»n 1 /*°° 1 Cn
I e~xxn~ldx + - I e~*2;n<fo: --
«^o M»^O w»^o
Let us call these integrals ^4, .6, (7 respectively.
We see at once that
Also, integrating by parts,
[y>-z^,n~ln 1 /•» ^n
L^ +!( i-wto^JL.
w Jo w we"
Thus r(M + M)< ^..
>
wu
Hence
(w— 1) ! nu
where n-i
Now
n
,
1 ! 2 ! nil n + 1 J n\
THE B AND T FUNCTIONS 275
f or any m
m
"»>!+- +•••+
"^(i+sY
n/ \ n)
Since w may be taken large at pleasure,
lira vn = co
and hence
lira qn = 0.
Thus _,
n=» (n — 1) ! w"
But from F(w + 1)= wF(w) we have
_ -,
~
n*n — n nn -
also, as n = QO . Thus the relation 1) holds for 1 < w<2, and in
fact for any u > 0.
r(tt + w) = M(> + l) ... (u + n
we have ,,
u(u+ 1) ... (u + n— 1)
Hence using 1), 1N ,
-M
Letting w= oo, we get F(w)= (r(w) for any w>0, making use
1) and 222, 1).
2. Having extended the definition of F(M) to negative values
:>f u, we may now take the relation
(2
is a definition of the B function. This definition will be in
Accordance with 220, 1) for M, v > 0, and will define B for negative
hen the right side of 2) has a value.
CHAPTER VIII
AGGREGATES
Equivalence
229. 1. Up to the present the aggregates we have dealt with
have been point aggregates. We now consider aggregates in
general. Any collection of well-determined objects, distinguish-
able one from another, and thought of as a whole, may be called
an aggregate or set.
Thus the class of prime numbers, the class of integrable func
tions, the inhabitants of the United States, are aggregates.
Some of the definitions given for point aggregates apply obvi-
ously to aggregates in general, and we shall therefore not repeat
them here, as it is only necessary to replace the term point by
object or element.
As in point sets, 21 = 0 shall mean that 21 embraces no elements.
Let 21, 33 be two aggregates such that each element a of 2l is
associated with some one element b of 33, and conversely. We say
that 21 is equivalent to 33 and write
21-33-
We also say 21 and 33 are in one to one correspondence or are in
uniform correspondence. To indicate that a is associated with
in this correspondence we write
a~b.
2. If 21 ~ S3 and 33 ~ @, then 21 ~ g.
For let a ~ 5, b ~ c. Then we can set 21, G> in uniform corre-
spondence by setting a ~ c.
3. Let 21 = 33 + £ + £) + —
A = B + C+D+ ...
// 33 ~ B, 6 ~ C, .--, tJien 2( ~ A.
276
EQUIVALENCE 277
For we can associate the elements of 21 with those of A by
keeping precisely the correspondence which exists between the
elements of 53 and B, of G and (7, etc.
Example 1. 21 = 1, 2, 3, •••
53 = ap 03, a8, •••
If we set an~ n, 51 and 53 will stand in 1, 1 correspondence.
Example 2. 21 = 1, 2, 3, 4, •••
53 = 2, 4, 6, 8, .-
If we set n of 21 in correspondence with 2 w of 53, 21 and 53 will
be in uniform correspondence.
We note that 53 is a part of 21 ; we have thus this result : An
infinite aggregate may be put in uniform correspondence with a
partial aggregate of itself.
This is obviously impossible if 21 is finite.
Example 3. 21 = 1, 2, 3, 4, ...
53 = 10!, 102, 103, 104, ...
If we set n ~ 10", we establish a uniform correspondence be-
tween 21 and 53. We note again that 21 ~ 53 although 21 > 53.
Example 4- Let @ = {£}, where, using the triadic system,
£=-*A*a- In =0,2
denote the Cantor set of I, 272. Let us associate with £ the point
X — • * jC-tjC'(£JCn " " * IX
where xn = 0 when fn = 0, and = 1 when £n = 2 and read 1) in
the dyadic system.
Then \x\ is the interval (0, 1). Thus we have established a
uniform correspondence between Q. and the points of a unit interval.
In passing let us note that if | < £' and x, x1 are the correspond-
ing points in fx|, then x <xt.
This example also shows that we can set in uniform correspond-
ence a discrete aggregate with the unit interval.
We have only to prove that 6 is discrete. To this end consider
the set of intervals C marked heavy in the figure of I, 272. Ob-
278 AGGREGATES
viously we can select enough of these deleted intervals so that
their lower content is as near 1 as we choose. Thus
Cont (7=1.
As Cont C < 1, G is metric and its content is 1. Hence g is
discrete.
230. 1. Let K=a + A, 33 = £ + -#, where a, b are elements
of 21, 33 respectively. If 21 - 33, *A«n A ~ 5 and conversely.
For, since 21 ~ 33, each element a of 21 is associated with some
one element b of 33, and the same holds for 33. If it so happens
that a ~ /3, the uniform correspondence of ^4, 5 is obvious.
on the contrary « ~ 5' and £ ~ a', the uniform correspondence be-
tween A, B can be established by setting a' ~ 6' and having t
other elements in A, B correspond as in 21— 33.
2. We state as obvious the theorems:
No part 33 of a finite set 21 can be ~ 21.
No finite part 33 of an infinite set 21 can be ~ 21.
Cardinal Numbers
231. 1. We attach now to each aggregate 21 an attribute
called its cardinal number, which is defined as follows :
1° Equivalent aggregates have the same cardinal number.
2° If 21 is ~ to a part of 33, but 33 is not ~ 21 or to any part
of 21 the cardinal number of 91 is less than that of 33, or the
cardinal number of 33 is greater than that of 21. The cardinal
number of 21 may be denoted by the corresponding small
o or by Card 21.
The cardinal number of an aggregate is sometimes
power or potency.
If 21 is a finite set, let it consist of n objects or elemer
Then its cardinal number shall be n. The cardinal number c
a finite set is said to be finite, otherwise transfinite. It folk
from the preceding definition that all transfinite cardinal nui
bers are greater than any finite cardinal number.
CARDINAL NUMBERS 279
•_'. It is a property of any two finite cardinal numbers a, b that
either
a = b , or a > b , or a < b. (1
This property has not yet been established for transfinite car-
dinal numbers. There is in fact a fourth alternative relative to
:'l. v^, besides the three involved in 1). For until the contrary
has been shown, there is the possibility that :
• part of 31 is ~ 33, and no part of 33 is ~ 31.
The reader should thus guard against expressly or tacitly
assuming that one of the three relations 1) must hold for any
two rurdinal numbers.
3. We note here another difference. If 31, 33 ure finite with-
out c-ommon element,
Card (31 + 33) > Card St. (2
Let now 31 denote the positive even and 33 the positive odd
numbers. Obviously
Card (31 + 39) = Card 21 = Card 33
and the relation 2) does not hold for these transfinite numbers.
4. We have, however, the following :
Let 31 > 33, then
Card 31 > Card 33-
For obviously 33 is ~ to a part of 31, viz. 33 itself.
5. This may be generalized as follows :
A=B+C+I> + .»
If Card 33 < Card B , Curd £ < Card <7, etc.,
Card 31 < Card A.
For from Card 33 <. Card B follows that we can associate in 1,
1 correspondence the elements of 33 with a part or whole of B.
The same is true for (S, C'; £), D ; •••
Tli us we can associate the elements of 31 with a part or the
!e of A.
280 AGGREGATES
Enumerable Sets
232. 1. An aggregate which is equivalent to the system of
positive integers 3 or to a part of $ ig enumerable.
Thus all finite aggregates are enumerable. The cardinal num-
ber attached to an infinite enumerable set is X0, aleph zero.
At times we shall also denote this cardinal by e, so that
e = *V
2. Every infinite aggregate 21 contains an infinite enumerable set $Q.
For let «! be an element of 51 and
5t = a1 + 2tr
Then 2lj is infinite ; let #2 be one of its elements and
«,-<!, + «,.
Then 212 is infinite, etc.
Then
>o = #1, «2, ••••
is a part of 21 and forms an infinite enumerable set.
3. From this follows that
K0 is the least transfinite cardinal number.
233. The rational numbers are enumerable.
For any rational number may be written
m
-
n
where, as usual, m is relatively prime to n.
The equation
| m | + | n | =p (2
admits but a finite number of solutions for each value of
j» = 2, 3,4, -.
Each solution m, n of 2), these numbers being relatively prime,
gives a rational number 1). Thus we get, e.g.
±1.
±2, ± J.
±3, ±J.
±4, ±\ , ±| , ±|.
ENUMERABLE SETS 281
Let us now arrange these solutions in a sequence, putting those
corresponding to p = q before those corresponding to p = q + 1.
We get
*i » Y • r»'" (3
which is obviously enumerable.
234. Let the indices ij, tj, ••• tp ran^e over enumerable sets. Then
is enumerable.
For the equation
"i + ^-t- "• +VP = n'
where the i/s are positive integers, admits but a finite number
of solutions for each n = p, J0+1, p + 2, p + &--- Thus the
elements of
« = I6-! -"pi
nmy be arranged in a sequence
*i » J2 » *3 -•
by giving to w successively the values p, jo + 1, ••• and putting the
elements bVi...Vp corresponding to n= q+ 1 after those correspond-
ing to n = q.
Thus the set 55 is enumerable. Consider now 31. Since each
index tm ranges over an enumerable set, each value of im as t'm is
associated with some positive integer as m' and conversely. We
may now establish a 1, 1 correspondence between 51 and SQ by
setting
0>nX - m'f ~ aij«; - £•
Hence 91 is enumerable.
235. 1. An enumerable set of enumerable aggregates form an
enumerable aggregate.
For let 91, 53, (5 ••• be the original aggregates. Since they form
an enumerable set, they can be arranged in the order
oc or or f\
jJlj , J^ , a8 ,
But each 9lw is enumerable ; therefore its elements can be
arranged in the order
282 AGGREGATES
Thus the a-elements in 1) form a set
\amn\ m, n,= 1, 2, •••
which is enumerable by 234.
2. The real algebraic numbers form an enumerable set.
For each algebraic number is a root of a uniquely determined
irreducible equation of the form
xn+ a^x"'1 + ••• + an = 0,
the a's being rational numbers. Thus the totality of real algebraic
numbers may be represented by
t Pn, 0,02 ••• an \
where the index n runs over the positive integers and a^ ••• an range
over the rational numbers.
3. Let 51, 33 be two enumerable sets. Then
Card 31 = Card33 = X0.
Card (21+23 )=K0-
And in general if 3lx, 312 ••• are an enumerable set of enumerable
aggregates, Card (Sj ,«,,-) = «o-
This follows from 1.
236. Every isolated aggregate 31, limited or not, forms an enumer-
able set.
For let us divide 9?m into cubes of side 1. Obviously these form
an enumerable set (/j, Cz---. About each point a of 31 in any Cn
as center we describe a cube of side <r, so small that it contains no
other point of 31. This is possible since 31 is isolated. There are but
a finite number of these cubes in Cn of side <r = -, v= 1, 2, 3, •••
v
for each v. Hence, by 235, 1, 31 is enumerable.
237. 1. Every aggregate of the first species 31, limited or not, in
enumerable.
For let 31 be of order n. Then
31 = 31, + «;
ENUMERABLE SETS 283
where Slt denotes the isolated points of SI and 3lp the proper limit-
ing points of SI-
Similarly,
si; = a^ + a?
a? = a;,. + a;"
Thus,
But Sl(n) is finite and 21<,n) < SJ(n).
Thus SI being the sum of n + 1 enumerable sets, is enumerable.
2. If 31' is enumerable, so is 31.
For as in 1,
21 = 2lt + Si;
and 2i,<2T.
,
238. 1. Every infinite aggregate 21 contains a part 33 such that
8~«.
For let (5 = (ax, a2, a3 •••) be an infinite enumerable set in 21,
so that
SI = @ + g.
Let (g = ax + j£.
To establish a uniform correspondence between E, (5 let us
associate an in (g with an+1 in J57. Thus (g ~ J^.
We now set
Obviously 31 ~ 53 since J?~ (5, and the elements of g- are common
to 21 and 33.
2. -Z^Sl ~ 53 are infinite, each contains a part Slj, Sgj
21-33! , 93~2lr
For by 1, 21 contains a part Stj such that 21 ~ 2^. Similarly,
33 contains a part 33j such that 33~33r As 21 ~ 33, we have the
theorem.
284 AGGREGATES
239. 1. A theorem of great importance in determining
whether two aggregates are equivalent is the following. It is
the converse of 238, 2.
then ™ m
\\ l^*-> -x_? •
In the correspondence 2lj ~ 33, let 212 be the elements of 2lt
associated with 33j • Then
212 ~ 33X ~ 21
and hence 9f 9f f~\
But as 2lx > 2^, we would infer from 1) that also
21 ~V (2
As 2lx ~ 33 by hypothesis, the truth of the theorem follows at
once from 2).
To establish 2) we proceed thus. In the correspondence 1), let
2(3 be that part of 212 which ~ 2lx in 21. In the correspondence
2lx ~ 2t3, let 214 be that part of 213 which ~ 212 in 2lx .
Continuing in this way, we get the indefinite sequence
21 > 2^ > 21, > 2*3 > .-
such that y, ™ ^
Let now 91 — 9r u K 9f — 9f _u K
Then 2l = X)4-S -HS V @ + S + •- (3
and similarly • 9T_<Ts_i_($ifcifr re
We note that we can also write
9j( = ;£> + (£„ -f £2 + GL + (L + ••• (4
Now from the manner in which the sets 2t3, 214 ••• were obtained,
it follows that
Thus the sets in 4) correspond uniformly to the sets directly
above them in 3), and this establishes 1).
ENUMERABLE SETS 285
2. In connection with the foregoing proof, which is due to
Bem&tein, the reader must guard against the following error. It
does not in general follow from
21 = 21! + ^, 2T2=2l3 + ($3 , 2t~2(2 , «!-«,
that K K
£1 ~C3
which is the first relation in 5).
Example. Let 31 = (1, 2, 3, 4, •••)•
211 = (2, 3, 4, 5.-) , 212=(3, 4, 5, 6-..)
213=(5, 6, 7, 8-).
g1 = l <53=(3,4).
Now 21, 21 r 51 2 , 213 are all enumerable sets ; hence
21-212 , 2t!~2l3.
But obviously G^ is not equivalent to @3, since a set containing
only one element cannot be put in 1 to 1 correspondence with a
set consisting of two elements.
240. 1. 7/>2l>«>S, and%~&, then 21-33.
For by hypothesis a part of 33, viz. (£, is ~2l. But a part of
is ~33, viz. S& itself. We apply now 239.
2. Let a. be any cardinal number. If
a < Card $<«,
then a = Card«.
For let Card 21 = «. Then from
a < CardS
it follows that 21 ~ a part or the whole of SS ; while from
Card $d < «
it follows that 33 is ~ a part or the whole of 21.
3. Any part SQ of an enumerable set 21 is enumerable.
For if 33 is finite, it is enumerable. If infinite,
Card33>K0.
On the other hand
Card S< Card 21 = K0.
286 AGGREGATES
4. Two infinite enumerable sets are equivalent.
For both are equivalent to $> the set of positive integers.
241. 1. Let (5 be any enumerable set in 31 ; set 21 = (£ + 53. If
53 is infinite, 31 ~ 53.
For 53 being infinite, contains an infinite enumerable set $.
Let 53 = $ + ®. Then
+ 8~8- Hence 21-53.
2. We may state 1 thus :
Card (31 -(5)= Card 31
provided 31 — (5 ts infinite.
3. From 1 follows at once the theorem :
Let 31 be any infinite set and (5 an enumerable set. Then
Some Space Transformations
242. 1. Let T be a transformation of space such that to each
point x corresponds a single point XT, and conversely.
Moreover, let a;, y be any two points of space. After the trans-
formation they go over into XT, yT. If
Dist (#, y) = Dist (a^y , y^)
we call 2* a displacement.
If the displacement is defined by
x'1 = xl + a1 , ••• x'm = xm + am
it is called a translation.
If the displacement is such that all the points of a line in space
remain unchanged by T, it is called a rotation whose axis is the
fixed line.
THE CARDINAL t 287
If 9? denotes the original space, and fRT the transformed space
after displacement, we have, obviously,
2. Let =te =te t Q a
Then when a; ranges over the m-\vny space 3E, y ranges over an
m-\va.y space 9). If we set x ~ y as defined by 1),
Also Dist (0, #) = t Dist (0, z).
We call 1) a transformation of similitude. If t > 1, a figure in
space is dilated ; if t < 1, it is contracted.
3. Let (> be any point in space. About it as center, let us de-
scribe a sphere S of radius R. Let P be any other point. On the
join of P, Q let us take a point P' such that
T-fcO
Dist (P', (?) =
Dist (P, QJ
Then P' is called the inverse of P with respect to S. This trans-
formation of space is called inversion. Q is the center of inversion.
Obviously points without S go over into points within, and con-
versely. As P = oo , P' = Q.
The correspondence between the old and new spaces is uniform,
except there is no point corresponding to Q.
Tlie Cardinal c
243. 1. All or any part of space @ may be put in uniform cor-
respondence with a point set lying in a given cube C.
For let @t denote the points within and on a unit sphere S about
the origin, while @e denotes the other points of space. By an in-
version we can transform (£>„ into a figure <§>,• lying in S. By a
transformation of similitude we can contract ©t, ®,- as much as we
choose, getting ©[, @}. We may now displace these figures so
as to bring them within C in such a way as to have no points in
common, the contraction being made sufficiently great. The
288 • AGGREGATES
correspondence between <S and the resulting aggregate is obviously
uniform since all the transformations employed are.
As a result of this and 240, 1 we see that the aggregate of all
real numbers is ~ to those lying in the interval (0, 1) ; for example,
the aggregate of all points of 9?m is ~ to the points in a unit cube,
or a unit sphere, etc.
244. 1. The points lying in the unit interval 21 = (0*, 1*) are
not enumerable.
For if they were, they could be arranged in a sequence
Let us express the a's as decimals in the normal form. Then
Consider the decimal
also written in the normal form, where
T , 1 , I ,
0-t ^ CL-t j , On '=f=' MO o 5 "a ' Q>9 3 ? " "
Then b lies in 21 and is yet different from any number in 1).
2. We have (0*, 1*) ~ (0, 1) , by 241, 3,
~(a, J) , by 243,
where a, b are finite or infinite.
Thus the cardinal number of any interval, finite or infinite,
with or without its end points is the same.
We denote it by c and call it the cardinal number of the recti-
linear continuum, or of the real number system 9? .
Since 9? contains the rational number system R, we have
3. The cardinal number of the irrational or of the transcendental
numbers in any interval 21 is also c.
For the non-irrational numbers in 21 are the rational which are
enumerable ; and the non-transcendental numbers in 21 are the
algebraic which are also enumerable.
THE CARDINAL C 289
4. The cardinal number of the Cantor set Gt of I, 272 is c.
For each point a of (5 has the representation in the triadic
system
a = • a^a^ ••• , a = 0, 2.
But if we read these numbers in the dyadic system, replacing
each an = 2 by the value 1, we get all the points in the interval
(0, 1). As there is a uniform correspondence between these two
sets of points, the theorem is established.
245. An enumerable set 21 is not perfect, and conversely a perfect
set is not enumerable.
For suppose the enumerable set
21 = «j, «2 - (1
were perfect. In D^^a^ lies an infinite partial set 2lj of 21,
since by hypothesis 21 is perfect. Let a^ be the point of lowest
index in 2lx. Let us take r^<rl such that Dr2(aOTj) lies in
D*(a^). In jDrf(ams) lies an infinite partial set 212 of 2lr Let
ams be the point of lowest index in 2^, etc.
Consider now the sequence
It converges to a point a by I, 127, 2. But a lies in 21, since this
is perfect. Thus a is some point of 1), say a = a,. But this
leads to a contradiction. For a, lies in every Dr^(a»»n) ; on the
other hand, no point in this domain has an index as low as mn
which = QO, as n = oo. Thus 21 cannot be perfect.
Conversely, suppose the perfect set 21 were enumerable. This
is impossible, for we have just seen that when 21 is enumerable it
cannot be perfect.
246. Let 21 be the union of an enumerable set of aggregates 2ln
each having the cardinal number c. Then Card 21 = c.
For let $„ denote the elements of 2ln not in 211,212 »• 2tn_!.
21 = 211 + <B2+<B8+-.-
Let (5n denote the interval (n — 1, w*). Then the cardinal
number of St + (5a + ••• is c.
290 AGGREGATES
But Card«n< Card£n.
Hence Card 21 < c , by 231, 6. (1
•Oil the other hand,
Card 21 > Card 2^ = c. (2
From 1), 2) we have the theorem, by 240, 2.
247. 1. As already stated, the complex x= (a^, z2, ••• xn} de-
notes a point in w-way space. Let 2^, z2, • •« denote an infinite
enumerable set. We may also say that the complex
x= (ajj, #2, ... in inf.)
denotes a point in oo -way space $lx.
2. Let 21 denote a point set in 9[{n, w finite or infinite. Then
Card 21 < c. (1
For let us first consider the unit cube (£ whose coordinates xm
range over 33 = (0*, 1*). Let £) denote the diagonal of (5. Then
c = Card £) < Card (5. (2
On the other hand we show Card (5 < c.
For let us express each coordinate xm as a decimal in normal
form. Then
l
x -
Let us now form the number
V = • «H«12a2lal3a22a23 "'
obtained by reading the above table diagonally. Let 9) denote the
set of y's so obtained as the x's range over their values. Then
»<»•
For the point y, for example, in which aln= 0, n = 1, 2, •«• lies
in $8 but not in 9) as otherwise xl — 0. Let us now set x ~ y.
Then (5 ~ ty and hence Cftrd g < c (3
From 2), 3) we have Card (5 = c.
THE CARDINAL c 291
Let us now complete (S by adding its faces, obtaining the set C.
By a transformation of similitude ^we can bring OT within (5.
Hence Card £ > Card 0.
On the other hand, (5 is a part of (7, hence
Card (5 < Card G.
Thus Card C — c. The rest of the theorem follows now easily.
248. Let i§ = \f\ denote the aggregate of one-valued continuous
functions over a unit cube (£ in 9?n.
Then Cardie.
Let C denote the rational points of (£, i.e. the points all of
whose coordinates are rational. Then any f is known when its
values over C are known. For if a is an irrational point of (£,
we can approach it over a sequence of rational points aj, a2 ••• = a.
But / being continuous, /(a) = lim/(an), and / is known at a.
On the other hand, C being enumerable, we can arrange its points
in a sequence „_
O — <?j , <?j ,
Let now 9?^ be a space of an infinite enumerable number of
dimensions, and let y = (^, yz •••) denote any one of its points.
Let f have the value r)l at Cj, the value rjz at c2 and so on for
the points of C. Then the complex T/J, 7/2, ••• completely deter-
mines f in (£. But this complex also determines the point
i)= (T/J, i/2 •••) in Sft^. We now associate / with rj. Thus
Card $ <. Card $ = c.
But obviously Card $ > c, for among the elements of ^ there
is an/ which takes on any given value in the interval (0, 1), at
a given point of (5.
249. There exist aggregates whose cardinal number is greater
than any given cardinal number.
Let -59= \b\ be an aggregate whose cardinal number b is given.
Let a be a symbol so related to ® that it has arbitrarily either
the value 1 or 2 corresponding to each 6 of 53. Let 51 denote the
292 AGGREGATES
aggregate formed of all possible a's of this kind, and let a be its
cardinal number.
Let ft be an arbitrary element of $8. Let us associate with ft
that a which has the value 1 for b = ft and the value 2 for all
other Vs. This establishes a correspondence between 53 and a
part of 21. Hence
a^b.
Suppose a = b. Then there exists a correspondence which
associates with each b some one a and conversely. This is
impossible.
For call ab that element of 21 which is associated with b. Then
ab has the value 1 or 2 for each ft of 53. There exists, however,
in 21 an element a' which for each ft of 53 has just the other
determination than the one ab has. But a' is by hypothesis
associated with some element of 53, say that
a' = ab, .
Then for b = 6', a' must have that one of the two values 1, 2
which ab' has. But it has not, hence the contradiction.
250. The aggregate of limited integrable functions $ defined over
2t = (0, 1) has a cardinal number f > c.
For let f(x) = 0 in 21 except at the points £ of the discrete
Cantor set of I, 272, and 229, Ex. 4. At each point of g let /
have the value 1 or 2 at pleasure. The aggregate © formed of
all possible such functions has a cardinal number > c, as the
reasoning of 249 shows. But each f is continuous except in (5,
which is discrete. Hence / is integrable. But $ > ©. Hence
f>c.
Arithmetic Operations with Cardinals
251. Addition of Cardinals. Let 21, 53 be two aggregates with-
out common element, whose cardinal numbers are a, b. We define
the sum of a and b to be
Card (21, 33)=a + b.
ARITHMETIC OPERATIONS WITH CARDINALS 293
We have now the following obvious relations :
K6 + /i = N0 , n a positive integer. (1
KO+ '•• 4-K0 = K0 , n terms. (2
KQ + SO+ ••• = X0 i an infinite enumerable set of terms. (3
If the cardinal numbers of 21, 33, Q are a, b, c, then *
a + (b + c) = (a + b) + c, ^
a + b = b + a- \^~
The first relation states that addition is associative, the second
that it is commutative.
252. Multiplication.
1. Let 31 = {a}, 53 = fJj have the cardinal numbers a, b. The
union of all the pairs (a, b) forms a set called the product of 31 and
33. It is denoted by 21 • 33. We agree that (a, i) shall be the
same as (6, a). Then
X •$«$•*.
We define the product of a and b to be
Card SI . $ = Card S3-5l = a-b = b-a.
2. "We Aave obviously the following formal relations as in finite
cardinal numbers : -. , <^ .,
a(b • c) = (a • b)c, ~^
a • b = b • a, -^
o(b + c) = ab + ac, -'"
which express respectively the associative, commutative, and dis-
tripulative properties of cardinal numbers.
Example 1. Let §l=[a|, $& = \b\ denote the points on two
indefinite right lines. Then
If we take a, b to be the coordinates of a point in a plane 9?2,
then 8* 9» 91,.
» The reader should note that here, as in the immediately following articles, c is
simply the cardinal number of (J which is any set, like 21, S3 •••
294 AGGREGATES
Example 2. Let 21 = \a\ denote the family of circles
Let 33 = {6| denote a set of segments of length b. We can
interpret (a, J) to be the points on a cylinder whose base is 1)
and whose height is b. Then 21 • 33 is the aggregate of these
cylinders.
253. 1. K0 = n • K0 , or nt = e. (1
For let <v, ,
9< = (>!, a2> '•• an)>
(5 =(>!, e2 ••• in inf.)
The cardinal number of the set on the left is wK0, while the
cardinal number of the set on the right is X0 .
2. ec = c. (2
For let (5 = \c\ denote the points on a right line, and (5 = (1, 2,
3,.->
Then ©£={O><0?
may be regarded as the points on a right line ln. Obviously,
Card {Znj=c.
Hence
ec = Card (gg = c.
254. Exponents. Before defining this notion let us recall a
problem in the theory of combinations, treated in elementary
algebra.
Suppose that there are 7 compartments
Oj» C2< ••• Cy,
and that we have k classes of objects
ARITHMETIC OPERATIONS WITH CARDINALS 295
Let us place an object from any one of these classes in Cv an
object from any one of these classes in (72"'and so on, for each
compartment. The result is a certain distribution of the objects
from these k classes K, among the 7 compartments 0.
The number of distributions of objects from k classes among 7
compartments is ky.
For in Cl we may put an object from any one of the k classes.
Thus C^ may be filled in k ways. Similarly (72 may be filled in
k ways. Thus the compartments C^, <7a may be filled in k2 ways.
Similarly 0j, (72, <73 may be filled in k3 ways, etc.
255. 1. The totality of distributions of objects from k classes
K among the 7 compartments C form an aggregate which may be
denoted by go
We call it the distribution of K over O. The number of distri-
bution of this kind may be called the cardinal number of the set,
and we have then Card K° = ky
2. What we have here set forth for finite 0 and JTmay be ex-
tended to any aggregates, 21 = jaj, 33 = \b\ whose cardinal num-
bers we call a, b. Thus the totality of distributions of the a's
among the 6's, or the distribution of 21 over 53, is denoted by
«»,
and its cardinal number is taken to be the definition of the symbol
o*. Thus, Card- 21® = a*.
256. Example 1. Let
xn + a^"-1 + ••• + an = 0 (1
have rational number coefficients. Each coefficient at can range
over the enumerable set of elements in the rational number
system R = fr|, whose cardinal number is K0. The n coefficients
form a set 21 = («t, ••• an) = fa}. To the totality of equations 1)
corresponds a distribution of the r's among the a's, or the set
R*
whose cardinal number is
Kn — pn
o — c •
296 AGGREGATES
As Card R* = X0 = e
we have the relation :
NO = KO ' or en = e
for any integer n.
On the other hand, the equations 1) may be associated with
the complex
(«!, ••• an),
and the totality of equations 1) is associated with
e = K«i, - <oj.
!(«!, «2)}=
{(«!,
Hence ^ , , , ', , ,
(s = {oj| . [a,j ... \an\.
Card (5 = c • e • ••• e , w times as factor.
Bufc Card (5 = Card R*,
since each of these sets is associated uniformly with the equations
1). Thus .. ,
en = e • e • ••• e , w ftwes asjactor.
2, > • , etc.
257. Example 2. Any point a; in m-way space 9?m depends on
m coordinates xv z2, ••• xm, each of which may range over the set
of real numbers 9?, whose cardinal number is c. The m coordi-
nates #! ••• xm form a finite set
£ =<>!, ••• xm}.
Thus to SRn = \x\ corresponds the distribution of the numbers in
9?, among the m elements of X, or the set
K*
whose cardinal number is
cm.
As Card ft* = c
we have
cm = c for any integer m. (1
As in Example 1 we show
cm = c • c • •>• c , m times as factor.
ARITHMETIC OPERATIONS WITH CARDINALS 297
258.
To prove this we have only to show that
2tSB+e and SI93 . 51s
can be put in 1-1 correspondence. But this is obvious. For
the set on the left is the totality of all the distributions of the
elements of 21 among the sets formed of 33 and (L On the other
hand, the set on the right is formed of a combination of a distri-
bution of the elements of 51 among the SJ3» and among the (£. But
such a distribution may be regarded as the distribution first con-
sidered.
259. (a*)' = aK (1
We have only to show that we can put in 1-1 correspondence
the elements of
(SI93)2 and 5l®'e. (2
Let 21 = {«{, 93 = \b\, (5 = \c\. We note that 21s is a union of
distributions of the a's among the J's, and that the left side of 2)
is formed of the distributions of these sets among the c's. These
are obviously associated uniformly with the distributions of the
a's among the elements of 23 • (£.
260. 1. cn = Oe)n = mne = m* = c (1
where rw, n are positive integers.
For each number in the interval (5 = (0, 1*) can be represented
in normal form once and once only by
• a^ag ... in the ra-adic system, (2
where the 0 < as < m. [I, 145] .
Now the set of numbers 2) is the distribution of 2ft =(0, 1, 2,
•>. m — 1) over (5 = (oj, «2> as '")' or
whose cardinal number is
m*.
On the other hand, the cardinal number (5 is c.
AGGREGATES
Hence, m* = c.
As we = c, we have 1), using 1) in 257.
2. TJie result obtained in 247, 2 may be stated :
c' = c. (3
3. ec = c. (4
For obviously we < ee < ce.
But by 3), ce = c and by 1) we = c.
261. 1. The cardinal number t of all functions f (x^ ••• xm) which
take on but two values in the domain of definition 51, of cardinal num-
ber a, is 2 «.
Moreover, 2 21 > a.
This follows at once from the reasoning of 249.
2. £e£ f be the cardinal number of the class of all functions de-
fined over a domain 51 whose cardinal number is c. Then
For the class of functions which have but two values in 51 is by
On the other hand, obviously
But
cc = (2e)c, by 260, 1)
= 2ec, by 259, 1)
= 2S by 253, 2).
Thus, cc = 2 c.
That f > c
follows from 250, since the class of functions there considered lies
in the class here considered.
3. The cardinal number t of the class of limited integrable func-
'tions in the interval 51 is = f, the cardinal number of all limited
functions defined over 51.
NUMBERS OF LIOUVILLE 299
For let £) be a Cantor set in 21 [I, 272]. Being discrete, any
limited function defined over £) is integrable. But by 229, Ex. 4,
the points of 21 may be set in uniform correspondence with the
points of 3).
4. The set of all functions
+... (2
which are the sum of convergent series, and whose terms are continu-
ous in 21, lias the cardinal number c.
For the set ^ °f continuous functions in "21 has the cardinal
number c by 248. These functions are to be distributed among
the enumerable set (§ of terms in 2). Hence the set of these
functions is ~
whose cardinal number is
c°=c.
Remark. Not every integrable function can be represented by
the series 2).
For the class of integrable functions has a cardinal number > c,
by 250.
5. The cardinal number of all enumerable sets in an m-way space
9?mwc.
For it is obviously the cardinal number of the distribution of
9?m over an enumerable set (5, or
Card W® = cc = c.
lumbers of Liouville
262. In I, 200 we have defined algebraic numbers as roots of
equations of the type
where the coefficients a are integers. All other numbers in 9? we
said were transcendental. We did not take up the question
whether there are any transcendental numbers, whether in fact,
not all numbers in 9? are roots of equations of the type 1).
300
The first to actually show the existence of transcendental num-
bers was Liouville. He showed how to form an infinity of such
numbers. At present we have practical means of deciding
whether a given number is algebraic or not. It was one of the
signal achievements of Hermite to have shown that e = 2.71818 •••
is transcendental.
Shortly after Lindemann, adapting Hennite's methods, proved
that ?r= 3.14159 ••• is also transcendental. Thereby that famous
problem the Quadrature of the Circle was answered in the negative.
The researches of Hermite and Lindemann enable us also to form
an infinity of transcendental numbers. It is, however, not our pur-
pose to give an account of these famous results. We shall limit
our considerations to certain numbers which we call the numbers
of Liouville.
In passing let us note that the existence of transcendental num-
bers follows at once from 235, 2 and 244, 2.
For the cardinal number of the set of real algebraic number is
e, and that of the set of all real numbers is c, and c > e.
263. In algebra it is shown that any algebraic number a is a
root of an irreducible equation,
whose coefficients are integers without common divisor. We say
the order of a is m.
We prove now the theorem
Let
V)
rn = — , pn, qn relatively prime,
In
= a, an algebraic number of order m, as n = oo. Then
For let « be a root of 1). We may take 8>0 so small that
/(V)=£ 0 in D6*(«), and « so large that rn lies in Da(«), for n > s.
Thus
I ff* M aoP» ~^~ a\Pn 9n~^~ '" + anf[n -~> • ^o
l/(rn)|= - . -^, 0>
NUMBERS OF LIOUVILLE 301
for n > a, since the numerator of the middle member is an integer,
and hence > 1.
On the other hand, by the Law of the Mean [I, 397],
where y9 lies in Z>s(«). Now /(a)=0 and /'(£)< some M.
Hence /., >. -.
on using 3). But however large M is, there exists a v^ such that
qn > M, for any n > v. This in 4) gives 2).
264. 1. The numbers
j _ al , a2 i a3 i /i
~ 101! 102! 103!
where an < 10n, awe? wo£ aW o/ them vanish after a certain index, are
transcendental.
For if L is algebraic, let its order be m. Then if Ln denotes
the sum of the first n terms of 1), there exists a v such that
rj=\L-Ln >^^ , forn>v. (2
But .
v1 being taken sufficiently large. But 3) contradicts 2).
The numbers 1) we call the numbers of Liouville.
2. The set of Liouville numbers has the cardinal number c.
For all real numbers in the interval (0*, 1) can be represented
where not all the 6's vanish after a certain index. The numbers
X A_ Ja_ A_
" ! 102! 103!
can obviously be put in uniform correspondence with the set j/8{.
Thus Card \\\ =c. But \L\ > \\\, hence Card \L\ >c. On the
other hand, the numbers \L\ form only a part of the numbers in
(0*, 1). Hence Card \L\ < c.
CHAPTER IX
ORDINAL NUMBERS
Ordered Sets
265. An aggregate 21 is ordered, when a, b being any two of
its elements, either a precedes 6, or a succeeds J, according to some
law ; such that if a precedes 6, and b precedes c, then a shall pre-
cede c. The fact that a precedes b may be indicated by
a<b.
Then a>b
states that a succeeds b.
Example 1. The aggregates
1, 2, 3, -.
2, 4, 6, ...
-3, -2, -1,0,1,2,3,.-
are ordered.
Example 2. The rational number system R can be ordered in
an infinite variety of ways. For, being enumerable, they can be
arranged in a sequence
' i •> ' a ' ' 8 ' " ' *•"
Now interchange r^ with rn. In this way we obtain an infinity
of sequences.
Example 3. The points of the circumference of a circle may be
ordered in an infinite variety of ways.
For example, let two of its points Px, P2 make the angles a+ 0r
a + #2 with a given radius, the angle B varying from 0 to "!TT.
Let Pl precede Pz when 81 < 02.
302
ORDERED SETS 303
Example 4- The positive integers $ may be ordered in an infi-
nite variety of ways besides their natural order. For instance, we
may write them in the order
1, 3, 5, ... 2, 4, 6, ...
so that the odd numbers precede the even. Or in the order
1, 4, 7, 10, ... 2, 5, 8, 11, ... 3, 6, 9, 12, ...
and so on. We may go farther and arrange them in an infinity
of sets. Thus in the first set put all primes ; in the second set
the products of two primes ; in the third set the products of
three primes; etc., allowing repetitions of the factors. Let any
number in set m precede all the numbers in set n>m. The num-
bers in each set may be arranged in order of magnitude.
Example 5. The points of the plane 9t2 may be ordered in an
infinite variety of ways. Let Ly denote the right line parallel to
the a>-axis at a distance y from this axis, taking account of the sign
of y. We order now the points of 9?2 by stipulating that any
point on L^ precedes the points on any Ly,, when y' < y" , while
points on any Ly shall have the order they already possess on that
line due to their position.
266. Similar Sets. Let 51, 53 be ordered and equivalent. Let
a ~ A, a ~ $. If when a < a in 21, b < ft in 53, we say 21 is similar
to 53, and write 9f ~ «»
Thus the two ordered and equivalent aggregates are similar
when corresponding elements in the two sets occur in the same
relative order.
Example 1. Let s>r — 1 9 Q
•A — 1, .£, o, ...
53 = aj, a2, a3, •••
In the correspondence 21 ~ 53, let n be associated with an. Then
21^53-
Example 2. Let or _ 1 9 Q
*l — A, ^, fj, «••
53= ax 02 ••• am, 5P £>2, bs ••-
304 ORDINAL NUMBERS
In the correspondence 21 ~ 59, let ar~r for r = 1, 2, ••• w; also
letin~w + w, w = l, 2 .- Then Sic- 53.
Example 3. Let w i o o
<a = i, z, o, •••
53 = 6j, £2 ••• a1, a2 .-. <zm.
Let the correspondence between 21 and 53 be the same as in
Ex. 2. Then 21 is not similar to 53. For 1 is the first element in
21 while its associated element a1 is not first in 53.
Example 4. Let 21 — 1 2 3
53 = «!, az ••• Jp &2 "*
Let an ~ 2 w, bn ~ 2 w - 1. Then 21-53 but 21 is not ^ 53-
267. Let 21 ^53, 53 ^£.
For let a ~ 6, a' ~ 5' in 21 ~ 53. Let b ~ c, 6' ~e' in 53 ~ G. Let
us establish a correspondence 21 ~ (5 by setting a ~ c, a' ~ c'. Then
if a <a' in 21, c< c' in (S. Hence 21 ~ (5.
Eutactic Sets
268. Let 21 be any ordered aggregate, and 53 a part of 21, the
elements of 53 being kept in the same relative order as in 2(. If 21
and each 53 both have a first element, we say that 21 is well ordered,
or eutactic.
Example 1. 21 = 2, 3, ••• 500 is well ordered. For it has a first
element 2. Moreover any part of 21 as 6, 15, 25, 496 also has a
first element.
Example 2. 21 = 12, 13, 14, — in inf. is well ordered. For it
has a first element 12, and any part 53 of 21 whose elements pre-
serve the same relative order as in 21, has a first element, viz.
the least number in 53.
The condition that the elements of 53 should keep the same rel-
ative order as in 21 is necessary. For B = ••• 28, 26, 24, 22, 20,
21, 23, 25, 27, ... is a partial aggregate having no first element.
But the elements of B do not have the order they have in 21.
EUTACTIC SETS 305
Example 3. Let 51 = rational numbers in the interval (0, 1)
arranged in their order of magnitude. Then 21 is ordered. It
also has a first element, viz. 0. It is not well ordered however.
For the partial set 53 consisting of the positive rational numbers of
21 has no first element.
Example 4- An ordered set which is not well ordered may some-
times be made so by ordering its elements according to another
law.
Thus in Ex. 3, let us arrange 51 in a manner similar to 233.
Obviously 21 is now well ordered.
Example 5. 21 = ar a2 ••• ix, bz ••• is well ordered. For al is the
first element of 21 ; and any part of 21 as
has a first element.
269. 1. Every partial set 53 of a well-ordered aggregate 21 is well
ordered.
For 53 has a first element, since it is a part of 21 which is well
ordered. If (5 is a part of 53, it is also a part of 21, and hence has
a first element.
2. If a is not the last element of a well-ordered aggregate 21, there
is an element o/"2l immediately following a.
For let 53 be the part of 21 formed of the elements after a. It
has a first element b since 21 is well ordered. Suppose now
a < c < b.
Then b is not the first element of 53, as c < b is in 53.
3. When convenient the element immediately succeeding a may
be denoted by
a + 1.
Similarly we may denote the element immediately preceding a,
when it exists, by
a-1.
306 ORDINAL NUMBERS
For example, let
21 =
Then an+l = a
«n— ! = «
There is, however, no bl — 1 .
270. 1. If 21 is well ordered, it is impossible to pick out an in-
finite sequence of the type
For
20 = ••• «3, a2, flj
is a part of 21 whose elements occur in the same relative order as
in 21, and 33 has no first element.
2. A sequence as 1) may be called a decreasing sequence, while
may be called increasing.
In every infinite well ordered aggregate there exist increasing
sequences.
3. Let 21, 33, (5, •" be a well ordered set. Let 21 = \a\ be ivell
ordered in the a"s, 33 = \b[ be well ordered in the b's, etc. The set
is well ordered with regard to the little letters a, b • ••
For U has a first element in the little letters, viz. the first ele-
ment of 21. Moreover, any part of U, as 33, has a first element in
the little letters. For if it has not, there exists in 35 an infinite
decreasing sequence
t > s > r > •«•
This, however, is impossible, as such a sequence would deter-
mine a similar sequence in U as
which is impossible as U is well ordered with regard to 21, 33 •••
4. Let 2l< 33 < @ < ••• (1
Let each element of 21 precede each element of 33< etc.
SECTIONS 307
Let each 21, 33, ••• be well ordered.
Let
© = 21 + 5 + C+ •••
i* a weZZ ordered set, © preserving the relative order of elements
intact.
For @ has a first element, viz. the first element of 21. Any
part S of @ has a first element. For, if not, there exists in @
an infinite decreasing sequence
r>q>p>-. (2
Now r lies in some set of 1) as 9?. Hence q, p, ••• also lie in
9?. But in $R there is no sequence as 2).
5. Let 21, 53, Gt, ••• be an ordered set of well ordered aggre-
gates, no two of which have an element in common. The reader
must guard against assuming that 21 + 53 + (£ 4- •••, keeping the
relative order intact, is necessarily well ordered.
For let us modify Ex. 5 in 265 by taking instead of all the
points on each Lv only a well ordered set which we denote by 2lv.
Then the sum Qr VQr
<Jl = -2<«ly
has a definite meaning. The elements of 21 we supposed arranged
as in Ex. 5 of 265.
Obviously 21 is not well ordered.
Sections
271. We now introduce a notion which in the theory of well-
ordered sets plays a part analogous to Dedekind's partitions in
the theory of the real number system 9?. Cf. I, 128.
Let 21 be a well ordered set. The elements preceding a given
element a of 21 form a partial set called the section of 21 generated
by a. We may denote it by
So,
or by the corresponding small letter a.
308 ORDINAL NTMMKKS
Example 1. Let 21 = 1 9 3
Then
£100=1, 2, ...99
is the section of 21 generated by the element 100.
Example 2. Let
21 = al , «2 • • • bl , J2 • • •
Then
Sb5 = alaz-"blb2bsb4
is the section generated by J5.
tSb^ = a^a% • • •
that generated by 6t, etc.
272. 1. Every section of a well ordered aggregate is well ordered.
For each section of 21 is a partial aggregate of 21, and hence
well ordered by 269, l.
2. In the well ordered set 21, let a<b. Then Sa is a section
ofSb.
3. Let <S denote the aggregate of sections of an infinite well
ordered set 2t. If we order @ such that Sa < 8b in © when a < b in
21, <S is well ordered.
For the correspondence between 21 and @ is uniform and similar.
273. Let 21, 53 Je well ordered and 21^93. If a^b, then
Sa^Sb.
For in 21 let a"<a'>a. Let 5'~a' and b"<^a". Since
21 2* 33, we have
b"<b'<b;
hence the theorem.
274. If 21 is well ordered, 21 is not similar to any one of its
sections.
For if 21 ^ *Sfo, to a in 21 corresponds an element a^ < a in >$'a.
To «j in 21 corresponds an element az in $a, etc. In this way \vt;
obtain an infinite decreasing sequence
a> a
which is impossible by 270, 1.
SECTIONS 309
275. Let 21, 53 be well ordered and 21 =* 53. Then to Sa in 21 can-
not correspond two sections Sb, S/3 each ^ Sa.
For let b < A and Sa =* Sb, Sa ^ S/3. Then
Sb ^ Sj3, by 267. (1
But 1) contradicts 274.
276. Let 21, 53 be two well ordered aggregates. It is impossible
to establish a uniform and similar correspondence between 21 and 53
in more than one way.
For say Sa ^ Sb in one correspondence, and Sa ^ Sj3 in an-
other, b, y8 being different elements of 53. Then
Sb ~ Sfr by 267.
This contradicts 275.
277. 1. We can now prove the following theorem, which is
the converse of 273.
Let SI, 53 be well ordered. If to each section of SI corresponds one
similar section of 53, and conversely, then 53 — SI.
Let us first show that SI ~ 53- Since to any Sa of SI corre-
sponds a similar section Sb in 53, let us set a ~ b. No other
a' ~ 6, and no other b' ~ a, as then Sa' ^ Sb or Sb' ^ Sa, which
contradicts 274. Let the first element of SI correspond to the
first of 53. Thus the correspondence we have set up between 21
and 53 is uniform and SI ~ 53.
We show now that this correspondence is similar. For let
a ~ b and a' ~ b', a' < a.
Then b' < b. For a' lies in Sa ^ Sb and b' ~ a' lies in Sb.
2. From 1 and 273 we have now the fundamental theorem :
In order that two well-ordered sets SI, 53 be similar, it is necessary
and sufficient that to each section of SI corresponds a similar section
of 53, and conversely.
278. Let 21, 53 be well ordered. If to each section of 21 corre-
sponds a similar section of 53, but not conversely, then 21 is similar to
a section of 53.
310 ORDINAL NUMBERS
Let us begin by ordering the sections of 21 and 53 as in 272, 3.
Let B denote the aggregate of sections of 53 to which similar sec-
tions of 21 do not correspond. Then B is well ordered and has a
first section, say SI. Let (3 < b. Then to /S/3 in 53 corresponds
by hypothesis a similar section Sa in 21. On the other hand, to
any section Sa' of 21 corresponds a similar section fib' of 53. Ob-
viously b'<b. Thus to any section of 21 corresponds a similar
section of Sb and conversely. Hence 21^>S7> by 277, 1.
279. Let 21, 53 be well ordered. Either 21 is similar to 53 or one
is similar to a section of the other.
For either :
1° To each section of 21 corresponds a similar section of 53
and conversely ;
or 2° To each section of one corresponds a similar section of
the other but not conversely ;
or 3° There is at least one section in both 21 and 53 to which no
similar section corresponds in the other.
If 1° holds, 21 =* 53 by 277, 1. If 2° holds, either 21 or 53 is similar
to a section of the other.
We conclude by showing 3° is impossible.
For let A be the set of sections of 21 to which no similar section
in 53 corresponds. Let B have the same meaning for 53. If we
suppose 21, 53 ordered as in 272, 3, A will have a first section say
Sa, and B a first section Sft.
Let a < a. Then to Sa in 21 corresponds by hypothesis a sec-
tion Sb of S/3 as in 278. Similarly if b1 < 0, to Sb' of 53 corre-
sponds a section Sa' of Sa. But then Sa^S/3 by 277, 1, and this
contradicts the hypothesis.
Ordinal Numbers
280. 1. With each well ordered aggregate 21 we associate an
attribute called its ordinal number, which we define as follows :
1° If 21^53, they have the same ordinal number.
2° If 21 ^ a section of 53, the ordinal number of 21 is less than
that of 53.
ORDINAL NUMBERS 311
3° If a section of 21 is ^ 53, the ordinal number of 21 is greater
than that of 53.
The ordinal number of 21 may be denoted by
Ord 21,
or when no ambiguity can arise, by the corresponding small letter a.
As any two well ordered aggregates 21, 53 fall under one and only
one of the three preceding cases, any two ordinal numbers a, b
satisfy one of the three following relations, and only one, viz. :
a = b , a<b , a>b,
and if o < b, it follows that b > a.
Obviously they enjoy also the following properties.
2 Tf
J a = b , b = c , then a = c.
For if c = Ord (£, the first two relations state that
21^53 , 53^(5.
But then aa£(g ^ by 267
Hence _
O Jf
o > b , b > c , then a > c.
281. 1. Let 21 be a finite aggregate, embracing say n elements.
Then we set
Thus the ordinal number of a finite aggregate has exactly similar
properties to those of finite cardinal numbers. The ordinal num-
ber of a finite aggregate is called finite, otherwise transfinite.
The ordinal number belonging to the well ordered set formed
of the positive integers cv _ 1 o q
O — 1, Z, O, ••• •
we call o).
•
2. The least transfinite ordinal number is o>.
For suppose a = Ord 21 < <o, is transfinite. Then 21 is ^ a
section of $. But every section of $ ^s finite, hence the
contradiction.
312 ORDINAL Nf.MHKKS
3. The cardinal number of a set 21 is independent of the order
in which the elements of 21 occur. This is not so in general for
ordinal numbers.
For example, let or — i 9 Q
•& — i, -, o, •••
53=1, 3, 5, ...2,4, 6,-. •
Card 21 = Card 33 = S0.
But Ord 21 < Ord 33,
since 21 is similar to a section of 33, viz. the set of odd numbers,
1, 3, 5, ...
282. 1. Addition of Ordinals. Let 2(, 33 be well ordered sets
without common elements. Let (5 be the aggregate formed by
placing the elements of 33 after those of 21, leaving the order in 33
otherwise unchanged. Then the ordinal number of (£ is called the
sum of the ordinal numbers of 21 and 33, or
Ord g = Ord 21 + Ord 33,
or c = a + b.
The extension of this definition to any set of well-ordered aggre-
gates such that the result is well ordered is obvious.
2. We note that
a + b > a, a + b > b.
For 21 is similar to a section of (£, and 33 is equivalent to a part
of 6.
3. The addition of ordinal numbers is associative.
This is an immediate consequence of the definition of addition.
4. The addition of ordinal numbers is not always commutative.
Thus if H= (ai<v.. in inf.), Ord 21 = «,
33= (6^3 -.. &„), . Ord 8 = TO;
Ipt
S=(«1a2...A1J2... Jn), Ord£ = c,
X) = (b1 ... bna^ .-•), Ord£) = b.
Then
C = CD + n , o = ri-fa>.
ORDINAL NUMBERS 313
But 21 ^ a section of (£, viz. : a* Sblt while £> =* 21. Hence
co < c , w = b,
, O>-fW>G> , W + 0)=0).
5. If a > b, Mew c + a > c + b, and a 4- c > b + c.
o = Ord 21, b = Ord SB, c = Ord (5.
Since o > b, we can take for 53 a section Sb of 21. Then c + a is
the ordinal number of ^ , Qf
« + 5R, (1
and c + b is the ordinal number of
6 + Sb, (2
preserving the relative order of the elements.
But 2) is a section of 1), and hence c + a > c + b.
The proof of the rest of the theorem is obvious.
283. 1. The ordinal number immediately following a is a •+• 1.
For let a = Ord 21. Let $8 be a set formed by adding after all
the elements of 21 another element b. Then
a + 1 = Ord 53 = b.
Suppose now
a < c < b , c = Ord g. (1
Then (5 is similar to a section of SB. But the greatest section
of S3 is Sb = 21. Hence
c < a,
which contradicts 1).
2. Let a > b. Then there is one and only one ordinal number b
such that
a = b + b.
For let a = Ord 21 , b = Ord33.
We may take SB to be a section /Sb of 21. Let X) denote the set
of elements of 2t, coming after Sb. It is Avell ordered and has an
ordinal number b. Then
«-»+$;
preserving the relative order, and hence
a = b + b.
There is no other number, as 282, 6 shows.
314 ORDINAL NUMBERS
284. 1. Multiplication of Ordinals. Let 21, 93 be well-ordered
aggregates having o, b as ordinal numbers. Let us replace cadi
element of 21 by an aggregate ^ 53. The resulting aggregate (S
we denote by ™ ™
As (5 is a well-ordered set by 270, 3 it has an ordinal number c.
We define now the product b • a to be c, and write
b • a = c.
We say c is the result of multiplying o % b, and call a, b factors.
We write
a - a = a2 , a • a • a = a3 , etc.
2. Multiplication is associative.
This is an immediate consequence of the definition.
3. Multiplication is not always commutative.
For example, let
33 = (1, 2, 3 ... in inf.).
Then » . a = (^aJ8 ..., cM ...).
Hence Qrd (53 • 21) = o> • 2 > «,
Ord(2i.53)=2o> = o>.
4. If a < b, then ca < cb.
For (£ . 21 is a section of £ • 53.
Limitary Numbers
285. 1. Let
a1<a2<«3< •••
be an infinite increasing enumerable sequence of ordinal numbers.
There exists a first ordinal number a greater than every an .
«n=()rd2tn.
LIMITARY NUMBERS 315
Since an_{ < an, 2ln_j is similar to a section of 21B. For simplicity
we may take 2ln_! to be a section of 2ln. Let, therefore,
Consider now 9r gr ™ ~
VI = ft] + £>2 + ^?3 + •••
keeping the relative order of the elements intact. Then 21 is well
ordered and has an ordinal number a.
As any 2ln is a section of 21,
«„<«.
Moreover any number /S<a is also < some «TO. For if $3 has
the ordinal number yS, 38 must be similar to a section of 21. But
there is no last section of 21.
2. The number « we have just determined is called the limit of
the sequence 1). We write
a = lim an , or an = a.
We also say that a corresponds to the sequence 1).
All numbers corresponding to infinite enumerable increasing
sequences of ordinal numbers are called limitary.
3. If every an in 1) is < /3, then a < yS.
For if $<«, a is not the least ordinal number greater than
every «n.
4. If /S < a, /3 is < some «n.
286.
(2
define the same, number \ it is necessary and sufficient that each
number in either sequence is surpassed by a number in the other.
For let o-o
«„ = a , £n = /3.
If no ySB is greater than «m, #< «m < «, by 285, 3, and « =£ £.
On the other hand, if each «,„< some y8n, a<$. Similarly
316 ORDINAL NUMBERS
287. Cantor 8 Principles of Generating Ordinals. We have now
two methods of generating ordinal numbers. First, by adding 1
to any ordinal number a. In this way we get
a, a + 1, a + 2, ...
Secondly, by taking the limit of an infinite enumerable increas-
ing sequence of ordinal numbers, as
Cantor calls these two methods the first and second principles
of generating ordinal numbers.
Starting with the ordinal number 1, we get by successive appli-
cations of the first principle the numbers
1, 2, 3, 4, ...
The limit of this sequence is to by 285, l. Using the first prin-
ciple alone, this number would not be attained ; to get it requires
the application of the second principle. Making use of the first
principle again, we obtain
G) + 1, o) + 2, &) + 3, ...
The second principle gives now the limitary number G> + G> = ft>2
by 285, 1. From this we get, using the first principle, as before,
whose limit is &>3. In this way we may obtain the numbers
torn + n , w, n finite.
The limit of any increasing sequence of these numbers as
to , &)2 , G>3 , ft>4, •••
is &) « ft) = ft)2, by 285, 1.
From a)2 we can get numbers of the type
a>zl + ft>w + n I, m, n finite.
Obviously we may proceed in this way indefinitely and obtain
all numbers of the type
where «0, al ••• an are finite ordinals.
LIMITARY NUMBERS 317
But here the process does not end. For the sequence
0) < ft)2 < ft)3 < •••
has a limit which we denote by w".
Continuing we obtain
tu10", ft)*0"", etc.
288. It is interesting to see how we may obtain well ordered
sets of points whose ordinal numbers are the numbers just con-
sidered.
In the unit interval 51 = (0, 1), let us take the points
1 . I . I . it- (i
These form a well ordered set whose ordinal number is o>.
The points 1) divided 51 into a set of intervals,
«i,«,, as- (2
In m of these intervals, let us take a set similar to 1). This
gives us a set whose ordinal number is com.
In each interval 2), let us take a set similar to 1). This gives
us a set whose ordinal number is to2. The points of this set
divide 51 into a set of to2 intervals. In each of these intervals,
let us take a set of points similar to 1). This gives a set of
points whose ordinal number is o>3, etc.
Let us now put in 5^ a set of points SQ^ whose ordinal number
is o>. In 512 let us put a set *82 whose ordinal number is a>2, and
so on, for the other intervals of 2).
We thus get in 51 the well ordered set
whose ordinal number is the limit of
a> , 6> -j- ft)2 , &> + ft)2 + ft>8 , ...
This by 286 has the same limit as
G> , a)2 , o)8 , ••• or a)**.
With this set we may now form a set whose ordinal number is
ft>w"', etc.
318 ORDINAL NUMBERS
Classes of Ordinals
289. Cantor has divided the ordinal numbers into classes.
Class 1, denoted by Zl, embraces all finite ordinal numbers.
Class 2, denoted by Z^t embraces all transfinite ordinal numbers
corresponding to well ordered enumerable sets ; that is, to sets
whose cardinal number is X0. For this reason we also write
It will be shown in 293, l that Z2 is not enumerable. Moreover
if we set ~ , „
Kx = Card Z2,
there is no cardinal number between X0 and Kj as will be shown in
294. We are thus justified in saying that Class 3, denoted by
Z% or Z(Xj), embraces all ordinal numbers corresponding to well
ordered sets whose cardinal number is Sj, etc.
Let ft = Ord SQ be any ordinal number. Then all the numbers
a < ft correspond to sections of 33. These sections form a well
ordered set by 272, 3. Therefore if we arrange the numbers
a < ft in an order such that a' precedes « when Sa' < /S'a, they are
well ordered. We shall call this the natural order. Then the
first number in Z^ is 1, the first number of Z^ is o>. The first
number in Zz is denoted by fl.
290. As the numbers in Class 1 are the positive integers, they
need no comment here. Let us therefore turn to Class 2.
If a is in Z^ so is a + 1 .
For let a = Ord 21. Let 33 be the well ordered set obtained
by placing an element b after all the elements of 21. Then
« + 1 = Ord 53.
But 53 is enumerable since 21 is.
Hence a + 1 lies in Z2 .
291. Let
«1 -S. «2 -^ «3 <.
be an enumerable infinite set of numbers in Zv Then a = lim an lirx
in Z.
CLASSES OF ORDINALS 319
For using the notation employed in the proof of 285, 1, a is the
ordinal number of
% = %l + s1 + 8a+...
But 2lj, 53j, 932-" are each enumerable.
Hence 21 is enumerable by 235, l, and a lies in Zv
292. We prove now the converse of 290 and 291.
Each number a in Z2, except &>, is obtained by adding 1 to some
number in Z^; or it is the limit of an infinite enumerable increasing
set of numbers in Zv
For, let «= Ord 21. Suppose first, that 21 has a last element,
say a. Since 21 is enumerable, so is Sa. Hence
is in Zv Then a _ ^ + j
Suppose secondly, that 21 has no last element. All the numbers
/9<« in Z^ belong to sections of 21. Since 21 is enumerable, the
numbers ft are enumerable. Let them be arranged in a sequence
Since they have no greatest, let $[ be the first number in it
>/S1, let £2 De tne first number in it >$/, etc. We get thus the
sequence ^< &{<&<••• (2
whose limit is X, say.
Then \ = «. For X is > any number in 1), which embraces all
the numbers of Z2 < «. Moreover it is the least number which
enjoys this property.
293. 1 . The numbers of Z^ are. not enumerable.
For suppose .they were. Let us arrange them in the sequence
«i» «<P «3 •'• (1
Then, as in 292, there exists in this sequence the infinite enu-
merable sequence . , , ,
«!<«, <«2< rv (2
such that there are numbers in 2) greater than any given number
in 1).
320 ORDINAL NUMBERS
Let «{, = «'. Then «' lies in Z^ by 291. On the other hand, by
285, «' is > any number in 2), and therefore > any number in
1). But 1) embraces all the numbers of Z2, by hypothesis. We
are thus led to a contradiction.
2. We set n , „
K! = Card Z2.
294. There is no cardinal number between K0 and Xr
For let a= Card 21 be such a number. Then 21 is ~ an infinite
partial aggregate of Z2, which without loss of generality may be
taken to be a section of Z%. But every such section is enumer-
able. Hence 51 is enumerable and «=K0, which is a contradiction.
295. We have just seen that the numbers in Z^ are not enumer-
able. Let us order them so that each number is less than any
succeeding number. We shall call this the natural order.
1. The numbers of Z^ when arranged in their natural order form
a well ordered set.
For Z2 has a first element o>. Moreover any partial set Z, the
relative order being preserved, has a first element. For if it has
not, there exists an infinite enumerable decreasing sequence
This, however, is not possible. For /3, 7, ••• form a part of *S'«
which is well ordered.
There is thus one well ordered set having Kj as cardinal num-
ber' Let
Let now 21 be an enumerable well ordered set whose ordinal
number is a. The set
the elements of 21 coming after Z^, has the cardinal number Kj by
241, 3. It is well ordered by 270, 3. It has therefore an ordinal
number which lies in Z3, viz. H + a by 282, 1. Thus Zs embraces
an infinity of numbers.
2. The leant number in Z% is O.
For to any number a< H corresponds a section 21 of Zv Hence
a lies in Z2.
CLASSES OF ORDINALS
321
296. 1. An aggregate formed of an Kj set of Kt sets is an Xj set.
Consider the set
- «2a •"
«<
Here each row is an Kj set. As there are an Sx set of rows, A
is an Kj set of Kj sets. To show that A is an Kt set, we associate
each atK with some number in the first two number classes.
In the first place the elements alK where t, K < o> may be associ-
ated with the numbers 1, 2, 3, ••• < a>. The elements at<0, aUK
lying just inside the o>th square and which are characterized
by thei condition that t = 1, 2, ••• co; K= 1, 2 ••• < to form an
enumerable set and may therefore be associated with the ordinals
eo, &> + 1, ••« < a>2. For the same reason the elements just inside
the w + 1st square may be associated with the ordinals o>2, o>2 + 1,
... < &)3. In this way we may continue. For when we have
arrived at the «th row and column (edge of the ath square) we
have only used up an enumerable set of numbers in the sequence
1, 2, ... a) ... < H (1
in our process of association. There are thus still an Kj set left
in 1) to continue the process of association.
2. As a corollary of 1 we have :
The ordinal numbers
n2, n3, n4, ...
lie in Z
z.
297. 1. Let'
« < /8 < 7 <
(1
be an increasing sequence of numbers in Zz having Kt as cardinal
number and such that any section of 1) has K0 as its cardinal.
There exists a first ordinal number \ in Zs greater than any number
in 1).
For let
« = Ord «, ft = Ord
7 = Ord (£
ORDINAL NUMBERS
Since a < /3 we may take 21 to be a section of 53. Similarly
we may suppose 53 is a section of (5, etc.
Let now ™ _ ™ , » K _ ™ n
Consider now o _ «r , » , /?
keeping the relative order intact. Then 8 is well ordered by
270, 4. Let
X = Ord 8.
Since Card 8 = K1? by 296, l, X lies in ZB.
As any 21, 53, ••• is a section of 8,
Moreover, any number /A < X is also < some a, ft, 7 ••• For if
2ft has ordinal number /*, 2ft must be similar to a section of 8.
But there is no last section in 8.
2. We shall call sequences of the type 1), an Kj sequence.
The number X whose existence we have just established, we shall
call the limit 0/1). We shall also write
«</3<7... =X
to indicate that a, /3, ••• is an Nj sequence whose limit is X.
298. 1. The preceding theorem gives us a third method of
generating ordinal numbers. We call it the third principle.
We have seen that the first and second principles suffice to gen-
erate the numbers of the first two classes of ordinal numbers but
do not suffice to generate even the first number, viz. £1 in Z3. We
prove now the following fundamental theorem :
2. The three principles already described are necessary and suffi-
cient to generate the numbers in Zs .
For let a = Ord be any number of Z3. If 21 has a last element,
reasoning similar to 292, l shows that
If 21 has no last element, all the numbers of Zs < a form an K0
or Kj set. In the former case
a = ft + ft,
CLASSES OF ORDINALS 323
where ft lies in Z^. In the latter case, reasoning similar to 292, l
shows that we can pick out an Sj increasing sequence
299. 1. The numbers of Zs form a set whose, cardinal number a
s
The proof is entirely similar to 293, 1. Suppose, in fact, that
« = K! . Let us arrange the elements of Za in the Kt sequence
«j , «2 ... «w ••• «n ••• (1
As in 292, there exists in this sequence an Xx increasing sequence
a[<ai< — =al. (2
Then «' lies in Zz by 297, 1. On the other hand «' is greater than
any number in 2) and hence greater than any number in 1).
But 1) embraces all the numbers in Z% by hypothesis. We are
thus led to a contradiction.
2" Weset S2 '
3. There is no cardinal number between Sj and Kj .
For let « = Card 21 be such a number. Then 21 is equivalent to
a section of Z3. But every such section has the cardinal num-
ber Kr
300. The reasoning of the preceding paragraphs may be at
once generalized. The ordinal numbers of Zn corresponding to
well ordered sets of cardinal number K,,_2 form a well ordered set
having a greater cardinal number a than Kn_2 . Moreover there is
no cardinal lying between Kn_2 and a. We may therefore ap-
propriately denote a by Kn_r The KB_2 sequence of ordinal
numbers
lying in Zn has a limit lying in Zn, and this fact embodies the
th principle for generating ordinal numbers. The first n prin-
ciples are just adequate to generate the numbers of Zn. They do
not suffice to generate even the first number in Zn+1 .
Finally we note that an Kn set of KB sets forms an Kw set.
CHAPTER X
POINT SETS
Pantaxis
301. 1. (JBorel.} Let each point of the limited or unlimited Bet
51 lie at the center of a cube (L Then there exists an enumerable set
of non- overlapping cubes \c.\ such that each c lies within some G», and
each point of 51 lies in some c. If 21 is limited and complete, there
is a finite set fcf having this property.
For let Dj, D2 ••• be a sequence of superposed cubical divisions
of norms = 0. Any cell of Dl which lies within some (£ and
which contains a point of 51 we call a black cell ; the other cells
of D we call white. The black cells are not further subdivided.
The division D2 divides each white cell. Any of these subdivided
cells which lies within some (£ and contains a point of 51 we call a
black cell, the others are white. Continuing we get an enumer-
able set of non-overlapping cubical cells \c.\.
Each point a of 51 lies within some c. For a is the center of
some (L But when n is taken sufficiently large, a lies in a cell of
Dn, which cell lies within (S.
Let now 51 be limited and complete. Each a lies within a cube c,
or on the faces of a finite number of these c. With a we associ-
ate the diagonal 8 of the smallest of these cubes. Suppose
MinS = 0 in 51. As 51 is complete, there is a point a in 51 such
that Min S = 0, in any V^a). This is not possible, since if 77 is
taken sufficiently small, all the points of V^ lie in a finite number
of the cubes c.
Thus Min B > 0. As the c's do not overlap, there are but a
finite number.
2. In the foregoing theorem the points of 51 are not necessarily
inner points of the cubes c. Let a be a point of 51 on the face of !
one of these c. Since a lies within some S, it is obvious that the
324
PANTAXIS 325
cells of some Dn, n sufficiently large, which surround a form a
cube e?, lying within £. Thus the points of 21 lie within an
enumerable set of cells fcj, each c lying within some ($. The
cells c of course will in general overlap. Obviously also, if 21 is
complete, the points of 21 will lie within a finite number of
these c's.
302. If 21 i« dense, 21' is perfect.
For, in the first place, 21' is dense. In fact, let « be a point of
21'. Then in any Z>*(«) there are points of 21. Let a be such a
point. Since 21 is dense, it is a limiting point of 21 and hence is a
point of 21'. Thus in any D*(«) there are points of 21'.
Secondly, 21' is complete, by I, 266.
303. Let $8 be a complete partial set of the perfect aggregate 21.
Then & = 21 — 33 is dense.
For if (5 contains the isolated point c, all the points of 21 in Dr*(c~)
lie in 33, if r is taken sufficiently small. But 33 being com-
plete, c must then lie in 33-
Remark. We take this occasion to note that a finite set is to be
regarded as complete.
304. 1. 7/*2l does not embrace all $ftn, it has at least one frontier
point in 9fn .
For let a be a point of 21, and b a point of $Rn not in 21. The
points on the join of a, b have coordinates
Let 6' be the maximum of those 0's such that x(0) belongs to
21 if 6 < 0'. Then x (0') is a frontier point of 21.
2. Let 21, 53 have no point in common. If Dist (21, 53) >0, we
say 21, 33 are exterior to each other.
305. 1. Let 21 = \ a\ be a limited or unlimited point set in 9?m.
We say 33 < 21 is pantactic in 21, when in each />«(a) there is a
point 33.
We say 33 is apantactic in 21 when in each -Z)j(a) there is a point
a of 21 such that some .#,,(«) contains no point of 33.
320 POINT SETS
Example 1. Let 81 be the unit interval (0, 1), and 53 the ra-
tional points in 81. Then 53 is pantactic in 81.
Example 2. Let 21 be the interval (0, 1), and 53 the Cantor set
of I, 272. Then 53 is apantactic in 21.
2. If 53 < 21 is pantactic in 21, 21 contains no isolated points not
n
For let a be a point of 21 not in 53. Then by definition, in any
Ds(a) there is a point of 53. Hence there are an infinity of points
of 53 in this domain. Hence a is a limiting point of 21.
306. Let 21 be complete. We say 53 < 21 is of the 1° category
in 21, if 53 is the union of an enumerable set of apantactic sets
in 21.
If 53 is not of the 1° category, we say it is of the 2° category.
Sets of the 1° category may be called Baire sets.
Example. Let 21 be the unit interval, and 53 the rational
points in it. Then 53 is of the 1° category.
For 53 being enumerable, let 53 = \bn\. But each bn is a single
point and is thus apantactic in 21.
The same reasoning shows that if 53 is any enumerable set in
21, then 53 is of the 1° category.
307. 1 . If 53 is of the 1° category in 21, 21 - 53 = B is > 0.
For since 53 is of the 1° category in 21, it is the union of an
enumerable set of apantactic sets |53n|. Then by definition there
exist points ax, a2, ••• in 21 such that
where D^a^) contains no point of 53X, -#(«2) no P°int °f $2' etc-
Let b be the point determined by 1). Since 21 is complete by
definition, b is a point of 21. As it is not in any 53n, it is not
in 53. Hence B contains at least one point.
2. Let 21 be the union of an enumerable set of sets f2tnf, each 2In
being of the 1° category in 53- Then 21 is of the 1° category in 53.
This is obvious, since the union of an enumerable set of enu-
merable sets is enumerable.
PANTAXIS 327
3. Let 33 be of the 1° category in 21. Then B = 21 -S3 is of the
2° category in 21.
For otherwise $$ + B would be of the 1° category in 21. But
21 - (33 + B) = 0,
and this violates 1.
4. It is now easy to give examples of sets of the 2° category.
For instance, the irrational points in the interval (0, 1) form a
set of the 2° category.
308. Let 21 be a set of the 1° category in the cube Q. Then
A = Q — 21 has the cardinal number c.
If A has an inner point, -Z>a(a), for sufficiently small 8, lies in A.
As Card D& = c, the theorem is proved.
Suppose that A has no inner point. Let 21 be the union of the
apantactic sets 2lj < 212 < ••• in Q. Let A» = Q — 2ln. Let qn be-
the maximum of the sides of the cubes lying wholly in An. Ob-
viously qn = 0, since by hypothesis A has no inner points. Let Q
be a cube lying in Al . As qn = 0, there exists an n± such that Q
has at least two cubes lying in Ani ; call them Q0, Q^. There ex-
ists an wa >Wj such that.$0, Ql each have two cubes in A^; Call
them Q O - O Q
Vo,o ' Vo, i > Vi, o » Vi, i»
or more shortly $,,,»,.
Each of these gives rise similarly to two cubes in some Ant,
which may be denoted by QHt lfi ls, where the indices as before have
the values 0, 1. In this way we may continue getting the cubes
Vij » Vijt, » Vii^8 ••*
Let a be a point lying in a sequence of these cubes. It obvi-
ously does not lie in 2t, if the indices are not, after a certain stage,
all 0 or all 1. This point a is characterized by the sequence
which may be read as a number in the dyadic system. But these
numbers have the cardinal number c.
309. Let 21 be a complete apantactic set in a cube O. Then there
exists an enumerable set of cubical cells {q| such that each point of
21 lies on a face of one of these q, or is a limit point of their faces.
:>2S POINT SETS
For let Dl > Dz > ••• be a sequence of superimposed divisions
of Q, whose norms 8n = 0. Let
be the cells of Z>x containing no point of 21 within them. Let
<f21, d^, </23 ... (2
denote those cells of _Z>2 containing no point of 51 within them and
not lying in a cell of 1). In this way we may get an infinite se-
quence of cells £> = \dmn\, where for each m, the corresponding n
is finite, and m = oo. Each point a of A lies in some dm^n. For 21
being complete, Dist (a, 21) > 0. As the norms Bn = 0, a must lie
in some cell of Dn, for a sufficiently large n. The truth of the
theorem is now obvious.
310. Let 33 be pantactic in 21. Then there exists an enumerable
set Q <_ 33 which is pantactic in 21.
For let D1 >D2> ••• be a set of superimposed cubical divisions
of norms dn = 0. In any cell of Dl containing within it a point
of $, there is at least one point of 33. If the point of 21 lies on
the face of two or more cells, the foregoing statement will hold
for at least one of the cells. Let us now take one of these points
in each of these cells; this gives an enumerable set (gj. The
same holds for the cells of Dz. Let us take a point in each of
these cells, taking when possible points of (5r Let (52 denote the
points of this set not in Qjj. Continuing in this way, let
e = (g1 + ea+ •••
Then Q. is pantactic in 21, and is enumerable, since each (5n is.
Corollary. In any set 21, finite or infinite, there exists an enumer-
able set (5 which is pantactic in 21.
For we have only to set 33 = 21 in the above theorem.
311. 1. The points (5 where the continuous function /(^ •• • zm)
takes on a given value g in the complete set 21,/orra a complete set.
For let Cj, c2 ••• be points of (5 which = c. We show c is a
point of G. For -., , „, -.
= "'
PANTAXIS 329
As /is continuous, ff \^_ff\
J\Cn) —J\c)'
Hence /o»-*
and c lies in (£.
2. Letf(x^ '•• #m) be continuous in the limited or unlimited set 21.
If the value of f is known in an enumerable pantactic set (5 in 21,
which contains all the isolated points of 21, in case there be such, the
value off is known at every point of 21.
For let a be a limiting point of 21 not in (5. Since (§ is pantactic
in 21, there exists a sequence of points «j, ez ••• in (5 which = a.
Since / is continuous, /(en) = /(a). As / is known at each en,
it is known at a.
3. Let g= {/| be the class of one-valued continuous functions
defined over a limited point set 21. Then
For let 9^ be a space of an infinite enumerable number of
dimensions, and let
y = Oi> #2> •")
denote one of its points. Let/ have the value ^ at «j, the value
7;2 at e% '•• for the points of (§ defined in 2. Then the complex
Oh» % "0
completely determines /. But this complex determines also a
point 77 in 9^ whose coordinates are ?;„. We now associate / with
Hence
On the other hand, f>c, since in ^ there is the function
/(^j ••• #„) = # in 21, where g is any real number.
312. Let 33 denote the class of complete or perfect subsets lying in
the infinite set 21, which latter contains at least one complete set.
For let alt a2, ••• =a, all these points lying in 21. Then
atl , ati , als... =a ; il<iz<t8-~
But for tj we may take any number in ^=1 = (1, 2, 3, •••) ; for
we may take any number in $2 = Oi + 1» L\ + 2, •••), etc.
330 POINT SETS
Obviously the cardinal number of the class of these sequences
1) is ec = c. But (
\,U1 »l|» «*!,» uia * *}
is a complete set in 2T- Hence b>^c. On the other hand, b<c.
Forlet A>A>- (2
be a sequence of superimposed cubical division of norms = 0.
Each Dn embraces an enumerable set of cells. Thus the set of
divisions gives an enumerable set of cells. Each cell shall have
assigned to it, for a given set in S3, the sign + or — according as
33 is exterior to this cell or not. This determines a distribution
of two things over an enumerable set of compartments.
The cardinal number of the class of these distributions is 2e = c-
But each 53 determines a distribution. Hence b<c.
Transfinite Derivatives
313. 1. We have seen, I, 266, that
Let now 51 be a limited point aggregate of the second species.
It has then derivatives of every finite order. Therefore by 18,
Dv(W, 21", 21'", ...) (2
contains at least one point, and in analogy with 1), we call the
set 2) the derivative of order w of 21, and denote it by
gw,
or more shortly by
21".
Now we may reason on 21" as on any point set. If it is infinite,
it must have at least one limiting point, and may of course have
more. In any case its derivative is denoted by
2l(w+1) or 2lw+1.
The derivative of 2lw+1 is denoted by
2j(«+2) 01. ^+2 ? etc>
Making use of a> we can now state the theorem :
TRANSFINITE DERIVATIVES 331
In order that the point set 51 is of the first species it is necessary
and sufficient that 2lf"; = 0.
2. We have seen in 18 that 51" is complete. The reasoning of
I, 266 shows that SI1""4"1, SI10"*"2, •••, when they exist, are also complete.
Then 18 shows that, if 2T"+n n = 1, 2, ••• exist,
2r''+1>2l"'+2> •••) (3
exists and is complete. The set 3) is called the derivative of order
ca • '2 and is denoted by
^2) or 2l<o2<
Obviously we may continue in this way indefinitely until we
reach a derivative of order a containing only a finite number of
points. Then ^0+1 _ Q
That this process of derivation may never stop is illustrated by
taking for 21 any limited perfect set, for then
51 = 21' =21" = ... = %» = %»* = ...
3. We may generalize as follows : Let a denote a limitary ordi-
nal number. If each 21^ > 0, /3 < a, we set
when it exists.
4. If 5la > 0, while 51 +1 = 0, we say 21 is of order a.
314. 1. Let a be a limiting point of 21. Let
«6 = Card F5(a).
Obviously «4 is monotone decreasing with S. Suppose that
there exists an a and a 80 > 0, such that for all 0 < 8 < S0
« = Card F(a).
We shall say that a is a limiting point of rank a.
If every «8 > a, we shall say that
Rank a > «.
If every aa > a, we shall say that
Rank a > a.
332 POINT SETS
2. Let 21 be a limited aggregate of cardinal number a. Then there
is at least one limiting point of 2t, of rank a.
The demonstration is entirely similar to I, 264. Let 8X >
S2 > ... =0. Let us effect a cubical division of 21 of norm 8^. In
at least one cell lies an aggregate 2lj having the cardinal num-
ber a. Let us effect a cubical division of 2^ of norm 8Z. In at
least one cell lies an aggregate 212 having the cardinal number a,
etc. These cells converge to a point a, such that
Card F6(a) = «,
however small 8 is taken.
3. If Card 21 > e, there exists a limiting point 0/21 of rank > e.
The demonstration is similar to that of 2.
4. If there is no limiting point of 21 of rank > e, 21 is enumerable.
This follows from 3.
5. Let Card 21 be > e. Let 33 denote the limiting points of 'Jl
whose ranks are > e. Then 33 is perfect.
For obviously 33 is complete. We need therefore only to show
that it is dense. To this end let b be a point of 33. About b let
us describe a sequence of concentric spheres of radii rn = 0. These
spheres determine a sequence of spherical shells \Sn\, no two of
which have a point in common. If 2ln denote the points of 21 in $„,
V= F*(6) = 2lx + 212 + 213 + -.
Thus if each 2lm were enumerable, V is enumerable and hence
Rank b is not > e. Thus there is one set 2lm which is not enu-
merable, and hence by 3 there exists a point of 33 in Sm. But then
there are points of S3 in any F^*(5), and b is not isolated.
6. A set 21 which contains no dense component is enumerable.
For suppose 21 were not enumerable. Let ty denote the proper
limiting points of 21. Then ^3 contains a point whose rank is > e.
But the set of these points is dense. This contradicts the hy-
pothesis of the theorem.
315. Let a lie in Zn. If 2la > 0, it is complete.
For if a is non-limitary, reasoning similar to I, 266 shows that
2la is complete. Suppose then that « is limitary, and 2la is not
TRANSFINITE DERIVATIVES 333
complete. The derivatives of 21 of order < « which are not com-
plete, form a well ordered set and have therefore a first element
SI", where ft is necessarily a limitary number. Then
But every point of 21^ lies in each 21*. Hence every limiting
point of 21*5 is a limiting point of each 21Y and hence lies in 21".
Hence 21^ is complete, which is a contradiction.
316. Let a be a limitary number in Zn. If 21^ > 0 for each
0 < «, 2la exists.
For there exists an Xm, m j< n — 2, sequence
7< & <e<T)< ... = a. (1
Let c be a point of 21?, d a point of 21s, e a point of 21% etc.
Then the set /• j ^ \
O, d, e, /, .-.)
has at least one limiting point I of rank Km. Let e be any number
in 1). Then I is a limiting point of rank KTO of the set
Thus I is a limiting point of every 21", ft < «, and hence of 2la.
317. Let us show how we may form point sets whose order a
is any number in Zl or Zv
We take the unit interval 21 = (0, 1) as the base of our con-
siderations.
In 21, take the points
• »i = i . f . * . if - , . a
Obviously $8[ = 1, 59{' = 0. Hence Sj is of order 1. The set
SBj divides 21 into a set of intervals
In 2lt = (0, £) take a set of points similar to 1) which has as
single limiting point, the point £. In 2Lj = Q> f ) take a set of
points similar to 1) which has as single limiting point, the point
|, etc. Let us call the resulting set of points $8a.
334 POINT SETS
Obviously «,_x 31 _<«
"l¥»4'¥' ~ "°i '
Hence ^, = ^, = ^ and ^,, = Q
Thus &j is of order 2.
In each of the intervals 2) we may place a set of points similar
to S32, such that the right-hand end point of each interval 2ln is a
limiting point of the set. The resulting set 338 is of order 3, etc.
This shows that we may form sets of every finite order.
Let us now place a set of order 1 in Slj, a set of order 2 in 212,
etc. The resulting set S3W is of order a>. For 93^n) has no points
in 5lj, Slg "• Sln-j, while the point 1 lies in every 33^n).
Thus ^ = ^
Hence 53(0)+!) = o
and $„ is of order to.
Let us now place in each 5ln a set similar to $8W, having the
right-hand end point of 2ln as limiting point. The resulting set
53<o+i i8 °f O1'der &> + 1. In this way we may proceed to form sets
of order a> + 2, o> + 3, ••• just as we did for orders 2, 3, ••• We
may also form now a set of order w2, as we before formed a set
of order CD.
Thus we may form sets of order
<o , o> • 2 , to • 3 , o> • 4
and hence of order w2, etc.
318. 1. Let 31 be limited or not, and let 2ltw denote the isolated
points of 21^. Then
a/ = vflw + go , /3= 1, 2, ...<H. (1
ft
21' = si; + H" , sr = at' + a"'-
Thus a/ = a/ + a// + ... + SP-1' + 5l(n) ;
that is, 21' is the sum of the points of 21' not in 21", of the points
of 21" not in 21"', etc. If now there are points common to every
9f(") \vp havp
' (n) + 2t(w) , n = l, 2, ...
TRANSFINITE DERIVATIVES 335
On 31" we can reason as on 31', and in general for any a < £1 we
have
which gives 1).
2. 7?Sl° = 0, SI awd 31' are enumerable.
For not every
3l(o) > 0 a < fl, by 316.
Hence there is a first a, call it 7, such that 3ly = 0. Then 1)
reduces to y ^ 0.. 1, 2, ...<,.
I
But the summation extends over an enumerable set of terms,
each of which is enumerable by 289. Hence SI' is enumerable.
But then SI is also enumerable by 237, 2.
3. Conversely, if 31' is enumerable, 31" = 0.
For if 31° > 0, there is a non-enumerable set of terms in 1), if
no Sl^ is perfect ; and as each term contains at least one point,
SI' is not enumerable. If some St(p) is perfect, SI' contains a per-
fect partial set and is therefore not enumerable by 245.
4. From 2, 3, we have :
For 31' to be enumerable, it is necessary and sufficient that there
exists a number a in Zl or Z2 such that Sla = 0.
5. If SI is complete, it is necessary and sufficient in order that 31
be enumerable, that there exists an a in Zl or Z2 such that Sla = 0.
For 3l=3lt + 3l',
and the first term is enumerable.
6. If 31"= 0 for some # < £1, we say SI is reducible, otherwise it
is irreducible.
319. If 31° > 0, it is perfect.
By 315 it is complete. We therefore have only to show that
its isolated points 31? = 0. Suppose the contrary ; let a be an
isolated point of 31°.
Let us describe a sphere S of radius r about a, containing no
other point of 31°. Let 53 denote the points of 31' in S. Let
r>r, >r«> ••• = 0.
336 POINT SETS
Let Sn denote a sphere about a of radius rn. Let 53n denote the
points of 53 lying between Sn_^, Sn, including those points which
may lie on iSn.l. Then
Each 53m is enumerable. For any point of 53" is a point of
53n = a. Hence 53" = 0 and 53m is enumerable by 318, 2.
Thus 53 is enumerable. This, however, is impossible since
53" = a, and is thus > 0.
320. 1. In the relation
«' = 221^ + 2ln £=1, 2,... <n,
P(
£ Ae ^rs£ term on the right is enumerable.
For let us set ^ _ ^(/3) _
ft
also let . A
ri > ri > "• = °-
Let 53n denote the points of 53 whose distance B from 21" satis-
fies the relation s
rn> 6 > rn+l.
Then the distance of any point of 53^ from 5ln is > rn+l . If SB0
includes all points of 53 whose distance from 21° is > r1, we have
53 = 530 + 53! +532+ -
Each 53n is enumerable. For if not, 53" > 0. Any point of
53? as b lies in 21°. Hence
Dist (5, 51") = 0.
On the other hand, as b lies in 53^, its distance from ?t" is
> rn+1, which is a contradiction.
2. If W is not enumerable, there exists a first number a in Z1 or
Zz such that 2T is perfect.
This is a corollary of 1.
3. Jf 21 is complete and not enumerable, there exists a first number
a in Zl + Z% such tJiat 21" is perfect.
•±.If$[ is complete, 21 = (5 + ^B •
where (5 is enumerable, and ^ is perfect. If 2t is enumerable, ^ = 0.
COMPLETE SETS 337
Complete Sets
321. Let us study now some of the properties of complete point
sets. We begin by considering limited perfect rectilinear sets.
Let 21 be such a set. It has a first point a and a last "point b. It
therefore lies in the interval /=(a, 6). If 21 is pantactic in any
partial interval J= (a, /3) of /, 21 embraces all the points of J,
since 21 is perfect. Let us therefore suppose that 21 is apantactic
in /. An example of such sets is the Cantor set of I, 272.
Let D = \& I be a set of intervals no two of which have a point
in common. We say D is pantactic in an interval I, when I con-
tains no interval which does not contain some interval 8, or at
least a part of some 8.
It is separated when no two of its intervals have a point in
common.
322. 1. Every limited rectilinear apantactic perfect set 21 deter-
mines an enumerable pantactic set of separated intervals D= {8},
whose end points alone lie in 21.
For let 21 lie in /=(«, /3), where a, /3 are the first and last
points of 21. Let 53 = J— 21. Each point I of 33 falls in some in-
terval 8 whose end points lie in 21. For otherwise we could
approach b as near as we chose, ranging over a set of points of 21.
But then b is a point of 21, as this is perfect. Let us therefore
take these intervals as large as possible and call them 8.
The intervals 8 are pantactic in /, for otherwise 21 could not be
apantactic. They are enumerable, for but a finite set can have
lengths > I/n + 1 and < I/n, n = 1, 2 •••
It is separated, since 21 contains no isolated points.
2. The set of intervals Z> = f8j just considered are said to be
adjoint to 21, or determined by 21, or belonging to 21.
323. Let 21 be an apantactic limited rectilinear perfect point set, to
u'hich belongs the set of intervals D— \S[. Then 21 is formed of the
end points E= \e\ of these intervals, and their limiting points E' .
For we have just seen that the end points e belong to 21. More-
over, 21 being perfect, E' must be a part of 21.
338 POINT SETS
51 contains no other points. For let a be a point of 21 not in E,
E' . Let a be another point of §1. In the interval (a, a) lies an
end point e of some interval of D. In the interval (a, e) lies an-
other end point er In the interval (a, «j) lies another end point
ea, etc. The set of points e, e^, e%"- = a. Hence a lies in E\
which is a contradiction.
324. Conversely, the end points E=\e\ and the limiting points of
the end points of a pantactic enumerable set of separated intervals
D = |8| form a perfect apantactic set 21.
For in the first place, 21 is complete, since 21 = (J£, E'}. 21 can
contain no isolated points, since the intervals S are separated.
Hence 21 is perfect. It is apantactic, since otherwise 21 would em-
brace all the points of some interval, which is impossible, as D is
pantactic.
325. Since the adjoint set of intervals D= \B\ is enumerable, it
can be arranged in a 1, 2, 3, ••• order according to size as follows.
Let 8 be the largest interval, or if several are equally large, one
of them. The interval B causes I to fall into two other intervals.
The interval to the left of S, call JQ, that to the right of 8, call Ir
The largest interval in J0, call S0, that in Iv call 8V In this way
we may continue without end, getting a sequence of intervals
S, 80, Sj, S00, S01, S10, Sn--- (1
and a similar series of intervals
J-i J-QI J-ii -*oo' -*01 **"
The lengths of the intervals in 1) form a monotone decreasing
sequence which = 0.
If v denote a complex of indices ij K • • •
D=fM = fV~i'
and /K = JH,+ 8r + /,1.
326. 1 . The cardinal number of every perfect limited rectilinear
point set 21 is C.
For if 21 is not apantactic, it embraces all the points of some in-
terval, and hence Card 21 = c. Let it be therefore apantactic.
COMPLETE SETS 339
Let D = {Syl be its adjoint set of intervals, arranged as in 325.
Let g be the Cantor set of I, 272. Let its adjoint set of intervals
be H= \i)v\, arranged also as in 325. If we set 8,,~ 17,,, we have
D^H. Hence Card 31 = Card (5.
But Card 6 = c by 244, 4.
2. The cardinal number of every limited rectilinear complete set 21
** either e or c.
For we have seen, 320, 4, that
where (§ is enumerable and <$ is perfect,
If <$ = 0, Card 21 = e.
If $>0, Card 21 = c.
For Card 21 = Card (g + Card <$ = e + c = c.
327. 2^0 cardinal number of every limited complete set 21 in 9?n t's
either t or c. /£ i« c, i/2l ^a« a perfect component.
The proof may be made by induction.
For simplicity take ra = 2. By a transformation of space [242],
we may bring 21 into a unit square S. Let us therefore suppose
21 were in S originally. Then Card 21 < c by 247, 2.
Let (£ be the projection of 21 on one of the sides of iS, and $3 the
points of 21 lying on a parallel to the other side passing through a
point of (£- If 53 has a perfect component, Card S& = c, and hence'
Card 21 = c. If 53 does not have a perfect component, the cardinal
number of each 53 is e. Now (E is complete by I, 717, 4. Hence
if 6 contains a perfect component, Card (5 = c, otherwise Card
G> = c. In the first case Card 21 = c, in the second it is c.
328. 1. Let 21 be a complete set lying within the cube Q. Let
Dl > D2 > ••• denote a set of superimposed cubical divisions of Q
of norms = 0. Let d-^ be the set of those cubes of Dl containing
no point of 21. Let dt be the set of those cubes of Z>2 not in dl ,
which contain no point of 21. In this way we may continue. Let
53 = 1 dn \ . Then every point of A = O — 21 lies in 53. For 21 being
340 POINT SETS
complete, any point a of A is an inner point of A. Hence Dp(a)
lies in A, for some p sufficiently small. Hence a lies in some dm.
We have thus the result :
Any limited complete set is uniquely determined by an enumerable
set of cubes \dnl, each of which is exterior to it.
We may call $3 = \dn\ the border of 21, and the cells rfn, border
cells.
2. The totality of all limited perfect or complete sets has the car-
dinal number c.
For any limited complete set (£ is completely determined by its
border \dn\. The totality of such sets has a cardinal number
< ce = c. Hence Card {(£} < c- Since among the sets (£ is a c-set
of segments, Card (£ > c.
329. If 21,. denote the isolated points of 21, and 21A its proper
limiting points, we may write
Similarly we have
21A=2L+2U
2lA, = 2iA!l + 2U etc.
We thus have
21 = 21, + 2lAt 4- SU + - + 2lA«->t + 21A».
At the end of each step, certain points of 51 are sifted out. They
may be considered as adhering loosely to 21, while the part which
remains may be regarded as cohering more closely to the set.
we may call 2lA«-1t, the nth adherent, and 21A» the ntb coherent.
If the nttl coherent is 0, 21 is enumerable.
If the above process does not stop after a finite number of steps,
let 8
If 2L > 0» we call it the coherent of order to.
Then obviously ^ _ ^^ n + ^
We may now sift 2L as we did 21.
COMPLETE SETS 341
If a is a limitary number, defined by
«! < «2 < «8 ... =a,
we set 2l0 = Dt;j2lAa"!
and call it, when it exists, the coherent of order a. Thus we can
21 = 221^ + 21x0 «=1, 2,...</9 (1
where ft is a number in Z%.
330. 1 . When 21 is enumerable,
2l = 22U + 2l,0 « = 1, 2, ...0
where $ is the sum of an enumerable set of isolated sets, and £), when
it exists, is dense.
For the adherences of different orders have no point in common
with those of any other order. They are thus distinct. Thus the
sum ^ can contain but an enumerable set of adherents, for other-
wise 21 could not be enumerable. Thus there is a first ordinal
number /8 for which
2lA = 0.
As now in general
8x0= 2t;A + 21x0+1,
we have „ _ „ -+1 ~.+2
•*^A^ ^*A ^*A
As 21A3 thus contains no isolated points, it is dense, when not 0,
by I, 270.
2. When 21 is not enumerable, X) > 0. For if not, 21 = $, and $
is enumerable.
331. 1 = 21'. (1
For let D be a cubical division of space. As usual let
Ft/, , IS,
denote those cells of D containing a point of 21, 21' respectively.
The cells of 21^, not in 2l# will be adjacent to those of 2l/>, and
342 POINT SETS
these may be consolidated with the cells of _D, forming a new di
vision A of norm B which in general will not be cubical. Then
The last term is formed of cells that contain only a finite number
of points of 31. These cells may be subdivided, forming a new
division E such that in
the last term is < e/3- Now if B is sufficiently small,
(2
Hence from 2), 3) we have 1).
332. If%>0, Card 31 = c.
For let 93 denote the sifted set of 21 [I, 712]. Then % is per-
fect. Hence Card 55 = c, hence Card 51 = c.
333. Let 2t = |oj, where each a is metric and not discrete. If no
two of the a's have more than their frontiers in common, 21 is an
enumerable set in the a's. 21 may be unlimited.
Let us first suppose that 21 lies in a cube Q. Let a. denote o on
removing its proper frontier points. Then no two of the a's have
a point in common. Let
•• =0,
where the first term q1 = Q. There can be but a finite number of
sets a, such that their contents lie between two successive ^'s.
For if
«4 i «tl— >?.
we have
«ll + «t,+ ••• +
But the sum on the left is < Q, for any n.
As n may = oo, this makes Q = oo, which is absurd.
If 21 is not limited, we may effect a cubical division of 9?m.
This in general will split some of the a's into smaller sets b. In
each cube of this division there is but an enumerable set of the b's
by what has just been proved.
CHAPTER XI
MEASURE
Upper Measure ; ,
334. 1. Let 21 be a limited point set. An enumerable set of
metric sets D= {rfj, such that each point of 21 lies in some dt, is
called an enclosure of 21. If each point of 21 lies within some dL , D
is called an outer enclosure. The sets d, are called cells. To each
enclosure corresponds the finite or infinite series
which may or may not converge. In any case the minimum of all
the numbers 1) is finite and <.0. For let A be a cubical division
of space, 21A is obviously an enclosure and the corresponding sum
1) is also 21A? since we have agreed to read this last symbol either
as a point set or as its content.
Weca11
with respect to the class of all possible enclosures Z>, the upper
measure of 21, and write
2. The minimum of the sums 1) is the same when we restrict our-
selves to the class of all outer enclosures.
For let D= feZJ be any enclosure. For each d^ there exists a
cubical division of space such that those of its cells, call them c?l)t,
containing points of dt have a content differing from rft by < — .
if
Obviously the cells \dlie\ form an outer enclosure of 21, and
343
344 MEASURE
As e is small at pleasure, Min 2dt over the class of outer en-
closures = Min Sc?t over the class of all enclosures.
3. Two metric sets whose common points lie on their frontiers
are called non-overlapping. The enclosure D = Sc?t is called non-
overlapping, when any two of its cells are non-overlapping.
Any enclosure D may be replaced by a non-overlapping enclosure.
For let U(d1, d^) = d^ + ez,
dz, d8) = dl + e<i + <?3,
ds d^) = dl + ez + e3 + e4, etc.
Obviously each en is metric. For uniformity let us set d± = er
Then E— \en\ is a non-overlapping enclosure of 21. As
2en<2<fn
we see that the minimum of the sums 1) is the same, when we restrict
ourselves to the class of non-overlapping enclosures.
Obviously we may adjoin to any cell «n, any or all of its
improper limiting points.
4. In the enclosure E = \en\ found in 3, no two of its cells
have a point in common. Such enclosures may be called distin<-t.
335. 1. Let D = \dt\, E = \eK\ be two non-overlapping enclosures
of 21. Let
8tK = Dv^eK}.
TJien
&=\8lKl, t, * = 1, 2, -.
is a non- overlapping enclosure of 21.
For 8IK is metric by 22, 2. Two of the S's are obviously non-
overlapping. Each point of 21 lies in some dt and in some eK,
hence a lies in 8tic.
2. We say A is the divisor of the enclosures D, E.
336.
For let E= \et\ be an enclosure of 93. Those of its cells dt con-
taining a point of 2t form an enclosure D = \dt\ of 21. Now the
class of all enclosures A = |8j of 21 contains the class D as a sub-
class.
UPPER MEASURE 345
As
we have
Min 28t< Min 2dt<Mi
A D E
from which 1) follows at once.
337. If 21 is metric,
21 = 21. (1
For let D be a cubical division of space such that
(2
Let us set S3 = 2J/>. Let E=\e^ be an outer enclosure of S3.
Since S3 is complete, there exists a finite. set of cells in E which
contain all the points of S3 by 301. The volume of this set is
obviously > S3 ; hence a fortiori
Hence = ^
S3>S3.
But
21>S3, by 336,
>2T-e, by 2). (3
On the other hand,
+ e, by 2). (4
From 3), 4) we have 1), since e is arbitrarily small.
338. /f2l is complete.
21 = 21.
For by definition -
with respect to all outer enclosures D = {<£t|. But 21 being com-
plete, we can replace D by a finite set of cells F =\f^\ lying in D,
such that F is an enclosure of 21. Finally the enclosure F can be
replaced by a non-overlapping enclosure Q- = \gt\ by 334, 3.
Thus
21 = Min 2</t,
with respect to the class of enclosures Q-. But this minimum
value is also 21 by 2, 8.
346 MEASURE
339. Let the limited set 21 = \ 2lnJ be the union of a finite or infinite
enumerable set of sets 2ln. Then
8<2gn. (1
For to each 2In corresponds an enclosure _Dn = \dni\ such that
2 dni < 2ln + — , e > 0, arbitrarily small.
i tin
But the cells of all the enclosures Z>n, also form an enclosure.
Hence
This gives 1), as e is small at pleasure.
340. Let 21 lie in the metric set 2ft. Let A = 9W — 21,
complementary set. Then
For from ^ = 21 + ^,
follows
m<n + A, by 339.
But
m = m, by 337.
341. If 21 = 33 4- S, awe? 33, (S are exterior to each other,
1 = S + S. (1
For, if any enclosure D = {o'l| of 21 embraces a cell containing
a point of S3 and (5, it may be split up into two metric cells d(,
d[', each containing points of 33 only, or of (£ only. Then
Thus we may suppose the cells of D embrace only cells
D' = \d(\ containing no point of S, and cells D" = \d['\ con-
taining no point of S3. Then
s54 = s5; + 25;f. (2
UPPER MEASURE 347
By properly choosing D, we may crowd the sum on the left
down toward its rainiraura. Now the class of enclosures D' is
included in the class of all enclosures of 33, and a similar remark
holds for D".
Thus from 2) follows that
I>5 + I.
This with 339 gives 1).
342. If 21 = $8 + 2ft, 9ft being metric,
For let D be a cubical division of norm d. Let n denote points
of 2ft in the cells containing points of Front 9ft. Let m denote
the other points of 9ft- Then m and 33 are exterior to each other,
and by 337 and 341,
Meas(33 + m) =
As
Meas(33 + m)< by 336.
l<i+m+n by 339.
Tfm<» =
(2
Now if d is sufficiently small,
Thus 2) gives, as m<9ft,
which gives 1), as e > 0 is arbitrarily small.
343. 1. Let 21 lie in the metric set 33, and also in the metric set
Then
For let
= Dt>(®, (5) , 33 =
348 MEASURE
Thus
2. If 5l<93, the complement of 51 with respect to S3 will
frequently be denoted by the corresponding English letter. Thus
^ = tf(5l),
Lower Measure
344. 1. We are now in position to define the notion of lower
measure. Let §1 lie in a metric set 9ft. The complementary set
A = 9ft — 51 has an upper measure A. We say now that 9ft — A
is the lower measure of 51, and write
By 343 this definition is independent of the set 9ft chosen.
When
21 = 51
we say 51 is measurable, and write
51 = 1 = 51.
A set whose measure is 0 is called a null set.
2. Let E = {e,} be an enclosure of A.
Then 5l=Max0m-2et),
with respect to the class of all enclosures E.
3. If (S = {et} is an enclosure of 51, the enclosures E and (S may
obviously, without loss of generality, be restricted to metric cells
which contain no points not in 9ft. If this is the case, and if (2,
J^are each non-overlapping, we shall say they are normal enclosures.
If (5, ^ ^'e two normal enclosures of a set 51, obviously their
divisor is also normal.
LOWER MEASURE 34JJ
345. 1. 21 >0.
For let 21 lie in the metric set 2ft.
Then n = m-A.
But by 336,
hence
2.
For let 31 lie in the metric set SDi.
by 340.
Hence 2t = §2
346. 1. -For any limited set 31,
2t < 31 < I < I. (1
For let Z>= |c?t| be an enclosure of 31. Then
S = Min 2<*M
/>
when D ranges over the class F of all finite enclosures. On the
other hand,
I = Min 2c£
/>
when D ranges over the class E of all enumerable enclosures.
But the class E includes the class F. Hence 21 < St.
To show that ™ ^ «r (2
we observe that as just shown
A>A.
Hence, ^.
®-A<m-A = %. (3
But ^
A + % = W, by 16.
This with 3) gives 2).
350 MEASURE
2. If 31 is metric, it is measurable, and
31= it
This follows at once from 1).
347. Let 31 be measurable and lie in the metric set 9ft. Then A
is measurable, and ** «, ^
% + A = m. • (1
For ^ ^
A = m - 3i. (2
2 = 2ft-I = §,
since 31 is measurable. This last gives
I = 5ft-3t
This with 2) shows that .A = A ; hence .A is measurable. From
2) now follows 1).
348. If 2l<93, <Aew H<®. G
For as usual let JL, J9 be the complements of 31, S3 with respect
to a metric set 3ft. Since 31 < 33, J. > 5.
Hence, by 336,
A > .5.
Thus,
j£ - 1 .< a» - JF,
which gives 1).
349. For 31 to fo measurable, it is necessary and sufficient that
where 9ft is any metric set > 31, #wd -A = 9ft — 31.
It is sufficient, for then 1) shows that
! = §?-!.
But the right side is by definition 31 ; hence 1 = 31.
It is necessary as 347 shows.
350. Let 31 = \an\ be the union of an enumerable set of non-
overlapping metric sets. Then 31 is measurable, and
31 = 2an. (1
LOWER MEASURE 351
Let S denote the infinite series on the right of 1). As usual
let Sn denote the sum of the first n terms. Let Sln = (ox, ••• an).
Then Sln < 31 and by 336,
8n = #n<i , for any w. (2
Thus S is convergent and
S<%. (3
On the other hand, by 339,
1 < S. (4
From 3), 4) follows that
S = 8 = lim Sn = lim Sln. (5
We show now that SI is measurable. To this end, let 3D1? be a
metric set > SI, and Sl» + An = 2R as usual.
gw + An = §K (6
But -A < ^4n , hence A < An.
Thus 6) gives = „ ^
^ + Sln < 2^,
for any n. Hence
I
orusingS),
Hence by 339,
Thus by 349, SI is measurable.
351. Let
» + <£<«. (1
Sl = 93 + <£;
then
For let 2ft be a metric set > SI. Let A, B, C be the comple-
ments of SI, 53, S, with reference to 2ft.
be normal enclosures of B, C. Let
and D = ]dmn\ the divisor of E, F.
352 MEASURE
As all the points of A are in B, and also in (7, they are in both
E and F, and hence in the cells of _Z), which thus forms a normal
enclosure of A. Let
7m = (dml, dmz •••) , ?;n = (dln, d2n • ••).
Let us set /. 7
«» = 7m + #m , /„ = •>?„ + «*•
Then by 350, ^ «.
7m=^^mn , ^»=^^mn-
n m
By 347, . _
em= Vm+ ffm 1 Jn = Vn + ">n .
Hence ^
Hence adding,
+
=m - %dmn+ [m - (2 + sn + 2)]. (2
2R
Thus by 339, the term in [ ] is < 0. Thus 2) gives
2/n) < sro - 2nn < a. (3
But
Thus 3) gives 1) at once.
Measurable Sets
352. 1. Let 2l=93 + (£. Jf 53, (£ are measurable, then 21 »
measurable, and
S = S + S. (1
93 + (£<2l , by 351
< 1 < S + I , by 339.
But
LOWER MEASURE :5f>:j
2. Let 21 = 93 + & //" 21, 93 are measurable, so is (£ and
<5 = 2l-S. (2
For let SI lie in the metric set 2ft. Then
2tt - 31 = m - (93 + <E) = (2ft - 6) - 93.
JL-(7-»;
<7=93 + A
Thus (7 is measurable by 1. Hence (£ is measurable by 347,
and
S = 5 + |.
From this follows 2) at once.
353. 1. Let 21 = 22ln fo <7te sum of an enumerable set of measur-
able sets. Then 21 is measurable and
If 21 is the sum of a finite number of sets, the theorem is obvi-
ously true by 352, l. In case 21 embraces an infinite number of
sets, the reasoning of 350 may be employed.
2. Let 9f = \yin\ be the union of an enumerable set of null sets.
Then 9t is a null set.
Follows at once from 1.
3. Let 21= f2ln| be the union of an enumerable set of measurable
sets whose common points two and two, form null sets. Then 21 is
measurable and
S = sSn.
4. Let (§= {en| be a non-overlapping enclosure 0/21. Then (§ is
measurable, and
g = 2en.
5. Let 53 < 21. Those cells of (g containing a point of 93 may
be denoted by 53g, and their measure will then be of course
Se-
lf 93 = 21, this will be (£. This notation is analogous to that
used in volume I when treating content.
354 MEASURE
6. If £5= \\n\ is another non-overlapping enclosure of some set
then
£> =
is measurable.
For the cells of !D are
&« =
Thus 8l/t is metric, and
354. 1. Harnack Sets. Let 21 be an interval of length I. Let
\ = ll+l^+ ...
be a positive term series whose sum X > 0 is <. I. As in defining
Cantor's set, I, 272, let us place a black interval of length ^ in the
middle of 21. In a similar manner let us place in each of the re-
maining or white intervals, a black interval, whose total lengths
= lz. Let us continue in this way; we get an enumerable set of
black intervals 33, and obviously
§ =X.
If we omit the end points from each of the black intervals we get
a set 33*, and obviously
S* = X.
The set £ = 21 - 33*
we call a Harnack set. This is complete by 324 ; and by 338, 347,
When \ = Z, ^> is discrete, and the set reduces to a set similar
to Cantor's set. When X < Z, we get an apantactic perfect set
whose upper content is I — \ > 0, and whose lower content is 0.
2. Within each of the black intervals let us put a set of points
having the end points for its first derivative. The totality of
these points form an isolated set $ and $' = €>• ^u* by 331,
$ = $'. If now ^ is not discrete, $ is not. We have thus the
theorem :
There exist isolated point sets which are not discrete.
LOWER MEASURE 355
3. It is easy to extend Harnack sets to 9?n. For example, in 9?a,
let S be the unit square. On two of its adjacent sides let us place
congruent Harnack sets £. We now draw lines through the end
points of the black intervals parallel to the sides. There results
an enumerable set of black squares <5 = \Sn\. The sides of the
squares @ and their limiting points form obviously an apantactic
perfect set $.
a? + «i+ .- = m
be a series whose sum 0 < m< 1.
We can choose ^> such that the square corresponding to its larg-
est black interval has the area a\ ; the four squares corresponding
to the next two largest black intervals have the total area a\, etc.
Then
= 2a2 = m.
Hence 1=1 -m = I.
355. 1. If S = \tm\ is an enclosure of 31 such that
2em_I<e,
it is called an e-enclosure. Let A be the complement of 51 with
respect to the metric set 9ft. Let E = \en\ be an e-enclosure of A.
We call (g, E complementary e-enclosures belonging to 31.
2. If 31 t* measurable, then each pair of complementary e/2
normal enclosures (£, E, whose divisor 1) = Z>w((S, J7), IB such that
2) < e, e small at pleasure. (1
For let (S, E be any pair of complementary e/2 normal enclo-
sures. Then
|_g<l , E-A<€^
Adding, we get 0 < i + 1- (i + 2)< e;
(2
But the points of 907 fall into one of three classes : 1° the points
of 3) ; 2° those of (g not in £> ; 3° those of E not in £>. Thus
& + E = W + &
This in 2) gives 1).
356 MEASURE
356. 1. Up to the present we have used only metric enclosures
of a set 21. If the cells enclosing 21 are measurable, we call the
enclosure measurable.
Let (S = |en| be a measurable enclosure. If the points common
to any two of its cells form a null set, we say (£ is non-
overlapping. The terms distinct, normal, go over without
change.
2. We prove now that p? _ A/T v** f\
with respect to the class of non-overlapping measurable enclosures.
For, as in 339, there exists a metric enclosure mn = \dnif\ of
each en such that ^dnic differs from en by < e/2n. But the set
K
\v\n\ forms a metric enclosure of 21. Thus
n, if
which establishes 1).
357. Let (5 be a distinct measurable enclosure of 21. Let f denote
those cells containing points of the complement A. If for each e > 0
there exists an (£ such that f < e, then 21 is measurable.
For let (g = e + f. Then e < 21. Hence e < 21 by 348. But
Hence *
and thus
n = zi.
358. 1. 2%e divisor 3) o/ £wo measurable sets 21, 33 t«
For let (£, J? be a pair of complementary e/4 normal enclosures
belonging to 21 ; let $, F be similar enclosures of 53. Let
e = Dw('(g, J£) , f = 7)w(g, -F).
Then
e<e/2 , ?<*A by 355, 2.
LOWER MEASURE 357
Now © = Z>v(S, 5) is a normal metric enclosure of 3). More-
over its cells g which contain points of £> and (7(3)) lie among
the cells of e, f. Hence
Thus by 357, £) is measurable.
2. .Z>£ 91, $8 be measurable.
3) = Dv^l 93) , U = (2t, S3).
359. ie/ 21 = £7 { 2lm | fo </«e wnion of an enumerable set of
measurable cells ; moreover let 31 be limited. Then 21 is measurable.
then £ _ yoi
For 3) = Dv(^(l, 2I2) is measurable by 358.
l'et w TN_L «r
?ix = ^ + dj , 21
Then ar Oj are measurable by 352, 2.
As
U is measurable. As U and 93L are measurable, so is 932. In a
similar manner we show that 933, 934 ••• are measurable. As
2l = 293m,
a is measurable by 353, l, and the relation 1) holds by the same
theorem.
360. Let %l<$li<:---beaset of measurable aggregates whose,
union a is limited. Then a is measurable, and
V» limi».
358 MEASURE
02 = 212 — 81! , a3 = 2l3 — EJ-*
For uniformity let us set ax = 21. Then
2l = 2am.
As each an is measurable
t = 2am
= 1^(0!+ ••- +an)
n=oo
= lira Sn .
361. Let §lj, 212 ••• fo measurable and their union 21 limited. If
3) = Dy 52lnf > 0, z£ is measurable.
For let 21 lie in the metric set 9ft;
let ® + D = W , 2ln + Al = 2«
as usual.
Now £) denoting the points common to all the 2ln, no point of
D can lie in all of the 2ln, hence it lies in some one or more of the
An. Thus D<\An\. (1
On the other hand, a point of \An\ lies in some Am, hence it
does not lie in 2^. Hence it does not lie in 3). Thus it lies in
D. Hence \An\<D. (2
From 1), 2) we have r\ _ < * >
•*' — f™-n]'
As each J.n is measurable, so is D. Hence 3) is.
362. If 21^212^: •••*'* cm enumerable set of measurable aggre-
gates, their divisor 2) is measurable, and
For as usual let D, An be the complements of 2), 2ln with respect
to some metric set 9ft.
Then D=\An\ , An<An+l.
Hence by 360, 7>_lm, A
LOWER MEASURE 359
As S) = 2tt-D,
wehave
= limSln.
363. 1. The points a: = (a^ ••• a;m) such that
form a standard rectangular cell, whose edges have the lengths
e1 = b1 — a1 , ... , em = bm-an.
When el = ez = ••• = em, the cell is a standard cube. A normal
enclosure of the limited set SI, whose cells @= fen$ are standard
cells, is called a standard enclosure.
2. For each e > 0, there are standard e-enclosures of any limited
«<?eSl.
For let (g = {en| be any ^-enclosure of SI. Then
2en-l<77. (2
Each en being metric, may be enclosed in the cells of a finite
standard outer enclosure Fn , such that
Then § = \Fn\ is an enclosure of SI, and
i;, by 2).
But the enclosure F can be replaced by a non-overlapping
standard enclosure © = |gn}, as in 334, 3. But © <
Hence if 2 17 is taken < e,
and (S) is an e-enclosure.
3- Let <g
be two non-overlapping enclosures of the same or of different
sets. Let ewll= Dv(cm, f,).
360 MEASURE
) ' ^m»
then em is measurable. By this process the metric or measurable
cell em falls into an enumerable set of non-overlapping measur-
able cells, as indicated in 3). If we suppose this decomposition to
take place for each cell of (£, we shall say we have superimposed 5
on (£.
364. ( W. H. Young. ) Let 6 be any complete set in limited 21.
Then
2 = Max 6. (1
For let 21 lie within a cube 2ft, and let A = 9W - 21, 0= 2tt - 6
be as usual the complementary sets.
Let 93= {bnf be a border set of 6 [328]. It is also a non-
overlapping enclosure of 0; we may suppose it is a standard en-
closure of (7. Let E be a standard e-enclosure of A. Let us
superimpose E on 93, getting a measurable enclosure A of both 0
and A. Then
Hence
Thus
6 = 6, by 338
<2tt-JA, by 352, 2
Hence
and thus
Max 6<2l- (2
On the other hand, it is easy to show that
Max 6>2I. (3
For let AD be an e-outer enclosure of A, formed of standard
non-overlapping cells all of which, after having discarded certain
parts, lie in 2ft.
LOWER MEASURE 361
Let t = 9W - AD + & (4
where 5 denotes the frontier points of AD lying in 21. Obviously
$ is complete. Since each face of D is a null set, g is a null set.
Thus each set on the right of 4) is measurable, hence
= 2R-2-e' , 0<e'<e
= 2 - e'.
Thus Maxd>f =5>|-e,
from which follows 3), since € is small at pleasure.
365. 1. If 21 e's complete, it is measurable, and
8 = i.
For by 364,
g=H.
On the other hand,
3 = 1, by 338,
2. Let 93 60 any measurable set in the limited set ST. Then
2 = Max 5. (1
For § > f = 5.
Hence, g > Max §. (2
But the class of measurable components of 31 embraces the
class of complete components (S, since each G> is measurable by 1.
Thus Max % > Max £ (3
From 2), 3) we have 1), on using 364.
366. Van Vleck Sett. Let Q denote the unit interval (0, 1),
whose middle point call M. Let $ denote the irrational points of
(5. Let the division Dn, n = 1, 2, ••• divide (§ into equal intervals
a. of length 1/2".
362 MEASURE
We throw the points 3 into two classes SI = jaf, S3 = |6| having
the following properties :
1° To each a corresponds a point b symmetrical with respect
to M* and conversely.
2° If a falls in the segment 8 of J9n, each of the other seg-
ments B' of Dn shall contain a point a' of 31 such that a' is situated
in B' as a is situated in B.
3° Each B of Dn shall contain a point a' of 31 such that it is
situated in 5, as any given point a of SI is situated in (5.
4° 21 shall contain a point a situated in (£ as any given point
a' of SI is in any Bn.
The 1° condition states that 21 goes over into S3 on rotating (5
about M. The 2° condition states that St falls into n = 1, 2, 22,
23, ••• congruent subsets. The 3° condition states that the subset
2ln of SI in Bn goes over into SI on stretching it in the ratio 2n : 1.
The condition 4° states that 31 goes over into Sln on contracting it
in the ratio 1 : 2".
We show now that 31, and therefore S3 are not measurable. In
the first place, we note that
St = «,
by 1°. As ^ = 31 + S3, if 31 or S3 were measurable, the other would
be, and ^
Sl = S3 = f
Thus if we show 31 or S3 = 1, neither 31 nor S3 is measurable.
We show this by proving that if 31 = «< 1, then S3 is a measurable
set, and S3 = 1. But when S3 is measurable, $8 = \ as we saw, and
we are led to a contradiction.
Let e = el + €2 + • • • be a positive term series whose sum e is
small at pleasure. Let (Sj = \en\ be a non-overlapping Cj-enclosure
of 31, lying in (5. Then
Let S3j = 3 - (gj ; then S3X < S3, and
S^ = § - ij = 1 - «j
= 1 — a — €j>l — a — €j .
LOWER MEASURE 363
Each interval en contains one or more intervals ijnl^ ij^, ••• of
some Z>,, such that
where _ ^
may be taken small at pleasure.
Now each ijnm has a subset 8lnm of 81 entirely similar to 81.
Hence there exists an enclosure (Snm of 8lnm, whose measure «nm is
such that
But (S2 = {Snm| is a non-overlapping enclosure of 81, whose
measure v~
? 0<e'2<ea
if a- is taken sufficiently small.
Let S32 denote the irrational points in (Sj — (S^. It is a part of
53, and S32 h:is no point in common with 33r We have
52=i1-S2 = «1-«2
= a + ei - «2 - €2
In this way we may continue. Thus S3 contains the measurable
component «, . <*
20i + <52 + •"
whose measure is
>!-€.
As c is small at pleasure, S3 = 1.
367. (IF. #. Young.) Let
*!,«,, «,- (1
6« an infinite enumerable set of point sets whose union 81 w limited.
Let 8lB>a>0 , n = 1, 2 ••• 2%ew iAere en«<« a set of points each
of wlitch belongs to an infinity of the sets 1 ) and of lower measure > a.
864 MEASURE
For by 365, 2, there exists in the sets 1), measurable sets
«i. V «fc -, Ga- (2
each of whose measures (En > a. Let us consider the first n of
these sets, viz.:
&! , Ii2 ••• ^n.
The points common to any two of the sets 3) form a measurable
set £)4<c by 358, l. Hence the union Sln = fjDi«| is measurable, by
359. The difference of one of the sets 3), as (£j and Dw(Sj, Gln),
is a measurable set Cj which contains no point in common with the
remaining sets of 3). Moreover
/» <*%
Cj > a - (S1B.
In the same way we may reason with the other sets (£3, £3 •••
of 3). Thus 21 contains n measurable sets cx, c2 ••• cn no two of
which have a common point.
Hence
c = q + ••• + cn
is a measurable set and
The first and last members give
ilB>«--H
n
Thus however small a > 0 may be, there exists a p such that
Si,, (l-f)«. (4
Let us now group the sets 2) in sets of /A. These sets give rise
to a sequence of measurable sets
£1,1 , Sz^ , (£sM ••• (5
such that the points of each set in 5) belong to at least two of the
sets 1) and such that the measure of each is > the right side of 4).
We may now reason on the sets 5) as we did on those in 2).
We would thus be led to a sequence of measurable sets
^ , 62, , G», - (6
ASSOCIATE SETS 365
such that the points of each set in 6) lie in at least two of the sets
5), and hence in at least 22 of the sets 1), and such that their
measures are.
In this way we may continue indefinitely. Let now ^ be the
union of all the points of 21, common to at least two of the sets 1).
Let 332 be the union of the points of §1 common to at least 22 of
the sets 1), etc. In this way we get the sequence
^>^2> •-
each of which contains a measurable set whose measure is
>(1 - e)«.
We have now only to apply 25 and 364.
368. As corollaries of 367 we have:
1. Let Qx, £}2 ••• be an infinite enumerable set of non-overlapping
cubes whose union is limited. Let each Qn > a > 0. Then there
exists a set of points b whose cardinal number is c, lying in an infin-
ity of the On and such that b > a.
2. {Arzeld,} Let y\, y% ••• ==?/• On each line yn there exists an
enumerable set of intervals of length Bn. Should the number of inter-
vals vn on the lines yn be finite, let vn = oo. In any case Sn > a > 0,
w = l, 2, ••• and the projections of these intervals lie in 31 = (a, 6).
Then there exists at least one point x = f in 51, such that the ordinate
through £ is cut by an infinity of these intervals.
Associate Sets
369. 1. Let e1>e2>e3 ••• = 0. (1
Let (gn be a standard en-enclosure of $ln. If the cells of (§n+1 lie in
<£„, we write <gi>@2>- (2
and call 2) a standard sequence of enclosures belonging to 1).
Obviously such sequences exist. The set
«.-!>» J<4
is called an outer associated set of 31. Obviously
366 MEASURE
2. Each outer associated set 2le is measurable, and
f=Se=limgn.
n=oo
For each (Sn is measurable; hence 2le is measurable by 362, and
a. -lime.
= , asen=0.
370. 1. Let A be the complement of 31 with respect to some
cube O containing 21. Let Ae be an outer associated set of A.
Then Q, _
Sli=Q-4e
is called an inner associated set of 21. Obviously
&<&
2. The inner associated set 2lt is measurable, and
For Ae is measurable by 369, 2. Hence 2lt=O — -A<> is meas-
urable. But
•"•e ^= •**-
by 369, 2. Hence
Separated Sets
371. Let 21, S3 be two limited point sets. If there exist
measurable enclosures @, $ of 21, S3 such that 3) = Z>v((§:, 5) is a
null set, we say 21, S3 are separated.
If we superimpose % on (§, we get an enclosure of (£ = (21, S3)
such that those cells containing points of both 21, S3 form a null
set, since these cells are precisely £). We shall call such an en-
closure of S a null enclosure.
Let 21 = {2ln} ; we shall call this a separated division of 21 into
the subsets 2ln, if each pair 2lm, 2ln is separated. We shall also
say the 2ln are separated.
SEPARATED SETS 367
372. For 21, S3 to be separated, it is necessary and sufficient that
t* a null set.
It is sufficient. For let
6 = (& 8) , Sle = £) + a, S3, = S) + b.
Then @ = (a,b,S»
is a measurable enclosure of (£, consisting of three measurable
cells. Of these only £> contains points of both SI, S3. But by
hypothesis 3) is a null set. Hence SI, S3 are separated.
It is necessary. For let 2ft be a null distinct enclosure of @,
such that those of its cells Sft, containing points of SI, S3 form a
null set. Let us superimpose 3ft on the enclosure (S above, get-
ting an enclosure ^ °f 51-
The cells of g arising from a contain no point of S3 ; similarly
the cells arising from b contain no point of SI. On the other
hand, the cells arising from 3), split up into three classes
$>« , Si , Srf.
The first contains no point of S3, the second no point of SI, the
cells of the last contain both points of SI, S3. As £>„,&:< ^»
Sa>6 = 0. (1
On the other hand,
t^P ft +.*>>*!
hence
Thus a + £.>!,. (2
byl). Also §t=a + £=I by 369, 2.
This with 2) gives ^ ^
Hence £. = £. (3
But
This with 3) gives £>6 = 0.
In a similar manner we find that 3)a = 0. Hence 3) is a null
set by 3).
368 MEASURE
373. 1. -7/21, 33 are separated, then 2)= .Z)v(2I, 53) is a null set.
For 3)e = Z>v(2le, 53e) is a null set by 372. But 2) < £)e.
2. Let 21, 53 be the Van Vleck sets in 366. We saw there that
i = i = l. Then by 369, 2, Se = 5e=l. The divisor of 2le, 53e is
not a null set. Hence by 372, 21, $3 are not separated. Thus the
condition that £> be a null set is necessary, but not sufficient.
374. 1. Let {2In{, |53nj be separated diviaions of 21. Let
(£« = Dv(2lt, 53,c). ^Aew )(£«! ** « separated division 0/21 «Z«0.
We have to show there exists a null enclosure of any two of the
sets (£«, (£,»„. Now (SIK lies in 2lt and 33K; also (£mn lies in 21OT, 53n.
By hypothesis there exists a null enclosure (£ of 2lt. 2lro; and a null
enclosure g of 53*, 53n. Then © = Z>v(@, g) is a null enclosure of
2lt, 2lm and of 53,, 53n. Thus those cells of ©, call them ®0, con-
taining points of both 2lt, 2Im form a null set ; and those of its cells
©6, containing points of both 93*, 53n also form a null set.
Let Gr= \g\ denote the cells of © that contain points of both
Sue, (£mn. Then a cell g contains points of 2tt 21TO $8K 53n. Thus y
lies in ©a or ©6. Thus in either case Gr is a null set. Hence \&lK\
form a separated division of 21.
2. Let 7) be a separated division of 21 into the cells dl, d2~>-
Let E be another separated division of 21 into the cells e1, e% •••
We have seen that F = \fM\ where flK = Dv(dt, eK} is also a sepa-
rated division of 21. We shall say that F is obtained by superim-
posing E on D or D on E, and write F=D + E= E+ D.
3. Let E be a separated division of the separated component 53
of 21, while D is a separated division of 21. If dt is a cell of D, eK
a cell of E, and dlK = Dv (c?t, e,), then
4-(<t. <••")+£
Thus superposing J? on D causes each cell dt to fall into sepa-
rated cells rftl, c?l4 ••• St. The union of all these cells, arising from
different d^ gives a separated division of 21 which we also denote
by D + E.
375. Let |2ln| be a separated division of 21. Let 53 < 21, and let
53n denote the points 0/53 in 2ln. TAew |53n$ i* a separated division
0/53.
SEPARATED SETS 369
For let 3) be a null enclosure of 2lm, 2Jn. Let 3)^ denote the
cells of 3) containing points of both 2lm, 2ln. Let @ denote the
cells of ID containing points of 53 ; let Grat6 denote the cells con-
taining points of both 53m , 53n . Then
As Sot is a null set, so is (Sot.
376. 1. Let 21 = (53, (E) fo a separated division of 21.
i = g + f. (1
For let €x > e2 > ••• = 0. There exist en-raeasurable enclosures
of 21, 53, <S ; call them respectively ^n, -Bn, 6Yn. Then ®n = An +
Bn + Cn is an en-enclosure of 21, 53, (5 simultaneously.
Since 53, (£ are separated, there exist enclosures -B, (7 of 53, S
such that those cells of D = B + 0 containing points of both 53
and (£ form a null set. Let us now superpose D on (Sn getting
an en-enclosure En=\ent\ of 21, 53, (£ simultaneously. Let e^
denote the cells of En containing points of 53 alone ; een those
cells containing only points of (£ ; and e^ those cells containing
points of both 53, (£. Then
%€„ = ^ebn + 2ecn + 2 e^ . (2
i
As 2^ = 0, we see that as n = oo,
2^ = 1 , 2^, = S , ^ecn = t
Hence passing to the limit n= QO, in 2) we get 1).
2. Ze£ 21 = f53n| be a separated division of limited 21. Then
! = 2§n. (1
For in the first place, the series
£=2in (2
is convergent. In fact let 2In = (53X, 532 ••• 53n).
Then 2ln < 21, and hence In < I.
370 MEASURE
On the other hand, by 1
in=51+ ... +§„=!?„,
the sum of the first n terms of the series 2). Thus
^n<i,
and hence B is convergent by 80, 4. Thus
£<I.
On the other hand, by 339,
#>i.
The last two relations give 1).
CHAPTER XII
LEBESGUE INTEGRALS
General Theory
377. In the foregoing chapters we have developed a theory of
integration which rests on the notion of content. In this chapter
we propose to develop a theory of integration due to Lebesgue,
which rests on the notion of measure. The presentation here
given differs considerably from that of Lebesgue. As the reader
will see, the theory of Lebesgue integrals as here presented differs
from that of the theory of ordinary integrals only in employing
an infinite number of cells instead of a finite number.
378. In the following we shall suppose the field of integration
21 to be limited, as also the integrand 51 lies in 9?TO and for brevity
we set /(a;) = f(xl • •• xm~). Let us effect a separated division of
21 into cells B1, 82 .... If each cell 8, lies in a cube of side d, we
shall say D is a separated division of norm d.
As before, let
ML = Ma,xf , 7wt = Min/ , o>(= Osc/= M, — w, in 8,.
the summation extending over all the cells of 21, are called the
upper and lower sums off over 21 with respect to D.
The sum .
is called the oscillatory sum with respect to D.
379. If m = Min f,M= Max / in 21, then
For
m < w, < Mt < M.
• 871
372 LEBESGUE INTEGRALS
2wi8. •
Thus
But 2l = I
by 376, 2.
380. 1. Since /is limited in 21,
Max SD , Min 8D
with respect to the class of all separated divisions D of 2t, are
finite. We call them respectively the lower and upper Lebesgue
integrals of /over the field 21, and write
In order to distinguish these new integrals from the old ones,
we have slightly modified the old symbol j to resemble somewhat
script L, or / , in honor of the author of these integrals.
L"L>
we say /is L-integrable over 21, and denote the common value by
//'
JU&
which we call the L-integral.
The integrals treated of in Vol. I we will call R-integrals, i.e.
integrals in the sense of Riemann.
2. Let/ be limited over the null set 21. Thenf is L-integrable in
21, and
• ' f/=°-
awH
This is obvious from 379.
381. Let 21 be metric or complete. Then
GENERAL THEORY 373
For let rfj, c?a ••• be an unmixed metric or complete division of
31 of norm d. Let each cell dt be split up into the separated cells
Then since dt is complete or metric, •"
Hence using the customary notation,
Thus summing over «;,
Summing over i gives
2mt< < STO^ J^ < ZMjH^ <
IK IK
Thus by definition,
Letting now rf = 0, we get 1).
2. Ze£ 21 be metric or complete. If f is R-integrable in 31, it is
L-integrable and
3. In case that 31 is not metric or complete, the relations 1), 2)
may not hold.
Example 1. Let St denote the rational points in the interval
(0, 1).
Let
/-t f m
_ _ = 1, for x = — , n even
n
= 2, when n is odd.
Then
while
since 31 is a null set. Thus 1) does not hold.
374 LEBESGUE INTEGRALS
Example 2. Let/= 1 at the rational points 51 in (0, 1). Then
J/=1 , JV_0 , and J/<J[/. (3
Let ff= — 1 in 51. Then
Thus in 3) thve Zrintegral is less than the 72-integral, while in
4) it is greater.
Examples. Let /=! at the irrational points 51 in (0, 1).
Then ~ .,
; //=//
although 51 is neither metric nor complete.
382. Let .D, A be separated divisions of 51. Let
For any cell dt of Z> splits up into d^ dlt--- on superimposing
A, and =
< = 2<K.
But
M,AK
and
!»«««
*<^ , SS>SD.
383. 1. Extremal Sequences. There exists a sequence of sepa-
rated divisions n n TI fi
D^ , X*2 , JJ3 "•
each J?n+1 being obtained from Dn by superposition, such that
, (2
(3
GENERAL THEORY
375
For let €j > e2 > ••• =0. For each en, there exists a division
E such that
and for uniformity set El = Dv Then by 382,
Hence
Letting n = oo we get 2).
Thus there exists a sequence \D'n} of the type 1) for 2), and a
sequence \ D'n j of the same type for 3). Let now Dn = D'n + D'n'.
Obviously 2), 3) hold simultaneously for the sequence { Dn \ .
2. The sequence 1) is called an extremal sequence.
3. Let \Dn} be an extremal sequence, and E any separated divi-
sion of U. Let En = Dn -f E. Then E±, E^-" is an extremal
sequence also.
384. Let fie L-integrable in 51. Then for any extremal sequence
where dt are the cells of Dn, and £t any point ofR in
Kor
Hence ^.
Passing to the limit we get 1).
385. 1. Let m = Min/, M = Max/in 31.
This follows at once from 379 and 383, 1.
376 LEBESGUE INTEGRALS
2. Let F = Max \f\ in 21, then
This follows from 1.
f
<
386. In order that fbe L-integrable in 21, it is necessary that, for
each extremal sequence \ Dn j ,
lim {10 /=0;
n=oo
and it is sufficient if there exists a sequence of superimposed separated
divisions \En\, such that
lim {ljn/ = 0.
It is necessary. For
/» /*" —
I = lim SD , I = lim ## .
J or — n J or n
As /is l/-integrable,
0= - =li
ota ?
It is sufficient. For
Both {/S^B|, |^nl are limited monotone sequences. Their
limits therefore exist. Hence
0 = lim fig = lim SEn — lim *S^ .
Thus
L-L
^a oi/a
387. In order that f be L-integrable, it is necessary and sufficient
that for each e > 0, there exists a separated division D of 21, for
which
It is necessary. For by 386, there exists an extremal sequence
, such that
0 < flD f<€ , for any n > some m.
Thus we may take Dm for D.
GENERAL THEORY 377
It is sufficient. For let ej >ea > ••• = 0. Let \Dn\ be an
extremal sequence for which
Let AJ = D! , ^ = Ax + Z>2 , A3 = A2 + D3 -. Then { An| is a
set of superimposed separated divisions, and obviously
Hence / is i-integrable by 386.
388. In order that f be L-integrable, it is necessary and sufficient
that, for each pair of positive numbers a>, <r there exists a separated
division D of 31, such that if TJI, 7/2, ••• are those cells in which
Qscf> (u, then
2?t < *• (1
It is necessary. For by 387 there exists a separated division
D = I St| for which
(0(r. (2
If 0j, #2 ••• denote the cells of D in which Osc/ ;< o>,
II^/ = 2a)t^l + SwA > &)2^t . (3
This in 2) gives 1).
It is sufficient. For taking e > 0 small at pleasure, let us then
take
e e ,*
ff==^0 ' a) = ~^' (4
231
where H = Osc / in 31.
From 1), 3), and 4) we have, since (at< ft,
+ 2&) Jt < o-fi + 2a>^t < o-n -(- &>S = e.
We now apply 387.
389. 1. If f is L-integrable in 31, it is in 35 < 31.
For let \Dnl be an extremal sequence of /relative to 31. Then
by 386,
378 LEBESGUE INTEGRALS
Hut the sequence \Dn\ defines a sequence of superposed sepa-
rated divisions of 53, which we denote by \En\. Obviously
Hence by 1),
*W=o,
and / is .L-integrable in 33 by 386.
2. If f is L-integrable in 21, so is \f\.
The proof is analogous to I, 507, using an extremal sequence
for/.
390. 1. Let [2lnf be a separated division of 21 into a finite or in-
finite number of subsets. Letf be limited in 21. Then
f/=f/+f/+-
oL2t d&fe, ^L2l2
For Ze£ MS 1° suppose that the subsets 2lx ••• 2tr are finite in num-
ber. Let \Dn\ be an extremal sequence of/ relative to 21, and
\Dmn\ an extremal sequence relative to 2lm. Let
Then {J?n| is an extremal sequence of /relative to 21, and also
relative to each 2lm.
Letting w = oo, we get 1), for this case.
Let now r be infinite. We have
i=|iro. (2
». = («!"•«») , en = 5l-53n.
Then 33n, (Sn form a separated division of 21, and
2T = Sn+Sn.
If v is taken large enough, 2) shows that
in 21.
GENERAL THEORY 379
Thus by case 1°,
//=//+//
4H 423n 4e»
= f+- + f+e', (3
J^&l 42l»
where by 385, 2
, n>v.
Thus 1) follows from 3) in this case.
2. Let |5ln| be a separated division 0/21. Then
/,
n
if/is L-integrable in 21, or i/zY i« in eacA 2ln, awti limited in SI.
391. 1. ie£/ = ^ in 51 except at the points of a null set
Then
7* 7*
j /=/ 9- (1
<^2l 21
Forlet . Then
/= /+ /= f / (2
c,L<8 ^Lyi 4:33
Similarly ? g = ^ . (g
4a ^33
But/ = ^ in 53. Thus 2), 3) give 1).
392. 1. 7c>0;
The proof is similar to 3, 3, using extremal sequences.
2. Iff is L-integrable in 21, so is cf, and
where c is a constant.
380 LEBESGUE INTEGRALS
393. 1. Let F (#) = /iO*0 + ••• +/»00> g«c^ fm being limited
in 21. 2%ew
n /» /» n /*
*' f~< f<Zlf»- <1
1 4/21 £8 * **
For let |7>n| be an extremal sequence common to F,fv •••/„. In
each cell
^nl » ^n2 *"
of Dn we have
2 Min/m<Min^< Max F< 2 Max/TO.
Multiplying by c?ns, summing over « and then letting w=oo,
gives 1).
2. Iffi(x), -"/nCa:) «/*e e«cA L-integrdble in 21, «o t*
and
i - — / " .
+ c
nCfn.
«*«
394. 1.
<! f+
For using the notation of 393,
Min (/+^r) < Min/+ Max# <
in each cell dns of Dn.
2. If g is L-integrable in 21,
Reasoning similar to 3, 4, using extremal sequences.
GENERAL THEORY 381
For
etc.
4. Iff, g are L-integrable in 21, so isf — g, and
f* C* C*
/ (/-<?) = / /- / g.
M JV* <=L>31
395. Iff, g are L-integrable in 21, so isf-g.
Also their quotient f/g is L-integrable provided it is limited in 31.
The proof of the first part of the theorem is analogous to I,
505, using extremal sequences common to both f and g. The
proof of the second half is obvious and is left to the reader.
396. 1. Let /, g be limited in 21, andf<^g, except possibly in a
null set 9^. Then ^ ^
f< 9- (1
Xa ?L$i
Let us suppose first that/<. <jr everywhere in 21.
Let \Dr\ be an extremal sequence common to both / and g.
Then 8Df<SD^.
Letting n = oo , we get 1).
We consider now the general case. Let 21 = 33 -f 9J- Then
f /*
/- // *
since
/= / 0-0.
But in 93,/<.0r without exception. We may therefore use the
result of case 1°.
2. Letf>_ 0 in 21. 2%en
For
382 LEBESGUE INTEGRALS
397. The relations of 4 also hold for L-integrals, viz. :
/
^a
< f i/i- a
(2
n- (3
'I- (4
The proof is analogous to that employed for the jK-integrals,
using extremal sequences.
398. Let 2l = (53u, (Su) be a separated division for each u = 0.
Let ltt = 0.
lim f/= T/.
M=o ei'Su et/a
For by 390, 1,
/=/+/•
<Xa 4»« ^ea
But by 385, 2, the last integral = 0, since C£u = 0, and since /is
limited.
399. Let f be limited and continuous in SI, except possibly at the
points of a null set 5ft. Then f is L-integrable in St.
Let us first take W = 0. Then/ is continuous in 21. Let 21 lie
in a standard cube O- If Osc/ is not < e in 21, let us divide Q
into 2n cubes. If in one of these cubes
Osc/<e, (1
let us call it a black cube. A cube in which 1) does not hold we
will call white. Each white cube we now divide in 2n cubes.
These we call black or white according as 1) holds for them or
does not. In this way we continue until we reach a stage where
all cubes are black, or if not we continue indefinitely. In the
latter case, we get an infinite enumerable set of cubes
flu 12' la - (2
GENERAL THEORY 383
Each point a of 31 lies in at least one cube 2). For since / is
continuous at x = a,
l/(*)-/(a)|<«/2 , x in K,(a).
Thus when the process of division has been carried so far that
the diagonals of the corresponding cubes are < S, the inequality
1) holds for a cube containing a. This cube is a black cube.
Thus, in either case, each point of 21 lies in a black cube.
Now the cubes 2) effect a separated division D of 51, and in
each of its cells 1) holds. Hence /is _Z/-integrable in 21.
Let us now suppose $1 > 0. We set
2i = £ + ft.
Then / is X-integrable in (5 by case 1°. It is _L-integrable in 9?
by 380, 2. Then it is i-integrable in a. by 390, 1.
2. If / is Z/-integrable in 21, we cannot say that the points of
discontinuity of /form a null set.
Example. Let/= 1 at the irrational points $, in 21 = (0, 1) ;
= 0 at the other points $ft, in 21.
Then each point of 21 is a point of discontinuity. But here
since 9? is a null set. Thus /is i-integrable.
400. Iff(xl ••' xm~) has limited variation in 21, it is L-integrable.
For let D be a cubical division of space of norm d. Then by I,
709, there exists a fixed number F, such that
^a>4m-l< V
for any D. Let o>, a be any pair of positive numbers. We take
d such that
. a
Let d{ denote those cells in which Osc/> w, and let the number
of these cells be v. Let i/t denote the points of 21 in d( . Then
"-1 < Sw^1"-1 < V.
384 LEBESGUE INTEGRALS
Hence v
v<— — . (2
~ cadm~l
Thus v= ^ jm^- Vdm
- ' by2)f
, byl).
o>
Hence /is />-integrable by 388.
' 401. Let <f> =/, in 21 < « ;
= 0, m ^1 = $ - 51.
Then
if 1°, <j> is L-integrdble in S3 ; or 2°, / is L-integrable in 21, awci 2t, ^4.
are separated parts of ^Q.
On the 1° hypothesis let {(£,$ be an extremal sequence of <f>.
Let the cells of Gj, be «j, e2 ••• They effect a separated division
of 5( into cells d^ dz ••• Let wt, M^ be the extremes of /in d^ and
wt, iVt the extremes of </> in et. Then for those cells containing at
least a point of 21,
n£ < m.d. < M& < Nfr , (2
is obviously true when et = dc Let dt < ec If ml j< 0,
nWt <^ mtdt , since mt = ni. (3
If wt > 0, nt = 0, and 3) holds.
IfJf^O, M&<N?^ since 2Vt = 0. (4
If Mt > 0, 4) still holds, since M = NC
Thus 2) holds in all these cases. Summing 2) gives
93
for the division (5,, since in a cell e of (S, containing no point of 21,
</> = 0. Letting s = oo, we get 1), since the end members
INTEGRAND SETS 385
On the 2° hypothesis,
r<#>= r *+ r *= /%= r/,
<£» ot-a e£^ ^a ota
since <£ being = 0 in A, is i-integrable, and we can apply 390.
402. 1. If „
/ /=<>,
at*
we calif a. null function in 21.
2- Iff> 0 «'* « null function in 21, f^e points $ where f> 0
a
For let 21 = 3 + ^P, so that/= 0 in 3.
By 401,
0
„ „
= //=//. (1
M <LK
Let el > e2 > •«« = 0. Let tyn denote the points of ty where
/ > en. Then
/» /»
= 0, by 1).
Each 3 is a null set. For
Hence ^n = 0.
Then ^ = ^n|=^1+^2+
where ^ = ^, Q^=^-^
As each Qn is a null set, ty is a null set.
403. Let 21 be a limited point set lying in an rw-way space 9?m.
Let / (xl '" xm~) be a limited function denned over 21. Any
point of 21 may be represented by
a = («! ... am).
386 LEBESGUE INTEGRALS
The point x = (ax -• amxm+l)
lies in an m -f- 1 way space 9?OT+1. The set of points frcf in which
xm+l ranges from — oo to +00 is called an ordinate through a. If
xm+1 is restricted by 0 < < ;
v _±. xm+\ -^ »»
we shall call the ordinate a positive ordinate of length I ; if it is re-
stricted by -l<xm+l<Q,
it is a negative ordinate. The set of ordinates through all the
points a of 51, each having a length =/(a), and taken positively
or negatively, as /(a) is ^ 0, form a point set $ in 9?»n+i which
we call an integrand set. The points of $ f°r which xm+l has a
fixed value xm+1 = c form a section of 3, and is denoted by 3(<0 °r
by a-
404. Let 51= fa} ie a limited point set in 9fm. Through each
point a, let us erect a positive ordinate of constant length Z, getting a
set £), in $m+1 . Then g = z| H
For let (§! > (S2 > ••• f9rm a standard sequence of enclosures of
O, such that ^ . =
v£n = *J- C^
Let us project each section of Qjn corresponding to a given value
of xm+l on 9?OT, and let 2ln be their divisor. Then 2ln >: 21. Thus
Letting n = oo , and using 2), we get
O « 5 • J.
of 1), let 0 be the complement of £) with re-
spect to some standard cube O in 9?m+1, of base Q in 9"Jro.
Then, as just shown,
0 = ll , where .4 = ^ - 51.
Hence £ = &-$= Ql - ll
-ii'9-c9
-a.
INTEGRAND SETS 387
405. Letf>0 be L-integrable m 21. Then
*« the integrand set corresponding to f.
For let {Sj be a separated division D of SI. On each cell S,
erect a cylinder (St of height 3/t = Max/ in St. Then by 404,
Let £ = |St} ; the (£t are separated. Hence, e>0 being small
at pleasure,
for a properly chosen D. Thus
s<
Similarly we find
From 2), 3) follows 1).
406. Letf>^0 be L-integrable over the measurable field 21. Then
the corresponding integrand set 3 is measurable, and
3= /• (1
For by 2) in 405,
Using the notation of 405, let cn be a cylinder erected on Bn of
height mn = Min/ in 8n. Let c = |cn|. Then c < 3» and hence
c<2- (2
But 21 being measurable, each cn is measurable, by 404. Hence
c is by 359. Thus 2) gives
c<2- (3
Now for a properly chosen D,
-e+ r/<2mt$t = c.
388 LEBESGUE INTEGRALS
Hence
f<r, (4
^a
as e is arbitrarily small. From 2), 3), 4)
f /< 3<§< r /,
<£«
from which follows 1).
Measurable Functions
407. Let/(a;1 ••• #m) be limited in the limited measurable set 21.
Let 2lxM denote the points of 21 at which
X </</*.
If each 2lxM is measurable, we s&yfis measurable in 21-
We should bear in mind that when f is measurable in 21, neces-
sarily 21 itself is measurable, by hypothesis.
408. 1. Iff is measurable in 21, the points £ of 21, at which f= C,
form a measurable set.
For let 2ln denote the points where
where . n
ei>e2> '•• =°-
Then by hypothesis, 2ln is measurable. But & =
Hence (S is measurable by 361.
2. Iffis measurable in 21, the set of points where
is measurable, and conversely.
Follows from 1, and 407.
3. If the points 2IA in 21 where f> \ form a measurable set for
each X, / is measurable in 21.
For 2U,* having the same meaning as in 407,
2tx^ = 2lx-2l^.
Each set on the right being measurable, so is 2U,**
MEASURABLE FUNCTIONS 389
409. 1. Iff is measurable in 21, it is L-integrable.
For setting m = Min /, M = Max / in 21, let us effect a division
D of the interval % = (wi, M ) of norm d, by interpolating a finite
number of points mi<mz<m,< -^
Let us call the resulting segments, as well as their lengths,
dl, d2, ds •••
Let 2lt denote the points of 31 in which
ml_l<f<ml , i = l, 2, ••• ; mQ = m.
We now 'form the sums
Obviously
*D<
= 0 , as d = 0. (2
We may now apply 387.
2. Iff is measurable in 21
= lim Sw^ = lim 2wtSt, (3
using the notation in 1.
This follows from 1), 2) in 1.
3. The relation 3) is taken by Lebesgue as definition of his
integrals. His theory is restricted to measurable fields and to
measurable functions. For Lebesgue's own development of his
theory the reader is referred to his pager, Integrate, Longueur,
Aire, Annali di Mat., Ser. 3, vol. 7 (1902) ; and to his book,
Lefons sur V Integration. Paris, 1904. He may also consult the
excellent account of it in Hobson's book, The Theory of Functions
of a Real Variable. Cambridge, England, 1907.
390 LEBESGUE INTEGRALS
Semi-Divisors and Quasi- Divisors
410. 1. The convergence of infinite series leads to the two
following classes of point sets.
T of n oo
F= If fa ... O = 2/t + 2/t = ^n + .F,, (1
1 n+l
each/t being defined in 21.
Let us take e > 0 small at pleasure, and then fix it.
Let us denote by ?In the points of 31 at which
-*<^nO)<*. . (2
Of course 2ln may not exist. We are thus led in general to the
Sets at ot or s»
*+l •> *»2 ' -"-B \P
The complementary set An = 21 — 3ln will denote the points
where \r.(*
If now F is convergent at #, there exists a v such that this point
lies in or or or
•av , <*v+i v -^v+z
The totality of the points of convergence forms a set which has
this property : corresponding to each of its points #, there exists
a v such that x lies in the set 5). A set having this property is
called the semi-divisor of the sets 3), and is denoted by
Suppose now, on the other hand, that 1) does not converge at
the point x in SI. Then there exists an infinite set of indices
n1<n2< "- = oo,
such that —
Thus, the point x lies in an infinity of the sets
-"•1 » "2 ' •"•& '"
The totality of points £uch that each lies in an fnfinity of the
sets 6) is called the quasi-divisor of 6) and is denoted by
Obviously,
SEMI-DIVISORS AND QUASI-DI VISORS 391
We may generalize these remarks at once. Since F(x) is
nothing but
we can apply these notions to the case that the functions/^! ••• a;m)
are defined in 21, and that
lim/t = <f>.
2. We may go still farther and proceed in the following abstract
manner.
The divisor £) of the point sets
«i , v- a
is the set of points lying in all the sets 1).
The totality of points each of which lies in an infinity of the sets
1) is called the quasi- divisor and is denoted by
QdvfSU. (2
The totality of points a, to each of which correspond an index TWO,
such that a lies in
^•ma » ^"'a*1 ' " "
forms a set called the semi-divisor of 1), and is denoted by
Sdv{2lnj. (3
If we denote 2), 3) by O and <S respectively, we have, obviously,
£) < e < O. (4
3. In the special case that Slj >212 > '" we have
O = <5 = £). (5
For denoting the complementary sets by the corresponding
Roman letters, we have
D- -A, + />»(*!, 4j)+ VvWv 4»)+ •"
But Q lias precisely the same expression.
Thus O = $), and hence by 4), <S = 5).
392 LEBESGUE INTEGRALS
4. Let 2ln + ^n = ®, w = l, 2, ... Then
For each point b of 33 lies
either 1° only in a finite number of 2ln, or in none at all,
or 2° in an infinite number of 2ln .
In the 1° case, b does not lie in 21,, 2la+1 ••• ; hence it lies in
As, A,+1 •" In the 2° case b lies obviously in Qdv {21J.
5. If 2lj, 212 ... are measurable, and their union is limited,
are measurable.
For let £)n = #v (2ln, 2ln+1 •••) . Then @ = {£„} .
But @ is measurable, as each £)„ is. Thus Sdv { An\ is measur-
able, and hence jQ is by 4.
6. Let O = Qdv {2ln| , eacA 2ln Jem^ measurable, and their union
limited. If there are an infinity of the 2ln, say
whose measure is > a,
O>a. (6
For let 33n = (2tln, 3Iln+1 »•), then 5n>«-
(7
by 362. As O >33 we have 6) at once, from 7).
Limit Functions
lim/C^ ... xm, ^ ... £„) = ^(^ ... zm),
< = T
as a: ranges over 21 , T finite or infinite. Let f be measurable in 21
and numerically <M,for each t near r. Then <f> is measurable in
21 also.
To prove this we show that the points 33 of 21 where
\<(j)<fJL (1
LIMIT FUNCTIONS 393
form a measurable set for each X, /A. For simplicity let T be finite.
Let £j, £2--- =T; also let €1>e2> • •• =0. Let (Sn,, denote the
points of SI where
O </* + «»• (2
Then for each point x of 33, there is an *0 such that 2) holds for
any*., if «>*0. Let (5n = !Sdv {(£„.}. Then$8<gn. But the (£„.
being measurable, £„ is by 410, 5. Finally 33 = Dv \ Sn| , and hence
33 is measurable.
/or a; in SI, awe? r /rate or infinite. Let t', t" ••• =r. Let each
ft—f(^i tw~) be measurable, and numerically <M. Let <f>=fa + gs-
Let ©, denote the points where
!&!>«•
Then for each e > 0, lim ^ _ ^ „
*=00
For by 411, <f> is measurable, hence g, is measurable in SI, hence
©, is measurable.
Suppose now that 1) does not hold. Then
fim ©. = I > 0.
«=00
Then there are an infinity of the ©„ as ©ai, ©,,,••• whose
measures are >X>0. Then by 410, 6, the measure of
© = Qdv{©8|
is > X. But this is not so, since/, = ^>, at each point of SI.
413. 1. Let ••
for x in 31, and r finite or infinite.
t1, «"...= T. (1
If each ft = f (x, #•>) t« measurable, and numerically <Min 31 /or
sequence I), Mew
/-» x*
0, 0- (2
LEBESGUE INTEGRALS
<£=/. + <?„
394
For set
and let
Then as in 412, <f> and gt are measurable in 21. Then by 409,
they are j[/-integrable, and
Let 33, denote the points of SI, at which
and let 93, + i?, = 21. Then S3,, .B, are measurable, since gt is.
Thus by 390, r
\ y.= ff.+
«La
Hence
By 412, S3. = 0. Thus
lim f <7. = 0.
*=«0La
Hence passing to the limit in 3), we get 2), for the sequence
1). Since we can do this for every sequence of points t which
= T, the relation 2) holds.
< M,
converge in 21. If each term ft is measurable, and each
then F is L-integrable, and
C* /*
F=1L f,
<Xa JL*
Iterated Integrals
414. In Vol. I, 732, seq. we have seen that the relation,
*^a *^33rie
holds when / is 72-integrable in the metric field 21. This result
was extended to iterable fields in 14 of the present volume. We
ITERATED INTEGRALS 395
wish now to generalize still further to the case that / is .L-inte-
grable in the measurable field 21. The method employed is due to
Dr. W. A. Wilson,* and is essentially simpler than that employed
by Lebesgue.
1. Let x =(zl"- «,) denote a point in s-way space 9?,, 8=m+n.
If we denote the first m coordinates by x1 ••• xm, and the remaining
coordinates by yl • • • yn, we have
Thepoints *= (^ ... *m 00 ~. 0)
range over an w-way space 9Jm, when z ranges over 9?,. We call
x the projection of z on 9?m .
Let z range over a point set 51 lying in 9?,, then x will range
over a set 33 in 9?m, called the projection of 21 on 9?m. The points
of 31 whose projection is x is called the section of 21 corresponding
to x. We may denote it by
21(2:), or more shortly by (S.
We write 2T = $ • (£
to denote that 21 is conceived of as formed of the sections (£, cor-
responding to the different points of its projection 33.
2. Let Q denote a standard cube containing 21, let q denote its
projection on fRm. Then 33 <.q. Suppose each section 2l(a;) is
measurable. It will be convenient to let 2l(#) denote a function
of x defined over q such that
2l(z) = Meas 2l(z) = (£ when x lies in S3,
= 0 when x lies in q — S3.
This function therefore is equal to the measure of the section of
21 corresponding to the point #, when such a section exists ; and
when not, the function = 0.
When each section 2l(#) is not measurable, we can introduce
the functions
8(aO , 2[O).
* Dr. Wilson's results were obtained in August, 1909, and were presented by me
in the course of an address which I had the honor to give at the Second Decennial
Celebration of Clark University, September, 1909.
396 LEBESGUE INTEGRALS
Here the first = (S when a section exists, otherwise it = 0, in q.
A similar definition holds for the other function.
3. Let us note that the sections
where 2le, 2lt are the outer and inner associated sets belonging to 21,
are always measurable.
For 2le=Dv[@n|, where each (§„ is a standard enclosure, each
of whose cells enm is rectangular. But the sections tnm(x) are
also rectangular. Hence
being the divisor of measurable sets, is measurable.
415. Let 2le be an outer associated set of 21, both lying in the stand-
ard cube G- Then 2le(o;) is L-integrable in q, and
•
§f _ / or (x\ (-[
<l— f -^e\^J' {±
For let {(£„} be a sequence of standard enclosures of 21, and
@n=>enrol. Then
@n = 2enn, (2
in
and ln(*) = 2enro(>). (3
m
Now enm being a standard cell, tnm(x) has a constant value > 0
for all x contained in the projection of enm on q. It is thus con-
tinuous in q except for a discrete set. It thus has an ^-integral,
and
^nm — I °nm\%)'
*/q
This in 2) gives
by 3).
= r2enm(z), by 413, 2,
oLq
= JSn(^), (4
ITERATED INTEGRALS 397
On the other hand, (£(X) is a measurable function by 411. Also
I = Se = lim ln
= limfin<»
at/q
= Aim in<V), by 413, 1. (5
<Xq
N°W §t(*) = lim in(o:).
n=«
Thus this in 5) gives 1).
416. Let 21 lie in the standard cube O. Let Slt be an inner asso-
ciated set. Then 2tt(z) is L-integrable in q, and
For & = % +A
Thus g xx _ g/^. _ J
Hence 2L(:r) is Z-integrable in q, and
£0^ f* , s
-, "^fl
= 8 - Ae , by 415,
= §t = 21 by 370, 2.
417. ietf measurable ?( ZiV m #Ae standard cube O.
T^w ,,=
n = J%(x). (1
For 5j xx <<%(x)<W, (V)
Hence ^ _ /'g , . < fyj(x\ .< T w ^ _. w C2
using 396, 1, and 415, 416. From 2) we conclude 1) at once.
418. Let ?I = SQ • (S be measurable. Then S are L-integrable in
S3,
398 LEBESGUE INTEGRALS
For by 417,
by 40f .
419. 7/ 21 = SB • (£ is measurable, the points of$$at which (£ is not
measurable form a null set 9J.
For by 418,
21= / £ =
0
= I (£ — (£).
Jbto
is a null function in SB, and by 402, 2, points where <£ > 0 form a
null set.
420. ie£ 21 = SB • £ ie measurable. Let b denote the points of
/or which the corresponding sections (£ are measurable. Then
S= /*£
afct
For by 419, SB = b + ^,
and 9t is a null set. Hence by 418,
/
Xf
=.
421. Let f>Q in 51. 7f <Ae integrand set $, corresponding to f
be measurable, then f is L-integrable in 21, and
3= / /•
<^a
For the points of $ lying in an m + 1 way space 9?m+1 may be
denoted by x-^.. ym,z),
where y = (^yl-"ym) ranges over 9?m, in which 21 lies. Thus 21
may be regarded as the projection of $ on $Rm. To each point y
ITERATKD INTEGRALS 399
of 21 corresponds a section 3(#), which for brevity may be denoted
by $. Thus we may write
3- at*.
As $ is nothing but an ordinate through y of length /(#), we
have by 419,
= /•
422. Let f be L-integrable over the measurable field SI = SB • 6.
Let b denote those points of 33, for which f is L-integrable over the
corresponding sections (£. Then
/= / /. (1
21 viboLQ.
Moreover $1 = 53 — 6 is a null set.
Let us 1° suppose f> 0. Then by 406, 3 is measurable and
§=r/. (2
oL*
Let ft denote the points of 53 for which 3(V) is measurable.
Then by 420,
By 419, the points
<P = 93-/3
form a null set.
On the other hand, $(#) is the integrand set of/, for
Hence by 421, for any x in £,
and £ < b. (6
From 2), 3), 5) we have
£/* /•
/=///. a
.1 <X0,Xe
From 6) we have
ft = 93-b<93-£ = 1p,
a null set by 4). Let us set
b = £ 4- n-
400 LEBESGUE INTEGRALS
Then n lying in the null set ty, is a null set. Hence
JLp -La Jin -La JLb -La
This with 7) gives 1).
Let f be now unrestricted as to sign. We take 0 > 0, such
that the auxiliary function
Then /, g are simultaneously J>-integrable over any section (£.
Thus by case 1°
f _L n\ /ft
"TV/). ^o
Now r r r
\ (/+#) = / f+ C= /+(7, (9
<X2l «i/2l -^21
By 418, S is i-integrable in 53, and hence in b. Thus
/» /» /» /» /^»=
/ /(/+^)= / f+cU. (ii
oLboLs (A^«&< •**
As b differs from 33 by a null set,
by 418. From 8), 9), 10), 11), 12) we have 1).
423. If f is L-integrable over the measurable set 51 = 33 • S, then
//=///• a
aL* JL^cL®,
For by 422,
/^ r» /»
(2
As S3 — b = 9J is a null set,
ITERATED INTEGRALS 401
may be added to the right side of 2) without altering its value.
Thus
L-LL+LL-LL
-LiU dbftXC •IrRXC oi>93oM£
424. 1. (TT. A. Wilson.^) Iff(xl»-xm} is L-integrable in
measurable 21, f is measurable in $1.
Let us first suppose that/> 0. We begin by showing that the
set of points HA .of 21 at which />X, is measurable. Then by
408, 3, / is measurable in 8f.
No w f being .L-integrable in S(, its integrand set 3 is measur-
able by 406. Let $A be the section of 3 corresponding to xm+1= \.
Then the projection of $A on 9?m is 21A. Since 3 is measurable, the
sections $A are measurable, except at most over a null set L of
values of X, by 419. Thus there exists a sequence
X1<\2< ••• = X
none of whose terms lies in L. Hence each 3AN is measurable, and
hence 5lA(i is also.
As Slj^ <_ 21^, each point of 21A lies in
so that fU<®. (2
On the other hand, each point d of 3) lies in 21A. For if not,
/(<*)<*•
There thus exists an s such that
f(d) < X. < X. (3
But then d does not lie in 21A., for otherwise /(rf) > X,, which
contradicts 3). But not lying in 2lAf, <i cannot lie in £), and this
contradicts our hypothesis. Thus
3><2U- (4
From 2), 4) we have
But then from 1), 2tA is measurable.
Let the sign off be now unrestricted.
402 IMl'KOI'KK L-IXTKdRALS
Since/ is limited, we may choose the constant (7, such that
# = /(*)+ <7>0, in St.
Then g is Z-integrable, and hence, by case 1°, g is measurable.
Hence/, differing only by a constant from g, is also measurable.
2. Let 21 be measurable. Iff is L-integrable in 21, it is measur-
able in 21, and conversely.
This follows from 1 and 409, l.
3. From 2 and 409, 3, we have at once the theorem :
When the field of integration is measurable, an L-integrable func-
tion is integrable in Lebesgues sense, and conversely ; moreover, both
have the same value.
Remark. In the theory which has been developed in the fore-
going pages, the reader will note that neither the field of integra-
tion nor the integrand needs to be measurable. This is not so in
Lebesgue's theory. In removing this restriction, we have been
able to develop a theory entirely analogous to Riemann's theory of
integration, and to extend this to a theory of upper and lower in-
tegration. We have thus a perfect counterpart of the theory
developed in Chapter XIII of vol. I.
4. Let 21 be metric or complete. If f (x^ ••• #„,) is limited and
R-integrable, it is a measurable function in 21.
For by 381, 2, it is .L-integrable. Also since 21 is metric or
complete, 21 is measurable. We now apply 1.
IMPROPER L-INTEGRALS
Upper and Lower Integrals
425. 1. We propose now to consider the case that the integrand
/(#! "' %m) is not limited in the limited field of integration 21- In
chapter II we have treated this case for ^-integrals. To extend
the definitions and theorems there given to X-integrals, we have
in general only to replace metric or complete sets by measurable
sets; discrete sets by null sets; unmixed sets by separated sets ;
UPPER AND LOWER INTEGRALS 403
finite divisions by separated divisions ; sequences of superposed
cubical divisions by extremal sequences; etc.
As in 28 we may define an improper ^-integral in any of the
three ways there given, making such changes as just indicated.
In the following we shall employ only the 3° Type of definition.
To be explicit we define as follows :
Let/(x1 ••• a;m) be defined for each point of the limited set 21.
Let 2l«0 denote the points of 21 at which
The limits
a, /S
/* ,—
lim / / , lim / / (2
, /S^x^Jk a, /3=oo .Xa
in case they exist, we call the lower and upper (improper) L-in-
tegrals, and denote them by
r~
/•
In case the two limits 2) exist and are equal, we denote their
common value by
f
and say/ is (improperly) L-integrable in 21, etc.
2. In order to use the demonstrations of Chapter II without too
much trouble, we introduce the term separated function. A func-
tion f is such a function when the fields 2l<^s defined by 1) are
separated parts of 21.
We have defined measurable functions in 407 in the case that
/ is limited in 21. We may extend it to unlimited functions by
requiring that the fields 2lo/s are measurable however large «, /S are
taken.
This being so, we see that measurable functions are special cases
of separated functions.
In case the field 21 of integration is measurable, 2la/9 is a meas-
urable part of 21, if it is a separated part. From this follows the
important result :
Iff is a separated function in the measurable field 21. it is L-in-
tegrable in each 2la£-
404 IMPROPER L-INTEGRALS
From this follows also the theorem:
Let f be a separated function in the measurable field 91. If either
the lower or upper integral off over 91 is convergent, f is L-integrable
in 91, and /» /•»
/ /= lim / /.
<Xa «, p=*>JL*afi
426. To illustrate how the theorems on improper ^-integrals
give rise to analogous theorems on improper .//-integrals, which
may be demonstrated along the same lines as used in Chapter II,
let us consider the analogue of 38, 2, viz. :
Iffis a separated function such that I /converges, so do I f.
<Xa JLy
Let \En\ be an extremal sequence common to both
f , f ff>/3.
<^2lo/3' rL^iafi
Let e denote the cells of En containing a point of ^ ; e' those
cells containing a point of ^p- ; 8 those cells containing a point of
91 but none of . Then
= lim \^Ml • e + EJ//, . e' +
ap ra=0°
In this manner we may continue using the proof of 38, and so
establish our theorem.
427. As another illustration let us prove the theorem analogous
to 46, viz. :
Let 9lj, 912, ••• 9ln form a separated division of 9T. If f is a-
separated function in 91, then
f* f* f*
I /= //+••• + / /,
*& ^Sll <^9n
provided the integral on the left exists, or all the integrals on the
right exist.
For let 91, 0/3 denote the points of 9la/s in 91,. Then by 390, 1,
.::, ' L:L.,+-+L«
In this way we continue with the reasoning of 46.
L-INTEGRALS
405
428. In this way we can proceed with the other theorems ; in
each case the requisite modification is quite obvious, by a con-
sideration of the demonstration of the corresponding theorem in
jR-integrals given in Chapter II.
This is also true when we come to treat of iterated integrals
along the lines of 70-78. We have seen, in 425, 2, that if 21 is
measurable, upper and lower integrals of separated functions do
not exist as such ; they reduce to ^-integrals. We may still
have a theory analogous to iterated 72-integrals, by extending the
notion of iterable fields, using the notion of upper measure. To
this end we define :
A limited point set at 21 = 33 • (£ is submeasurable with respect
to $8, when
3= f
J
.
We do not care to urge this point at present, but prefer to pass
on at once to the much more interesting case of i-integrals over
measurable fields.
L-Integrals
429. These we may define for our purpose as follows :
Let^arj ••• a;TO) be defined over the limited measurable set 21.
As usual let 2la/3 denote the points of 21 at which
-«</<& o,£>0.
Let each 2ta/J be measurable, and let / have a proper i-integral
in each 2U0. Then the improper integral of f over 21 is
f*
/
<X
f*
/= lim / /,
«,0=->e£«a
when this limit exists. We shall also say that the integral on
the left of 1) is convergent.
On this hypothesis, the reader will note at once that the dem-
»nst r;it ions of Chapter II admit ready adaptation ; in fact some
of the theorems require no demonstration, as they follow easily
from results already obtained.
406 IMPROPER ^INTEGRALS
430. Let us group together for reference the following theo-
rems, analogous to those on improper ^-integrals.
1. Iff is (improperly") L-integrable in 21, it is in any measurable
part of 21.
2. If g, h denote as usual the non-negative functions associated
withf, then
V= / 9- I h. (1
f* (*
3. If I f is convergent, so is I \f\, and conversely.
<X» <Xa
4. When convergent,
< / - (2
£
/
.1
5. If I f is convergent, then
e>0, cr>0, I/
<€,
for any measurable 53 < 31, such that 33 < cr.
6. Let §l = (?t1, ^ ... §In) be a separated division of 21, eacA 2lt
measurable. Then
>=Ja/+-+J/, (3
provided the integral on the left exists, or all the integrals on the
right exist.
1. Let 21 = J2ln| be a separated division of 21, into an enumerable
infinite set of measurable sets 2ln. Then
£[* f*
/=//+//+- (4
.1 ^81 0^82
provided the integral on the left exists.
8. Iff < g in 21, except possibly at a null set, then
/* /»
1 f~l ff) (5
when convergent.
^INTEGRALS 407
431. 1. To show how simple the proofs run in the present
case, let us consider, in the first place, the theorem analogous to
38, 2, viz. :
f* (* C*
If I f converges, so do i f and I f.
<X« JLy JJR
The rather difficult proof of 38, 2 can be replaced by the follow-
ing simpler one. Since
is a separated division of H0/s, we have
=/
JW
I/ '
|<Xaap
Hence
But the left side is < e, for a sufficiently large a, and /?, ft' >
/«
some y80. This shows that I is convergent. Similarly we show
JL%
the other integral converges.
2. This form of proof could not be used in 38, 2, since 1) in
general is not an unmixed division of 8fa/5.
3. In a similar manner we may establish the theorem analo-
gous to 39, viz. :
If I f and i f converge, so does I /.
JLy *Lw JL*
4. Let us look at the demonstration of the theorem analogous
to 43, 1, viz. :
/•••/• /* f*
/ 9= \ f 5 / h = ~ I /,
Jin J*y <,c« ^9?
provided the integral on either side of these equations converges.
408 IMPROPER L-INTEGRALS
Let us prove the first relation. Let $dft denote the points of
at which /<£. Then
is a separated division of $8^, and hence
Cff = C</ + Cff = \ 9= f /» etc-
cLXp ^0 JLy? ^p <£yp
5. It is now obvious that the analogue of 44, l is the relation 1)
in 430.
6. The analogue of 46 is the relation 3) in 430. Its demon-
stration is precisely similar to that in 46.
7. We now establish 430, 7. Let
*.-<&. V-*3-
Then 8 = *„ + *„
is a separated division of SI, and we may take m so large that
Bm < o-, an arbitrarily small positive number. Hence by 430, 6,
we may take m so large that
L
f
Bm
Thus Cf=Cf+Cf
^a cLldm cLBrn
= f /+-+ f
<^a, °Ln
From this our theorem follows at once.
Iterated Integrals
432. 1. Let us see how the reasoning of Chapter II may be
extended to this case. We will of course suppose that the field
of integration 21 = 53 • £ is measurable. Then by 419, the points
of S3 for which the sections are not measurable form a null set.
Since the integral of any function over a null set is zero, we may
therefore in our reasoning suppose that every (£ is measurable.
Since 91 is measurable, there exists a sequence of complete com-
• /2*
ponents A,H= BmCm in 21, such that the measure of A = { Am\ is 21.
ITERATED INTEGRALS 409
Since Am is complete, its projection Bm is complete, by I, 717, 4.
The points of Bm for which the corresponding sections Cm are not
nuMsurable form a null set vm. Hence the union \vm\. is a null
set. Thus we may suppose, without loss of generality in our
demonstrations, that 21 is such that every section in each Am is
measurable.
Now from
0 = 5-1= f I- Cc= f (£-£),
ei® JLti =X«B
we see that those points of 53 where (5 > G form a null set. We
^ «
my therefore suppose that (£ = 0 everywhere. Then (£ — C is a
mil set at each point ; we may thus adjoin them to 0. Thus we
lay suppose that £ = O at each point of 53, and that 53 = B is the
union of an enumerable set of complete sets Bm.
As we shall suppose that
/>
is convergent, let
«1< «3 < »•• = GO
Let us look at the sets 2l0n, 53/sn, which we shall denote by 2ln.
These are measurable by 429. Moreover, the reasoning of 72, 2
shows that without loss of generality we may suppose that 21 is
such that 53n = 53. We may also suppose that each Q£n is measur-
able, as above.
2. Let us finally consider the integrals
/• . \. ; a
These may not exist at every point of 53, because / does not
admit a proper or an improper integral at this point. It will
suffice for our purpose to suppose that 1) does not exist at a null
set in 53. Then without loss of generality we may suppose in our
demonstrations that 1) converges at each point of 53.
On these assumptions let us see how the theorems 73, 74, 75,
and 76 are to be modified, in order that the proofs there given
may be adapted to the present case.
410 IMPROPER L-INTEGRALS
433. 1 The first of these may be replaced by this :
Let Bv, n denote the points of 93 at which cn > a-. Then
lim.8,,,-0.
For by 419,
i=fi,
Is
as by hypothesis the sections (£ are measurable. Moreover, by
hypothesis
is a separated division of S, each set on the right being measur-
able. Thus the proof in 73 applies at once.
2. The theorem of 74 becomes :
Let the integrals
f / , />
JL&
be limited in the complete set 93. Let (£„ denote the points of 93 at
which
Then
Km ®n = 93.
The proof is analogous to that in 74. Instead of a cubical
division of the space $ftp, we use a standard enclosure. The sets
93n are now measurable, and thus
is measurable. Thus bn = b. The rest of the proof is as in 74.
3. The theorem of 75 becomes :
Let the integral
be limited in complete 93. Then
lim C f/=0.
»- ^SoLc.
ITERATED INTEGRALS 411
The proof is entirely similar to that in 75, except that we use
extremal sequences, instead of cubical divisions.
4. As a corollary of 3 we have
Let the integral ^
\ f » />0
JU
be limited and L-integrable in 33. Let $8 = \Bm\ the union of an
enumerable set of complete sets. Then
limf f/=0.
"=00oi/33 aLcn
For if 33m = (B^ B2 ... 5m), and 33 = 33m + 3X,, we have
f* f* f* /* /* f*
LL=L JC+L L
But for m sufficiently large, £)m is small at pleasure. Hence
— _T f <€'
We have now only to apply 3.
434. 1. We are now in position to prove the analogue of
76, viz. :
Let SI = 33 • S be measurable. Let I f be convergent. Let the
r .
integrals I f converge in 33, except possibly at a null set. Then
JL<$.
//=///< a
<^9t 06$ •&€
provided the integral on the right is convergent.
We follow along the line of proof in 76, and begin by taking
/ > 0 in 31- By 423, we have
hence
£/» /»
/=Hm/ if. (2
^"oi/Sci/Cn
412 IMPROPER L-INTEGRALS
Now e > 0 being small at pleasure,
-e+ f /'/< f Cf , for a > some
JL*& JLo. <£»<,. JUi
+ n
n JLtJ
Since we have seen that we may regard 53 as the union of an
enumerable set of complete sets, we see that the last term on the
right = 0, as n = <x, by 433, 4. Thus
r» r» /»/*/•
/ / < lim / / = / , (3
JL^Q <Xe eLs <=^en ^a
by 2). On the other hand,
From 3) and 4) we have 1), when/> 0.
The general case is now obviously true. For
51 = ^ + 9?,
where /> 0 in ^J, and < 0 in 91. Here ty and 91 are measurable.
We have therefore only to use 1) for each of these fields and add
the results.
2. The theorem 1 states that if
, r r
JL® Xe
both converge, they are equal. Hobson* in a remarkable paper on
Lebesgue Integrals has shown that it is only necessary to assume
the convergence of the first integral ; the convergence of the second
follows then as a necessary consequence.
* Proceedings of the London Mathematical Society, Ser. 2, vol. 8 (1909),
p. 31.
ITERATED INTEGRALS 413
435. We close this chapter by proving a theorem due to
Lebesgue^ which is of fundamental importance in the theory of
Fourier's Series.
Letf(x) be properly or improperly L-integrable in the interval
21 = «<&. Then
For in the first place,
Next we note that
Hence
C"\*f\dx-
oLa oLa
or Jf-Jg<Jf-g. (3
From 2), 3) we have
Jf<J0 + z£\f-g\dx. (4
Let now g_f t^}f}<^
= 0 for |/| >a.
Then by 4), T ^ r
Cb\*
I |/—
oi/«
where e' is small at pleasure, for Q sufficiently large. Thus the
theorem is established, if we prove it for a limited function,
\g(x)\<G.
Let us therefore effect a division of the interval F = (— 6r, #),
of norm d, by interpolating the points
-G-<cl< cz< ... <#,
causing F to fall into the intervals
414 IMPROPER L-INTEGRALS
Let hm = cm for those values of x for which g(x) falls in the in-
terval 7m, and = 0 elsewhere in 21. Then
< 2 Jhi + e', e' small at pleasure,
for d sufficiently small.
Thus we have reduced the demonstration of our theorem to a
function h(x) which takes on but two values in SI, say 0 and 7.
Let (£ be a o-/4 enclosure of the points where h=% while g niay
denote a finite number of intervals of Qj such that $• — (5 < <r/4.
Let (f> = 7 in (§, and elsewhere = 0 ; let ty = 7 in ^ and else-
where = 0. Thus using 4),
since A = ^> in (a, /8), except at points of measure < er/4. Similarly
Thus Jh< J* + <*"!< J+ + e,
for o- sufficiently small.
Thus the demonstration is reduced to proving it for a ->/r which
is continuous, except at a finite number of points. But for such a
function, it is obviously true.
CHAPTER XIII
FOURIER'S SERIES
Preliminary Remarks
/*
436. 1. Let us suppose that the limited function /(a;) can be
developed into a series of the type
/(#) = a0 + «j cos x + az cos 2 x -\- a3 cos 3 x H» • ••
+ b1 sin x + J2 sin 2 a; 4- £>3 sin 3 # + • •• (1
which is valid in the interval 21 = (— TT, TT). If it is also known
that this series can be integrated termwise, the coefficients an, bn
can be found at once as follows. By hypothesis
£fdx = #0 / dx + ax / cos xdx +
r aL-* aL-*
+J'f>
As the terms on the right all vanish except the first, we have
Let us now multiply 1) by cos nx and integrate.
£C** (**
f(x) cos nxdx = a0 I cos nxdx + a1 I cos x cos rmfo +
Now ,
cos mx cos nxdx = 0
£
cos2 nxdx = TT,
ll si
sinxcosnx+ •
L
f>
sin wa; cosna;=0.
416
416 FOURIER'S SERIES
Thus all the terms on the right of the last series vanish except
the one containing an. Hence
1 />ir
an = - I /(a:)cos nxdx. (2"
Finally multiplying 1) by sin nx, integrating, and using the
relations /,ff
/ sin mx sin nxdx = 0 , m =£ w,
JL-v
L
sin2 nxdx = -TT,
r
bH = - r*/(*) sin nxdx. (2'"
TTeLf-ir
Thus under our present hypothesis,
f(x~) = - — / / (u)du -\ — 2 cos nx I /(M) cos nudu
^TJL-K 7T 1 J*-"
1 oo (**.
H — 2 gin wa; / /(w) sin nudu. (3
7T 1 <X-T
The series on the right is known as Fourier 's series ; the coeffi-
cients 2) are called Fourier's coefficients or constants. When the
relation 3) holds for a set of points 53, we say f(x) can be de-
veloped in a Fourier's series in S3, or Fourier's development is valid
in S3.
2. Fourier thought that every continuous function in 51 could
be developed into a trigonometric series of the type 3). The
demonstration he gave is not rigorous. Later Dirichlet showed
that such a development is possible, provided the continuous
function has only a finite number of oscillations in 31. The func-
tion still regarded as limited may also have a finite number of
discontinuities of the first kind, i. e. where
/(a + 0) , /(a-0) (4
exist, but one at least is ^=/(a).
At such a point a, Fourier's series converges to
PRELIMINARY REMARKS 417
Jordan has extended Dirichlet's results to functions having
limited variation in 21. Thus Fourier's development is valid in
certain cases when / has an infinite number of oscillations or
points of discontinuity. Fourier's development is also valid in
certain cases when/ is not limited in 21, as we shall see in the
following sections.
We have supposed that f(x) is given in the interval
51 = ( — TT, TT). This restriction was made only for convenience.
For if /(#) is given in the interval 3 = (a < 6), we have only to
change the variable by means of the relation
7rC2 x— a — b)
u= v *.
o — a
Then when x ranges over 3, u will range over 21.
Suppose/ is an even function in 21 ; its development in Fourier's
series will contain only cosine terms. For
/(#) = 2(an cos nx + bn sin nx),
o
00
/(— x~)= 2(«n cosnx— bn sin nx}.
o
Adding and remembering that /(#) =/(— x~) in 21, we get
00
/(#) = \^an cos nx, f even.
o
Similarly if / is odd, its development in Fourier's series will
contain only sine terms ;
.00
/(#) = 4 i£6n sin nx, f odd.
" i
Let us note that if f(x) is given only in 53 = (0, TT), and has
limited variation in SB, we may develop / either as a sine or a
cosine series in S3. For let
#O) =/O) » a in 93
=/(— #) , a:in(-7r, 0).
Then g is an even function in 21 and has limited variation.
Using Jordan's result, we see g can be developed in a cosine
series valid in 21. Hence / can be developed in a cosine series
valid in 93.
418 FOURIER'S SERIES
In a similar manner, let
h(x) =/(a;) , a; in S3
= — /( —X) , — 7T < X < 0.
Then A is an odd function in 31, and Fourier's development
contains only sine terms.
Unless /(0)= 0, the Fourier series will not converge to /(O)
but to 0, on account of the discontinuity at x= 0. The same is
true for x = TT.
If /can be developed in Fourier's series valid in 31 = (— TT, TT),
the series 3) will converge for all #, since its terms admit the
period 2 TT. Thus 3) will represent /(#) in 81, but will not
. represent it unless / also admits the period 2 TT. The series 3)
defines a periodic function admitting 2 TT as a period.
EXAMPLES
437. We give now some examples. They may be verified by
the reader under the assumption made in 436. Their justifica-
tion will be given later
Example 1. f(x)=x , for — Tr<x<7r.
Then
_ o [sin x sin 2 a; sin 3 # 1
11 ~~2~ ~~3~~
If we set x = ^, we get Leibnitz' 8 formula,
?=!_l+!_i4
4 1 35 7
Example 2. f (a:) = x , 0 < x < TT
= — X , — 7T< X< 0.
Then
4 f cos x cos 3 a; cos 5 a; "1
•« o * oo I ^o «
If we set a; = 0, we get
^=1 , 1 , 1 ,
8 I2 32 52
PRELIMINARY REMARKS 419
Example S. /(X) = 1 i 0 < a; < TT
= 0 , x = 0, ± TT
= —1 , — TT < a; < 0.
Then
/.x N 4 (sin x . sin 3 a; . sin 5x .
Example 4.
By defining / as an odd function, it can be developed in a sine
series, valid in (0, TT). We find
ff ^ _± \s\r\. x sin 3 a; sin 5 x ]
~^{~T ~&~ ~&~ "}'
r ^>^NI n^^-7r
?. /(a:) = l , Q<x<-
= -1 ?
By defining / as an even function, we get a development in
cosines,
/., N 4 fcos x cos 3 a; . cos 5 a;
'tf in (0, TT).
Example 6. f (a;) = |(TT — a;) , 0 < a; < TT.
By defining / as an odd function we get a development in
sines,
f(x) = sin x + % sin 2 x •+• . % sin 3 x +
valid in (— TT, TT).
Example 7. Let/(af) = - , 0 < a- < -
o u
7T ^ 2-7T
' <:r<-
TT 2?r
I • T<ir<*-
420 FOURIER'S SERIES
Developing/ as a sine series, we get
valid in (0, TT).
Example 8. /(X) = e* •> in (— TT, TT).
We find
valid for — TT < x < TT.
Example 9. We find
2 u . f 1 cos z , cos 2 # cos 3 x .
cos fix = -^ sm-TT/* H-x--2 — ? + -= — s~~Ji - 5"2+ "•
7T I 2 /A2 ^2 — 1 /A2 — 22 /X2 — 32
wfla/0r -TT^O;^^ , ^2^1, 22, 32,-.
Let us set x = IT, and replace fi by x ; we get
TT 1111
Cf = + + + -+
a decomposition of cot TTX into partial fractions, a result already
found in 216.
Example 10. We find
2 [1 2 cos 2 z 2 cos 4 a; 2 cos 6 z I
01 Y\ >y* — - ^_ ^_ • •
oiii JU — \ J. f •
1 Q U n ^
valid for 0 < x < TT.
Summation of Fourier's Series
438. In order to justify the development of/(x) in Fourier's
series F, we will actually sum the F series and show that it con-
verges to/ (a;) in certain cases. To this end let us suppose that
/(#) is given in the interval 21 = (— TT, TT), and let us extend /by
giving it the period 2 TT. Moreover, at the points of discontinuity
of the first kind, let us suppose
SUMMATION OF FOURIER'S SERIES 421
Then the function
</>(w) =f(x + 2 w) +f(x - 2 v) -
is continuous at u = 0, and has the value 0, at points of continuity,
and at points of discontinuity of 1° kind of/. Finally let us sup-
pose that / is (properly or improperly) i-integrable in 21 ; this
last condition being necessary, in order to make the Fourier co-
efficients an, bn have a sense.
Let
F = F (#) = \ aQ + «j cos x + «2 cos 2 x + • • •
+ blsin x + b2 sin 2x + ••• (1
CO
= 2 ao + ^(an cos nx + ^n sin wx),
where we will now write
1 /»C
an = - I
5n = - CC
cosnxdx, (2'
sin wa;rfrr. (2"
Since /(a;) is periodic, the coefficients an, 5n have the same value
however c is chosen. If we make c = — TT, these integrals reduce
to those given in 436.
We may write
1 /-»e+2»- o>
F= — I f (t}dt \\+ 2 (cos nx cos nt + sin nx sin w<)|
TXc 1
= I TflV I cos n(t -x)\f (f)dt. (3
Thus ' l *.=ir%.fw*, -
^
where Pn = |+icosmO-a:). (4
Provided sinK<-*)*0, (5
we may write
2" IXJ. Nf Z V X •
sin $(t — x) \
sin \(t — x)
ain K<-g) + 22 Bin |(t-a;)cogiii(t-a;)
422 FOURIER'S SERIES
ThllS
p _ sin j(2n -
2 sin !(«-*)
if 5) holds. Let us see what happens when 5) does not hold.
In this case $(t — x) is a multiple of IT. As both t and x lie in
(e, c + 2 TT), this is only possible for three singular values :
t = x ; t = c, x= c + 2 TT ; £ = c + 2 TT, # = e.
For these singular values 4) gives
As Pn is a continuous function of t, x, the expression on the
right of 6) must converge to the value 7) as #, t converge to these
singular values. We will therefore assign to the expression on
the right of 6) the value 7), for the above singular values. Then
in all cases
, i f" *«nK2« + lX«-«)/(0(t(.
irJic 2 sin £(£ — #J
Let us set o t 1
zn+I = v , t — x= u.
Then
o N sin vu
2w>TT
SHIM
Let us choose c so that
c — x = — TT,
then /-, /.o
irJL
n ~~ J ~
ot'-.r
2
Replacing w by — u in the first integral on the right, it becomes
£
/< o \ sn vu j
f(x— 2 u)— - du.
o sin //
Thus we get
IT
u. (8
Let us now introduce the term — 2/(a;) under the sign of inte-
gration in order to replace the brace by </>(w). To this end let
SUMMATION OF FOURIER'S SERIES 423
give x an arbitrary but fixed value and consider the Fourier's
series for the function
g(t)=f(x), a constant.
If we denote the Fourier series corresponding to the g function
=
4- h1 sin t + hz sin 2 1
we have
Cos ntdt = 0,
&) fc H2irsi
7T JLc
= 0.
Thus the sum of the first n + 1 terms of the Fourier series
belonging to g(£) reduces to
#„=/<» (9
But this sum is also given by 8), if we replace
g(x + 2 u) + ^ - 2 u) =
since ^ is a constant. We get thus
sin
(10
Let us therefore subtract /O) from both sides of 8), using 9),
10). We get
Dn(3:)=7r^n(a;)-/(a;)|, (11
we have
(12
sin u
We have thus the theorem :
For the Fourier Series to converge to f(x) at the point x, it is
necessary and sufficient that -Dn(x) = 0, as n = oo.
424 FOURIER'S SERIES
Validity of Fourier s Development*
439. The integral on the right side of 438, 12), on which the
validity of Fourier's development at the point x depends, is a
special case of the integral
/»
Jl®
In fact Jn goes over into ./)„, if we set
<P A 7 7T
9 = -r*— , a = U, b = - •
sin u 2
To evaluate Jn let us break 33 up into the intervals
. 7T , 2t 7T
These intervals are equal except the last, which is shorter than
the others unless b — a is a multiple of 7r/n. We have thus
If we set
, IT
v = u + -
n
we see that while v ranges over S32^ u ranges over 33^-1 . This
substitution enables us to replace the integrals over 532, by those
over $82*- 1, since
/ g (v) sin nvdv =— I g[u + — ) sin nudu.
JL^ JL^-'i \ w^
Hence grouping the integrals in pairs, we get
Jn= I 9 (w) sin nudu + ^ / I #O) — ^( w + — ) [ sin nudu
^» • al»» W^J
*
The presentation given in 439-448 is due in the main to Lebesgue. Cf. his
classic paper, Mathematische Annalen, vol. 61 (1906), p. 251. Also his Leqons .-•?<>•
Zes Series Trigonometriques, Paris, 1906.
VALIDITY OF FOURIER'S DEVELOPMENT 425
where 33' is 33r or 93r_i + 93ri depending on the parity of r. Now
<
\9
'
(2
- #i w + - ) \ si
V W/J
. T
/n
(3
(4
Thus Jn = 0, if the three integrals 2), 3), 4) = 0. Moreover,
if these three integrals are uniformly evanescent with respect to
some point set (£ < 53, Jn is also uniformly evanescent in (£. In
particular we note the theorem
Jn = 0, if g is L-integrable in 33.
We are now in a position to draw some important conclusions
with respect to Fourier's series.
440. 1. Let f(x} be L-integrable in (c,
Fourier constants an, bn = 0, as n = oo.
27r). Then the
For
1 /»<r+2ir
an = - I /(#) cos nxdx
TrJLc
is a special case of the Jn integral. As / is -L-integrable, we need
only apply the theorem at the close of the last article. Similar
reasoning applies to bn .
2. For a given value of x in 31 = (— TT, TT) let
sin u
(1
L-integrable in 53 = ( 0, — j. Then Fourier s development is valid
the point x.
FOURIER'S SERIES
For by 438, Fourier's series =/(z) at the point x, if Dn(x) = 0.
Hut Dn is a special case of Jn for which the g function is in-
tegrable. We thus need only apply 439.
3. For a given x in 21 = ( — TT, TT), let
x (*) = *> (2
6e L-integrable in 33 = f 0, ^J. TAew Fourier's development is valid
at the point x.
For let 8 > 0, then
< pi*ooia +*),,»
,o
= 0 , as B = 0 , by hypothesis.
4. For a given x in 31 = (— TT, TT), ZeZ
,(.)./('+">-/(«) (3
It
be L integrable in 51. Then Fourier's development is valid at the
point x.
F°r -
u u
Thus ^ is .L- integrable in (0, ^ J, as it is the difference of two
integrable functions.
441. {Lebesgue*). For a given x in SI = (— TT, TT) let
1° limn
fl=°° <
2° lim /(w + 8) - i/r(w) | du = 0
«=o,Xs
for some 77
VALIDITY OF FOURIER'S DEVELOPMENT
427
Then Fourier's development is valid at the point x.
For as we have seen,
sin i'ii
sin w
du+
v
I ^(u + —} —
du
sin vu
sm w
</>'+ &"+!>'",
where $„ is a certain number which = , as n = oo.
us first consider D'. Since 0<w<— , we have O<VM<TT.
Hence
sin vu
sin //
w , w
0«7, T<
= V-
vWf-i <rv
-- I 1 -- -
6 V 4
<rvu\
- — I
-, w
1 — 8 —
6
= v
<i>, provided 8>t.
But this is indeed so. For
-j VffU > -I _ ^
Hence
Thus
4
, if z/>5.
D' <v I \<f>\ du = 0, by hypothesis.
We now turn to D" . We have
428 FOURIER'S SERIES
Now / being L-integrable,
is j&-integrable in (77, ^J. Thus
lim = 0.
But by condition 2°, , - /** __ Q
"=aoot'7r
Thus
8=0
Finally we consider D'". But the integrand is an integrable
function in f $, ^ J . Thus it = 0 as n = x.
\ 2/
442. 1. 7%e validity of Fourier's development at the point x de-
pends only on the nature off in a vicinity of x, of norm 8 as small as
we please.
For the conditions of the theorem in 441 depend only on the
value of /in such a vicinity.
2. Let us call a point x at which the function
$(«) =/(* + 2 u) +/<> - 2 u) - 2/(a;)
is continuous at w = 0, and has the value 0, a regular point.
In 438, we saw that if # is a point of discontinuity of the first
kind for /(#), then # is a regular point.
3. Fourier's development is valid at a regular point x, provided
for some 77
lim f "
«=o Ji&
8) -
2
For at a regular point #, <Kw) is continuous at u = 0, and = 0
for u = 0. Now
lim
*=« A
LIMITED VARIATION 429
Thus
/*». 1 /»».
I \ <p(w) | du = TT --- J I <£ |
du
Hence condition 1° of 441 is satisfied.
Limited Variation
443. 1. Before going farther we must introduce a few notions
relative to the variation of a function /(a:) defined over an interval
2l = (a< 6). Let us effect a division D of 31 into subintervals,
by interpolating a finite number of points a1<az< ••• The sum
is called the variation off in 21 for the division D. If
Max VD (2
is finite with respect to the class of all finite divisions of 31, we say
f has finite variation in 31. When 2) is finite, we denote its value by
Var/, or FJ-, or V
and call it the variation off in 31.
We shall show in 5 that finite variation means the same thing
as limited variation introduced in I, 509. We use the term finite
variation in sections 1 to 4 only for clearness.
2. A most important property of functions having finite vari-
ation is brought out by the following geometric consideration.
Let us take two monotone increasing curves A, B such that one
of them crosses the other a finite or infinite number of times. If
/(#), g(x) are the continuous functions having these curves as
graphs, it is obvious that
<*O) =/O) -g(x)
is a continuous function which changes its sign, when the curves
A, B cross each other. Thus we can construct functions in infinite
variety, which oscillate infinitely often in a given interval, and
which are the difference of two monotone increasing functions.
430 FOURIER'S SERIES
For simplicity we have taken the curves A, B continuous. A
moment's reflection will show that this is not necessary.
Since d(x) is the difference of two monotone increasing functions,
its variation is obviously finite. Jordan has proved the following
fundamental theorem.
3. If f(x) has finite variation in the interval 2l = (« < 5), there
exists an infinity of limited monotone increasing functions g(x), h(x}
such that f = g-h. (1
For let D be a finite division of 51. Let
PD= sum of terms f/(«m+1)— /(«m)l which are > 0,
-ND= .............. <0.
Then
VD = 2 |/(am+1) -/(am) \=PD + ND. (2
Also
) -/Oh)! + -
On the left the sum is telescopic, hence
f^-f(^=PD-ND. (3
From 2), 3) we have
VD = 2PD +/(a)-/(6)= 2 ^ +/(&) -/(a). (4
Let now MaxP^ = /> , MaxJV^jy
with respect to the class of finite divisions D.
We call them the positive and negative variation of /(#) in 21.
Then 4) shows that
/(a). (5
Adding these, we get ^_ p + ^ _
From 5) we have
/(«) = P-N- (7
Instead of the interval 21 = (a < J), let us take the interval
(a < z), where x lies in 21. Replacing b by a; in 7), we have
/(*)=/(«) + ^00-^00- (8
LIMITED VARIATION 431
Obviously P(x), N(x) are monotone increasing functions.
Let At(z) be a monotone increasing function in SI. If we set
(9
we get 1) from 8) at once.
4. From 8) we have
< I/O) I + F(*). (10
5. We can now show that when f(x) has finite variation in the
interval SI = (a < b~) it has limited variation and conversely.
For if / has finite variation in 81 we can set
where </>, i/r are monotone increasing in SI. Then if SI is divided
into the intervals Sj, 8Z ••• we have
Osc/< Osc <f>+ Osc i|r ., in 8t.
Osc (> = A< , Osc ir = Air , in 8
since these functions are monotone. Hence summing over all the
intervals St,
< some M) for any division.
Hence f has limited variation.
If f has limited variation in SI,
<0sc/ , in«t.
2 | A/] < 2 Osc/< some J!f.
Hence /has finite variation.
6. If f(z} has limited variation in the interval SI, its points of
continuity form a pantactic set in SI.
This follows from 5, and I, 508.
432 FOURIER'S SERIES
7. Let a< b < c ; then iff has finite variation in (a, c),
where Va^ means the variation of fin the interval (a, J), etc.
F°r Vacf= Max F,,/
with respect to the class of all finite divisions D of (a, <?). The
divisions D fall into two classes :
1° those divisions E containing the point 6,
2° the divisions F which do not.
Let A be a division obtained by interpolating one or more
points in the interval. Obviously
Let now & be obtained from a division F by adding the point
b- Then v,,f>vef.
Hence Max F£>Max VF.
£ F
Hence to find F^c/, we may consider only the class E. Let
now EI be a division of (a, 5), and E^ a division of (5, c). Then
El -f j&2 is a division of class E. Conversely each division of class
Ogives a division of (a, 5), (5, c). Now
From this 11) follows at once.
444. We establish now a few simple relations concerning the
variation of two functions in an interval 21 = (a < 5).
+ 0-tt + 0| =2 |/t+1 -/J,
where for brevity we set /. _ /.. ^
/. — J\ai)-
(2
LIMITED VARIATION 433
3. Letf, g be monotone increasing functions in 21. Then
Vg. (3
4. For any two functions /, g having limited variation,
g. (4
5. Letf,f^ have limited variation in 31 = («, 5).
(5
For by 443, 8) we have
f=P-N+A , f^P.-N.
where A »/ •*. A /. , ^
A -/(a) , A^f^ay.
Thus
Hence by 2, 4,
< ^PA + ^P^i + VPAl + ...
...) , by 3
< (P + N+ aXPi + -^i + ai).
Vf=P + N , hence, etc.
445. Fourier's development is valid at the regular point #,
exists a 0 < t^-^i «wcA ^Aa< m (0, £) Me variation V(u) o
tw awy (w, £) i« limited, and such that u V(u) = 0, u = 0.
By 442, we have only to show that
is evanescent with 8.
434 FOURIER'S SERIES
Let us first suppose that ^r(w) is monotone in some (0, £), say
monotone increasing. Similar reasoning will apply, if it is mono-
tone decreasing. Then, taking 0 < 77 + 8 < £
* =<L^u + B^~ ^u^du = f Vo
In the second integral from the end, set v = u + S.
Then i V(w + $)du = J "+ ty(v}dv.
Hence, ^,+8 -
¥=J ty(u)du- J -^(u)du
+5 /»25 /»r,
JL& ~L
/*>)+«
I |
aLrt
Thus
We will consider the integrals on the right separately. Let
<£m = Max | <£ |, in (8, 28).
Then ™ , , .
Jss sinu
Now
Hence, -. ^
— = — -f- <ru , I a- 1 < some M.
sin u u
Thus,
= 0 , as 8 = 0 , since </>(w) = 0,
as a: is a regular point.
We turn now to ^z. In (77, 77 4- 8), 8, 77 sufficiently small,
sin u > w — ^ w8 > 77(1 — 772).
LIMITED VARIATION
Thus, if fa = Max | </> | in (?;, 17 + 8),
435
with 8.
Thus, when ty is monotone in some (0, f), Fourier's develop-
ment is valid. But obviously when i/r is monotone, the condition
that uV(u)=Q is satisfied. Our theorem is thus established in
this case.
Let us now consider the case that the variation V(u) of ty is
limited in (w, f).
From 443, 10), we have
As before we have
By hypothesis there exists for each e > 0, a 8Q > 0, such that
u V(u) < e , for any 0 < u < 8Q.
Hence,
V(u) < —
~~u
Thus,
w» <wrw wow <o "^g. Since V(u) is the sum of two limited
monotone decreasing functions P, ^Vin (M, f), it is integrable.
Thus,
^(w>rfw < 8 M
is evanescent with S.
436 FOURIER'S SERIES
446. 1. Fourier's development is valid at the regular point x, if
</>(w) has limited variation in some interval ^0 < £), f < , •
A
For let 0 < u < 7 < £, then
Now
sin u
Hence Fuv i/r < \ Vuy<j> + | $(7) I \
But sin u being monotone,
r.-A-.-ll-^1
sin u sin M sin 7
Thus
V *K-J22U__
'uvrS sin
Similarly,
sin 7
Now
0<-^-<Jf , in (0*, £).
sin u
The theorem now follows by 445. For we may take 7 so small
that T:r e
r°^4Jf
Thus for any u < 7,
/^-f
^ On the other hand, SO? being sufficiently large, and 7 chosen as
in 1) and then fixed,
I
Thus
for w<some S'. Hence
for 0 < u < some S.
2. (Jordan.} Fourier's development is valid at the regular point
x, iff (x~) has limited variation in some domain of x.
OTHER CRITERIA 437
For *00=J/(*+2u)-/(iOf + {/(*- 2 «) -/(«)}
has limited variation also.
3. Fourier's development is valid at every point of 21 = (0, 2 TT),
*y/ ** limited and has only a finite number of oscillations in 21.
Other Criteria
447. Let X=
If X = 0 as 8 = 0, «o cZo^« ^, anc? conversely.
For . s.x ^ >. . 5., sin^M + £) . x N sin u
W + O
M
,
u -\-
where sn
Obviously X and ^ are simultaneously evanescent with
provided
R =T\ p\=Q , as 8 = 0.
Let
rr/ \ Sin U
u
Then
p = ^(U) { Z(« + 8) - Z(u
Now
cos v — sin v
438
Hence
FOURIER'S SERIES
«> i , . »*-
sin
=0 , with 8.
448. (Lipschitz-Dini.) At the regular point x, Fourier's devel-
opment is valid, if for each e > 0, tfore e:mte a 80 > 0, sucA that for
each 0 < 8 < 80 ,
| <j)(u + 8) - <f>(tt) 1 < , . € ... /<w any u in (8, 80).
| log 8 |
For
(M 4- 8) — <b(u)
|
Now 2; being a regular point, there exists an rj' such that
| <f>(u) | < e, for u in any (8, 77').
Thus taking s ,
V > o» Vi
v n
X=
Thus
I log 8 |J,6 u
log 77 — log 8 ./I 1
<C-TT — rr- +eg U —
| log 8 | \8
< 2 e, for any 8 < 77.
X = 0, as 8 = 0.
Uniqueness of Fourier's Development
449. Suppose /(a:) can be developed in Fourier's series
no
/O) = £ «0 + 2(ancos wz + ftnsin nx}, (1
an = - I /(#) cos »mfo , bn = - I f(x) sin rmfo, (2
^at-w ^X-ir
UNIQUENESS OF FOURIER'S DEVELOPMENT 439
valid in 31 = (— TT, TT). We ask can /(#) be developed in a simi-
Ijir series /• /• ^ * i . ^* / i .?/• x ,n
f (x) = £ «o 4- 2(«B cos wz + o» sin nx), (3
also valid in SI, where the coefficients are not Fourier's coefficients,
at least not all of them.
Suppose this were true. Subtracting 1), 3) we get
0 = 2 (ao ~ rto) + 2 1 (an — rtn) cos nx + (^n — &») sin nz} = 0,
CQ + 2 {cn cos w# + <£n sin wx| = 0, in 31. (4
Thus it would be possible for a trigonometric series of the type
4) to vanish without all the coefficients em, dm vanishing.
For a power series
Po+Pix +.P<^+ '" (5
to vanish in an interval about the origin, however small, we know
that all the coefficients pm in 5) must = 0.
We propose to show now that a similar theorem holds for a
trigonometric series. In fact we shall prove the fundamental
Theorem 1. Suppose it is known that the series 4) converges to 0
for all the points of 21 = (— TT, TT), except at a reducible set 9?.
Then the coefficients cm , dm are all 0, and the series 4) = 0 at all the
points of St.
From this we deduce at once as corollaries :
Theorem 2. Let fR be a reducible set in 21. Let the series
CD
a0 + 2 [an cos nx + /?„ sin nx\ (6
converge in SI, except possibly at the points 9J. Then 6) defines a
function F(x} in SI — 9?.
If the series / , vt / at •
«0 + 2 f «„ cos nx + p« sin nx\
converges to F(x") in SI — 9?, its coefficients are respectively equal to
those in 6).
Theorem 3. If f(x) admits a development in Fourier's series for
the set 31 — 9?, any other development of f(x) of the type 6), valid in
21 — 9? is necessarily Fourier s series, i.e. the coefficients am, ftm have
the values given in 2).
440 FOURIER'S SERIES
In order to establish the fundamental theorem, we shall make
use of some results due to Riemann, Q-. Cantor, Harnack and
Schwarz as extended by later writers. Before doing this let us
prove the easy
Theorem 4- If /(X) admits a development in Fourier's series
which is uniformly convergent in 51 = ( — TT, TT), it admits no other
development of the type 3), which is also uniformly convergent in 21.
For then the corresponding series 4) is uniformly convergent
in 31, and may be integrated termwise. Thus making use of the
method employed in 436, we see that all the coefficients in 4)
vanish.
450. 1. Before attempting to prove the fundamental theorem
which states that the coefficients an, bn are 0, we will first show
that the coefficients of any trigonometric series which converges
in §1, except possibly at a point set of a certain type, must be such
that they = 0, as n = oo. We have already seen, in 440, 1, that
this is indeed so in the case of Fourier's series, whether it con-
verges or not. It is not the case with every trigonometric series
as the following example shows, viz. :
sin n ! x. (1
i
When x = — - all the terms, beginning with the r Ith, vanish,
and hence 1) is convergent at such points. Thus 1) is conver-
gent at a pantactic set of points. In this series the coefficients «„
of the cosine terms are all 0, while the coefficients of the sine
terms bn , are 0 or 1. Thus bn does not = 0, as n = oo.
2. Before enunciating the theorem on the convergence of the
coefficients of a trigonometric series to 0, we need the notion of
divergence of a series due to Harnack.
Let A = a1 + a2+.-. (2
be a series of real terms. Let gn, Q-n be the minimum and maxi-
mum of all the terms
•"•n+l i -"-n+1 1 •'"
where as usual An is the sum of the first n terms of 2). Obviously
UNIQUENESS OF FOURIER'S DEVELOPMENT 441
Thus the two sequences |#nf, \Gf-n\ are monotone, and if limited,
their terms converge to fixed values. Let us say
9» = 9 i #,» = #•
The difference
\) = G-g
is called the divergence of the series 2).
3. For the series 2) to converge it is necessary and sufficient that
its divergence b = 0.
For if A is convergent,
-e + A<An+p<A + € , p = l, 2...
Thus -€ + A<gn<an<A + e.
Thus the limits Q-, g exist, and
#-<7<2e ; or# = <7,
as e > 0 is small at pleasure.
Suppose now b = 0. Then by hypothesis, 6?, g exist and are
equal. There exists, therefore, an n, such that
g-e<gn<Gn<a + e,
or #n-<7n<2e.
Thus \An+p-An\<2e , ^=1,2...
and A is convergent.
451. Let the series
03
2 (an cos wz -f bn sin w#)
o
5e such that for each 8 > 0, £Aere« exz«f« a subinterval of
2I = (-7r, TT)
a£ eacA point of which its divergence b < 8. Then an, bn = 0, as
w = ao.
For, as in 450, there exists for each x an mt, such that
g
I an cos wx + bn sin wx | < - , n > mx (1
» o
442 FOURIER'S SERIES
for any point x in some interval 93 of 21. Tims if b is an inner
point of 33, x = b + ft will lie in 33, if ft lies in some interval
B = (p, <?). Now
an cos w (b + /3) + &„ sin n (b + $)
= (an cos w6 -|- bn sin wi) cos w/3 — (an sin w5 — bn cos w6) sin w/3.
an cos w (6 — /3) + 5n sin n(b — ft}
= (an cos w6 + bn sin w5) cos w/? + («„ sin w6 — bn cos w5) sin wy3.
Adding and subtracting these equations, and using 1) we have
$
| (an cos nb + bn sin w6) cos nft \ < -,
£
| (an sin w6 — bn cos w6) sin w/S | < -,
for all n>mx. Let us multiply the first of these inequalities by
cos nb sin w/3, and the second by sin nb cos w/3, and add. We get
| an sin n@l \ < 8 , /Sj = 2 /3 , n>mx. (2
Again if we multiply the first inequality by sin nb sin w/3, and
the second by cos nb cos w/3, and subtract, we get
| bn sin w/Sj | < 8 , w > wx. (3
From 2), 3), we can infer that for any e > 0
| an | < e , | bn | < e , n > some w, (4
or what is the same, that an, bn = 0.
For suppose. that the first inequality of 4) did not hold. Then
there exists a sequence
Wj < w2 < • • • = oo (5
such that on setting
I anr | = 8 + Vnr ' , e-8 = 8'
we will have
8nr > B'. (6
If this be so, we can show that there exists a sequence
v1 < v2 < • • • = oo
in 5), such that for some ft' in B,
| a,r sin vrft' | > S, (7
UNIQUENESS OF FOURIER'S DEVELOPMENT 443
which contradicts 2). To this end we note that 70 > 0 may be
chosen so small that for any r and any | 7 | < 70 ,
I a-, | cos 7 > (8 + £') cos 70 > 8. (8
Let us take the integer v1 so that
>7r + 27ft (9
q-p
Then 2 , , 0 N ^ 0
-Oi (?-/>)- 270)^2-
7T
Thus at least one, odd integer lies in the interval determined by
the two numbers
9 9
-(P'l + Vo) > ^Oi-7o)-
Let ml be such an integer. Then
2 2
-(P/i + 7o)<wi<-Oi-7o)-
7T 7T
If we set
C11
we see that the interval JB1 = (p1, q^) lies in B. The length of
^j is 2 70/Vj. Then for any ft in J5j,
, |7il<70-
Thus by 8),
| aVl sin Vj/S | = | an | cos 7X > S. (12
But we may reason on Bl as we have on B. We determine z/2
by 9), replacing jt>, ^ by p^ ql . We determine the odd integer w2
by 10), replacing JP, q, vl by p1, q1, vz. The relation 11) deter-
mines the new interval B^ = (j?2, ^2), on replacing Wj, i/j by w2, v3.
The length of .Z?2 is 270/v2, and 52 lies in 5j. P^or this relation
of i>2, and for any ft in .62 we have, similar to 12),
| aVt sin j/2/3 | > B.
In this way we may continue indefinitely. The intervals
Bl > Bz > ••• = to a point /3', and obviously for this /3', the rela-
444 FOURIER'S SERIES
tion 7) holds for any x. In a similar manner we see that if bn does
not == 0, the relation 3) cannot hold.
452. As corollaries of the last theorem we have :
1. Let the series
QO
2(an cos nx + bn sin nx) (1
be such that for each 8 > 0, the points in 21 = ( — TT, TT) at which
the divergence of 1) is >S, form An apantactic set in 21. Then
an, &B = 0, as w = oo.
2. ie£ ^g sm'es 1) converge in 21, except possibly at the points of
a reducible set 9?. TAew «„, &„ = 0.
For $R being reducible [318, 6], there exists in 21 an interval 33
in which 1) converges at every point. We now apply 451.
453. Let IT/' \ v/- i i
Jf (x) = 2(an cos nx + on sin nx)
at the points of 21 = (— TT, TT), ivhere the series is convergent. At the
other points of 21, £#£ F(x) have an arbitrarily assigned value, lying
between the two limits of indetermination g, Gr of the series. If F is
R-integrable in 21, the coefficients an, £>n = 0.
i
For there exists a division of 21, such that the sum of those in-
tervals in which Osc F > CD is < a-. There is therefore an interval
3 in which Osc F < o>. If $ is an inner interval of $, the di-
vergence of the above series is < co at each point of $. We now
apply 451.
454. Riemanrfs Theorem.
Let F(x) = % a0 + 2(an cos nx + bn sin nx) = 2^4n converge nt
each point of 21 = (— TT, TT), except possibly at the points of a redu-
cible set 9?. The series obtained by integrating this series termwise,
we denote by
G(x) = - a^ - V — (an cos nx + bn sin nx) = - AQx2 - ^
4 ^ n* 2 "Y ?r
(r t* continuous in 21.
UNIQUENESS OF FOURIER'S DEVELOPMENT 445
Let 4>(tt) = #O + 2 w) + Q(x - 2 w) - 2 #(». (1
Then at each point of 93 = 21 - ft,
<b(ijL\
lirvi ^- 7 — JFf'r~\ • fty
o^ — V^V ' 'V.^
ti=o 4 u*
and at each point of 21,
*'"" = 0. (3
«=0
For, in the first place, since ft is a reducible set, an, bn = 0. The
series (r is therefore uniformly convergent in 21, and is thus a
continuous function.
Let us now compute <I>. We have
an cos n(x + 2 u) + an cos n(x — 2 u) — 2 an cos nx
= 2 an cos wo; (cos 2 WM — 1)
= — 4 an cos nx sin2 WM.
6re sin n(x + 2 w) + bn sin w(a; - 2 u) -25nsinwa;
= 2 5n sin wa;(cos 2 ra/ — 1)
= — 4 bn sin wa; sin2 nu.
Thus
'
o \ nu
if we agree to give the coefficient of A0 the value 1. Let us
give x an arbitrary but fixed value in 53. Then for each e > 0,
there exists an m such that
Thus An = en+1 - en.
Hence , «,
4^2 = €l ^ i ^€n+1~
oo fl ain ^'W 1 \ti |2 I ciTi >}'}/ |2 )
--, I I Bill I TV ^^ L ) U/ \ I BUI raw I /"/I
2 en | v_1 J -^-
446 FOURIER'S SERIES
The index m being determined as above, let us take u such that
7T , i 7T
u < - , so that m < — ;
w u
and break S into three parts
where K is the greatest integer < TT/M, and then consider each sum
separately, as u = 0.
Obviously lim Sl = 0.
«=o
As to the second sum, the number of its terms increases indefin-
itely as u = 0.
For any u,
m+1
I fsin mu
— ]2 r~ • —|2 1
< e j I
I L_ /«M J |_ KU J )
[sii
~
. sin mu~\z
< e | - < e,
mu
since each term in the brace is positive. In fact
sin v
v
is a decreasing function of v as v ranges from 0 to TT, and
nu<KU^ir , n = m, m + 1, ••• K.
Finally we consider Ss. We may write the general term as
follows :
en fpjnCn-l)^ .pinO-T
lL (w-l)w J L nu
ffsin Cn — I)?/"!2 rsin w?n21,
+ e»{ nM - \—^r\ •
(\_ 71U J l_ NW J J
NOW -ox -IN -o •/'O -IN-
sm^ (n — 1 )w — SIIT* nw — sin ( 2 n — 1 )u sin u
ri*u
UNIQUENESS OF FOURIER'S DEVELOPMENT 447
Thus
l&l<41
since
But K >_ 1 , or KU >_ TT — u.
u
Thus
i^i<
Hence ^ = ^ + ^2 + ^3 = 0, as w = 0,
which proves the limit 2), on using 4).
To prove the limit 3), we have
4w 0 \ nu
Let us give u a definite value and break T into three sums.
m
1
where m is chosen so that
| A, | < e » n>m',
\
TO+l
where X is the greatest integer such that
and «
A+l
Obviously for some Jif,
| 2U <.«!«:
since / . N,
/sin wwy -.
I I ^
\ nu J
448 FOURIER'S SERIKS
As to the last sum,
I TI I < - V \ < eX - - , since - < X,
~w£>2~ X u~
AT 1
<e.
Thus T=0 , asw=0.
455. Schwarz-Liiroth Theorem.
In 21 =(a < i) £e£ *^e continuous function f (x) be such that
S(x, M) _/(*+«)+ A* -*)-2/(*) = 0, a, W= 0, (1
w2
except possibly at an enumerable set (§ in SI. -<4.£ <Ae points (5, Ze<
M^^, M) = 0 a« w = 0. (2
Thenf is a linear function in SI.
Let us first suppose with Schwarz that (£ = 0. We introduce
the auxiliary function,
g(x) = T?Z(» -\c(x- a)(x - 5),
where
L(x) «/(*) -/(a)-
77 = ± 1, and c is an arbitrary constant.
The function g(x) is continuous in 31, and #(a) = #(6) = 0.
Moreover
as w = 0.
M
Thus for all 0 < u < some S,
(3
From this follows that g(x)<Q in 21. For if #(:r)>0, at any
point in 21, it takes on its maximum value at some point £ within 21.
Thus
for 0 < u < 8, 5 being sufficiently small. Adding these two in-
equalities gives #<.0, which contradicts 3). Thus#<.0 in 21.
Let us now suppose L =£ 0 for some x in 21. We take c so small
that
= sgn r}L = 77 sgn L.
UNIQUENESS OF FOURIER'S DEVELOPMENT 449
But 17 is at pleasure ± 1, hence the supposition that L =£ 0 is
not admissible. Hence L = 0 in SI, or
/00! (4
— "
is indeed a linear function.
Let us now suppose with Liiroth that (£ > 0. We introduce the
auxiliary continuous function.
A(z) = L(x) + c(x - a)2 ,
A(a)=0 , £(£)=
Suppose at some inner point f of SI
Thus A(a)=0 , £(£)=<& -a)2.
(5
This leads to a contradiction, as we proceed to show. For then
A(£) - A(&) = £(£) + « I (I - «)2 ~ (* - «)2^ > 0,
provided
We shall take c so that this inequality is satisfied, i.e. c lies in
the interval (£ = (0*, (7*). Thus
*(!)>*<*>>*(«)•
Hence Ji(x) takes on its maximum value at some inner point e
of 21. Hence for 8 > 0 sufficiently small,
<8. (6
, U) = e e-- < Q> (7
tv
Now if e is a point of SI — (§,
lim J?(e, w) = 2 <? > 0.
«=o
But this contradicts 7), which requires that
lim #(>, w)<0.
u=0
450 FOURIER'S SERIES
Hence e is a point of (§. Hence by 2),
— . — — . f
N ' + — ^ — v ' = 0 , as u = 0.
u u
By 6), both terms have the same sign. Hence each term = 0.
Thus for u > 0
± w ± M /> — a
+ 2<?(e — a).
Hence /v,. ^/,. x
/'(0 = /(*>"/(g) + 2C(«-a). (8
o — a »
Thus to each c in the interval (£, corresponds an e in (§, at which
point the derivative of /(#) exists and has the value given on the
right of 8). On the other hand, two different c's, say c and c', in
(5 cannot correspond to the same e in (£.
For then 8) shows that
c(e, — a) = d(e — a),
or as ,
e > a, c = c.
Thus there is a uniform correspondence between (£ whose cardi-
nal number is c, and G? whose cardinal number is e, which is absurd.
Thus the supposition 5) is impossible. In a similar manner, the
assumption that L < 0 at some point in 21, leads to a contradiction.
Hence L — 0 in 51, and 4) again holds, which proves the theorem.
456. Cantor s Theorem. Let
00
% «0 + 2(an cos nx + bn sin nx) (1
i
converge to 0 in 2l = (— ?r, TT), except possibly at a reducible set 9?,
where nothing is asserted regarding its convergence. Then it con-
verges to 0 at every point in 21, and all its coefficients
#0' ai-> a2 •" &i» *2» *3 "• = 0-
For by 452, 2, an, 5n = 0. Then Riemann's function
/ 00 = i V^ — 2} -g («„ cos MZ + 5n sin
UNIQUENESS OF FOURIER'S DEVELOPMENT 451
satisfies the conditions of the Schwarz-Liiroth theorem, 455, since 9t
is enumerable. Thus/(:r) is a linear function of x in 21, and has
the form a + j3x. Hence
» 1
a + fix — \ dQx2 = — 2, -3 (an cos nx + bn sin nx). (2
i w
I The right side admits the period 2 TT, and is therefore periodic.
Its period o> must be 0. For if &> > 0, the left side has this
eriod, which is absurd. Hence a> = 0, and the left side reduces
to a constant, which gives /3=0, a0=0. But in 51 — 9J, the right
side of 1) has the sum 0. Hence a= 0. Thus the right side of
2) vanishes in 31. As it converges uniformly in 21, we may deter-
mine its coefficients as in 436. This gives
CHAPTER XIV
DISCONTINUOUS FUNCTIONS
Properties of Continuous Functions
457. 1. In Chapter VII of Volume I we have discussed some
of the elementary properties of continuous and discontinuous
functions. In the present chapter further developments will be
given, paying particular attention to discontinuous functions.
Here the results of Baire * are of foremost importance. Le-
besgue f has shown how some of these may be obtained by sim-
pler considerations, and we have accordingly adopted them.
2. Let us begin by observing that the definition of a continu-
ous function given in I, 339, may be extended to sets having iso-
lated points, if we use I, 339, 2 as definition.
Let therefore /(^ ••• xm~) be defined over 51, being either limited
or unlimited. Let a be any point of 51. If for each e > 0, there
exists a B > 0, such that
I/O) — /O) | < e, for any x in Fs(a),
we say f is continuous at a.
By the definition it follows at once that / is continuous at each
isolated point of 51. Moreover, when a is a proper limiting point
of 51, the definition here given coincides with that given in I, :'••''>'.».
If /is continuous at each point of 51, we say it is continuous in ?(.
The definition of discontinuity given in I, 347, shall still hold,
except that we must regard isolated points as points of con-
tinuity.
* " Sur lea Functions de Variables reeles," Ami-ili di Mat., Ser. 3, vol. 3
(1899) .
Also his Lemons nur Ifs Functions Discontinues. Paris, 1005.
1 Bulletin de la Societe Mathematique de France, vol. 32 (1904), p. 229.
452
PROPERTIES OF CONTINUOUS FUNCTIONS \~>:\
3. The reader will observe that the theorems I, 350 to 354
inclusive, are valid not only for limited perfect domains, but also
for limited complete sets.
458. 1. If f(%i ••• #TO) is continuous in the limited set 21, and its
r, i /HI'S are known at the points of 53 < 21, then f is known at all
points of 53' lying in 21.
For let b1, b2, bs ••• be points of 53, whose limiting point b lies
in :>[. Then
2. If f is known for a dense set 53 in 21, and is continuous in 21,
/ is known throughout 21.
For 53' > 21.
3. If f(xl ••• #m) i* continuous in the complete set 21, the points
53 in 21 where f=c,a constant, form a complete set. If 21 is an
interval, there is a first and a last point of$&.
For/= c at x= «x, «2 ••• which = a; we have therefore
/(«) = lim/(an) = c.
459. 7%e points of continuity (£ of f(xl-"Xm) in 21 fo'e «w a
• l>'/i'ted enclosure ®. Ifty. is complete, ft = S.
For let e! > e2 > ••• =0. For each en, and for each point of
nmtinuity c in 21, there exists a cube O whose center is c, such that
Osc/< en, in Q.
Thus the points of continuity of / lie in an enumerable non-
ovrrlapping set of complete metric cells, in each of which
( >>(•/< en. Let Qn be the inner points of this enclosure. Then
t-ai h point of the deleted enclosure
which lies in 21 is a point of continuity of /. For such a point c
lies within each Qn.
Hence ^ /. . Tr , N
Osc / < e, m Fj (<?),
for 8 > 0 sufficiently small and n sufficiently great.
454 DISCONTINUOUS FUNCTIONS
Oscillation
460. Let n
This is a monotone decreasing function of 8. Hence if <u5 is
finite, for some B > 0,
a> = lim &>s
8=0
exists. We call G> the oscillation off at x = a, and write
a, = Osc/.
ar=a
Should G>J = -f oo, however small B > 0 is taken, we say &> = + oo.
When w = O,/ is continuous at # = a, if a is a point in the domain
of definition of/. When &> > 0, /is discontinuous at this point.
It is a measure of the discontinuity off at x = a ; we write
&) = Disc/(a;1 ••• #„,).
#=a
461. 1. Let
d =
af z = a.
| d - e | < Disc (/ ± g~) < d + e.
x=a
For in V& (a),
| Osc/ - Osc g | < Osc (/ ± g^ < Osc/ + Osc g.
2. J^/ 18 continuous at x = a, wAe7e Disc g — d, then
Disc (/ + #) = d.
jr=a .
For/behig continuous at a, Disc/= 0.
Hence Digc ^ ^ Digc (/ + ^) < Disc # = ^.
3. If c is a constant,
Disc (</) = | c | Disc/ , at x = a.
Osc (c/) = | c | Osc/ , in any F6(a).
4. When the limits
OSCILLATION 455
cist and at least one of them is different from /(x), the point x
a discontinuity of the first kind, as we have already said.
f hen at least one of the above limits does not exist, the point x
is a point of discontinuity of the second kind.
462. 1. The points of infinite discontinuity 3 of /, defined over
a limited set 2l,/0rra a complete set.
For let tj, i2 ••- be points of $, having k as limiting point.
Then in any V(k) there are an infinity of the points in and hence
in any V(Jc), Osc/= + oo. The point k does not of course
need to lie in 21.
2. We cannot say, however, that the points of discontinuity of
a function form a complete set as is shown by the following
Example. In 21 = (0, 1), let f(x) = x when x is irrational, and
= 0 when x is rational. Then each point of 21 is a point of dis-
continuity except the point x = 0. Hence the points of disconti-
nuity of /do not form a complete set.
3. Let f be limited or unlimited in the limited complete set 21.
The points & 0/21 at which One f>k form a complete set.
For let ar a2 ••• be points of $ which = a. However small
B >0 is taken, there are an infinity of the an lying in F«(a). But
at any one of these points, Osc/_>&. Hence Oscf>_k in Vs (a)5
and thus a lies in $.
4. Letf(x± ••• Xn) be limited and R-integrable in the limited set 21.
The points $ at which Oscf>^kform a discrete set.
For let D be a rectangular division of space. Let us suppose
$D > some constant c> 0, however D is chosen. In each cell 8
of D
Hence the sum of the cells in which the oscillation is _> k can-
not be made small at pleasure, since this sum is ®D. But this
contradicts I, 700, 6.
5. Let f(^xl •'• xm) be limited in the complete set 21- If the points
R in 21 at which Osc / > k form a discrete set, for each k, then f is
R-iittegrable in 21.
456 DISCONTINUOUS FUNCTIONS
For about each point of 21 — $ as center, we can describe a cube
(£ of varying size, such that Osc/< 2 k in (£. Let D be a cubical
division of space of norm d. We may take d so small that
$D = 2rft is as small as we please. The points of 21 lie now within
the cubes (£ and the set formed of the cubes dt. By.Borel's
theorem there are a finite number of cubes, say
such that all the points of 21 lie within these 17*8. If we prolong
the faces of these ?;'s, we effect a rectangular division such that
the sum of those cells in which the oscillation is > 2 k is as small
as we choose, since this sum is obviously < ®D. Hence by I, 700,
5, / is .R-integrable.
6. Letf(xl ••• xm~) be limited in 21; let its points of discontinuity
in 21 be £). If f is R-integrable, 3) is a null set. If 21 is complete
and 3) is a null set, f is R-integrdble.
Let / be .R-integrable. Then 3) is a null set. For let e1 > e2
> ... = 0. Let !Dn denote the points at which Osc/> en. Then
3) = {£)„}. But since /is _R-integrable, each $£)„ is discrete by 4.
Hence 3) is a null set.
Let 21 be complete and 3) a null set. Then each £)n is complete
by 3. Hence by 365, £>„ = £)„. As £ = 0, we see £>nis discrete.
Hence by 5, /is .R-mtegrable.
If 21 is not complete, / does not need to be 72-integrable when
2) is a null set.
Example. Let2l1=(^l , n= 1, 2 ••• ; m<2».
r<3'.
Let f(x) = — , &tx=~
= 1 in 2I2 .
Then each point of 21 is a point of discontinuity, and 21 = 3).
But 2tj, 2^2 are null sets, hence 21 is a null set.
POINT WISE AND TOTAL DISCONTINUITY 457
On the other hand,
j/=i , j/=o,
•** ^a
and / is not ^2-integrable in 31.
Paintwise and Total Discontinuity
463. Let/^ ... zm) be denned over 31. If each point of 31 is a
point of discontinuity, we say /is totally discontinuous in 31.
We say/ is pointwise discontinuous in 31, if / is not continuous
in ?(= \a\, but has in any F(a) a point of continuity. If/ is
continuous or pointwise discontinuous, we may say it is at most
pointwise discontinuous.
Example 1. A f unction /(a^ ••• xm~) having only a finite number
of points of discontinuity in 31 is pointwise discontinuous in 31.
Example 2. Let
/(#)= 0 , for irrational x in 31 = (0, 1)
1 t m
= - , for x = —
n n
= 1 , for x = 0, 1.
Obviously /is continuous at each irrational x, and discontinuous
at the other points of 31. Hence / is pointwise discontinuous
in 31.
Example 3. Let 3) be a Harnack set in the unit interval
31 = (0, 1). In the associate set of intervals, end points included,
let/(»=l. At the other points of 31, let /= 0. As $) is
apantiictic in 31, /is pointwise discontinuous.
Example 4. In Ex. 3, let 3) = (5 + g, where (S is the set of end
points of the associate set of intervals. Let/=l/n at the end
points of these intervals belonging to the wth stage. Let/= 0 in
5- Here / is defined only over 3). The points ^ are points of
continuity in 2). Hence / is pointwise discontinuous in 2).
Example 5. Let /(#) be Dirichlet's function, i.e. /= 0, for the
irrational points 3 in 31 =(0, 1), and = 1 for the rational points.
458 DISCONTINUOUS FUNCTIONS
As each point of SI is a point of discontinuity,/ is totally discon-
tinuous in 21. Let us remove the rational points in 21 ; the deleted
domain is $. In this domain /is continuous. Thus on removing
certain points, a discontinuous function becomes a continuous
function in the remaining point set.
This is not always the case. For if in Ex. 4 we remove the
points g, retaining only the points (£, we get a function which is
totally discontinuous in Q?, whereas before / was only point wise
discontinuous.
464. 1. Iff(Xi ••• Xn) is totally discontinuous in the infinite com-
plete set 21, then the points bu where
Disc/>a> , «o > 0,
form an infinite set, if a> is taken sufficiently small.
For suppose b,,, were finite however small o> is taken. Let
&)1>&)2>"- =0. Let Z>j, Z>2, ••• be a sequence of superposed
cubical divisions of space of norms dn = 0. We shall only con-
sider cells containing points of 21. Then if dl is taken sufficiently
small, .Dj contains a cell Sj, containing an infinite number of
points of 21, but no point at which Disc/>o>r If dz is taken
sufficiently small, Dz contains a cell &2<S1, containing no point
at which Disc/>&>2. In this way we get a sequence of cells,
which = a point p. As 21 is complete, p lies in 21. But / is
obviously continuous at p. Hence / is not totally discontinuous
in 21.
2. If 21 is not complete, b,,, does not need to be infinite for
any a> > 0.
Example. Let 21 = I— \ , n = 1, 2, ... and m odd and <2n. At
1
— , let/= — • Then each point of 21 is a point of discontinuity.
VI VW
But bo, is finite, however small to > 0 is taken.
3. We cannot say /is not pointwise discontinuous in complete
21, when b« is infinite.
EXAMPLES OF DISCONTINUOUS FUNCTIONS 459
Example. At the points 1 = 91, let / = 0 ; at the other
points of 21 =(0, 1), let /=!.
Obviously / is pointwise discontinuous in 21. But b« is an
intinite set for o><l, as in this case it is formed of 91, and the
point 0.
Examples of Discontinuous Functions
465. In volume I, 330 seq. and 348 seq., we have given ex-
amples of discontinuous functions. We shall now consider a few
more.
Example 1. Riemann's Function.
Let (x) be the difference between x and the nearest integer;
and when x has the form n + fa let (x) = 0. Obviously (z) has
the period 1.
It can be represented by Fourier's series thus :
f ^ \ f sin 2 irx sin 2 • 2 TTX ^_ sin 3 • 2 irx \ ,1
(X)— — i. - - ---- - | - — "' f • V1
7T I 1 A 6 j
Riemann s function is now
i-w-t^- (2
i n
This series is obviously uniformly convergent in 21 =(— oo, oo).
Since (x) has the period 1 and is continuous within ( — |, |),
we see that (nx) has the period -, and is continuous within
n
-- , — ]. The points of discontinuity of (nx) are thus
2 n 2 nj
* = 0, ±1, ±2,.-.
2 n n
Let (S= J@n|. Then at any x not in (5, each term of 2) is a con-
tinuous function of x. Hence F(x) is continuous at this point.
On the other hand, F is discontinuous at any point e of (£. For
F being uniformly convergent,
m(^ (3
L lira .FO) = 2£ lim . (4
460 DISCONTINUOUS FUNCTIONS
We show now that 3) has the value
7T2 2 8 4- 1
fore=- — , e irreducible. (f>
16 rf 2 n
and 4) the value
F(e) + _^_. (6
Hence 2
Disc F(x)=-j—- (1
#=<? O 71
To this end let us see when two of the numbers
1 +-?!, and J-+°
2mm 2n n
are equal. If equal, we have
m n
Thus if we take 2 s + 1 relatively prime to n, no two of the num-
bers in (§n are equal. Let us do this for each n. Then no two of
the numbers in (§ are equal.
-<
Let now x = e — 1 Then (mx) is continuous at this point,
2 n n
unless 8) holds; i.e. unless m is a multiple of w, say m= In. In
this case, 8) gives
Thus I must be odd ; I = 1, 3, 5 ••• In this case (mx) = 0 at e,
while R lim (mx)= — ^. When m is not an odd multiple of w,
obviously R lim (mx) = (me).
x=e
Thus when m = In, I odd,
T> v (mx) 1 1 (mx) 11 1
H lim — -1= — -=-^ — - • — •
x=e m* 2 Pn-* w 2 n2 Z2
When m is not a multiple of w,
yn#) _ ( mx)
m2 m2
EXAMPLES OF DISCONTINUOUS FUNCTIONS 461
Hence
218.
This establishes 5). Similarly we prove 6). Thus F(x) is
discontinuous at each point of (g. As
.F is limited. As the points G? form an enumerable set, F is
.R-integrable in any finite interval.
466. Example 2. Let/(z)=0 at the points of a Cantor set
C= m • aj«2 ••• ; m = 0, or a positive or negative integer, and the
a's = 0 or 2. Let f(x) = 1 elsewhere. Since f(x) admits the
period I,/ (3 rue) admits the period -— ••
3 n
Let Ol be the points of
C which fall in 51 = (0, 1). Let Dl be the corresponding set of
intervals. Let (72 = C±+ Fx, where T1 is obtained by putting a
C1 set in each interval of Dl . Let Dz be the intervals correspond-
ing to Cy Let CB= Cz+ F2 where F2 is obtained by putting a (72
set in each interval of _Z>2, etc.
The zeros of/(3wz) are obviously the points of Cn. Let
The zeros of F are the points of (5 = ] <7nf . Since each <7n is a null
set, & is also a null set. Let A = 31 — (£. The points J., (5 are
each pantactic in 31. Obviously F converges uniformly in 31,
since 0</(3 nx) <1. Since /n(V) is continuous at each point a
of A, F is continuous at a, and
1HSCON TINIOIS RNCTIONS
We show now thnt /•' is discontinuous ;it i>ai:h point of (£. For
let em be tin cud point of one of the intervals of Dm+1 but not of
Dm. Then
—^ i '••Jm\em)= — ^
Hence F(em) = Hm = + - + -
I2 w2
As the points ^4 are pantactic in 21, there exists a sequence in
A which = e. For this sequence F = H. Hence
Similarly, if ijm is not an end point of the intervals Dm+l, but a
limiting point of such end points,
The function F is 72-integrable in 21 since its points of discon-
tinuity (E form a null set.
467. Let (g = \eLi...L8l be an enumerable set of points lying in the
limited or unlimited set 31, which lies in 9?m. For any x in s)l ami
any eL in (§, let x — et lie in 53. Let ff(xl ••• xm~) be limited in 53 and
continuous, except at x = 0, where
~D\scg(x)= b.
Let G= 2^...^ converge absolutely. Then
is continuous in A = 31 — (§, and at x = et,
For when x ranges over 21, x — et remains in 53, and g is limited
in 53. Hence F is uniformly and absolutely convt'ryvnt in 31.
Now each g(x — ej) is continuous in A ; hence F is continuous
in A by 147, 2.
KXAMPLES OF DISCONTINUOUS FUNCTIONS
On the other hand, F is discontinuous at x= eK. For
where H is the series F after removing the term on the right of
the last equation. But H, as has just been shown, is continuous
at x = eK.
468. Example 1. Let Q? = {enf denote the rational numbers.
I .. t ' I / •>. • 7T
g(jx) = sin - , x =£ 0
x
= 0 , z=0.
Then r?- N v^ 1 / ^
is continuous, except at the points (£. At x = en,
Disc F = — .
Example 2. Let (5 = \en\ denote the rational numbers.
Let / \ _ i • nx _ i -A o
n=» 1 -\- nx
= 0 , 3=0,
which we considered in I, 331.
Then -n, N
is continuous, except at the rational points, and at x = em<
1
m !
469. In the foregoing g(x) is limited. This restriction may be
removed in many cases, as the reader will see from the following
theorem, given as an example.
Let E = \ eLl ... M \ be an enumerable apantactic set in 21. Let (§ =
( K. #'). For any x in 21, and any et in E, let x— el lie within a
cube 33. Let g(xl ••• xm*) be continuous in 33 except at #=0, where
g = + oo, as x = 0. Let 2<?, ... ,t be a positive term convergent series.
464 DISCONTINUOUS FUNCTIONS
Then '
i* continuous in A = 91 — (S. On the other hand, each point of Qj is a
point of infinite discontinuity.
For any given point-a;=a of A lies at a distance >0, from (§.
Thus Min(>-O>0,
as x ranges over some Fi,(a), and et over E.
for x in F,(a), and et in E. Thus -F is uniformly convergent at
x = a. As each g(x — et) is continuous at x = a, F is continuous
at a.
Ze£ weatf a; = eK. Then there exists a sequence
*', *" - = eK (1
whose points lie in A. Thus the term g(x — e^) = + oo as a; ranges
over 1). Hence a fortiori .F = + <x>. Thus each point of E is a
point of infinite discontinuity.
Finally any limit point of E is a point of infinite discontinuity,
by 462, l.
470. Example. Let #(#) =- , «„ = -- , a > 1.
x an
ann\
! 1
is a continuous function, except at the points
0 -1 -1 -I-
' ' 91 1
a or a6
which are points of infinite discontinuity.
471. Let us show how to construct functions by limiting
processes, whose points of discontinuity are any given complete
limited apantactic set (5 in an w-way space 9?m.
EXAMPLES OF DISCONTINUOUS FUNCTIONS 465
1. Let us for simplicity take m = 2, and call the coordinates of
a point 2;, //.
Let Q denote the square whose center is the origin, and one of
whose vertices is the point (1, 0).
The edge of Q is given by the points #, y satisfying
Thus .. f J, on the edge
^^"-l + CM + lyl)-" T inside (2
10, outside
of the square Q. Hence
L(x v^= i H _ lim »Jl-M-|yM I f |, on the edge, f g
* Kofftheedge.
Thus ff <*, y) = <?(*, y) -hXC* y) = j1' in £
10, without <?.
2. We next show how to construct a function g which shall = 0
on one or more of the edges of Q. Let us call these sides el, ez, e^ e±,
as we go around the edge of Q beginning with the first quadrant.
If G- = 0 on et, let us denote it by 6rt; if Gr = 0 on et, eK let us
denote it by 6rl(t, etc. We begin by constructing Grr We observe
that
1' for * = °>
'0,
Now the equation of a right line I may be given the form
x cos « + y sin a = p
where 0 < a < 2 TT, jt>>0. Hence
„ , , . n\x cos a + y sin a — p \ ( 1, on Z,
Z(z, v) = 1 — Inn - — 2— — C-l - = <
n=x 1 + w I x cos a + y sin a — JD | 1 0, oft I.
If now we make I coincide with e^ we see that
Hence
f 1 in 0 except on #1
1 0, on «j and without Q.
400 DISCONTINUOUS FUNCTIONS
In the same way,
4 = a - (j?t
&+ = a - (EI + a, + jso,
#1234 = <* ~ (^1 + ^2 + ^3 + ^4)'
By introducing a constant factor we can replace Q by a square
Qc whose sides are in the ratio c : 1 to those of Q.
Thus -I U, on the edge of &,
, outside.
\ c c J
We can replace the square Q by a similar square whose center
is a, b on replacing | x |, | y | by | x — a , | ^ — 6 |.
We have thus this result : by a limiting process, we can con-
struct a function g(x, y*) having the value 1 inside Q, and on any
of its edges, and = 0 outside $, and on the remaining edges,
Q has any point a, b as center, its edges have any length, and its
sides are tipped at an angle of 45° to the axes.
We may take them parallel to the axes, if we wish, by replacing
| x |, | y | in our fundamental relation 1) by
\x-y\ , \x + y\.
Finally let us remark that we may pass to wz-way space, by re-
placing 1) by
Kl + KI + »• + |^| = i.
3. Let now O = \<\n\ be a border set [328], of non-overlapping
squares belonging to the complete apantactic set (£, such that
O + (£ = 9? the whole plane. We mark these squares in the
plane and note which sides qn has in common with the preceding
q's. We take the gn(xy) function so that it is = l in qn, except
on these sides, and there 0. Then
Q-(x, y) = 2#«(zy)
has for each point only one term ^ 0, if cc, y lies in O, and no
term ^ 0 if it lies in (£.
r,, \ _ f 1? f°r each point of O,
1 0, for each point of (£.
EXAMPLES OF DISCONTINUOUS FUNCTIONS 467
Since S is apantactic, each point of (5 is a point of disconti-
nuity of the 2° kind ; each point of Q is a point of continuity.
4. Letf(xy) be a function defined over 21 which contains the
complete apantactic set (£.
ryi|
472. 1. Let 21 = (0, 1), 33n= the points ™ + in 21.
m
Then S3n, 33,. have no points in common.
Let/n<V) = 1 in 93n, and = 0 in Bn = 21 - 93n.
Let93={93n|. Then
The function F is totally discontinuous in S3, oscillating be-
tween 0 and 1. The series F does not converge uniformly in
any subinterval of 21.
2. Keeping the notation in 1, let
~*n
At each point of S3n, Q- = -, while G- = 0 in B.
The function Gr is discontinuous at the points of S3, but con-
tinuous at the points J5. The series Q- converges uniformly in
21, yet an infinity of terms are discontinuous in any interval in 21.
473. Let the limited set 21 be the union of an enumerable set
of complete sets |21B|. We show how to construct a function/,
which is discontinuous at the points of 21, but continuous else-
where in an m-way space.
Let us suppose first that 21 consists of but one set and is com-
plete. A point all of whose coordinates are rational, let us call
rational, the other points of space we will call non-rational. If 21
has an inner rational point, let /= 1 at this point, on the frontier
of 21 let /= 1 also ; at all other points of space let /= 0. Then
each point a of 21 is a point of discontinuity. For if a; is a froii-
468 DISCONTINUOUS FUNCTIONS
tier or an inner rational point of 21, /(#) = 1, while in any V(x)
there are points where /= 0. If x is not in 21, all the points of
some D(x) are also not in 21. At these points /= 0. Hence /is
continuous at such points.
We turn now to the general case. We have
where Al = ($il, Az = points of 2Lj not in 2lx, etc. Let/j = 1 at the
rational inner points of A^ and at the frontier points of 2lj ; at all
other points let /x = 0. Let /2 = £ at the rational inner points of
A%, and at the frontier points of Az not in Al ; at all other points
let/2 = 0. At similar points of Az let/3 = £, and elsewhere = 0,
etc.
Consider now F=^f (x x ^
™^/ n\ 1 vnj *
Let x = a be a point of 21. If it is an inner point of some At,
it is obviously a point of discontinuity of F. If not, it is a proper
frontier point of one of the A's. Then in any D (a) there are points
of space not in 21, or there are points of an infinite number of the
As. In either case a is a point of discontinuity. Similarly we
see F is continuous at a point not in 21.
2. We can obviously generalize the preceding problem by sup-
posing 21 to lie in a complete set 93, such that each frontier point
of 21 is a limit point of A = 93 — 21.
For we have only to replace our m-way space by 93.
Functions of Class 1
474. 1. Baire has introduced an important classification of
functions as follows :
Let /(#! •••#„,) be defined over 21 ; /and 21 limited or unlimited.
If /is continuous in 21, we say its class is 0 in 21, and write
Class /=0 , orCl/=0 , Mod 21.
If ' ^
each/n being of class 0 in 21, we say its class is 1, if/ does not lie
in class 0, mod 21.
FUNCTIONS OF CLASS 1 469
2. Let the series F(x) = ?,fn(x)
converge in SI, each term/n being continuous in 31. Since
we see F is of class 0, -or class 1, according as F is continuous, or
not continuous in SI. A similar remark holds for infinite prod-
ucts #0) = n<7n(20.
3. The derivatives of a function /(V) give rise to functions of
class 0 or 1. For let f(x~) have a unilateral differential coeffi-
cient g(x) at each point of 31. Both / and 31 may be unlimited.
To fix the ideas, suppose the right-hand differential coefficient
exists. Let h1>hz> ••• = 0. Then
w .
is a continuous function of x in 31. But
2O)=limgn(»
W=oo
exists at each a; in SI by hypothesis.
A similar remark applies to the partial derivatives
£ .%L
dZl dxm
of a function f(xl ••• xn).
4- Let
each/n being of class 1 in SI. Then we say, Cl/= 2 if /does not
lie in a lower class. In this way we may continue. It is of
course necessary to show that such functions actually exist.
475. Example 1.
_ ( 1,
„=» 1 + nx 1 0, for x = 0.
Let f(a* = lim nx _ ( 1, for x > 0,
This function was considered in I, 331. In any interval
SI = (0 < 6) containing the origin x = 0, Cl/= 1 ; in any inter-
val (a < 6), a > 0, not containing the origin, Cl/= 0.
•
470 DISCONTINUOUS FUNCTIONS
Example 2.
/<» = lira — • = 0, in 21 =(- 00,00).
n=oo 6
The class of/(:r) is 0 in 21. Although each /„ is limited in 21,
the graphs of /„ have peaks near x = 0 which = oc, as n = oo.
Example 8. If we combine the two functions in Ex. 1, 2, we
get f 1 1 1 f 1, for z =£ 0,
f (x} = hm -^ -- -- \ nx = \
n=* \\ + nx en*\ 10, for z = 0.
Hence C1/(V) = 1 for any set S3 embracing the origin ; = 0
for any other set.
Example 4-
Let
= H,n xeI+« , in 2T = (0, 1).
I
= ^e* , for x > 0.
We see thus that / is continuous in (0*, 1), and has a point of
infinite discontinuity at x = 0.
Hence Class f (x) = 1, in 21
= 0, in(0»,l).
Example 5.
Let
/ <V) = lim — p in 21 = (0, oo).
x +
Then
= -f oo , for x = 0.
Here lim/n(»
rt=oo
does not exist at x = 0. We cannot therefore speak of the class
of /(z) in 21 since it is not defined at the point x = 0. It is
defined in 18 = (0*, oo), and its class is obviously 0, mod 33.
FUNCTIONS OF CLASS 1
471
Example 6.
Let
f(x) = sin - , for x ^ 0
x
= a constant c , for x = 0.
We show that Cl/ = 1 in 21 = (- 0, oo). For let
nx \ nx ( 1
4- nx
sin
I
J
Now by Ex. 1,
while
O) =
lim /*„<» =
0, for x > 0,
<?, for a; = 0 ;
sin — , for x > 0,
0, for a = 0.
As each /„ is continuous in 21, and
lim /„(*)=/<>) in 21,
we see its class is < 1. As / is discontinuous at x = 0, its class
is not 0 in 21.
Example 7. Let 1 1
f(x) = lira - • sm -•
=», n x
Here the functions fn(x) under the limit sign are not defined
for x = 0. Thus /is not defined at this point. We cannot there-
fore speak of the class of/ with respect to any set embracing the
point x= 0. For any set $8 not containing this point, Cl /= 0,
since /(a;) = 0 in 53.
Let us set
= sin - , for x 3= 0
= a constant c
for x = 0.
Let
= lim -'
472 DISCONTINUOUS FUNCTIONS
Here g is a continuous function in 51 = ( — oo, oo). Its class is
thus 0 in 51. On the other hand, the functions" <£„ are each of
class 1 in 51.
Example 8.
is defined at all the points of (—00, oo) except 0, —1, — 2, ...
These latter are points of infinite discontinuity. In its domain
of definition, F is a continuous function. Hence Cl F(:r) = 0
with respect to this domain.
476. 1. If 51, limited or unlimited, is the union of an enumerable
set of complete sets, we say 51 is hypercomplete.
Example 1. The points S* within a unit sphere S, form a
hypercomplete set. For let 2r have the same center as S, and
radius r<l. Obviously each 2r is complete, while J2rj = *S'*, r
ranging over rl < r2 < ••• = 1.
Example 2. An enumerable set of points «j, «2 ««• form a hyper-
complete set. For each an may be regarded as a complete set,
embracing but a single point.
2. .// Slj , S12 • • • are limited hypercomplete sets, so is their union
{«.*-«.
For each 5^ is the union of an enumerable set of complete sets
5lOT)n. Thus 21= jSlm,n| w, w = 1, 2 ... is hypercomplete.
Let 51 be complete. If 53 is a complete part of 51, A = 31 — 33 is
hypercomplete.
For let O= \qnl be a border set of 53, as in 328. The points
An of A in each qn are complete, since 51 is complete. Thus
A=\An\, and A is hypercomplete.
Let 51= {5ln| fo hypercomplete, each 5tn iem<7 complete. If S3 z«
a complete part of 51, JL = 51 — 53 «8 hypercomplete.
For let ^4n denote the points of 5ln not in 53. Then as above,
>4.n is hypercomplete. As A = \An\, A is also hypercomplete.
FUNCTIONS OF CLASS 1 473
477. 1. @« Sets. If the limited or unlimited set 21 is the union
of an enumerable set of limited complete sets, in each of which
Osc/<e, we shall say % is an (ge set. If, however small e>0 is
taken, 21 is an (§« set, we shall say 21 is an (§. set, e = 0, which we
may also express by (Sei0-
2. Letf(xl'"X^) be continuous in the limited complete set 21.
Then 21 is an G?« set, e = 0.
For let e>0 be taken small at pleasure and fixed. By I, 353,
there exists a cubical division of space D, such that if 2ln denote
the points of 21 in one of the cells of Z>, Osc/< e in 2ln. As 21* is
complete, since 21 is, 21 is an @e set.
3. An enumerable set of points 21 = f an\ is an @€d=o *&•
For each an may be regarded as a complete set, embracing but
a single point. But in a set embracing but one point, Osc/= 0.
4. The union of an enumerable set of (£e sets 21 = J21™ j is an (5,, set.
For each 21™ is the union of an enumerable set of limited sets
2L = {2lm,nj, n = 1, 2, ... and Osc/<e in each 2Tmn.
a = {8U! * ro,n=l,2,...
But an enumerable set of enumerable sets is an enumerable set.
Hence 21 is an G?, set.
5. Letf(xl ... #„,) be continuous in the complete set 21, except at the
points £> = dl , c?2 • • • ds . Then 21 is an G?e=N) set.
For let e>0 be taken small at pleasure and fixed. About each
point of 3) we describe a sphere of radius p. Let 2lp denote the
points of 21 not within one of these spheres. Obviously 2lp is com-
plete. Let p range over rx > r2 > ••• = 0. If we set 21 = A -\- 2),
obviously ^4. = {2lrjJ. As/ is continuous in 2lr)%, it is an (Se set.
Hence 21, being the union of A and £>, is an (£e set.
478. 1. Let 21 be an (Se set. The points 3) of 21 common to the
limited complete set 35 form an (§e set.
For 21 is the union of the complete sets 2tn, in each of which
Osc/<e. But the points of 2tn in 33 form a complete set An, and
of course Osc/< e in An. As £) = \An\, it is an (S€ set.
474 DISCONTINUOUS FUNCTIONS
2. Let 51 be a limited (§, set. Let 93 be a complete part of "H.
Then A = 51 - % is an @e set.
For 31 is the union of the complete sets Sln, in each of which
Osc/<e. The points of 5ln not in 33 form a set An , such that
Osc/<e in An also. But A = \An\, arid each An being hyper-
complete, is an (S, set.
3. Let/^j ••• xm~) be defined over 51, either/ or 51 being limited
or unlimited. The points of 51 at which
«</<£ (1
may be denoted by
O </<£). (2
If in 1) one of the equality signs is missing, it will of course be
dropped in 2).
479. 1. Letf^if^i "-be continuous in the limited complete set H.
If at each point of 51, lim fn exists, 51 is an (5e=N) set and so is any
71=00
complete 53 < 51.
For let lim fn (xl ••• zm) =f(xl ••• zm) in 51. Let us effect a
71=00
division of norm e/2 of the interval ( — oo , oo ) by interpolating
the points ••• w_2, m_l, m0= 0, mt , ra2 •••
Let 5lt = (ml</<wl+2), then 51 = jHJ.
Next let ^ Tjf , 1
Then a4={®.,p! . n,p = l, 2- (1
For let a be a point of 5lt , and say /(a) = a. Then
7ftt < a < wt+2 .
But a — e </9(a) < a + e , <? > s
and we may take e and n so that
Hence a is in 3X)P .
Conversely, let a be a point of l®njp|. Then a lies in some
£)»,„. Hence,
«) <wl+2 -- ,
n
FUNCTIONS OF CLASS 1 475
But as/n(a) =/(a), we have
I/O) ~/«O) I < e , q > some p'.
Hence if e is sufficiently small,
and thus a is in 2lt.
Thus 1) is established. But £)Bp is a divisor of complete sets,
and is therefore complete. Thus 21 is the union of an enumerable
set of complete sets }S3tf, in each of which Osc/<e, € small at
pleasure.
Let now S3 be any complete part of 21. Let ot = Dv *S3i S3t|.
Then at is complete, and Osc/<e, in ot. Moreover, S3 = {at|.
Hence S3 is an (S€=^ set.
2. If Class /< 1 in limited complete 21, f limited or unlimited^
21 is an (§e set.
This is an obvious result from 1.
3. Let /(#! ••• #m) be a totally discontinuous function in the non-
enumerable set 21. Then Class f is not 0 or 1 m 21, if b = Disc /at
eacA point is < & > 0.
For in any subset S3 of 21 containing the point a:, Osc f>k.
Hence Osc /is not <e, in any part of 21, if e < k. Thus 21 cannot
be an G?e set.
4. If Class /(#! ••• rm)<.l tw fAe limited complete set 21, £Ae set
S3 = O</< ^) ** a hypercomplete set, a, b being arbitrary numbers.
For we have only to take a = mt, b = ml+2. Then S3 = 2lt, which,
as in 1, is hypercomplete.
480. (Lebesgue.') Let the limited or unlimited J 'unction f(x^ ~- zm)
be defined over the limited set 21. // 21 may be regarded as an
(S.d^ set with respect to /, the class of f is < 1 .
For let w1> eo2 > ••• = 0. By hypothesis 21 is the union of a
sequence of complete sets
in each of which Osc / <.a>r 21 is also the union of a sequence
of complete sets
476 DISCONTINUOUS FUNCTIONS
in each of which Osc/< o>2. If we superpose the division 1) of
31 on the division Slt each 2ll)t will fall into an enumerable set
of complete sets, and together they will form an enumerable
sequence
&H , Slja , 3^3 ... (^
in each of which Osc/<. a>2. Continuing in this way we see that
21 is the union of the complete sets
such that in each set of Sn, Osc/< o>n, and such that each set lies
in some set of the preceding sequence Sn.l.
With each 21W)S we associate a constant Cns, such that
-CM\<»n , in2ln., (2
and call Cns the corresponding field constant.
We show now how to define a sequence of continuous functions
/i 1/2 •" which = /. To this end we effect a sequence of super-
imposed divisions of space Dj, Z>2 ••• of norms = 0. The vertices
of the cubes of Dn we call the lattice points Ln . The cells of Dn
containing a given lattice point I of Ln form a cube 0. Let 2lUl
be the first set of 8^ containing a point o'f O. Let 212,2 be the first
set of $2 containing a point of O lying in 2llt, . Continuing in
this way we get
ft* >*,.>•'->«<;.
To 2lnin belongs the field constant Cnln ; this we associate with
the lattice point I and call it the corresponding lattice constant.
Let now (5 be a cell of Dn containing a point of SI. It has 2n
vertices or lattice points. Let Ps denote any product of « differ-
ent factors #„, #,.,, ... xrg. We consider the polynomial
4 = APn + VBP^ + 2 (7Pn_2 + .- + ^KPl + L,
the summation in each case extending over all the distinct
products of that type. The number of terms in <£ is, by I, 96,
FUNCTIONS OF CLASS 1 477
We can thus determine the 2n coefficients of <£ so that the values
of <f> at the lattice points of (S are the corresponding lattice con-
stants. Thus <f> is a continuous function in £, whose greatest and
least values are the greatest and least lattice constants belonging
to (£. Each cube (5 containing a point of 21 has associated with it
a <f> function.
We now define fn(xl ••• xm~) by stating that its value in any
cube (£ of 7)n, containing a point of 21, is that of the correspond-
ing <£ function. Since </> is linear in each variable, two $'s belong-
ing to adjacent cubes have the same values along their common
points.
We show now that/n(z) =f(x) at any point x of 21, or that
e>0, v, |/ Or) -/„<>) | <e , n>v. (3
Let a>e < e/8. Let 2lltl be the first set in Sv containing the point a;,
2l2l, the first set of S2 lying in 2lu, and containing x. Continuing
we £e* 91 > 91 > 91 > > 91
Let tye be the union of the sets in Sl preceding 2l)ti ; of the sets in
S2 preceding 9J2tj and lying in 2lltj, and so on, finally the sets of
Se preceding 2let<(, and lying in 2le_l>,a_1. Their number being
finite, 5= Dist (2let<i, ^e) is obviously > 0. We may therefore
take v > e so large that cubes of Dv about the point x lie wholly
in .#,,(», 77 < 8.
Consider now /„(»), n > v, and let us suppose first that x is not
a lattice point of Dn. Let it lie within the cell (5 of Dn. Then
fn(x) is a mean of the values of
where I is any one of the 2n vertices of S, and Cnjn is the corre-
sponding lattice constant, which we know is associated with the
•eta.
njn.
We observe now that each of the
«*„<*....•' (4
For each set in Sn is a part of some set in any of the preceding
sequences. Now 2lnJit cannot be a part of 2llfc, k < tj, for none of
478 DISCONTINUOUS FUNCTIONS
these points lie in D^x}. Hence Sln7> is a part of 2llt,. For the
same reason it is a part of S12,2, etc., which establishes 4).
Let now x1. be a point of ?lnyn. Then
I Cm. - Oeit | < | Cnin -/O') I
€
<»„+«.<! , by 2). (5
From this follows, since /„ (x) is a mean of these <7n/B, that
|/,0)-^yJ<|. (6
But now
I/O) -MX} | < !/(*) - Gnjn \ + | <7n7n -/„(*) I . (7
As x lies in 3leie,
I/GO - CnJn I < I/O) - c^ i + i cete - cn}n i
<«.+|<|, (8
by 2), 5). From 6), 8) we have 3) for the present case.
The case that a; is a lattice point for some division and hence
for all following, has really been established by the foregoing
reasoning.
481. 1. Let f be defined over the limited set 21. If for arbitrary
a, i, the sets 53 = (a </< 6) are hypercomplete, then Class /< 1.
For let us effect a division of norm e/2 of (—00, oc) as in
479, 1. Then SI = {21J, where as before '2lt= (wt </< ml+2).
But as Osc/<e in 2lt, and as each 2lt is hypercomplete by
hypothesis, our theorem is a corollary of 480.
2. For /Oj "• xm) t° ?>e °f class < 1 in the limited complete set
SI, it is necessary and sufficient that the sets (a </< 6) are hyper-
complete, a, b being arbitrary.
This follows from 1 and 479, 2.
3. Let limited 21 be the union of an enumerable set of complete sets
, such that Cl/< 1 in each 2ln, then Cl/< 1 in 21.
FUNCTIONS OF CLASS 1 479
For by 479, 1, 2In is the union of an enumerable set of complete
sets in each of which Osc/< e. Thus 21 is also such a set, i.e. an
(5, set. We now apply 480, 1.
4. If Class/ <1 in the limited complete set 21, its class is < 1,
in any complete part 33 of 21.
This follows from 479, 1 and 480, 1.
482. 1. Let /(#! ••• #m) be defined over the complete set 21, and
have only an enumerable set (§ of points of discontinuity in 21.
Then Class/ = 1 in 21.
For the points E of 21 at which Osc/ > e/2 form a complete
part of 21, by 462, 3. But E, being a part of (§, is enumerable
and is hence an (ge set by 477, 3. Let us turn to 33 = 21 — E. For
each of its points 5, there exists a 8 > 0, such that Osc/< e in
the set b of points of $8 lying in -Z>s(5). As 21 is complete, so is b.
As E is complete, there is an enumerable set of these b, call them
b1? b2 •••, such that 93 = |b.|. As 21 = 53+ E, it is the union of
an enumerable set of complete sets, in each of which Osc/< e.
This is true however small e>0 is taken. We apply now 480, l.
2. We can now construct functions of class 2.
Example. Let fn(xi ••• xm)= 1 at the rational points in the
unit cube Q, whose coordinates have denominators < n. Else-
where let/n = 0. Since /„ has only a finite number of discontinu-
ities in O, Cl/n = 1 in O. Let now
/Oi ••• arm)=lim/n.
72=00
At a non-rational point, each fn = 0, .-. /=0. At a rational
point, /„ = ! for all n > some s. Hence at such a point /= 1.
Thus each point of O is a point of discontinuity and Disc/= 1.
Hence Cl/ is not 1. As / is the limit of functions of class 1, its
class is 2.
483. Let f(xi ••• #m) be continuous with respect to each x^, at each
point of a limited set 21, each of whose points is an inner point.
Then Class f<l.
480 DISCONTINUOUS FUNCTIONS
For let SI lie within a cube Q. Then A = O — 21 is complete.
We may therefore regard SI as a border set of A ; that is, a set of
non-overlapping cubes jqnj. We show now that C1/<1 in am
one of these cubes as q. To this end we show that the points 33m
of q at which
m m
form a complete set. For let Jj, 52 ••• be points of $8OT, which = ft.
We wish to show that ft lies in 53m. Suppose first that 6,, 5,+1 •••
have all their coordinates except one, say #, the same as the coordi-
nates of ft. Since
« + -</<&+*)<*---,
m m
therefore -. .,
a -\ — < lim/(6a+ )< 6 .
m p==o w
As/ is continuous in x1, and as only the coordinate xl varies in
6,+p, we have
a-\ — !^/($) < 5 •
w m
Hence ft lies in 33m .
We suppose next that 6,, 5,+1 ••• have all their coordinates the
same as ft except two, say x^ , x% .
We may place each 6n at the center of an interval t of length S,
parallel to the xl axis, such that
m m
since /is uniformly continuous in a^, by I, 352. These intervals
cut an ordinate in the 2^, xz plane through ft, in a set of points
C»+P which = ft. Then as before,
-- + «.
m
As e is small at pleasure, ft lies in 23m. In this way we may
continue.
As C1/<1 in each qn, it is in SI, by 481, 3.
FUNCTIONS OF CLASS 1 481
484. (Volterra.) Letf^f^ ••• be at most pointwise discontinuous
in the limited complete set 21. Then there exists a point of 21 at
which all thefn are continuous.
For if 21 contains an isolated point, the theorem is obviously
true, since every function is continuous at an isolated point. Let
us therefore suppose that 21 is perfect.
Let e1>e2>---=0. Let a± be a point of continuity of fv
Osc/j < e , in some 211 = V^aJ.
In Slj there is a point b of continuity of /r Hence Osc/j < e2
in some F^,(5), and we may take b so that Fi,(6)<2lr But in
Vj,(b) there is a point a2 at which /2 is continuous. Hence
Osc/j < e2 , Osc/2 < ej , in some 2^ = F5j(aa),
and we may take «2 such that 212<211. Similarly there exists a
point as in 212, such that
Oscfl<es , Osc/2 <e2 * Osc/3<ei » in some 213= Fis(a3),
and we may take a3 so that 213 < 212 .
In this way we may continue. As the sets 2ln are obviously
complete, Dv\y[n\ contains at least one point a of 21. But at this
point each/TO is continuous.
485. 1. Let 21 = 33 + (£ be complete, let 53, (5 be pantactic with
reference to 21. Then there exists no pair of functions f, g defined
over 21, such that if 93 are the points of discontinuity of f in 21, then
53 shall be the points of continuity of g in 21.
This is a corollary of Volterra's theorem. For in any F5(a) of
a point of 21, there are points of 53 and of £. Hence there are
points of continuity of /and g. Hence/, g are at most pointwise
discontinuous in 21. Then by 484, there is a point in 21 where/
and g are both continuous, which contradicts the hypothesis.
2. Let 21 = 53 + £ be complete, and let 53, (E each be pantactic with
reference to 21. If 53 is hypercomplete, (S is not.
For if 53, S were the union of an enumerable set of complete
sets, 473 shows that there exists a function / defined over 21
which has 53 as its points of discontinuity ; and also a function g
482 DISCONTINUOUS FUNCTIONS
which has (S as its points of discontinuity. But no such pair of
functions can exist by 1.
3. The non-rational points 3 in any cube O cannot be hyper-
complete.
For the rational points in O are hypercomplete.
4. As an application of 2 we can state :
The limited function f(^xl---xm) which is < 0 at the irrational
points of a cube Q, and > 0 at the other points 3 of Q, cannot be
of class 0 or 1 in Q.
For if Cl/ < 1, the points of Q where/ > 0 must form a hyper-
complete set, by 479, 4. But these are the points $.
486. 1. (Baire.*) If the class off(^xl---xm) is 1 in the com-
plete set 21, it is at most pointwise discontinuous in any complete
93<2l.
If Cl/ = 1 in 51, it is < 1 in any complete 53 < 21 by 481, 4 ; we
may therefore take $8 = 21. Let a be any point of 21. We shall
show that in any V= Vs(a) there is a point c of continuity of /.
Let ej > €3 > ••• = 0. Using the notation of 479, 1, we saw that
the sets 2lt = (wt</< ml+2) are hypercomplete. By 473, we can
construct a function ^^x^ ••• #„), defined over the w-way space
9?m which is discontinuous at the points 21,, and continuous else-
where in 9?m. These functions fa, </>2 ••• are not all at most point-
wise discontinuous in V. For then, by 484, there exists in V a
point of continuity 6, common to all the </>'s. This point b must
lie in some 2lt, whose points are points of discontinuity of <£t.
Let us therefore suppose that fa is not at most pointwise dis-
continuous in V. Then there exists a point cl in I7", and an n1
such that Kt = F^C^i) contains no point of continuity of fa .
Thus Fi<.9(/. But in 2ly and hence in Fj, Osc f<e1. The
same reasoning shows that in Vl there exists a F^= ^,,(^2)' sucn
that Osc/< e2 in Vz. As 21 is complete, V^> F"2 > ••• defines a
point c in F"at which /is continuous.
2. If the class off(xl ••• #m) is 1 in the complete set 51, its points
of discontinuity Qform a set of the first category.
FUNCTIONS OF CLASS 1 4s:;
^For by 462, 3, the points On of $) at which Osc/> form a
n
complete set. Each £)„ is apantactic, since / is at most pointwise
discontinuous, and £)„ is complete. Hence £) = |On| is the union
of an enumerable set of apantactid sets, and is therefore of the 1°
category.
487. 1. Let f be defined over the limited complete set 21. If
Class / is not < 1, there exists a perfect set £> in 21, such that f is
totally discontinuous in 3).
For if Cl/ is not <1 there exists, by 480, an e such that for
this e, 21 is not an @e set. Let now c be a point of 21 such that
the points a of 21 which lie within some cube q, whose center is <?,
form an (ge set. Let 33 = {a}, (£ = \c\.
Then 93 = (5. For obviously (5 < 33, since each c is in some
a. On the other hand, 33 < (5. For any point b of 93 lies within
some q. Thus b is the center of a cube q' within q. Obviously
the points of 21 within q' form an (§e set.
By Borel's theorem, each point c lies within an enumerable set
of cubes fcn|, such that each c lies within some q. Thus the
points an of 21 in cn, form an Q?e set. As (S = Jan|, S is an (5e set.
Let $) = 21 - (£. If $) were 0, 21 = & and 21 would be an & set
contrary to hypothesis. Thus 2) > 0.
3) is complete. For if I were a limiting point of 3) in (£, I must
lie in some c. But every point of 21 in c is a point of (5 as we saw.
Thus I cannot lie in (S.
We show finally that at any point d of 35,
Osc/>e, with respect to £).
If not, Osc/<e with respect to the points b of 2) within
i some cube q whose center is d. Then b is an (§e set. Also the
points e of S in q form an (5€ set. Thus the points b + e, that is,
! the points of 21 in q form an (5, set. Hence d belongs to (5, and
I not to 3). As Osc/>e at each point of 3), each point of 3) is a
point of discontinuity with respect to 2). Thus/ is totally discon-
tinuous in £).
This shows that 2) can contain no isolated points. Hence ID is
perfect.
484 DISCONTINUOUS FUNCTIONS
2. Let f be defined over the limited complete set 21. If f is at
most pointwise discontinuous in any perfect 53 < 21, its class is < 1
in 21.
This is a corollary of 1. For if Class / were not 0, or 1, tin- re
exists a perfect set £> such that/ is totally discontinuous in $).
488. If the class of f, g < 1 in the limited complete set 21, the class
of their sum, difference, or product is < 1 . If f > 0 in 21, the class
of <f> =
For example, let us consider the product h =fg. If Cl h is not
< 1, there exists a perfect set £) in 21, as we saw in 487, 1, such
that h is totally discontinuous in £). But/, g being of class < 1,
are at most pointwise discontinuous in 3) by 486. Then by 484,
there exists a point of £) at which/, g are both continuous. Then
h is continuous at this point, and is therefore not totally discon-
tinous in 2).
Let us consider now the quotient <f>. If Cl <£ is not < 1, <j> is
totally discontinuous in some perfect set £) in 21. But since/ > 0
in 3), / must also be totally discontinuous in £). This contradicts
486.
489. 1. Let F = S/ti ... lt(xl ••• xm~) converge uniformly in the com-
plete set 21. Let the class of each termf, be < 1, then Class F < 1
in 21.
For setting as usual [117],
F=F, + F, (1
there exists for each e > 0. a fixed rectangular cell R^, such that
| F^ | < e, as x ranges over 21. (2
As the class of each term in F^ is < 1, Cl F^ < 1 in 2t. Hence
21 is an (Se set with respect to F^.
From 1), 2) it follows that 21 is an (g, set with respect to F.
2. Let F = HflJ...ll(xl ••• xm~) converge uniformly in the complet
set 21. If the class of eachf^ is < 1, then Cl F< 1 in 21.
SEMICONTINUOUS FUNCTIONS 485
Semicontinuous Functions
490. Let /(zj ••• a-TO) be defined over 21. If a is a point of 21,
Max/ in F«(a) exists, finite or infinite, and may be regarded as a
function of 8. When finite, it is a monotone decreasing function
of 8. Thus its limit as 8 = 0 exists, finite or infinite. We call
this limit the maximum off at x= a, and we denote it by
Max/.
x=a
Similar remarks apply to the minimum of /in F^(a). Its limit,
finite or infinite, as 8 == 0, we call the minimum of f at x = a, and
we denote it by
Min/.
x=a
The maximum and minimum of /in F«(a) may be denoted by
Max/ , Min/.
a, 4 a, S
Obviously, Max (-/)=- Min/,
x=a x=a
Min (-/)=- Max/.
x=a x=a
491. Example 1. -,
/(aO = i in (-1, 1) , fora^O
x
= 0 , for a: = 0.
Then Max/= + oo , Min/= - oo.
jr=0 f=Q
Example 2. -,
f(x) = sin - in (— 1, 1) , for x =£ 0
a;
= 0 , for x = 0.
Then Max/=l , Min/=-l.
*=o «==o
Examples. /(aj) = 1 in (- 1, 1) , fora:*0
= 2 , for a: = 0.
Then Max/ =2 , Min/=l.
"
486 DISCONTINUOUS FUNCTIONS
We observe that in Exs. 1 and 2,
lim/ = Max/ , lim/= Min/;
while in Ex. 3,
lim/= 1 , and hence Max/> lim/.
r=0 r=0 x=Q
Also fi_ .= Min/
Example 4- -\
/(z) = (2? + 1) sin - in ( - 1, 1) ,
= - 2 , . f or x = 0.
Here Max/=l , Min/ =-2,
*=0 *=0
Iim7=l , Hm/=-l.
ar=0 ^^=0
Examples. Let /(a;) = ^ ? for rational a: in (0, 1)
= 1 , for irrational x.
Here Max/=l , Min/=0,
492. 1. For M to be the maximum of f at x = a, it is necessary
and sufficient that
1° e > 0, 8 > 0, /(z) < M+ e, for any x in V&(a) ;
2° there exists for each e > 0, and in any FS(«), a point a su;'h
that
M- e </(«).
These conditions are necessary. For M is the limit of Max/
in Fa(a), as 8 = 0. Hence
e > 0, o > 0, Max/ •
a, j
But for any x in Ffi(a),
/O) < Max/.
a, 5
SEMICONTINUOUS FUNCTIONS 487
Hence f(x)<M+* , x in F«(a),
which is condition 1°.
As to 2°, we remark that for each e > 0, and in any F«(a),
there is a point a, such that
-e+ Max/ </(«).
a, 5
But ^< Max/.
a, 8
Hence -6 + Jf </(«),
which is 2°.
These conditions are sufficient. For from 1° we have
Max/ < M + e,
a, £
and hence letting 8 = 0,
Max/<J!f, (1
x=a
since e > 0 is small at pleasure.
From 2° we have
Max/> M-e,
a,&
and hence letting 8=0,
7ltf. (2
From 1), 2) we have M= Max/.
,r=a
2. .For m to be the minimum of f at x = a, t£ is necessary and
sufficient that V* '•
1° e > 0, 8 > 0, m — e </(a:), /or aw# rr m FsCa) ;
2° Mai Mere exists for each e > 0, and in any V& (a), a point a
such that
/(a) < m + e.
493. When Max/ = /(a), we say /is supracontinuous at x = a.
x=a
When Min/ = /(a), we say / is infracontinuous at a. When/ is
x=a
supra (infra) continuous at each point of 21, we say / is supra
(infra) continuous in SI. When / is either supra or infracontinu-
ous at a and we do not care to specify which, we say it is semi-
continuous at a.
488 DISCONTINUOUS FUNCTIONS
The function which is equal to Max /at each point x of H we
call the maximal function of/, and denote it by a dash above, viz.
f(x). Similarly the minimal f unction /(z) is denned as the value
of Min / at each point of 21.
Obviously Qsc/= Max/_ Min/= Digc/
x=a x=a x=a x=a
We call -
»(>)=/<>)-/<>)
the oscillatory function.
We have at once the theorem :
For f to be continuous at x = a, it is necessary and sufficient that
/(«)=/(«) = /(a).
F°r Min / < /(a) < Max /
a, 6 a, 5
Passing to the limit x = a, we have
Min /</<» < Max/,
x=a x=a
/(«></(«)</<*).
But for / to be continuous at x = a, it is necessary and suffi-
cient that
o>O) = Osc/= 0.
x=a
494. 1. For f to be supracontinuous at x = a, i£ t« necessary and
sufficient that for each e > 0, there exists a 8 > 0, swcA £/ta£
/(*) < /(a) + e ' /or any x in ^s(a)- C1
Similarly the condition for infracontinuity is
/(a) — e < /O) , /or any x in Fs(a). (2
Let us prove 1). It is necessary. For when /is supracontinu-
ous at a,
/(a)=Max/<>).
Then by 492, l,
e>0 , S>0 , f(x) <f(a) + e , for any x in F6(a),
which is 1).
SEM1CONTINUOUS FUNCTIONS 489
It is sufficient. For 1) is condition 1° of 492, 1. The condition
2° is satisfied, since for a we may take the point a.
2. The maximal function f(x} is supracontinuous ; the minimal
function f (x) is infracontinuous, in 21.
To prove that/ is supracontinuous we use 1, showing that
f(x) < /(«) + e i for any x in some Fj(a).
Now by 492, 1,
e' > 0, 8 > 0 , f(x) < /(a) + e' , for any x in r«(a).
Thus if e' < e
^
/(z) < /(a) + e , for any x in F, (a) , 77 = -
3. T7te sum of two supra (infra} continuous functions in 21 is a
supra (infra} continuous function in 21.
For let/, <j be supracontinuous in 21 ; let/ 4- # = A. Then by 1,
For any x in some V^(a} \ hence
This, by 1, shows that h is supracontinuous at x— a.
4. If f(x} is supra (infra} continuous at x = a, g(x} = —f(x}
is infra {supra} continuous.
Let us suppose that/ is supracontinuous. Then by 1,
f(x}<f(a}+ e , for any x in some V&(a}.
^ence - f( ^ — < — f(..}
or s ^ s \ *
g{a}— e<g(x} , tor any x in
Thus by 1, g is infracontinuous at a.
4 '.»«.» DISCONTINUOUS FUNCTIONS
495. // ' ./ '(.''! ••• #„,) is supra continuous in the limited complete
set 21, the points 33 of 21 at which f> c an arbitrary constant form a
complete set.
For let/> c at b1, />2 ••• which = b ; we wish to show that i lies
in 33.
Since/ is supracontinuous, by 494, l,
/(V) </(£>) + e , for any a: in some V6(b) = F.
But <?</(£>„), by hypothesis ; and Jn lies in F, for w> some m.
Hence
'</(*„
As e > 0 is small at pleasure,
and 6 lies in 53.
496. 1. T7ig oscillatory function o)(a;) z« supracontinuous.
For by 493, «,(a:)ss5 Max/- Min/
= Max/+Max(-/).
But these two maximal functions are supracontinuous by 494, 2.
Hence by 494, 3, their sum at is supracontinuous.
2. The oscillatory function a> is not necessarily infracon-
tinuous, as is shown by the following
Example. /= 1 in (—1, 1), except for x = 0, where /= 2.
Then o>(x) = 0, except at x = 0, where o> = 1. Thus
Min 60(2;)= 0 , while &>(0)= 1.
x=0
Hence w(a;) is not infracontinuous at x = 0.
3. ie£ eo(a;) 6e <Ae oscillatory function of f(x1 ••• #m) w SI. For
f to be at most pointwise discontinuous in 31, it is necessary that
Min co = 0 a£ eacA j0om£ o/ 21. 7/ 21 is complete^ this condition is
sufficient.
SEMICONTINUOUS FUNCTIONS 491
It is necessary. For let a be a point of 21. As / is at most
pointwise discontinuous, there exists a point of continuity in any
Fj(a). Hence Min (a(x) = 0, in Fa(a). Hence Min a>(z) = 0.
T=a
It is sufficient. For let €j>e2> ••• =0. Since Mina»(a;) = 0,
f=a
there exists in any Fj(a) a point «j such that a>(cti)<lcl.
Hence a>(a;)<e1 in some ^a,(«i) < Vs. In V^ there exists a point
ttj such that (o(V)<e2 in some V&t(a)< F«t, etc. Since 21 is com-
plete and since we may let Bn = 0,
- = a point a of 51,
at which / is obviously continuous. Thus in each Fj(a) is a point
of continuity of/. Hence /is at most pointwise discontinuous.
497. 1. At each point x of 21,
<j> = Min j/Or) -/(z)! , and IT = Min {/(*) -/(a:)|
are both = 0.
Let us show that <f> = 0 at an arbitrary point a of 21. By 494,
2, /(z) is supracontinuous ; hence by 494, l,
/(#) </(«) + e , for any x in some Fa(«) = V. (1
Also there exists a point a in P\such that
-6 +/(«)</(«). (2
Also by definition
• (3
If in 1) we replace # by a we get
7(
From 2), 3), 4) we have
or
0 </(«)-/(«)< 2 e.
As e > 0 is small at pleasure, this gives
<K«) = o.
492 DISCONTINUOUS FUNCTIONS
2. Iffis semicontinuous in the complete set 21, it is at most point-
wise discontinuous in 21.
For
m(r\ = f(y\ _ f(x\
V J J V J J v J
= [7(«) -/(*)] -
To fix the ideas let / be supracontinuous. Then </> = 0 in 21.
Hence 1) gives
Min «(V) = Min ty(x) = 0, • by 1 .
Thus by 496, 3, /is at most pointwise discontinuous in 21.
CHAPTER XV
DERIVATES, EXTREMES, VARIATION
Derivates
498. Suppose we have given a one-valued continuous function
/(#) spread over an interval 21 = (a < 6). We can state various
properties which it enjoys. For example, it is limited, it takes
on its extreme values, it is integrable. On the other hand, we
do not know 1° how it oscillates in 21, or 2° if it has a differ-
ential coefficient at each point of 21. In this chapter we wish to
study the behavior of continuous functions with reference to these
last two properties. In Chapters VIII and XI of volume I this
subject was touched upon ; we wish here to develop it farther.
499. In I, 363, 364, we have defined the terms difference quo-
tient, differential coefficient, derivative, right- and left-hand dif-
ferential coefficients and derivatives, unilateral differential coeffi-
cients and derivatives. The corresponding symbols are
^ , /'(«) , /'(*) , RfW .
ox
£/'(a) , Bf'(x) , £/'(*).
The unilateral differential coefficient and derivative may be de-
noted by
tf/'OO , Uf'(x). (l
When ,
does not exist, finite or infinite, we may introduce its upper and
lower limits. Thus
A=O
, /'(a)=lim/ (2
always exist, finite or infinite. We call them the upper and lower
differential coefficients at the point x = a. The aggregate of values
493
494 DERIVATES, EXTREMES, VARIATION
that 2) take on define the upper and lower derivatives of /(#), as
in I, 363.
In a similar manner we introduce the upper and lower right-
and left-hand differential coefficients and derivatives,
Rf , Rf , Lf , Lf. (8
Thus, for example,
h=t>
finite or infinite. Cf. I, 336 seq.
If /(#) is defined only in 51 = (« < /3), the points a, a + A must
lie in 31. Thus there is no upper or lower right-hand differential
coefficient at x = /3 ; also no upper or lower left-hand differential
coefficient at x= a. This fact must be borne in mind. We call
the functions 3) derivates to distinguish them from the deriva-
tives Rf, Lf. When Rf(a)-Rf'(a), finite or infinite,
Rf'(ci) exists also finite or infinite, and has the same value. A
similar remark applies to the left-hand differential coefficient.
To avoid such repetition as just made, it is convenient to in-
troduce the terms upper and lower unilateral differential coeffi-
cients and derivatives, which may be denoted by
Uf , Uf. (4
The symbol U should of course refer to the same side, if it is
used more than once in an investigation.
When no ambiguity can arise, we may abbreviate the symbols
3), 4) thus:
R , R , L , L , U , U.
The value of one of these derivates as R at a point x = a may
similarly be denoted by
.B(a).
The difference quotient
a — b
may be denoted by
A(«, ft)
DKRIVATKS
4<if,
= :E sin -
x
Example 1.
Asin-
o A/ A.I
Here for x = 0, — = — = — = sin T-
Ax h h
Hence
0 in (- 1, 1)
Example 2.
Here for
Hence
Example 3.
Z/'(0)=
(-1,
0 , x = 0.
0
A f Sln I
A/_ h
Ax~ lA
JL/'(0)= + oo , Z/'(0)=-oo,
f(x) = x sin - , for 0 < x < 1
x
= x* sin - , for — 1 < x < 0
= 0 , for x = 0.
/'(0)=-oo.
500. 1. Before taking up the general theory it will be well
for the reader to have a few examples in mind to show him how
complicated matters may get. In I, 367 seq., we have exhibited
functions which oscillate infinitely often about the points of a set
496 DERI VAXES, EXTREMES, VARIATION
of the 1° species, and which may or may not have differential co-
efficients at these points.
The following theorem enables us to construct functions which
do not possess a differential coefficient at the points of an enumer-
able set.
2. Let (5 = \en\ be an enumerable set lying in the interval 21. For
each x in 21, and en in (5, let x — en lie in an interval 33 contain iin/
the origin. Let <j(x) be continuous in 93. Let g'(x~) exist and be
numerically <_ M in 53, except at x = 0, where the difference quotient '.s-
are numerically <. M. Let A = 2an converge absolutely. Then
is a continuous function in 21, having a derivative in (5 = 21 — G£.
At the points of (§, the difference quotient of F behaves essentially as
that of g at the origin.
For g(x) being continuous in 93, it is numerically < some con-
stant in 21. Thus F converges uniformly in 21. As each term
g(x — en~) is continuous in 21, F is continuous in 21.
Let us consider its differential coefficient at a point x of (5.
Since g'(x — en) exists and is numerically < Jf,
F'(x)=^ang'(ix-en) , by 156, 2.
Let now x = em , a point of (£,
F(x) = amg(x - em~) + 2*an^r(a; - en~)
The summation in 2* extends over all n^m. Hence by what
has just been shown, Gr has a differential coefficient at x — em.
A F Af/
Thus - behaves at x= em, essentially as — - at x = 0. Hence
A# Aa;
501. Example 1. Let
g(x) = ax , x > 0
b < 0 < a.
bx , x < 0,
DERIVATES
497
Then
is continuous in any interval 31, and has a derivative
at the points of 31 not in (5. At the point em,
RF'(x} = anc
ill"
Let (5 denote the rational points in 31. The graph of F(x) is a
continuous curve having tangents at a pantactic set of points ;
and at another pantactic set, viz. the set (5, angular points (I, 366).
A simple example of a g function is
Example 2. Let g(x) = x2 sin — , x
Ju
= 0 , z=0.
This function has a derivative
7T
g'(x) =• 2x sin TTCOS— , x
x x
= 0 , z=0.
Thus if 2cn is an absolutely convergent series, and (£= \en\ an
enumerable set in the interval 31 = (0, 1),
is a continuous function whose derivative in 31 is
Thus F has a derivative which is continuous in 31 — (§, and at
the point x — em
Disc F' = 2 cm?r,
since
498 DERIVATES, EXTREMES, VARIATION
If (S is the set of rational points in 21, the graph of F(x) is a
continuous curve having at each point of 21 a tangent which does
not turn continuously as the point of contact ranges over the
curve ; indeed the points of abrupt change in the direction of the
tangent are pantactic in 21.
Example 3. Let g(x) = x sin log x2 , x =£ 0
= 0 , x=0.
Then # (X) = sin log x2 + 2 cos log x2 , x =£ 0.
At x = 0, -3- = sin log h2
which oscillates infinitely often between ± 1, as h = Ax'= 0. Let
(§ = \en\ denote the rational points in an interval 21. The series
F = ^ -2 (x - O sin log O - en~)2
satisfies the condition of our theorem. Hence F(x~) is a continu-
ous function in 21 which has a derivative in 21 — G£. At x= em,
Thus the graph of F is a continuous curve which has tangents at
a pantactic set of points in 21, and at another pantactic set it has
neither right- nor left-hand tangents.
502. Weierstrass' Function. For a long time mathematicians
thought that a continuous function of x must have a derivative, at
least after removing certain points. The examples just given
show that these exceptional points may be pantactic. Weierstrass
called attention to a continuous function which has at no point a
differential coefficient. This celebrated function is defined by the
series
F (x) = 2 an cos bnirx = cos irx + a cos ITTX + a2 cos WTTX -f • • • (1
i
where 0 < a < 1 ; b is an odd integer so chosen that
ab > 1 + § TT. (2
DERIVATES
499
The series F converges absolutely and uniformly in any interval
since
\an cos bn7rx | <, a*.
Hence F is a continuous function in «. Let us now consider
series obtained by differentiating 1) term wise,
If a£<l, this series also converges absolutely and uniformly
ant* vi
by 155, 1. In this case the function has a finite derivative in 2[.
Let us suppose, however, that the condition 2) holds. We have
«-*•• f\ x~* a ,
A — = V = / • -y j'
^^ 0 ""
Now m_
^m = V -7 {cos bnTr(x + h) —
+ A) - COS b+ITX\ = Qm+Qm. (3
cos
^l(aby Cx+h •
==~7ry. *-z sm
h
Since
r A •
M si
<
/*T
J
du
Consider now
f
— ab ab—l
A) — COS lnTTX\.
Up to the present we have taken h arbitrary. Let us now
take it as follows ; the reason for this choice will be evident in a
moment.
Let
where im is the nearest integer to bmx. Thus
500 DERIVATES, EXTREMES, VARIATION
We choose h so that
^m = Im + hbm is ± 1, at pleasure.
Then _ .
h= r)n , ^m = 0, as m=<x> ;
bm
moreover sgnA-sgn,. , and | „„ - |m | < f .
This established, we note that
cos bnTr(x + h) = cos bn~mirr • bm(x + A) = cos &n~m(*
= cos 0OT4-»?m)7r , since 6 is odd
= ( — 1)'»+1 , since r}m is odd.
COS bnTTX = COS 5B~m(tm + |OT)7T
= (•— l)twcos bn~m%mir.
Also
Thus
where
Now each \ } > 0 and in particular the first is > 0. Thus
sgn Qm = sgn-f = sgn emrjm,
h
and
Itn 3 m
Thus if 2) holds, \Qm\>\Qm\. Hence from 3),
sgn Q = sgn Qm = sgn emym,
and
ab —
Let now m = oo. Since r)m = ± \ at pleasure, we can mal«
Q = +00, or to — oo , or oscillate between ± oo, without becoming
definitely infinite. Thus F (x) has at no point a finite, or infinit
differential coefficient. This does not say that the graph of F dc
not have tangents; but when they exist, they must be cuspidal tangents.
DERIVATES 501
503. 1. Volterrd's Function.
In the interval 21 = (0, 1), let $ = JT?J be a Harnack set of
measure 0<A<1. Let A = j8nj be the associate set of black
intervals. In each of the intervals SB = (a</9), we define an
auxiliary function/,, as follows:
/n(a;) = (x- a)2 sin , in (a*, 7), (1
x — a
where 7 is the largest value of x corresponding to a maximum of
the function on the right of 1), such that 7 lies to the left of the
middle point p of Sn. If the value of /„(#) at 7 is ^, we now
make
Finally /„(«)= 0. This defines fn(x) for one half of the inter-
val 8n. We define /„ (z) for the other half of 8n by saying that if
x<xl are two points of Bn at equal distances from the middle
point* then /.(«)-/.(«•).
With Volterra we now define a function /(a;) in 21 as follows:
f(x)=fn(x) , in Bn , w = l, 2, —
=y 0 , in |>.
Obviously /(#) is continuous in 21.
At a point x of 21 not in &,f(x) behaves as
1 1
2 xsin -- cos-,
X X
as is seen from 1). Thus as x converges in Sn toward one of its
end points a, /3, we see that f(x) oscillates infinitely often be-
tween limits which = ± 1. Thus
similar limits exist for the points #. *
Let us now consider the differential coefficient at a point 17 of
£. We have
since /(,)=0.
Ax k k
502 UERIVATES, EXTREMES, VARIATION
If 77 -f k is a point of $, f(ij + &) = 0. If not, 77 + k lies in some
interval Bm. Let x—e be the end point of 8m nearest ?/ + k.
Then
Ax
Thus /'(?;) = 0. Hence Volterra's function /(a;) has a differen-
tial coefficient at each point of 51; moreover /'(#) is limited in 31.
Each point i) of £ is a point of discontinuity of/'(V), and
Disc/'<»>2.
X=r>
Hence /'(V) is not .B-integrable, as |> = A>0.
We have seen, in I, 549, that not every limited .72-integrable
function has a primitive. Volterra's function illustrates con-
versely the remarkable fact that Not every limited derivative is
R-integrable.
2. It is easy to show, however, that The derivative of Volterra's
function is L-integrable.
For let 51A denote the points of 51 at which /' (#) > \. Then
when X>l/m, w=l, 2, ••• 51A consists of an enumerable set of
intervals. Hence in this case 51A is measurable. Hence 51A, X>0,
is measurable. Now 51 , X>0, differs from the foregoing by add-
ing the points ,3n in each Bn at which/' (x) = 0, and the points ^p.
But each £„ is enumerable, and hence a null set, and ^ is measur-
able, as it is perfect. Thus SIA, X>0, is measurable. In the
same way we see 51A is measurable when \ is negative. Thus 51A
is measurable for any X, and hence -L-integrable.
504. 1. We turn now to general considerations and begin by
considering the upper and lower limits of the sum, difference, prod-
uct, and quotient of two functions at a point x — a.
Let us note first the following theorem :
Letf(%i ••• xm) be limited or not in 51 which has x= a as a limiting
point. Let 3>6 = Max/, (f>s = Min/ in F5*(a). Then
lim/=lim<£>{ , lim/= lim 4>fi.
j^j s=o x=a «=o
This follows at once from I, 338.
DERIVATES 503
2. Letf(xl ••• xm), g(x^ • •• #m) be limited or not in ?l which has
x — a as limiting point.
Let lim/=a , lim0 = /8
as x = a. Then, these limits being finite,
For in any Fj*(a),
M in / + Min g < Min (/ + #) < Max (/ + #) < Max / + Max g.
Letting B = 0, we get 1).
Also in JV(«),
Min / — Max g < Min (/ — #) < Max (/ — #) < Max /— Min g.
Letting 8 = 0, we get 2).
3. // /(*)>0 , <?(*)> 0,
(^
(4
-^
-<^lim-^<^ — • (6
The relations 3), 4), 5), 6) may be proved as in 2. For exam-
ple, to prove 5), we observe that in F"a*(a),
.
Max# g g Mm g
504 DERIVATES, EXTREMES, VARIATION
5. a + /3<lim_(f + ff)<a + B. (7
_A + B. (8
a -£< lim (/-£)<«-£. (9
-JB<IIm(/-#)<^-£. (10
/(*)>0 , <7<X>>0,
a/3 < lim /#<«£, (11
(12
6.
lira" (/ + £) = lira / + fim> (16
lim ^ exists,
(17
lim (/ - 0) = lim / - lim 0. (18
#) > 0, ^(2;) > 0. Let lim# e^'«^. TAew,
lim fg = lim/. lim g, (19
lim ./# = lira/- lim g. (20
g(x) > k > 0,
lim //# = lim //lim ^, (21
lim" //0 = lira" //lim $r. (22
505. The preceding results can be used to obtain relations be-
tween the derivates of the sum, difference, product, and quotient
of two functions as in I, 373 seq.
DERIVATES
505
1. Let
v(x). Theti
Aw_ Au At;
Aa: Ax Ac '
(1
Thus from 504, 1), we get the theorem :
Uu' + v'U<Uw'< Uu' + Uv'. (2
If u has a unilateral derivative Uu',
Uw' = Uu' + Uv', (3
Uw' = tfu' + Uv'. (4
We get 3), 4) from 1), using 504, 15), 16).
2. Jw £Ae interval 51, w, v are continuous, u is monotone increasing,
v w > 0, awe? t/ exists. Then, ifw = uv, we have
Uw' = uv' + vUu',
Uw' = uv' + vUu'.
(1
(2
For from
Aw _ f ,
A ^ ^V 4- ^U
~Kx~
Aa: Aa;'
we have
i i
rn: &u
—
— Aa;
which gives 1). Similarly we establish 2).
506. 1. We show now how we may generalize the Law of the
Mean, I, 393.
Let f(x) be continuous in 91 = (a<6). Let m, M be the mini-
mum and maximum of one of the four derivates off in 21. Then for
/3-a
To fix the ideas let us take Rf'(x} as our derivate. Suppose
now there exists a pair of points «</8 in H, such that
50G DERIVATES, EXTREMES, VARIATION
We introduce the auxiliary function
<K*0=/<>)-(^+<0*, (2
where U<c<e = c+8.
Then «K£) - »(«) = /(/3) -/(«) ( = g
/3 — a ft — a
Hence
Consider now the equation
It is satisfied for z = a. If it is satisfied for any other x in the
interval («/3), there is a last point, say x = 7, where it is satisfied,
by 458, 3.
Thus for x> 7, <£<X> is ><£(«).
Hence Jfy'(7)>0. (3
Now from 2) we have
Hence M is not the maximum of Rf'(x) in 21. Similarly the
other half of 1) is established. The case that m or M is infinite
is obviously true.
2. Letf(x) be defined over 21 = (a <6). Letal < «2< ••• < an /
rw 21. Let m and M denote the minimum and maximum of the dif-
ference quotients
A(ax, a2) , A(a2, a3) , ••• A(an_!, an).
For let us first take three points « < fi < 7 in 21. We have iden-
tically _a p_
a— 7 a — 7
Now the coefficients of A on the right lie between 0 and 1.
Hence 1) is true in this case. The general case is now obvious.
DKRIVATES
507
507. 1. Let f(x} be continuous in 21 = (a < b). The four deri-
tes off have the same extremes in 21.
To fix the ideas let
Min L = m , Min R = /it, in 21.
We wish to show that m = fi. To this end we first show that
For there exists an a in 21, such that
£(«) < m + e.
There exists therefore a $< a in 21, such that
-
Now by 506, l,
a-
= Min R <q.
/* < m,
Hence
as e>0 is small at pleasure.
We show now that
For there exists an a in 21, such that
R(a) < fji + e.
There exists therefore a ft > a in 21, such that
(2
0<e>'e.
a—
Thus by 506, l,
= Min L<q.
Hence as before m<p. From 1), 2) we have m =
2. In 499, we emphasized the fact that the left-hand derivates
are not defined at the left-hand end point of an interval, and the
rijjlit-hand derivates at the right-hand end point of an interval
for which we are considering the values of a function. The fol-
lowing example shows that our theorems may be at fault if this
fact is overlooked.
508 DERIVATES, EXTREMES, VARIATION
Example. Let /(#) = j x j.
If we restrict x to lie in 21 = (0, 1), the four derivates = 1 when
they are defined. Thus the theorem 1 holds in this case. If,
however, we regarded the left-hand derivates as defined at x = 0,
and to have the value
i/'(0) = - 1,
as they would have if we considered values of / to the left of 21,
the theorem 1 would no longer be true.
For then Min £ = — 1 , Min J[ = + 1,
and the four derivates do not have the same minimum in 21.
3. Let f '(af) be continuous about the point x=c. If one of its
four derivates is continuous at x = c, all the derivates defined at this
point are continuous, and all are equal.
For their extremes in any F^(<?) are the same. If now R is
continuous at x = c,
R(c} - e < R(x) < .ft (e) + e,
for any x in some F^(<?).
4. Letf(x^) be continuous about the point x = c. If one of its
four derivates is continuous at x = c, the derivative exists at this
point.
This follows at once from 3.
Remark. We must guard against supposing that the derivative
is continuous at x = c, or even exists in the vicinity of this point.
Example. Let F(x) be as in 501, Ex. 1. Let
21= (0,1) and (g= I-}
( n)
Let
Then
RH'(x) = 2 xF(x) +
LH'(x) = 2 xF(x) +
Obviously both RH' and LH' are continuous at x = 0 and
1T'(0) = 0. But H' does not exist at the points of (g, and hence
DERIVATES 509
38 not exist in any vicinity (0, B) of the origin, however small
> 0 is taken.
5. If one of the derivates of the continuous function f(x) is
itinuous in an interval 21, the derivative f'(x) exists, and is con-
TUOUS in 21.
This follows from 3.
6. If one of the four derivates of the continuous function f(x) is
: 0 in an interval 21, /(#) = const in 21.
This follows from 3.
508. 1. If one of the derivates of the continuous function f(x) is
> 0 in 21 = (a < ft), f(x) is monotone increasing in 21.
For then m = Min Rf > 0, in (a < z). Thus by 506, i,
2. If one of the derivates of the continuous function f(x) is _> 0
in 21, /(#) is monotone decreasing.
3. // one of the derivates of the continuous function f(x) is > 0
in 21, without being constantly 0 in any little interval of 21, f(jx~) is
an increasing function in 21. Similarly f is a decreasing function
in 21, if one of the derivates is <^ 0, without being constantly 0 in any
little interval of 21.
The proof is analogous to I, 403.
509. 1. Letf(x) be continuous in the interval 21, and have a deriv-
ative, finite or infinite, within 21. Then the points where the deriva-
tive is finite form a pantactic set in 21.
For let a < £ be two points of 2t. Then by the Law of the
Mean,
As the right side has a definite value, the left side must have.
Thus in any interval (a, £) in 21, there is a point 7 where the
differential coefficient is finite.
510 DERIVATES, EXTREMES, VARIATION
"2. Let f(x) be continuous in the interval 3l = (a<i). Then
Uf'(x) cannot be constantly -\- oo, or constantly — oo in 31.
For consider
o — a
which is continuous, and vanishes for x = a, x = b. We observe
that <£(#) differs from f(x~) only by a linear function. If now
Uf'(x)= + oc constantly, obviously U<$>'(x) = + oo also. Thus (f>
is a uni variant function in 31. This is not possible, since </> has
the same value at a and b.
3. Let f(x) be continuous in 31 = (a < 6), awe? Aaye a derivative,
finite or infinite, in 31 = (a*, £>). TAew
Min / O) < jgf (a) <. Max/ (a:) , in 31.
For the Law of the Mean holds, hence
? .
A
Letting now A = 0, we get the theorem.
Remark. This theorem answers the question : Can a continu-
ous curve have a vertical tangent at a point x = a, if the deriva-
tives remain < M in V*(a)1 The answer is, No.
4. Let f(jx) be continuous in 31 = (a < 5), awrf Aavg a derivative,
finite or infinite, in 31* = (a*, #). Iff'(cL) exists, finite or infinite,
there exists a sequence «j > a2 > ••• = a m 31, swcA
=/, f a<aj<a + ,. (2
A
Let now A range over Aj > A2 > ••• = 0. If we set an= «/, , the
relation 1) follows at once from 2), since /'(a) exists by
hypothesis.
510. 1. A right-hand derivate of a continuous function f(x)
cannot have a discontinuity of the 1° kind on the right. A similar
statement holds for the other derivates.
DERIVATES 511
For let R(x} be one of the right-hand derivates. It it has a
discontinuity of the 1° kind on the right at a; = a, there exists a
n umber I such that
I— e <.72(a;) <^l + e , in some (a < a + S).
Then by 506, l,
Hence R(a~) = I,
and R(x) is continuous on the right at x = a, which is contrary
to hypothesis.
2. It can, however, have a discontinuity of the 1° kind on the
left, as is shown by the following
Example. Let/(ar) = | ar |= + V? , in 51 = (-1,1).
Here R(x) = + 1 , for x> 0 in 21
= - 1 , for x < 0.
Thus at x = 0, R is continuous on the right, but has a discon-
tinuity of the 1° kind on the left.
3. Let /(#) be continuous in 21 = (a, 5), and have a derivative,
finite or infinite, in 21* =(a*, £>*). Then the discontinuities off'(x)
in 21, if any exist, must be of the second kind.
This follows from 1.
Example. . = a 1
for x* 0 in 21 = (0, 1)
3?
= 0 , for x = 0.
Then -, -.
f (#) = 2 x sin -- cos- , x=f=Q
x x
= 0 , z=0.
The discontinuity of f'(x) at x = 0, is in fact of the 2° kind.
4. Let /(a?) be continuous in 21 =(«< £), except at x = a, which
is a point of discontinuity of the 2° kind. Let f (x) exist, finite or
infinite, in (a*, 6). Then x = a is a point of infinite discontinuity
512 DERIVATES, EXTREMES, VARIATION
For if
p= TZTTm/O) , g = .Rlim/(a;),
there exists a sequence of points a1>«2>---=a, such that
f(an)=p-, and another sequence ^1>^z>---=at such that
i = q. We may suppose
««>&, , oran<£n , w = l, 2, ••.
Then the Law of the Mean gives
where 7n lies between an, /3n. Now the numerator = p — q, while
the denominator = 0. Hence Qn = + oo , or — oo , as we choose.
5. Let f (x) have a finite unilateral differential coefficient U at
each point of the interval 21. Then U is at most pointwise discon-
tinuous in 21.
For by 474, 3, Vis a function of class 1. Hence, by 486, 1, it is
at most pointwise discontinuous in 21.
511. Let f(x) be continuous in the interval (a < 5). Let R(x)
denote one of the right-hand derivates of f(x~). If R is not con-
tinuous on the right at a, then
AI\ n f>y0
1= R lim R(x) , m = R lira R(x) , x = a.
To fix the ideas let R be the upper right-hand derivate. Let us
suppose that « = Rf'(a) were >m. Let us choose 77, and c such
that
m + 77 < c < a. (2
We introduce the auxiliary function
</>(»= cx-f(x).
)=c-Rf '(*•). (3
Now if B > 0 is sufficiently small,
Rf'(x)<m + r) , for any x in 21* = (a*, a + 5).
DERIVATES f,]:',
Thus 2), 3), show that
_K<£'(aO><r , <r>0.
Hence ^>(x) is an increasing function in 21*. But, on the other
JB/''(a)=:B/'(a),
simr a > m. Hence
(a) = c- #/'(» = c - «< 0.
Hence <j> is a decreasing function at x — a. This is impossible
since <f> is continuous at a. Thus «< m.
Similarly we may show that I <_ «.
512. 1. Let /(z) be continuous in 21 = (a < ft), and have a
derivative, finite or infinite. //?«=/'(a), /S =/'(6), then f (x)
takes on all values between a, y8, a« a; ranges over 21.
For let a < 7 < & and let
<?*. a = /(* + -/(20 A>O.
We can take A so small that
<)(a, A) < 7 , and #(&, - A) > 7-
Hence
If now we fix A, () (#, A) is a continuous function of a;. As ^
is < 7, for x = «, and > 7, for x = b — A, it takes on the value 7
for some a;, say for x = %, between a, b — h. Thus
But by the Law of the Mean,
Q(f, A) =/'(,),
a<f<,<f + A<5.
Thus/' (x) = 7, at x = 77 in 21.
2. Let f(x} be continuous in the interval 21, and admit a deriva-
tive, finite or infinite. If f'(x) = 0 in 21, except possibly at an
enumerable set (§, then f = 0 also in Qj.
514 DERIVATES, EXTREMES, VARIATION
For if /'(a) = 0, and /'(£) = b * 0, then /'(*) ranges over all
values in (0, 6), as x passes from « to y8. But this set of values
has the cardinal number c. Hence there is a set of values in
(a, /3) whose cardinal number is c, where /'(a:) ^= 0. This is
contrary to the hypothesis.
3. Let f(jx), #0*0 be continuous and have derivatives, finite or
infinite, in the interval 21. If in 21 there is an a for which
and a (3 for which
then there is a 7 for which
provided «(*> =/(*)-**)
has a derivative, finite or infinite.
For by hypothesis
#(«)> 0 , a'08)<0.
Hence by 1 there is a point where 8' = 0.
513. 1. If one of the four derivates of the continuous function
/(#) is limited in the interval 21, all four are, and they have the
same upper and lower R-integrals.
The first part of the theorem is obvious from 507, 1. Let us
effect a division of 21 of norm d. Then
XU = lim ^M.d, , MI = Max RL in d,.
d=0
But the maximum of the three other derivates in dt is also Mt by
507, l. Hence the last part of the theorem.
2. Let /(#) be continuous and have a limited unilateral derivate
asfiin%= (a<6). Then
f*Sd»<f(t) -/(a) < §bRdx. (1
For let a < aj < a2 < ••• < b determine a division of 21, of norm d.
DERIVATES 515
ien by 506, 1,
Min R<f^^—l^ < Max R,
«m+i - am
in the interval (am, am+1) = dm.
Hence
2^ Min 12 </(&) -/(a) < 2^ Max R.
Letting d = 0, we get 1).
3. If f(x~) is continuous, and Uf is limited and R-integrable in
51 = (a < 6), then
514. 1. Letf(x) be limited in 2l = (a< J), and
F(x)= (fdx , a<x<b.
%/a
/or aw^/ u within 31.
To fix the ideas let us take a right-hand derivate &tx=u. Then
h Min/< fUfdx< h Max/ , in (M*, u + h), h > 0.
• ' U
Thus
A/r. /. . . ,f ,.
Mm/<--<Max/.
Aa;
Letting h = 0, we get
R lim/< RF'(u) < R lira/,
^=i~ ^tt
which is 1) for this case.
2. ie£ /(z) 6e ^mi«edf in the interval 51 = (a < 6). 7//O + 0)
72 derivative I fdx = /(a: -f- 0) ;
Ja
and iff(x — 0) exists, a<x<b
L derivative { fdx =f(x — 0).
*/a
516 DERIVATES, EXTREMES, VARIATION
3. Let /(#) be limited and R-integrable in 2l=(a<£>). The
points where
.FO) = ffdx , a<x<b
•Ja
does not have a differential coefficient in 2l/0rm a null set.
F(x) =/O) by I, 537, 1,
when / is continuous at x. But by 462, 6, the points where / is
not continuous form a null set.
515. In I, 400, we proved the theorem :
Let /(a;) be continuous in 51 = (a < J), and let its derivative
= 0 within 21. Then /is a constant in 21. This theorem we have
extended in 507, 6, to a derivate of /(X). I* can be extended still
farther as follows :
1. (L. Scheefer). If /(#) is continuous in 21 = (a< i), and if
one of its derivates = 0 in 21 except possibly at the points of an
enumerable set (§, then f = constant in 21.
If/ is a constant, the theorem is of course true. We show that
the contrary case leads to an absurdity, by showing that Card (v
would = c, the cardinal number of an interval.
For if / is not a constant, there is a point c in 21 where
j9=/(c) —/(a) is =£ 0. To fix the ideas let jo>0; also let us
suppose the given derivate is R = Rf'(x).
Let g(xit-)=f(x)-f(a)-t(x-a) , 00.
Obviously | g \ is the distance / is above or below the secant line,
Thus in particular for any £,
#(a, t)=0 , #(<?, t) = p — <O-a).
Let q > 0 be an arbitrary but fixed number < p. Then
g(c, t} - q =p - q — t(c - a)
-<>-«> 1-
if t < T, where
T=
c — a
DERIVATES 517
Hence
g(c, 0 > q
for any t in the interval X = (T, T), 0 < T < T. We note that
Card £ = c.
Since for any t in X, g(a, £) = 0, and g(c, t) > q, let x = et be
tin- maximum of the points < c where g(x, £)= (?. Then e < <r,
and for any A such that e + h lies in (e, c),
Hence njn/- \ >
Rf (e) > 0.
Thus for any t in £, et lies in (g. As £ ranges over £, let e<
range over (gj < (5. To each point e of (gx corresponds but one
point t of £. For
Hence ,,
£ = r , as e > a.
Card £ = Card (gx < Card (g,
which is absurd.
2. Let f (x) be continuous in Sl = (a<5). -Lei (£ denote the
points of 21 where one of the derivates has one sign. If S exists,
Card & = c, the cardinal number of the continuum.
The proof is entirely similar to that in 1. For let c be a point
of (£. Then there exists a d > c such that
We now introduce the function
and reason on this as we did on the corresponding g in 1, using
here the interval (c, d) instead of (a, &). We get
Card @j = Card £ = c.
3. Letf(x^), g(x) be continuous in the interval 21. Let a pair of
corresponding derivates as Rf, Rg' be finite and equal, except pos-
sibly at an enumerable set (g. Then f = g + C, in SI, where C is a
constant.
518 DKR1VATES, EXTREMES, VARIATION
For let <t>=f_g ^ ^ = (/_f
Then in ^ = « - (g,
But if R(f>' < 0 at'one point in 31, it is < 0 at a set of points 33
whose cardinal number is c. But 93 lies in G?. Hence R$ is
never < 0, in 51. The same holds for i/r. Hence, by 508, </> and
A/T are both monotone increasing. This is impossible unless
^ = a constant.
516. The preceding theorem states that the continuous function
f(x) in the interval 51 is known in 31, aside from a constant, when
f (x) is finite and known in 31, aside from an enumerable set.
Thus /(#) is known in 31 when /' is finite and known at each
irrational point of 31.
This is not the case when/' is finite and known at each rational
point only in 31.
For the rational points in 31 being enumerable, let them be
»*!' rV rS'~ 0-
Let I=ll + l2+ls+...
be a positive term series whose sum I is < 31. Let us place r^
within an interval Sl of length < ^ . Let rt be the first number
in 1) not in Sr Let us place it within a non-overlapping interval
S2 of length < Z2, etc.
We now define a f unction f(x) in 31 such that the value of /at
any x is the length of all the intervals and part of an interval
lying to the left of x. Obviously /(#) is a continuous function of
x in 31. At each rational point /'(V) = 1. But f(x) is not de-
termined aside from a constant. For 2Sn < I. Therefore when
I is small enough we may vary the position and lengths of the
S-intervals, so that the resulting /'s do not differ from each other
only by a constant.
517. 1. Let /(#) be continuous in 31 = (a < J) and have a finite
derivate, say Rf\ at each point of 31. Let (S denote the points of H
where R has one sign, say > 0. If S exists, it cannot be a null set.
DERIVATES 519
For let c be a point of &, then there exists a point d > c such
it
Let (£„ denote the points of (£ where
n-l<Rf'<n. (2
Then £ = Qtj + &j + ... Let 0 < 9 < j». We take the positive
istants a, , <?„ « • • such that
* i ' -
If now (S is a null set, each @m is also. Hence the points of (£m
can be inclosed within a set of intervals 8mn such that 2Smn < qm.
n
Let now qm (x) be the sum of the intervals and parts of intervals
$m, m w = 1, 2 ••• which lie in the interval (a < x). Let
QW =
Obviously Q(x) is a monotone increasing function, and
0 <Q(x)<q. (3
Consider now
We have at a point of St — (£,
__<
- A A — A ' "^
Ax Ax Ax
Hence at such a point
RP'
But at a point x of (£, jRP' < 0 also. For x must lie in some
Gm, and hence within some 8mn. Thus <?m(X) increases by at least
Ax when x is increased to x + Ax. Hence 7w^m(x), and thus
Q(x) is increased at least rwAx. Thus
Ag
Ax
Thus
>
RP' < Rf - m < 0, by 2),
520 DERIVATES, EXTREMES, VARIATION
since x lies in dm. Thus RP' < 0 at any point of 31. Thus P is
a monotone decreasing function in 21, by 508, 2. Hence
P(c)-P(&) >0.
Hence
> 0,
or using 1), 3)
j> - 3 < 0,
which is not so, as p is > j.
2. (Lebesgue.^) Let f(x), g(x) be continuous in the interval 21,
and have a pair of corresponding derivates as Rf, Rg' which are
finite at each point of 21, and also equal, the equality holding except
possibly at a null set. Thenf(oi) — g(jx) = constant in 21.
The proof is entirely similar to that of 515, 3, the enumerable
set 6 being here replaced by a null set. We then make use of 1.
518. Letf'(x) be continuous in some interval A = (u — B, u + 3).
Letf"(x) exist, finite or infinite, in A, but be finite at the point x = u.
where
/(« + *) +/(» - *) - 2/0)
ft
Let us first suppose that/"(w) = 0. We have for 0 < h < 77 < 8,
Qf=l f
h \
h — h J
= 7 !/'<>') -/'<>'')! » w<x'<w + A , u-h<x"<u
h
where |e'|, | e"| are < e/2 for rj sufficiently small.
Now x' — u ^ 1 j x" — u | ^ 1
~^~ ~fe~
while /"(w) = 0 , by hypothesis.
Hence \Qf\<* i for 0 < A <.T;,
and 1) holds in this case.
MAXIMA AND MINIMA 521
Suppose now thatf"(u} = a =£ 0. Let
#O) =/O) - ?O) » where q(x) = % ax* + bx + c.
Since q" (u) = a , g" (w) = 0.
Thus we are in the preceding case, and liin Qg = 0.
But Qg=Qf-Qq.
Hence lim Qf= a.
Maxima and Minima
519. 1. In I, 466 and 476, we have defined the terms f(x) as
a maximum or a minimum at a point. Let us extend these terms
as follows. Let/(x1 ••• #m) be defined over 91, and let x = a be an
inner point of 21.
We say f has a maximum at x = a if I0,/ (a) — /(#) > 0, for any
x in some V(a~), and 2°, /(a) —f(x) >0 for some x in any F"(a).
If the sign > can be replaced by > in 1°, we will say / has a
proper maximum at a, when we wish to emphasize this fact ; and
when > cannot be replaced by >, we will say / has an improper
maximum. A similar extension of the old definition holds for
the minimum. A common term for maximum and minimum is
extreme.
2. If /(a;) is a constant in some segment 53, lying in the inter-
val 91, $5 is called a segment of invariability, or a constant segment
of /in 91.
Example. Let/(a;) be continuous in 21 = (0, 1*).
Let
be the expression of a point of 91 in the normal form in the dyadic
system. Let fc
=
be expressed in the triadic system, where «„ = «„, when an = 0,
and =2 when «„ = !. The points (£ = {£! form a Cantor set,
I, 272. Let |3n| be the adjoint set of intervals. We associate
522 DERIVATES, EXTREMES, VARIATION
now the point 1) with the point 2), which we indicate as usual by
x~%. We define now a function g(x) as follows :
This defines g for all the points of @. In the interval $„, let g
have a constant value. Obviously g is continuous, and has a
pantactic set of intervals in each of which g is constant.
3. We have given criteria for maxima and minima in I, 4(J8
seq., to which we may add the following :
Let f(x~) be continuous in (a— 8, a +• S). If Rf' (a) > 0 and
Z/'(a)< 0, finite or infinite, f(x} has a minimum at x = a.
J/ .#/'(«) <0 and Lf'(a~)>0, finite or infinite, /(z) has a maxi-
mum at x = a.
For on the 1° hypothesis, let us take « such that R — a > 0.
Then there exists a B' > 0 such that
A
HenCe
A in (a*, a + 8')-
Similarly if /3 is chosen so that L + yS< 0, there exists a 8" > 0,
such that ,., _ j\_f/ \
— — ^ < // + p.
— A
Hence /(a - A) >/(a) , a + A in (a - S", a*).
520. Example 1, Let /(V) oscillate between the #-axis and the
two lines # = # and y = —x, similar to
. TT
a; sin-
ce
In any interval about the origin, y oscillates infinitely often, hav-
ing an infinite number of proper maxima and minima. At the
point x = Q,f has an improper minimum.
Example 2. Let us take two parabolas Pj, P2 defined by y = x2,
y = 2x2. Through the points #=±|, ± ^ ••• let us erect ordi-
nates, and join the points of intersection with Pj, P2, alternately
by straight lines, getting a broken line oscillating between the
MAXIMA AND MINIMA 523
punibolas P1, P2. The resulting graph defines a continuous func-
tion /(a?) which has proper extremes at the points (5= I ±- [•
However, unlike Ex. 1, the limit point x = 0 of these extremes is
also a point at which f(x) has a proper extreme.
Example 3. Let \B\ be a set of intervals which determine a
1 larnack set & lying in $1 = (0, 1). Over each interval 8 = («, $)
belonging to the nih stage, let us erect a curve, like a segment of
a sine curve, of height hn = 0, as n = oo, and having horizontal
tangents at a, /3, and at 7, the middle point of the interval 8. At
the points f £f of 21 not in any interval S, let /(#) = 0. The func-
tion/ is now defined in 51 and is obviously continuous. At the
points 1 7 1,/ has a proper maximum; at points of the type a, &
£,/has an improper minimum. These latter points form the set
^ whose cardinal number is c. The function is increasing in each
interval («, 7), and decreasing in each (7, )3). It oscillates in-
finitely often in the vicinity of any point of ^>.
We note that while the points where f has a proper extreme
form an enumerable set, the points of improper extreme may form
a set whose cardinal number is c.
Example 4- We use the same set of intervals \8\ but change
the curve over 8, so that it has a constant segment 17 = (\, jt) in its
middle portion. As before /=0, at the points £ not in the
intervals 8.
The function / (#) has now no proper extremes. At the points
of |>, / has an improper minimum ; at the points of the type \, /A, it
has an improper maximum.
Example 5. Weierstrass1 Function. Let (5 denote the points in
an interval 21 of the type
x = £• , r, a, positive integers.
o*
For such an x we have, using the notation of 502,
Hence f m = 0 , formes.
Thus =-l+1=-lr
524 DERIVATES, EXTREMES, VARIATION
Hence sgn - - = sgn Q = sgn emijn = sgn ( - lyh.
Ax
Thus ') = +l , sgn £/'(*) = -1,
if r is even, and reversed if r is odd. Thus at the points (£, the
curve has a vertical cusp. By 519, 3, F has a maximum at the
points (£, when r is odd, and a minimum when r is even. The
points (£ are pantactic in 21.
Weierstrass' function has no constant segment 8, for then
f'(x) = 0 in 8. But F' does not exist at any point.
521. 1. Let f (2^ ••• xm} be continuous in the limited or unlimited
set 21. Let (S denote the points of 21 where f has a proper extreme.
Then (5 is enumerable.
Let us first suppose that 21 is limited. Let 8 > 0 be a fixed
positive number. There can be but a finite number of points a in
21 such that
/(«) >/O) , in FPOO- (1
For if there were an infinity of such points, let /8 be a limiting
point and ij < % S. Then in F^(/3) there exist points «', a" such
that F^(a'), Fa(a") overlap. Thus in one case
and in the other
which contradicts the first.
Let now £j > &2 > • • • =0. There are but a finite number of
points a for which 1) holds for 8 = 8X, only a finite number for
S = S?, etc. Hence (S is enumerable. The case that 21 is unlim-
ited follows now easily.
2. We have seen that Weierstrass' function has a pantactic set
of proper extremes. However, according to 1, they must be
enumerable. In Ex. 3, the function has a minimum at each point
of the non-enumerable set ^>; but these minima are improper. On
the other hand, the function has a proper maximum at the points
1 7}, but these form an enumerable set.
MAXIMA AND MINIMA ;Vjr>
522. 1. Let f(x) be continuous in the interval 21. Letf have a
roper maximum at x = a, and x = ft in 21. Then there is a point 7
etween a, ft where f has a minimum, which need not however be a
proper minimum.
For say a < ft. In the vicinity of a, /(a:) is </(«) ; also in
the vicinity of ft, f(x) is </(£). Thus there are points 93 in
(a, ft) where /is < either /(a) or/(/3). Let ^ be the minimum
of the values of f(x), as x ranges over 93. There is a least value
of x in (a, ft) for which /(#) = p. We may take this as the
point in question. Obviously 7 is neither a nor ft.
2. That at the point 7, / does not need to have a proper mini-
mum is illustrated by Exs. 1, or 3.
3. In 21 = (a, b~) let f'(x) exist, finite or infinite. The points
within 21 at which f has an extreme proper or improper, lie among
the zeros off'(x~).
This follows from the proof used in 1, 468, 2, if we replace there
< 0, by < 0, and > 0, by > 0.
4. Let f'(x) be continuous in the interval 21, and let f(oi) have
no constant segments in 2(. The points G? of 21 where f has an ex-
treme, form an apantactic set in 21. Let 3 denote the zeros of f (x)
in 21. If 93 = { bn \ is the border set of intervals lying in 21 corre-
sponding to 3i /0*0 zs univariant in each bn .
For by 3, the points (§ lie in 3- As /'(#) is continuous, 3 is
complete and determines the border set 53- Within each bB,
f'(x) has one sign. Hence /(a;) is univariant in bn.
5. Letf(x~) be a continuous function having no constant segment
in the interval 21. If the points (i where f has an extreme form a
pantactic set in 21, then the points 33 where f'(x~) does not exist or is
discontinuous, form also a pantactic set in 21.
For if 93 is not pantactic in 21, there is an interval (£ in 21
containing no point of 93. Thus f'(x) is continuous in (£. But
the points of (S in (S form an apantactic set in (£ by 4. This,
however, contradicts our hypothesis.
Example. Weierstrass' function satisfies the condition of the
theorem 5. Hence the points where F' (x) does not exist or is
526 DERIVATES, EXTREMES, VARIATION
discontinuous form a pantactic set. This is indeed true, since
F' exists at no point.
6. Let /(#) be continuous and have no constant segment in the
interval SI. Let /'(#) exist, finite or infinite. The points where
/'(#) is finite and is =£.0 form a pantactic set in SI.
For let a < ft be any two points in SI. If /(«) =/($), there is
a point a < 7 < ft such that /(«) =£/(7), since / has no constant
segment in SI. Then the Law of the Mean gives
a— 7
Thus in the arbitrary interval (a, ft) there is a point |, where
f (x) exists and is =£ 0.
7. Let f(x) be continuous in the interval SI. Then any interval
33 in SI which is not a constant segment contains a segment (£ in which
f is univariant.
For since / is not constant in 33, there are two points a, b in 33
at which / has different values. Then by the Law of the Mean
Hence /'(<?) =f= 0. As f'(x) is continuous, it keeps its sign in
some interval (c — S, c + 8), and/ is therefore univariant.
523. Letf(x) be continuous in the interval 31, and have in any in-
terval in SI a constant segment or a point at which f has an extreme.
If f'(x) exists, finite or infinite, it is discontinuous infinitely often in
any interval in SI, not a constant segment. At a point of continuity
of the derivative, f (x) = 0.
For if f'(x) were continuous in an interval 33, not a constant
segment, / would be univariant in some interval (£<.33, by 522. 7.
But this contradicts the hypothesis, which requires that any inter-
val as (£ has a constant segment. Hence f'(x) is discontinuous
in any interval, however small.
Let now x = c be a point of continuity. Then if c lies in a con-
stant segment, /'(c) = 0 obviously. If not, there is a sequence of
points «!, e2 ••• = e such that f(x) has an extreme at en. But then
/'Ov)=0, by 522,3. As/' (of) is continuous at x = e, /'(<?)= 0
also.
MAXIMA AND MINIMA 527
524. (Kb'nig.} Letf(x) be continuous in 91 and have a pantactic
set of cuspidal points (S. Then for any interval 33 of 31, there exists
a yS such that f(z) = j3 at an infinite set of points in 33. Moreover,
t/h re is a pantactic set of points \%\ in 33, such that k being taken at
VUa,ure, /-(,)<* <J»(«). (1
For among the points S there is an infinite pantactic set c of
proper maxima, or of proper minima. To fix the ideas, suppose
the former. Let x = c be one of these points within 33. Then
there exists an interval b <.33, containing c, such that
x n •
Let (i = Min/(aT), in b-
Then there is a point x where / takes on this minimum value.
The point c divides the interval b into two intervals. Let I be
that one of these intervals which contains 5, the other interval we
denote by m- Within m let us take a point c1 of c. Then in (
there is a point c[ such that
The point cl determines an interval bj , just as c determined b.
Obviously bx<^m, and bx falls into two segments (x , ml as before
b did. Within m1 we take a point of c. Then in ( there is a
point <?2» and in (j a point c% , such that
In this way we may continue indefinitely. Let
be the points obtained in this way which fall in I. Let c' be a
limit point of this set. Let
c" c"
C2 ' 3
be the points obtained above which fall in Ij, and let c" be a limit
point of this set. Continuing in this way we get a sequence of
limiting points c> cn ^ c/n ... (2
lying respectively in (, Ix, (2 •••
f>l>S
DERIVATES, EXTREMES, VARIATION
Since /is continuous,
/(<")=/(''")=- (3
Thus if we set /(<?') = /3 we see that /(#) takes on the value /8 at
the infinite set of points 2), which lie in $3.
Let 7j, 72 ••• be a set of points in 2) which = 7.
-/(7s) = = p.
7 - 72
7 - 7i
Thus if /'(#) exists at x = % the equations 3) show that
= 0. If/' does not exist at 7, they show that
(4
Let now k be taken at pleasure. Then
is constituted as/, and
This gives 1).
'OO =/(*)-*•
525. 1. Lineo- Oscillating Functions. The oscillations of a con-
tinuous function fall into two widely different classes, accord-
ing as f(x) becomes monotone on adding a linear function
l(x) = ax + b, or does not.
The former are called lineo-oscillating functions. A continu-
ous function which does not oscillate in §1, or if it does is lineo-
oscillating, we say is at most a lineo-oscillating function.
Example 1. Let /.,- N .
f(x) = si
If we set
. 7, N
sin x , l(x) = x.
and plot the graph, we see at once that y is an increasing function.
At the point x = TT, the slope of the tangent to /(#) = sin x is
greatest negatively, i.e. sin a; is decreasing here fastest. But the
angle that the tangent to sin x makes at this point is — 45°, while
the slope of the line l(x) is constantly 45°. Thus at x = TT, y has
a point of inflection with horizontal tangent.
If we take Z(V) = ax, a > 1, y is an increasing function, increas-
ing still faster than before.
MAXIMA AND MINIMA 529
All this can be verified by analysis. For setting
y = sin x -f- ax , a > 1,
y' = a + cos a;,
Thus y is a lineo-oscillating function in any interval.
Example 2. /(#) = z2 sin - , x^Q
x
= 0 , x=0.
l(x) =ax + b , y =/(#) -f l(x).
Then ^ ^
y' = 2 x sin cos - + a , x =£ 0
a; #
= a , a; = 0.
Hence, if a > 1 + 2 TT, # is an increasing function in 31 = ( — TT, TT).
The function /oscillates infinitely often in 31, but is a lineo-oscil-
lating function.
Example 3. f(x) = x sin - , x =£ 0
x
_ 0 y — 0
— \7 * .* — • \J •
I C (f i — — fty I A 7/ — T j '/* i I / ( o* |
Here 111
v' = sin cos - + a , a: =£ 0.
or or oc
For x = 0, ^' does not exist, finitely or infinitely.
Obviously, however great a is taken, y has an infinity of oscilla-
tions in any interval about x— 0. Hence /is not a lineo-oscillat-
ing function in such an interval.
2. If one of the four derivates of the continuous function f(x) is
limited in the interval 31, /(#) is at most lineo-oscillating in 31.
For say Rf > - « in 31. LetO<«<&
530 DERIVATES, EXTREMES, VARIATION
Then
r)>0.
Hence g is monotone increasing by 508, l.
3. Letf(oi) be at most lineo-oscillating in the interval 81. If Uf
does not exist finitely at a point x in 31, it is definitely infinite at f/u-
point. Moreover, the sign of the QO is the same throughout 81.
For if / is monotone in 31, the theorem is obviously true. If
be monotone. Then
Uf'=Ug'-a,
and this case is reduced to the preceding.
Remark. This shows that no continuous function whose graph
has a vertical cusp can be lineo-oscillating. All its vertical tan-
gents correspond to points of inflection, as in
y = x*.
Variation
526. 1. Letf(oi) be continuous in the interval 31, and have limited
variation. Let D be a division of 31 of norm d. Then using the no-
tation of 443,
For there exists a division A such that
where for brevity we have dropped / after the symbol V. Let
now A divide 31 into v segments whose minimum length call X.
Let D be a division of 31 of norm d<d0<\. Then not more
than one point of A, say «K, can lie in any interval as (at, al+1) of
D. Let E = D + A, the division obtained by superposing A on I>.
Then /* denoting some integer < y,
(C=l
VARIATION 631
If now <f0 is taken sufficiently small, Osc/ in any interval of D
is as small as we choose, say < — . Then
Qv
But since E is got by superposing A on D,
V±<VE<V.
Hence for any D of norm < d^
which proves the first relation in 1. The other two follow at
once now from 443.
527. If /(a;) is continuous and has limited variation in the in-
terval 21 = (a < £), then
are also continuous functions of x in 81.
Let us show that V(x) is continuous ; the rest of the theorem
follows at once by 443.
By 526, there exists a c?0, such that for any division D of norm
F(T)=F,><T) + e' , 0<e'<e/3.
Then a fortiori, for any x < b in 51,
F<» = VD(x) + €l , O^e^e/3. (1
In the division D, we may take x as one of the end points of an
interval, and x + h as the other end point. Then
r(z + A) = F^(20 + |/(z + A)-/<>)|+€2 , 0<ej<e/3. (2
On the other hand, if d0 is taken sufficiently small,
3
From 1), 2), 3) we have
\x + A) — V(x) < e , for any 0 < h < 8. (4
532 DERIVATES, EXTREMES, VARIATION
But in the division D, x is the right-hand end point of some in-
terval as (x — &, z) . The same reasoning shows that
\V(x-K)-V(x)\<e , foranyO<&<$. (5
From 4), 5) we see V(x) is continuous.
528. 1. If one of the derivates of the continuous function f (a?) is
numerically < M in the interval 21, the variation V off is <
For by definition
with respect to all divisions D= \d,\ of St. Here
Now by 506, l,
Hence VD < M^d, < MU.
2. Letf(x) be limited and R-integrable in §1 = (a< 6). Then
F(x) = fdx , a < x < b
*Sa
has limited variation in 91.
For let D be a division of 21 into the intervals dt = (at, al+1).
Then
/»an-i /*a'+i
< 2 I \f\dx< MZ dx =
•/at */at
Thus Max VD • F <
and F has limited variation.
529. 1. If f (x~) has limited variation in the interval 51, the
points $ where Osc/> k, are finite in number.
For suppose they were not. Then however large Gr is taken,
we may take n so large that nk > G-. There exists a division D
VARIATION 533
of 51, such that there are at least n intervals, each containing a
point of $ within it. Thus for the division D,
Thus the variation of / is large at pleasure, and therefore is not
limited.
2. If f has limited variation in the interval 21, its points of dis-
continuity form an enumerable set.
This follows at once from 1.
530. 1. Let J)j, jD2 ••• be a sequence of superposed divisions, of
norms dn = 0, of the interval 31. Let flDn be the sum of the oscilla-
tions of f in the intervals of Dn. If Max £lDn is finite, /(#) has
limited variation in 31.
For suppose / does not have limited variation in 21. Then
there exists a sequence of divisions E±, E% ••• such that if fl£n is
the sum of the oscillations of /in the intervals of JS7n, then
to£l<n£t< "• = +00. (1
Let us take v so large that no interval of Dv contains more than
one interval of En or at most parts of two En intervals. Let
Fn = En + Dv . Then an interval 8 of Dv is split up into at most
two intervals 8', 8" in Fn. Let o>, a/, a>" denote the oscillation of
/in S, £', 8". Then the term m in Dv goes over into
&)' -|- «<j" < 2 to
in flfn. Hence if Max flDn =• M,
p,.<2n^<2jc
which contradicts 1).
2. Let V0n = S |/(at) — /(«t+1) | > the summation extended
over the intervals (at, at+1) of the division Dn. If Max VDn is
n
Unite with respect to a sequence of superposed divisions {-£>„{, we
cannot say that/ has limited variation.
Example. For let/(a;) = 0, at the rational points in the inter-
val 31 = (0, 1), and =s 1, at the irrational points. Let Dn be
534 DERIVATES, EXTREMES, VARIATION
obtained by interpolating the points -- ^— in 21. Then / = 0
St
at the end points a,, al+1 of the intervals of Dn. Hence VDn = 0.
On the other hand, f(x) has not limited variation in 21 as is
obvious.
531. Let F (x) = lira /(#,<), r finite or infinite, for x in the
t~T
interval 21. Let Var/(#, t) <^M for each t near r.
Then F(x) has limited variation in 21.
To fix the ideas let T be finite. Let
Then for a division D of 21,
VDF< VDf + VDg.
But
= 2 \g(an) - ff(am+1) |,
where (am, am+1) are the intervals of D.
But for some t = t' near T, each
where « is the number of intervals in the division D.
Thus
Hence VDF<M+r],
and F has limited variation.
532. Let /(#), #0*0 ^«we limited variation in the interval 21, then
their sum, difference, and product have limited variation.
If also l#|>7><> , in 21
thenf/g has limited variation.
Let us show, for example, that h=fg has limited variation.
Forlet Min/=w , Min# = w
in the interval <Zt.
Osc/= <u , Osc g = T
VARIATION 535
Then -
/ = m + «o> , g = n + &T , m rft,
0<«<1. , 0</9<1.
fg = mn + mfir + naa + «/3a>T.
Now
mn— | w | T — | w | a> — <WT <C /</ < mn + \ m \ r + \ n \ <o -|- an.
i) = Osc A<C 2 JT | m | + a> | w | + a>rj.
But lit v
\ m \ , I n I , T <_ some K.
< some #,
and A has limited variation.
533. 1. Let us see what change will be introduced if we
replace the finite divisions D employed up to the present by
divisions E, which divide the interval 21 = (a < 6) into an infinite
enumerable set of intervals (at, at+1).
for the class of finite or infinite enumerable divisions
Obviously _
hence if IF is finite, so is V.
We show that if V is finite, so is IF. For suppose IF were
infinite. Then for any Gf- > 0, there exists a division E, and an
n, such that the sum of the first n terms in 1) is > (?, or
jF£,n>#. (2
Let now D be the finite division determined by the points al ,
a2 *" a»+i which figure in 2).
Then V > ft
hence V = ao, which is contrary to our hypothesis.
536
DERIVATES, EXTREMES, VARIATION
We show now that V and W are equal, when finite. For let
E be so chosen that
W--<WE<W.
Now
Then
if n is sufficiently large.
Let D correspond to the points «j «2 ••• in
and hence y i r > TP- • i _ -nr
Hence W-VD<t.
We may therefore state the theorem :
2. Iff has limited variation in the interval 21 with respect to the
class of finite divisions D, it has with respect to the class of enumer-
able divisions E, and conversely. Moreover
Max VD = Max VE.
534. Let us show that Weierstrass' function F, considered in
502, does not have limited variation in any interval 21 = (a < /3)
when ab > 1. Since F is periodic, we may suppose a > 0. Let
Jm' Jm Jm
be the fractions of denominator bm which lie in 21.
These points effect a division Dm of 21, and
M-i
+1
If I is the minimum of the terms Fj under the S sign,
Now
Hence
k-l
<
- 2.
(i
(2
NON-INTUITIONAL CURVES 537
On the other hand, using the notation and results of 502,
bmx=im + £m , h= m^ -;
and also F(x + A) - F(x) ^ _.,./2 TT \
(3
h
Let us now take
£m=0,
Then
, A=-i.
6- b
Hence from 3), ^ *>„„(% IT
Jj y -x"^ (Jf/ I — — •• -- •
\O fltO ~™~ .L
Thus T7- ^
-a-2) , byl),2).
As a < 1, and ab > 1, we see that
Vj)m == -f oo, as m = oo .
Non-intuitional Curves
535. 1. Let /(#) be continuous in the interval SI. The graph
of / is a continuous curve 0. If / has only a finite number of os-
cillations in 31, and has a tangent at each point, we would call G an
ordinary or intuitional curve. It might even have a finite num-
ber of angle points, i.e. points where the right-hand tangent is
different from the left-hand one [cf. I, 366]. But if there were
an infinity of such points, or an infinity of points in the vicinity
of each of which / oscillates infinitely often, the curve grows less
and less clear to the intuition as these singularities increase in
number and complexity. Just where the dividing point lies be-
tween curves whose peculiarities can be clearly seen by the intui-
tion, and those which cannot, is hard to say. Probably different
persons would set this point at different places.
For example, one might ask: Is it possible for a continuous
curve to have tangents at a pantactic set of points, and no tangent
at another pantactic set? If one were asked to picture such a
curve to the imagination, it would probably prove an impossibility.
538
DERIVATES, EXTREMES, VARIATION
Yet such curves exist, as Ex. 3 in 501 shows. Such curves might
properly be called non-intuitional.
Again we might ask of our intuition : Is it possible for a con-
tinuous curve to have a tangent at every point of an interval 21,
which moreover turns abruptly at a pantactic set of points ? Again
the answer would not be forthcoming. Such curves exist, how-
ever, as was shown in Ex. 2 in 501.
We wish now to give other examples of non-intuitional curves.
Since their singularity depends on their derivatives or the nature
of their oscillations, they may be considered in this chapter.
Let us first show how to define curves, which, like Weierstrass'
curve, have a pantactic set of cusps. To effect this we will extend
the theorem of 500, 2, so as to allow g(x) to have a cusp at x= 0.
536. Let G? = \en\ denote the rational points in the interval
Sl=(— a, a). Let g(x) be continuous in 53 =(—2 a, 2 a), and
= 0, at x = 0. Let 53* denote the interval 53 after removing the
point x = 0. Let g have a derivative in 53*, such that
a
Then
A.F
.
is a continuous function in 21, and - - behaves at x = em essentially
A&
as -^ does at the origin.*
Az
To simplify matters, let us suppose that (S does not contain the
origin. Having established this case, it is easy to dispose of the
general case. We begin by ordering the en as in 233. Then
obviously if
en=*- , q > 0 , p positive or negative,
we have n > ?
Let
>->— .
qs
mn
(2
* Cf. Dini, Theorie der Functionen, etc., p. 192 seq. Leipzig, 1892.
NON-INTUITIONAL CURVES 539
Let E(x) be the F series after deleting the wth term. Then
We show that E has a differential coefficient at x = «m, obtained
li\ differentiating E termwise. To this end we show that as h = 0,
(3
IV
-2<^'(*») , ">*«• (4
That is, we show
€>0 , 7/>0 , |D(A)-#|<e , 0<|A|<7/. (5
Let us break up the sums 3), 4) which figure in 5), into three
parts oo r » oo
2 = 2 + 2 + 2. (6
1 1 r+l *+l
|D_^|<|DP-^r| + |A..-fltr,.|+ A- S.| (7
<A'+B+O.
Since g'(emn) exists, the first term, may be made as small as we
choose for an arbitrary but fixed r ; thus
•Let us now turn to B. We have
B < Dn
provided ^'C^) exists in the interval (<?TOn, «mn +
But by 2),
if
Thus by 1),
< 2" Mm«na < M^n* , J*^ a constant.
540 DER1VATES, EXTREMES, VARIATION
Hence a fortiori,
Now the sum
} gl (
<
converges if p. > 0. Hence Hp> q and Hp may be made as small as
we choose, by taking p sufficiently large. Let us note that by 91,
ffp<--. (10
PP"
Thus if fi = Min (a, £),
for a sufficiently large r.
We consider finally O. We have
a
< ^-f (72+ (7,.
From 9) we see that
0,
o
for * sufficiently large. Since g(x) is continuous in
Hence
1 .
C and f < - - 7
2 ~
<
AT
if s >_——, on using 10).
Taking a still larger if necessary, we can make
Thus
NON-INTUITIONAL CURVES 541
The reader now sees why we broke the sum 6) into three parts.
h = 0, the middle term contains an increasing number of terms.
But whatever given value h has, s has a finite value.
Thus as vl, It, O are each < e/3, the relation 5) is established.
Hence E has a differential coefficient at x = «m, and as
A(0) ,
— — — ~~~* CL i — -^
h h h
our theorem is established.
537. Example 1. Let
Then for x =£ 0, g' (x) = | —L Here a = £.
Thus
is a continuous function, and at the rational points em in the in-
terval 51,
RF' O) = + oo , LF (re) = - oo.
Hence the graph of F has a pantactic set of cuspidal tangents
SI. The curve is not monotone in any interval of 31, however
in SI
small.
Example 2. Let -.
g (x) = x sin - , x =£ 0
x
= 0 , * = 0.
Then 111
g' (x) = sin --- cos - , a; =£ 0.
a: re z
Here a. = 1. For z = 0,
542 DERIVATES, EXTREMES, VARIATION
Then
-S-jafr-O'rfn -— . £><>
'.Vl-lTP ,,. a
x — e.
is a continuous function in 51, and at the rational point em,
n1
3+|3
where E is the series obtained from F by deleting the mth terra.
538. Pompeiu Curves.* Let us now show the existence of
curves which have a tangent at each point, and a pantactic set of
vertical inflectional tangents.
We first prove the theorem (Borel) :
Let
where @ = \en\ is an enumerable set in the interval 51, and
A =
is convergent. Then B converges absolutely and uniformly in a set
33 < 51, and 3$ is as near 5t as we choose.
The points 2) where adjoint B is divergent form a null set.
For let us enclose each point en in an interval 8n of length — r-
with en as center.
The sum of these intervals is
for k > 0 sufficiently large. Let now k be fixed. A point x of 21
will not lie in any 8n if
If
Then at such a point,
k
Adjoint B < 2an^=. = &2 Va^ = kA.
* Math. Annalen, v. 63 (1907), p. 326.
NON-INTUITIONAL CURVES 543
As % > 21 — e, the points !D where B does not converge ab-
solutely form a null set.
539. 1. We now consider the function
. F(x) = I an(z - erf = 2/n(af) (1
i
lere (S = \ en\ is an enumerable pantactic set in an interval 21, and
'] — — ^? /¥ ^O
-» — ^«» {*
a convergent positive term series.
Then F is a continuous function of x in 21. For | x — en |J is <
Let us note that each fn(x) is an increasing function and the
curve corresponding to it has a vertical inflectional tangent at the
point x = en .
We next show that F (x) is an increasing function in 21. For let
x' < x". Then
/«<>')
Hence JFn<V) < ^n<>").
Thus Fn^<Fn(x").
Hence F(x'}<F(x").
2. Let us now consider the convergence of
obtained by differentiating F term wise at the points of 21 — (£.
Let 3) denote the points in 21 where
^ — (4
diverges. We have seen 2) is a null set if
(5
544 DERIVATES, EXTREMES, VARIATION
is convergent. Let 21 = 3) + (5. Let a; be a point of (£, i.e. a
point where 4) is convergent. We break 3) into two parts
such that in D^ each £n < 1. Then D2 is obviously convergent,
since each of its terms
where fn= |z-«n|,
In*
and the series 2) is convergent.
The series D1 is also convergent. For as £n < 1, the term
^n <<^n
f.» f.
and the series 4) converges by hypothesis, at a point x in (£.
Hence D(x) is convergent at any point in (£, and & = 51 when 5) i«
3. Let O denote the points in 51 where 3) converges. Let
51= <7+A.
We next show that F'(x} = D(x), for x in O. For taking x at
pleasure in C but fixed,
= = 2 a, --- , A,= j. (6
Aa: A
We now apply 156, 2, showing that () is uniformly convergent
in (0*, 77). By direct multiplication we find that
b (a + J)* + a^(a + ft)* + a1
Thus 6) gives
(* + A - en) + (a? + h - OO - O + (* - O
Let us set
Then
"^ _ . —^ __ < 2 T ^
' '
NON-INTUITIONAL CURVES 545
for 0 < | h | <.iy, rj sufficiently small. As the series on the right is
independent of A, Q converges uniformly in (0*, if). Thus
by 156,2
F' = D , for any x in (7.
4. Let now x be a point of A, not in (g. At such a point we show
tluit
F'(x}= + <x>i (R
\ J ^ ^o
and thus the curve F has a vertical inflectional tangent. For as
D is divergent at z, there exists for each M an w, such that
But the middle term in 7) shows that for | h \ < some ij' each
term in Qm is > \ the corresponding term in Dm. Thus
QmQi)>M , 0<\h\<7,'.
Since each term of Q is > 0, as 7) shows,
Hence 8) is established.
5. Let us finally consider the points x = em . If <I> denotes the
series obtained from F by deleting the mib term, we have
am , ,
— = — H -- , for x = em .
Are ^f Arc
As F is increasing, the last term is > 0.
Hence x?//- \ m
F'(x)= +00 , in (£.
As a result we see the curve F has at each point a tangent. At an
enumerable pantactic set V, it has points of inflection with vertical
tangents.
7. Let us now consider the inverse of the function F, which we
denote by
x=G(t). (9
As x in 1) ranges over the interval 21, t=F(x) will range over
an interval 53, and by I, 381, the inverse function 9) is a one-
valued continuous function of t in 33 which has a tangent at each
546 DERIVATES, EXTREMES, VARIATION
point of 33. If Wure the points in 93 which correspond to the
points V in 51, then the tangent is parallel to the £-axis at llm
points TF, or Q-' (f) = 0, at these points. The points W are pun-
tactic in 53.
Let Z denote the points of 53 at which #'(£) = 0. We show
that Z is of the 2° category, and therefore
CardZ=c.
For &'(£) being of class < 1 in 53, its points of discontinuity 8
form a set of the 1° category, by 486, 2. On the other hand, the
points of continuity of G' form precisely the set Z, since the
points W are pantactic in 33 and Q-' — 0 in W. In passing let us
note that the points Z in iB correspond 1-1 to a set of points $ at
which the series 3) diverges. For at these points the tangent to
F is vertical. But at any point of convergence of 3), we saw in
2 that the tangent is not vertical.
Finally we observe that 3) shows that
n , n
3
Hence
Summing up, we have this result :
8. Let the positive term series 2Van converge. Let (5 = jgnj be
an enumerable pantactic set in the interval 51. The Pompeiu curves
defined by
have a tangent at each point in 51, whose slope is given by
when this series is convergent, i.e. for all x in 51 except a null set.
At a point set 3 of the 2° category which embraces (£, the tanye.nts
are vertical. The ordinates of the curve F increase with x.
540. 1. Fdber Curves.* Let F(x) be continuous in the interval
51 = (0, 1). Its graph we denote by F. For simplicity let
« Math. Annalen, v. 66 (1908), p. 81.
NON-INTUITIONAL CURVES 547
/•'ii>) = 0, F(1) = 10. We proceed to construct a sequence of
hroki-M lines or polygons,
which converge to the curve F as follows :
As first line L0 we take the segment joining the end points of
/•'. Let us now divide 21 into n^ equal intervals
*IH*M-*I,.H (2
• if length x 1
Oj = — -
ni
and having
an, a12, a18... (3
as end points. As second line L± we take the broken line or
polygon joining the points on F whose abscissas are the points 3).
We now divide each of the intervals 2) into wa equal intervals,
getting the n^ intervals
&J1' ^22, 823'" (4
of length £ 1
and having ff.
as end points. In this way we proceed on indefinitely. Let us
call the points
A=\amn\
''iial points. The number of intervals in the rth division is
it — a . n . . . /;
Vy. — ft i • /t-o "r •
If Lm(x) denote the one-valued continuous function in 3 whose
value is the ordinate of a point on Xm, we have
ince the vertices of Lm lie on the curve F.
2. For each x in 31,
lim Zm(*) = F(x). (7
TO=ao
For if a; is a terminal point, 7) is true by 6).
548 DERIVATES, EXTREMES, VARIATION
If x is not a terminal point, it lies in a sequence of intervals
belonging to the 1°, 2° ••• division of 21.
Sm= (0m,ni am, n+l)-
Since F(x) is continuous, there exists an «, such that
|^)-^<>m,»)!<|, ™>«
for any x in 8m. As £m(V) is monotone in Sm,
<| , by 8).
Hence from 8), 9),
\F(x*)-Lm(x-)\<e , m>8
which is 7).
3. We can write 7) a» a telescopic series. For
etc. Hence
^(rr) = lira Zn<» = i0(a:) + f
If we set
we have
«
The function /„(#), as 10) shows, is the difference between the
ordinates of two successive polygons Ln_^, Ln at the point x.
may be positive or negative. In any case its graph is a polyg(
NON-INTUITIONAL CURVES .Yi;»
/„ which has a vertex on the x-axis at the end point of each
interval Bn-i- Let 1M be the value of fn(x) at the point x^a^,
that is, at a point corresponding to one of the vertices of /n. We
rull 1M the vertex differences of the polygon Ln.
. pn = Min Ik | , 9,, = Max |k I-
* «
Then I/.OOI<9. , in 21. (13
In the foregoing we have supposed F(x~) given. Obviously if
the vertex differences were given, the polygons 1) could be con-
st ructed successively.
We now show :
Is convergent, *(*) = 2/.C*)
'liformly convergent in 21, and is a continuous function in 21.
For by 13), 14), F converges uniformly in 21. As each fn(x)
is continuous, F is continuous in 21.
The functions so defined may be called Faber functions.
541. 1. We now investigate the derivatives of Faber* s functions,
and begin by proving the theorem :
If ^nl"-ntqt=^vtqt (1
i
converge, the unilateral derivatives o/F(x~) exist in 21 = (0, 1). More-
over they are equal, except possibly at the terminal points A= |tfmn|.
For let a: be a point not in A. Let xf, x" lie in V= V*(x) ;
\etx'-x=h',x" -x=h".
Le 0_F
h' h"
Then F'(x~) exists at x, if
e>0 , 77 >0 , \Q\<€ , for any x', x" in V. (2
550
DER1VATES,
EXTREMES, VARIATION
Now
01 <
*.(*') -JP«(*) I
?„(*") -*.(*)
*
JLGO-ILOO
V| ^
h'
h"
A'
A"
But
Hence
Similarly
/.<>') -/.(*)
x'-x
sufficiently large.
Finally, if ?; is taken sufficiently small, x, x', x" will correspond
to the side of the polygon Lm. Hence using 540, 12), we see
that Q1 = 0. Thus 2) holds, and F'(x) exists at x.
If # is a terminal point amn, and the two points x', x" are taken
on the same side of amn , the same reasoning shows that the uni-
lateral derivatives exist at amn . They may, however, be different.
2. Let Wj = w2 = ••• = 2. For the differential coefficient F'(x) to
exist at the terminal point x, it is necessary that
lira 2n<?n<oo.
lim 2wjt?n = oo,
the points where the differential coefficient does not exist form a'
pantactic set in 21.
Let us first prove 3). Let b < a< c be terminal points. Then
they belong to every division after a certain stage. We will
therefore suppose that 5, c are consecutive points in the
division, and a is a point of the n + 1st division falling in the
interval Bn = (6, <?). If a differential coefficient is to exist at
a—b
a—c
must be numerically less than some M, as n = 00, and hence theii
sum Q remains numerically <2M.
NON-INTUITIONAL CURVES 551
Now
\a-b\ = \a-c\ = 8n = B+1.
Thus Q = 2»+i { 2 in+1(a) - [in(6) + £„<»] |
or | # | = 4 • 2»Znt. , supposing a = aM.
Hence 2n^n < M,
which establishes 3).
Let us now consider 4). By hypothesis there exists a sequence
Wj<w2 < ••• = QO, such that
G being large at pleasure. Hence at least one of the difference
quotients 5) belonging to this sequence of divisions is numerically
large at pleasure.
3' If \ = 2Z« (1
is absolutely convergent, the functions F(x) have limited variation in
?l.
For/m(z) is monotone in each interval 8,^,. Hence in 8^,
Var/m =\lm.-lm,.+l\<\l^\ + \ lm,t+i |.
Hence in 21, Var /„(,:)< 2 2^.
Hence „
Var Fn(x) < 2 2 2Zm. = 2 X , in 21.
w=l *
We apply now 531.
662
DKRIVATES, EXTREMES, VARIATION
542. Faber Function* without Finite or Infinite Derivatives.
To simplify matters let us consider the following example.
The method employed admits easy generalization
and gives a class of functions of this type. We
use the notation of the preceding sections.
Let /0(#) have as graph Fig. 1. We next
divide 31 =(0, 1) into 21! equal parts Sn, S12 and
take fi(x) as in Fig. 2. We now divide 31 into
2s' equal parts S21, S^, S23, S24 and take /2(:c) as
The height of the peaks is lz = — -•
in Fig. 3.
In the Tw"1 division 31 falls into 2m! equal parts
Fio. 1
Fio. 2
one of which may be denoted by
Its length may be denoted by the same letter,
thus -i
B = ——
m 2m!*
In Fig. 4, Bm is an interval of the m — 1st
division.
FIG. 3
AA/V
The maximum ordinate of fm(x) is lm = - — = -
Fio. 4
1
The
part of the curve whose points have an ordinate < \ lm have been
marked more heavily. The x of such points, form class 1. The
other ar's make up class 2. With each x in class 1, we associate
the points «m< $m corresponding to the peaks of fm adjacent to x.
Thus am<x<f3m. Ifzis in class 2, the points «m, /3OT are the
adjacent valley points, where /m = 0.
Let now a; be a point of class 1. The numerators in
(1
have like signs, while their denominators are of opposite sign.
Thus the signs of the quotients 1) are different. Similarly if x
belongs to class 2, the signs of 1) are opposite. Hence for any x,
NON-INTUITIONAL CURVES 553
the signs of 1) are opposite. It will be convenient to let em denote
either o^ or y3m. We have
Hence j> , x * s . \ i nm\
>410^' (3
On the other hand, for any x^x' in SOT,
.2L
x — x
Hence setting x' = en, and letting n >ra,
< 1 2-' . 1
— 1 0»» 9»! 1 0»* 9»!
_LV/ — -LV Xj
— — - f4
^10n ' 10"1'
For if Iog2 a be the logarithm of a with the base 2,
w — 1! > Iog2 10 , for n sufficiently large.
Hence
Thus 2n! 2n~l! 1
and this establishes 4).
Let us now extend the definition of the functions /„(#) by giv-
ing them the period 1. The corresponding Faber function F(x)
defined by 540, 12) will admit 1 as period. We have now
From 2) we have T7 > 1 7
1 — 2 **
554 DERIVATES, EXTREMES, VARIATION
As to TV we have, using 4) and taking n sufficiently large,
Similarly
• KK^IO" 10-^
<|C
i»=n+l
»»=»+!
Thus finally
As
Thus
sgn
= sgn
— 2;
— a;
18 «.
On!
As em may be at pleasure an or /3B, and as the signs of 1) are
opposite, we see that
and F(x) has neither a finite nor an infinite differential coefficient
at any point.
CHAPTER XVI
SUB- AND INFRA-UNIFORM CONVERGENCE
Continuity
543. In many places in the preceding pages we have seen how
important the notion of uniform convergence is when dealing
with iterated limits. We wish in this chapter to treat a kind of
uniform convergence first introduced by Arzeld, and which we
will call subuniform. By its aid we shall be able to give condi-
tions for integrating and differentiating series term wise much
more general than those in Chapter V.
We refer the reader to Arzela's two papers, " Suite Serie di
Funzioni" R. Accad. di Bologna, ser. V, vol. 8 (1899). Also
to a fundamental paper by Osgood, Am. Journ. of Math., vol. 19
(1897), and to another by Hobson, Proc. Lond. Math. Soc., ser. 2,
vol. 1 (1904).
544. 1. Let/^j ••• xm, tv • -• tn)=f(x, f) be a function of two
sets of variables. Let x = (xl ••• #OT) range over £ in an m-way
space, and t = (tl • •« £n) range over !£ in an w-way space. As x
ranges over H and t over £, the point (xl • •• t1 ...) = (a;, f) will
range over a set $1 lying in a space 9?p, p = m + n.
Let T, finite or infinite, be a limiting point of X.
in
t=r
Let the point x range over SB <£, while t remains fixed, then
the point (x, £) will range over a layer of ordinate t, which we
will denote by £t. We say x belongs to or is associated with this
layer.
We say now that/= <j>, subuniformly in X when for each e>0,
555
.».,.; SUB- AND INFRA-UNIFORM CONVERGENCE
1° There exists a finite number of layers ?< whose ordinates t
lie in F/(T).
2° Each point x of X is associated with one or more of these
layers. Moreover if x = a belongs to the layer £t, all the points
x in some Fi(a) also belong to gt.
3° |/o, o-<K*)|<*
while (#, f) ranges over any one of the layers £t. When m= 1,
that is when there is but a single variable x which ranges over an
interval, the layers reduce to segments. For this reason Arzela
calls the convergence uniform in segments.
2. In case that subuniform convergence is applied to the series
convergent in 21, we may state the definition as follows :
F converges subuniformly in 51 when
1° For each e>0, and for each v there exists a finite set of
layers of ordinates > v, call them
?i, V- (2
such that each point x of 31 belongs to one or more of them, and if
x = a belongs to ?m, then all the points of 31 near a also belong
to?m.
2° i^Oj.. .*„,))<€
as the point (x, n) ranges over any one of the layers 2).
545. Example. Let
rv ~\ ^ f nx (n— l)a: 1 • m s -t t\
**>- ? irr^~i+(«-i)vl
Here-
The series converges uniformly in $, except at x = 0. The
convergence is therefore not uniform in 31; it is, however, sub-
uniform. For
CONTINUITY 557
Hence taking m at pleasure and fixed,
\Fm\<e , sin «!=(-«, S),
sufficiently small. On the other hand,
Thus for n sufficiently large,
Hence we need only three segments «j, *2, «3 to get subuniform
convergence.
546. 1. Let /(>! — zm, «j ... en) = ^(xj ••• rm) in X, as £ = r,
finite or infinite. Let /(#, £) 6<? continuous in £ t/br eacA ^ near T.
J^or <^> <o 6e continuous at the point x = a in £, it is necessary that
for each e > 0, there exists an T/ > 0, and a dt for each t in F,*(T)
such that
I/(*,O-<K*OI<* a
/or each t in Vn and for any x in F^(a).
It is sufficient if there exists a single t=/3 in F^*(T) for which
the inequality 1) holds for any x in some Fj(a).
It is necessary. For since $ is continuous at x = a,
i
| <f>(x~) — </>(a) | < | » for any x in some Fa(a).
o
Also since /= <£,
|/(a, «) - <£(a) | < | , for any t in some F"/(T).
o
Finally, since /is continuous in x for any t near T,
—/(a, 0| < | » f°r anJ x in some
Adding these three inequalities we get 1), on taking
, Bt.
568 SUB- AND INFRA-UNIFORM CONVERGENCE
It is sufficient. For by hypothesis
J/O, /3) - $(x) \>e- , for any x in some F«,(a);
o
and hence in particular.
|/(a, ft) -*(«•) | <|.
Also since /(x, £) is continuous in a;,
|/(z, £)-/(«, £)| <| , for any a? in some F6,,(a).
Thus if S < 5', 5", these unequalities hold simultaneously. Add-
ing them we get
| $(x) — <Ka)l < € > f
and thus </> is continuous at # = a.
2. As a corollary we get :
Let I* = 2l ..<,
converge in SI, ea<?A term being continuous in 21. jPor F(ii) to be con-
tinuous at the point x = a in SI, & «* necessary that for each e > 0,
and for any cell R^ > 80?ne 72A, tf^ere exists a S^ such that
\Flt(x)\<e , /or any a; in F^(a).
/< i« sufficient if there exists an 72A and a 8 > 0 such that
| J5\(aO| < e , for any x in F5(a).
547. 1. Let Urn /(a^ •••#„,, ^ ••• *n) = ^(^ ••• a:m) m X, T finite
X=*T
or infinite. Letf(x, t) be continuous in Hfor each t near T.
1° Iff= $ subuniformly in J, <j> is continuous in X.
2° If Hi is complete, and <$> is continuous in £, / = 4> subuniformly
in 3E.
To prove 1°. Let 2; = a be a point of Hi. Let e > 0 be taken at
pleasure and fixed. Then there is a layer ^ to which the point
a belongs and such that
CONTINUITY 559
when (#, £) ranges over the points of fyj. But then 1) holds for
t = j3 and x in some F^(a). Thus the condition of 546, l is satis-
fied.
To prove 2°. Since $ is continuous at x = a, the relation 1)
holds by 546, l, for each t in F^*(T) and for any x in Vdt(a).
With the point a let us associate a cube (7a>< lying in DA(a) and
having a as center. Then each point of Hi lies within a cube.
Hence by Borel's theorem there exists a finite number of these
cubes (7, such that each point of Hi lies within one of them, say
^«A ' ^"A "' (2
But the cubes 2) determine a set of layers
8*. , V" (3
such that 1) holds as (#, £) ranges over the points of 31 in each
layer of 3). Thus the convergence of /to <£ is subuniform in £.
2. As a corollary we have the theorem :
converge in X, each /t 6em</ continuous in Hi. If F converges sub-
uniformly in 3E, ^ is continuous in Hi. If Hi is complete and F is
continuous in X, F converges subuniformly in Hi.
converge in 21.
ie^ <Ae convergence be uniform in 51 except possibly for the points
of a complete discrete set S3 = |J|. -For ea<?A 6, Ze^ iAere «xz8< a X0
that for any \ > X0,
lim J*Aaj = 0.
converges subuniformly in 31.
For let D be a cubical division of norm d of the space 9tm in
which SI lies. We may take d so small that $B/> is small at
pleasure. Let BD denote the cells of D containing points of 21
but none of S3. Then by hypothesis ^converges uniformly in BD.
Thus there exists a /*0 such that for any p > /*0,
| Fp (x) \ < e , for any x of 21 in BD.
,->r,o SUB- AND INFRA-UNIFORM CON V KIMiKM K
At a point b of 53, there exists by hypothesis a F«(i) and a X0
such that for each X > X0
•
|^A(a;)|<€ , for any x in F"6(5).
Let (76>A be a cube lying in Z>«(i), liaving 6 as center. Since 53
is complete there exists a finite number of these cubes
such that each point of 53 lies within one of them.
Moreover
|^(*)|<€,
for any x of 31 lying in the /cth cube of 1).
As BD embraces but a finite number of cubes, and as the same
is true of 1), there is a finite set of layers ? such that
| Fv (x) | < e , in each 8.
The convergence is thus subuniform, as X, p are arbitrarily large.
2. The reasoning of the preceding section gives us also the
theorem :
t
in 9E, r finite or infinite. Let the convergence be uniform in Hi except
possibly for the points of a complete discrete set (§ = \e\. For each
point e, let there exist an rj such that setting e(a;, £) =f(x, £) — <j> (a;),
lim e(a;, t*) = 0 , for any t in F^*(T).
x=e
Thenf= <j> subuniformly in H.
3. As a special case of 1 we have the theorem :
W-/i« +/•(*)+•••
converge in SI, and converge uniformly in 51, except at x = «1? ••• :r = «s.
-4i x = at ?e£ there exist a vt such that
converges subuniformly in SI.
CONTINUITY 561
4. When v »f , >.
Inn /(a;, <) = <£(a;)
t=T
we will often set
/O, 0=<£O) + *OiO,
and call e the residual function.
549. Example 1.
a, /3, X > 0 , /* > 0.
The convergence is subuniform in 21. For a; = 0 is the only
possible point of non-uniform convergence, and for any wi,
• , \\ — <m^ _^ o — 0
~^~
Example 2. /(#, ri) = ~ — = <£ (oi) = 0 , as n = oo,
^ i
x in 51 = (0 < a) , a, & X, /x > 0 , ^ > X , c> 0.
The convergence is uniform in 53 = (e < a), where e > 0. For
IX* "\ I _^ it/ a " cv\
e(x, ») < - , m SB
~ c + nr-e*
aa WA
** e? n*
< e , for n > some m.
Thus the convergence is uniform in 21, except possibly at x= 0.
The convergence is subuniform in SI. For obviously for a given n
lim/(:£, n) = 0.
550. 1. Let li «!/(#! ••• xm ^ ••• £n) = ^(zj ••• a:m) «w X, T
<=T
or infinite.
Let the convergence be uniform in X except at the points
568 SUIi- AND INFRA-UNIFORM CONVERGENCE
For the convergence to be sub-uniform in 3£, it is necessary that for
each b in S3, and for each e > 0, there exists a t = ft near T, such that
lim |e(>, f)\ >e. (1
x=b
For if the convergence is subuniform, there exists for each e
and y > 0 a finite set of layers ?,, t in F",*(T) such that
| e (x, f) | < e , x in £« .
Now the point x = b lies in one of these layers, say in £0 .
Then
| e(z, /3) | < e , for all a; in some V*(V).
But then 1) holds.
2. Jkaw^. Let ^ ^(:r) = 1^(1 _ *).
o
This is the series considered in 140, Ex. 2.
F converges uniformly in 31 = ( — 1, 1), except at x = 1.
AS Fm(x) = - a*
we see that lim J^) - _ 1.
*=i
Hence J7 is not subuniformly convergent in SI.
Integrdbility
551. 1. Infra-uniform Convergence. It often happens that
subuniformly in X except possibly at certain points (£= fe} form-
ing a discrete set. To be more specific, let A be a cubical divi-
sion of 9JW in which X lies, of norm B. Let X± denote those cells
containing points of X, but none of (£. Since (g is discrete,
X^ = 1H. Suppose now/=<£ subuniformly in any JTA ; we shall
say the convergence is infra-uniform in X. When there are no
exceptional points, infra-uniform convergence goes over into sub-
uniform convergence.
INTEGRABILITY 563
This kind of convergence Arzela calls uniform convergence by
segments, in general.
2. We can make the above definition independent of the set (g,
and this is desirable at times.
Let 36 = (-3T, j) be an unmixed division of Hi such that r. may be
taken small at pleasure. If f = <£ subunif ormly in each X, we
say the convergence is infra-uniform in 36.
3. Then to each e, 77 >0, and a given X, there exists a set of
layers Ij, I2 ••• , t in F^*(T), such that the residual function e(a;, f)
is numerically < e for each of these layers. As the projections of
these layers I do not in general embrace all the points of £, we
call them deleted layers.
4. The points 5 we shall call the residual points.
a?
5. Example 1. ^ V — - - — - - - — — .
F = 2, (1 + nxz)(l + O + l)a*)
This series was studied in 150. We saw that it converges uni-
formly in tl = (0, 1), except at x= 0.
As -,
and as this = 1 as x = 0 for an arbitrary but fixed w, F does not
converge subuniformly in H, by 550. The series converges infra-
uniform ly in SI, obviously.
6. Example 2. F=lx«(l-x).
o
This series was considered in 550, 2. Although it does not
converge subuniformly in an interval containing the point x = 1,
the convergence is obviously infra-uniform.
552. 1. Let lim / (x1 ••• xn t± ••• £„) = 4>(xi '" xm) ^e limited in 3E,
X=T
T finite or infinite. For each t near T, letf be limited and R-integrable
in H. For $ to be R-integrable in X, it is sufficient thatf = <f> infra-
unif ormly in 36. If 36 is complete, this condition is necessary.
:>r,4 SUB- AND INFRA IMF01LM COX VKIKi KXCK
It is sufficient. We show that for each e, «o > 0 there exists a
division D of 9Jm such that the cells in which
Osc </> > co (1
have a volume < a-. For setting as usual
=<>+ 6,
we have in any point set,
Osc <j> < Osc/+ Osc e.
Using the notation of 551,
in the finite set of deleted layers Ix, (2 ••• corresponding to
£=£j, £3 ... For each of these ordinates <t,/(a;, Q is integrable
in £. There exists, therefore, a rectangular division D of 9?m,
such that those cells in which
have a content < -, whichever ordinate t, is used. Let E be a
&
division of 9?m such that the cells containing points of the residual
set £ have a content < cr/2. Let F = D + E. Then those cells
of F in which
Osc f(x, O >^-, or Osc | e(z, £) | >~
A &
i = l, 2 ••• have a content < <r. Hence those cells in which 1)
holds have a content < a.
It is necessary, if Hi is complete. For let
/ / ... _i. T
1 ' 2
Since cf> and f(x, £n) are integrable, the points of discontinuity of
<^>(a:) and otf(x, tn) are null sets by 462, 6. Hence if (£, (£< denote
the points of continuity of <f)(x) and /(a, 2) in X,
since X is measurable, as it is complete.
INTEGRABILITY 5G5
Let © = Qdv|(S<i,
then ® = £
by 410, 6.
Let £) =
then £) = , (1
as we proceed to show. For if Gr = Hi — ©,
(£ = #<(£, ®) + Dv(6, #) = £) +
But # is a null set. Hence Meas Dy((£, 6r) = 0, and thus
g = 5 = £), which is 1).
Let now f be a point of £), let it lie in (5,,, (£/„ ••• where t±, t% •••
form a monotone sequence = T. Then since
there is an w such that
I e(& *»)l<| » for any w > «»• (2
But £ lying in 3), it lies in £ and (£<n .
Thus 1*00 -*(£)!<§,
for any x in F«(f). Hence
| e<>, «,) - e(f , O | < ^ , ^ in ra(|). (3
o
Now
e(jr, O = e<>, «n) - e(f, *„) + e(f, O-
Hence from 2), 3),
| e(a:, fn) | <e , for any a; in F«(f).
Thus associated with the point (?, there is a cube F lying in Z>a(|),
having | as center. As _Z) = X — 5) is a null set, each of its points
can be enclosed within cubes (7, such that the resulting enclosure
SUB- AND IM- MA-UNIFORM CONVERGENCE
Cj has a measure < a, small at pleasure. Thus each point of £ lies
within a cube. By Borel's theorem there exists a finite set of
these cubes
r r r • f f f
1 1' 12 " r ' °1' °2 " °«'
such that each point of £ lies within one of them. But corre-
sponding to the F's, are layers
«n ^ "' ?r
such that in each of them
Thus/ = <f> subuniformly in X = (Fj, F2-. Fr). Let j be the
residual set. Obviously j < <r. Thus the convergence is infra-
uniform.
2. As a corollary we have :
Let ^a: = 2l...lna:...a:m)
converge in 21. -Le£ ^ fo limited, and each f, be limited and R-in-
tegrable in SI. For F to be R-integrable in 31, it is sufficient that F
converges infra-uniformly in 21.
If 21 is complete, this condition is necessary.
553. Infinite Peaks. 1. Let lim/(a:, •••xmtl"> £n) = <j>(x) in X,
T finite or infinite. Although f(x, f) is limited in X for each t
near T, and although <£(#) is also limited in X, we cannot say that
\f(x, 0 | < some M (1
for any x in X and any £ near T, as is shown by the following
Example. Let/(z, t} = — = (f>(x~) = 0, as £=oo for x in
gd1
£ = (-00, 00).
It is easy to see that the peak of / becomes infinitely high as
n = 00.
In fact, for x = — , f= V*. Thus the peak is at least as high
V t e
V« , . ,
as — , which = oo .
e
INTEGRABILITY 567
The origin is thus a point in whose vicinity the peaks of the
family of curves /(a:, £) are infinitely high. In general, if the
peaks of /0,-^V-O
in the vicinity V& of x = £ become infinitely high as t = r, however
small 8 is taken, we say f is a point with infinite peaks.
On the other hand, if the relation 1) holds for all x and t in-
volved, we shall say f (x, t) is uniformly limited.
2. If lira f(xl-"Xm t1->.tn) = 4>(xl--xm), and if f(x, t) is
t=T
uniformly limited in £, then (f> is limited in £.
For x being taken at pleasure in £ and fixed, </>(#) is a limit
point of the points /(#, f) as t = T. But all these points lie in
some interval (— 6r, 6r) independent of x. Hence </> lies in this
interval.
3. If Hi is complete, the points $ in £ with infinite peaks also form
a complete set. If these points $ are enumerable, they are discrete.
That $ is complete is obvious. But then $ = $ = 0, as $ is
enumerable.
554. 1. Let \imf(xl ••• xm t1 ••• fn) = <f>(xl ••• xm~) in X, metric or
<=T
complete. Let f(x, t) be uniformly limited in X, and R-integrable
for each t near T. For the relation
lim !/(*, 0 =
t=T +SX.
to hold, it {* sufficient thatf=<f> infra- uniformly in £. If £ z*
/or eacA t complete, this condition is necessary.
For by 552, </> is .R-integrable if /= <£ infra-uniformly, and when
J is complete, this condition is necessary. By 424, 4, each /(#, f)
is measurable. Thus we may apply 381, 2 and 413, 2.
2. As a corollary we have the theorem :
converge in the complete or metric field 21. Let the partial sums F^ be
uniformly limited in 21. Let each termft be limited and R-integrable
in 21. Then for the relation
f>r,S SUB- AND INFRA-UNIFORM CONVERGENCE
to hold it is sufficient that F is infra -uniformly convergent in 21. If
21 1* complete, this condition is necessary.
555. Example 1. Let us reconsider the example of 150,
We saw that we may integrate term wise in 21 = (0, 1), al-
though F does not converge uniformly in 21. The only point of
non-uniform convergence is x — 0. In 551, 6, we saw that it con-
verges, however, infra-uniformly in 21. As
| Fn(x) | < 1 , for any x in 21, and for every w,
all the conditions of 554 are satisfied and we can integrate the
series termwise, in accordance with the result already obtained
in 150.
Example 2. Let F(x) = v--=-
~*1 [ enifl g(»-l)a:2
Then F (x~) = —
en**'
We considered this series in 152, i. We saw there that this
series cannot be integrated termwise in 21 = (0 < a). It is, how-
ever, subuniformly convergent in 21 as we saw in 549, Ex. 1. We
cannot apply 554, however, as Fn is not uniformly limited. In
fact we saw in 152, l, that x = 0 is a point with an infinite peak.
Example 3. F(x~) = izn(l - x).
o
We saw in 551, 6, that F converges infra-uniformly in 21 = (0, 1).
Fn(x)\ = \l-xn\ oome-flf,
for any x in 21 = (0 < w), u <_ 1, and any n. Thus the Fn are
uniformly limited in 21.
We may therefore integrate termwise by 554, 2. We may
verify this at once. For
= 0
INTEGRABILITY 569
Hence \uF(x}dx = u. (1
On the other hand,
XM Wn+1
Fndx — u — = w , as w = co. (2
71+1
+
From 1), 2) we have
£(W)=M=- • ^ «"+
+ 1 n + 2
556. 1. If 1° f(x± - • • xm tl • • • £n) == <f> (#! - • • Xn) infra-uniformly
in the metric or complete field 9£, as t = T, T finite or infinite ;
2° f(x, £) is uniformly limited in Hi and R-integrable for each t
near T;
Then
uniformly with respect to the set of measurable fields 51 in £•
If Hi is complete, condition 1° may be replaced by 3° <f>(x) is
R-integrable in X.
For by 552, l, when 3° holds, 1° holds ; and when 1° holds, <#>
is 72-integrable in £
Now the points G£t where
|e(z, *„)! >e
are such that ^
lira @f = 0 , by 412.
t=T
Then
" O, 0
But r (5 - 0
which establishes the theorem.
2. As a corollary we have :
If 1° F(x)= 2/ti. ..,„(#! ••• #TO) converges infra-uniformly, and
each of its terms fi is R-integrable in the metric or complete field 21;
;,70 SIT, AND INFRA-UNIFORM CONVERGENCE
2° F*(xy is uniformly limited in SI;
Then
the series on the right converges uniformly with respect to all
measurable 33 <_Sl.
3. If 1° lira f(x, ^ ••• £„)=$(#) is R-integrable in the interval
t=r
SI = (a < 5), T finite or infinite ;
2°f(x, t) is uniformly limited, and R-integrable for each t near r ;
7171611 lim
t=T
uniformly in 31, awe? ^(z) is continuous in SI.
and also each, termft are R-integrable in the interval SI = (a< 5);
2° F*(x) is uniformly limited in SI;
Then
i« continuous.
For ^ is a uniformly convergent series in SI, each of whose terms
i* a continuous function of x.
Differentiability
557. 1. If 1° lim/(z, ^ ... £n) = <^>(a:) m SI = (a < 6), r finite or
t=T
infinite ;
2°/*Oc» 0 *« R-integrable for each t near T, «AIC? uniformly limited
in SI;
^° /T(^ 0= ^C37) infra-uniformly in SI, as t= T;
Then at a point x of continuity of ty in SI
or ttwatf is the same
r, *).lim ./(«, 0- (2
DIFFERENTIABILITY 571
For by 554,
lini f /JO, t)dx = (*'*(*>& (3
t=r */a «/«
= lim[/(a:, 0-/<>,0] » by I, 538
<=T
= <£(*)-</>(«) , byl°.
Now by I, 537, at a point of continuity of i/r,
— I •^r(x)dx=-fy(x). (4
From 3), 4), we have 1), or what is the same 2).
2. In the interval 21, if
1° F(x)= 2/tl...ln(:c) converges; (1
2° Eachf((x) is limited and R-integrable ;
3° _FA' (#) i« uniformly limited ;
4° Gr(x)= 2// t« infra-uniformly convergent;
Then at a point of continuity of 6r(#) in SI, we way differentiate
the series 1) termwise, or F'(x)= G(oi).
3. /w the interval 21, z/
1° /(re, £j ••• ^n) = <f>(x) as t = T, r finite or infinite ;
2° /(#, £) «* uniformly limited, and a continuous function of x;
3° -^(a:) = lim/£(z:, t~) is continuous ;
t=T
Then .,, >. , ,- >. .,-•
</>'(a:) = -f(a;), (1
or wAa£ t* <Ae same
± lira /(x, 0 = lim -f /(as, <)• (2
ax I=T t=r dx
For by 547, 1, condition 3° requires that /' = i/r subuniformly
in 21. But then the conditions of 1 are satisfied and 1) and 2)
hold.
4. In the interval 21 let us suppose that
1° JF(a;) = 2/ll...l),(a:) converges; (1
572 SUB- AND INFRA-UNIFORM CONVERGENCE
2° Each termf, is continuous;
8° -FxC^) ** uniformly limited ;
4° #(2;) = 2r/f(#) z« continuous ;
Then we may differentiate 1) termwise, or F(x} = Q-(x).
558. Example 1. We saw in 555, Ex. 3 that
The series got by differentiating termwise is
#(3) = f 3n(l - 3) = 1 , 0 < 3 < 1
u (2
= 0 , s = 0.
Thus by 557, 4, ^^ = F(^ -n ^^^ 1 ^ = ^ (g
The relation 3) does not hold for x = Q.
Example 2.
Vw-|-
l
lit1 1*(*
^(a;) = arctg #, for any a:. (1
' ^° (2
Hence Q-(x) is continuous in any interval 81, not containing
x = 0. Thus we should have by 557, 4,
F(x}=a(x), x in 51. (3
This relation is verified by 1), 2). The relation 3) does not
hold for 3=0, since
DIFFERENTIABILITY 573
Example 3.
= £ log (1 + z2) , for any x.
, for any a;.
In any interval 21, all the conditions of 557, 4, hold.
F(x)=Q-(x) , for any a? in «. (3
In case we did not know the value of the sums 1), 2) we could
still assert that 3) holds. For by 545, Gr is subuniformly con-
vergent in 21, and hence is continuous.
Example 4-
l+a?
x-)=^{I+n* l+(n+l>] =
T 1 ne™ (n + iy+1>* } ~
Here
!"& = -£. (2
The series obtained by differentiating F termwise is
a,-)=^{(jn + l)x_nx}_x (3
^ \ el»+U* en* } <*>
and hence
sy s x OC , W/jC
ff.-.w=--+^.
The peaks of the residual function
, . nx
e(x< n)= — ,
enx
are of height = \/e. The convergence of Q- is not uniform at
x = 0. The conditions of 557, 4, are satisfied and we can differ-
entiate 1) termwise. This is verified by 2), 3).
:,7l SUB- AND INFRA-UNIFORM CONVERGENT!-:
559. 1. Ifl° lim/(:r, tl ••• £„)= </>(#) is limited and R-iuteyrable
t=r
in the interval 81 = (a < 5) ;
2° /(#, £ ) is limited, and R-integrable in ?l, /or eacA £ near T ;
3° -Jr(^) = lim P/O, 0 = lim^O, 0
<=T •'a /=T
is a continuous function in 21;
4° The points (§ iw 31 m wAose vicinity the peaks of f(x, t) as
t= T are infinitely high form an enumerable set;
Then rx /*x
e(x}= \ 4>(x) = lim I /(z, t)dx = +(x\ (1
«/a i-r «/a
or /»i fx
lim I /(x, t}dx= I lira /(a:, ^)rfa;,
t=r «/a */a <=T
awe? f Ae «ei (£ t'» complete and discrete.
For (£ is discrete by 553, 3.
Let a be a point of A = §1 — (£. Then in an interval a about a,
| /(#, £) | < some J!f , 2; in 0, any t near T. (2
Now by 556, 3, taking e > 0 small at pleasure, there exists an
77 > 0 such that
for any z in a, and t in K,*(r). If we set x = a + A, we have
,'.
Also by 556, 3, we have
f /O, f)dx = r<K*)dx +e" , | e"
•'a *^a
for any x in a, and t in F^,*(T). Thus
From 3), 4) we have
DIFFERENTIABILITY 575
Now e may be made small at pleasure, and that independent of
h. Thus the last relation gives
= — , for a; in A.
As this holds however small h = Ax is taken, we have
d-\lr dd *
-J- = — , tor x in A.
ax ax
Hence by 515, 3,
i/r(V) = 6(x) + const , in 21.
For x = a, ^(a) = ^00 = ° 5
and thus
•\1r(^r\ — fi(^r\ in 9T
T'\°*')^~ u {•t' ) , 111 vi*
2. As a corollary we have :
If 1° F(x)= 2/tl...lB(a;) is limited and R integrable in the inter-
val 21 =
2° F^(x) is limited and each termft is R-integrable;
3° #(#)= V J /t i« continuous;
4° 7%e points (S m 21 in whose vicinity the peaks of F^(x) are in-
finitely high form an enumerable set;
Then
or we may integrate the F series termwise.
560. 1. If 1° lira f(x, *j — tn~) = $(x) in 21 = (a < 5), r finite or
t=r
infinite ;
2° f'x(x, f) is limited and R-integrable for each t near r;
3° The points (§ of 21 in w^o«e vicinity fx(x, t*) has infinite peaks
as t = T form an enumerable set;
4° <f>(x) is continuous at the points (S;
5° ^C^) = ^mfx(,x-> 0 ** limited and R-integrable in 21;
t=*
576 SUB- AND INFRA-UNIFORM CONVKIHJKNCE
Th>-n at a point of continuity of ^(x) in 31
$'(*) = *(*), (1
or what its the same
For let 8 = (a < $) be an interval in 31 containing no point of
•. Then for any x in B
Hence ~x
lim I f'Jx, f)dx = lim \ f(x, 0 — /(«, 01
<=T •'a l=T
= <j>(x) - <£(«) , by 1°. (2
By 556, 3, <£(V) ig continuous in 8. Thus $(x~) is continuous
at any point not in (5. Hence by 4° it is continuous in 31.
We may thus apply 559, l, replacing therein /(#, f) \>y f'x(x, f).
We get
Cx Cx Cx
lim I f'x(x, f)dx = I lim/^(a;, t)dx = I -^r(x)dx. (3
Since 2) obviously holds when we replace a by a, this relation
with 3) gives
At a point of continuity, this gives 1) on differentiating.
2. If 1° F(x) = 2jfti... ,„(#) converges in the interval 31;
2° 6?(a;) = 2/[(aO and each of its terms are limited and R-
integrable in 31;
3° The points of 31 in whose vicinity G-^(x) has infinite peaks as
\ = Qo,/onn an enumerable set at which F(x) is continuous;
Then at a point of continuity of 6r(#) we have
or what is the same
dx
DIFFERENTIABILITY 577
561. Example. « , , ( - , - , .
_£? I «Cy — ^^, i f ^^5 — •
I g^* g(W-f-l)j7^ P
**
Hence o « <&
The series obtained by differentiating F term wise is
+ -
Here 0 9 „
v^~« 1 \ •*•' / ~~ ^~ ^~~^^ ^"~
e" e*
Hence 0
(2
y>X» y>;C* X
O Cx
is a continuous function of x.
The convergence of the Gf- series is not uniform at x = 0. For
set an = 1/w. Then
2 ]
i i
en gn
To get the peaks of the residual function we consider the
points of extreme of
y =
We find
Thus y' = 0 when
2 wV - 5 w^ + 1 = 0,
or when x = — - or -^ , a, a constants.
Vw
Putting these values in 3), we find that y has the form
y = <?Vw.
Hence x = 0 is the only point where the residual function has
an infinite peak. Thus the conditions of 560, 2, are satisfied, and
we should have F'(x) = Q-(x) for any x. This is indeed so, as 1),
2) show.
CHAPTER XVII
GEOMETRIC NOTIONS
Plane Curves
562. In this chapter we propose to examine the notions of
curve and surface together with other allied geometric concepts.
Like most of our notions, we shall see that they are vague and
uncertain as soon as we pass the confines of our daily experience.
In studying some of their complexities and even paradoxical
properties, the reader will see how impossible it is to rely on his
unschooled intuition. He will also learn that the demonstration
of a theorem in analysis which rests on the evidence of our
geometric intuition cannot be regarded as binding until the
geometric notions employed have been clarified and placed on a
sound basis.
Let us begin by investigating our ideas of a plane curve.
563. Without attempting to define a curve we would say on
looking over those curves most familiar to us that a plane curve
has the following properties :
1° It can be generated by the motion of a point.
2° It is formed by the intersection of two surfaces.
3° It is continuous.
4° It has a tangent at each point.
5° The arc between any two of its points has a length.
6° A curve is not superficial.
7° Its equations can be written in any one of the forms
(2
(3
and conversely such equations define curves.
678
PLANE CURVES 579
8° When closed it forms the complete boundary of a region.
9° This region has an area.
Of all these properties the first is the most conspicuous and
characteristic to the naive intuition. Indeed many employ this
as the definition of a curve. Let us therefore look at our ideas
of motion.
564. Motion. In this notion, two properties seem to be essen-
tial. 1° motion is continuous, 2° it takes place at each instant in
a definite direction and with a definite speed. The direction of
motion, we agree, shall be given by dy/dx, its speed by ds/dt.
We see that the notion of motion involves properties 4°, 5°, and 7°.
Waiving this point, let us notice a few peculiarities which may
arise.
Suppose the curve along which the motion takes place has an
angle point or a cusp as in I, 366. What is the direction of
motion at such a point? Evidently we must say that motion is
impossible along such a curve, or admit that the ordinary idea of
motion is imperfect and must be extended in accordance with the
notion of right-hand and left-hand derivatives.
Similarly ds/dt may also give two speeds, a posterior and an
anterior speed, at a point where the two derivatives of * = <£(£)
are different.
Again we will admit that at any point of the path of motion,
motion may begin and take place in either direction. Consider
what happens for a path defined by the continuous function in
I, 367. This curve has no tangent at the origin. We ask how
does the point move as it passes this point, or to make the ques-
tion still more embarassing, suppose the point at the origin. In
what direction does it start to move? We will admit that no
such motion is possible, or at least it is not the motion given us
by our intuition. Still more complicated paths of this nature are
given in I, 369, 371, and in Chapter XV of the present volume.
It thus appears that to define a curve as the path of a moving
point, is to define an unknown term by another unknown term,
equally if not more obscure.
565. 2° Property. Intersection of Two Surfaces. This property
has also been used as the definition of a curve. As the notion
580 GEOMETRIC NOTIONS
of a surface is vastly more complicated than that of a curve, it
hardly seems advisable to define a complicated notion by one still
more complicated and vague.
566. 3° Property. Continuity. Over this knotty concept philos-
ophers have quarreled since the days of Democritus and Aristotle.
As far as our senses go, we say a magnitude is continuous when
it can pass from one state to another by imperceptible gradations.
The minute hand of a clock appears to move continuously, although
in reality it moves by little jerks corresponding to the beats of the
pendulum. Its velocity to our senses appears to be continuous.
We not only say that the magnitude shall pass from one state
to another by gradations imperceptible to our senses, but we also
demand that between any two states another state exists and so
without end. Is such a magnitude continuous ? No less a mathe-
matician than Bolzano admitted this in his philosophical tract
Paradoxien des Unendlichen. No one admits it, however, to-day.
The different states of such a magnitude are pantactic, but their
ensemble is not a continuum.
But we are not so much interested in what constitutes a con-
tinuum in the abstract, as in what constitutes a continuous curve
or even a continuous straight line or segment. The answer we
have adopted to these questions is given in the theory of irra-
tional numbers created by Cantor and Dedekind [see Vol. I,
Chap. II], and in the notion of a continuous function due to
Cauchy and Weierstrass [see Vol. I, Chap. VII].
These definitions of continuity are analytical. With them we
can reason with the utmost precision and rigor. The consequences
we deduce from them are sufficiently in accord with our intuition
to justify their employment. We can show by purely analytic
methods that a continuous function f(x) does attain its extreme
values [I, 354], that if such a function takes on the value a at the
point P, and the value b at the point Q, then it takes on all inter-
mediary values between a, 6, as x ranges from P to Q [I, 357].
We can also show that a closed curve without double point does
form the boundary of a complete region [cf. 576 seq.].
567. 4° Property. Tangents. To begin with, what is a tangent ?
Euclid defines a tangent to a circle as a straight line which meets
PLANE CURVES 581
the circle and being produced does not cut it again. In com-
menting on this definition Casey says, " In modern geometry a
curve is made up of an infinite number of points which are
placed in order along the curve, and then the secant through two
consecutive points is a tangent." If the points on a curve were
like beads on a string, we might speak of consecutive points. As,
however, there are always an infinite number of points between any
two points on a continuous curve, this definition is quite illusory.
The definition we have chosen is given in I, 365. That property
3° does not hold at each point of a continuous curve was brought
out in the discussion of property 1°. Not only is it not necessary
that a curve has a tangent at each of its points, but a curve does
not need to have a tangent at a pantactic set of points, as we saw
in Chapter XV.
For a long time it was supposed that every curve has a tangent
at each point, or if not at each point, at least in general. Analytic-
ally, this property would go over into the following : every con-
tinuous function has a derivative. A celebrated attempt to prove
this was made by Ampere.
Mathematicians were greatly surprised when Weierstrass ex-
hibited the function we have studied in 502 and which has no
derivative.
Weierstrass * himself remarks : " Bis auf die neueste Zeit hat
man allgemein angenommen, dass eine eindeutige und continuir-
liche Function einer reellen Veranderlichen auch stets eine erste
Ableitung habe, deren Werth nur an einzelnen Stellen unbestimmt
oder unendlich gross werden konne. Selbst in den Schriften von
Gauss, Cauchy, Dirichlet findet sich meines Wissens keine
Ausserung, aus der unzweifelhaft hervorginge, dass diese Mathe-
matiker, welche in ihrer Wissenschaft die strengste Kritik iiberall
zu iiben gewohnt waren, anderer Ansicht gewesen seien."
568. Property 5°. Length. We think of a curve as having
length. Indeed we read as the definition of a curve in Euclid's
Elements : a line is length without breadth. When we see two
simple curves we can often compare one with the other in regard
to length without consciously having established a way to measure
* Werke, vol. 2, p. 71.
582 GEOMKTKIC NOTIONS
them. Perhaps we unconsciously suppose them described at a
uniform rate and estimate the time it takes. It may be that \vc
regard them as inextensible strings whose length is got by
straightening them out. A less obvious way to measure their
lengths would be to roll a straightedge over them and measure
tin- distance on the edge between the initial and final points of
contact.
We ask how shall we formulate arithmetically our intuitional
ideas regarding the length of a curve? The intuitionist says, a
curve or the arc of a curve has length. This length is expressed
by a number L which is obtained by taking a number of points
Pj, P2, P3"- on the curve between the end points P, P', and
forming the sum
The limit of this sum as the points. became pantactic is the
length L of the arc PP1.
Our point of view is different. We would say : Whatever
arithmetic formulation we choose we have no a priori assurance
that it adequately represents our intuitional ideas of length.
With the intuitionist we will, however, form the sum 1) and see if
it has a limit, however the points Pt are chosen. If it has, we will
investigate this number used as a definition of length and see if it
leads to consequences which are in harmony with our intuition.
This we now proceed to do.
569. 1. Let * = <£(*) , y = ^r(0 (1
be one-valued continuous functions of t in the interval 21 = (a< 5).
As t ranges over 21 the point x, y will describe a curve or an arc
of a curve C. We might agree to call such curves analytic, in
distinction to those given by our intuition. The interval 21 is
the interval corresponding to O.
Let D be a finite division of 21 of norm d, defined by
a<t1<tz< • • • < b .
To these values of t will correspond points
PiPP-Q (2
PLANE CURVES 583
on (7, which may be used to define a polygon PD whose vertices
are 2).
Let (w, 7W + 1) denote the side PmPm+l, as well as its length.
If we denote the length of PD by the same letter, we have
lira P0 (3
d=0
exists, it is called the length of the arc (7, and C is rectifiable.
2. (Jordan.^) For the arc PQ to be rectifiable, it is necessary and
sufficient that the functions <£, -fy in 1) have limited variation in SI.
Hence
D
But the sum on the right is the variation of <£ for the division D.
If now (J> does not have limited variation in SI, the limit 3) does
not exist. The same holds for i/r. Hence limited variation is a
necessary condition.
The condition is sufficient. For
PD<^\^x +21 Ay 1 = Var<£ + Vari/r.
/> .0
As <£, i/r have limited variation, this shows that
P0 = Max PD
D
is finite. We show now that
\imPD = PQ. (4
d=0
For there exists a division A such that
Let A cause SI to fall into v intervals, the smallest of which has
the length X. Let D be a division of SI of norm d<dQ<\.
Then no interval of D contains more than one point of A.
Let E=D + A.
Obviously PE>PD or
684 GEOMETRIC NOTIONS
Suppose that the point tK of A falls in the interval (£0 tl+l) of
D. Then the chord (t, i + 1) in P^ is replaced by the two chords
(t, /c), (AC, i + 1) in PE. Hence
£.— («, «) + («,t+i)-(i,t+i).
Obviously as </>, i/r are continuous we may take dQ so small that
each
CrK < £ , for any d < dQ .
— v
Hence p p ^ e fc
* E ~ *D < 5" \y
From 5), 6) we have
PQ - PD < e , for any d < dQ,
which gives 4).
3. If the arc PQ is rectifiable, any arc contained in PQ is also
rectifiable.
For </>, i/r having limited variation in interval 21, have a fortiori
limited variation in any segment of 21.
4. Let the rectifiable arc Of all into two arcs (7j, (72. If s, «j, 82
are <Ag lengths of (7, Cj, (72, then
For we saw that Cj, Gj are rectifiable since O is. Let Slj, 2(2
be the intervals in 21 corresponding to C7j, (72. Let Z>j, Z>2 be
divisions of Slj, 2Lj of norm c?. Then
», = lim PDi , *2 = lira PDt.
d=0 d=0
But Dj, D2 effect a division of 21, and since
« = lim PE (8
«=o
with respect to the class of all divisions of 21, the limit 8) is the
same when E is restricted to range over divisions of the type of D.
Now
Passing to the limit, we get 7).
PLANE CURVES 585
The preceding reasoning also shows that if C± , (72 are rectifiable
curves, then C is, and 7) holds again.
5. If 1) define a rectifiable curve, its length s is a continuous func-
tion s(f) of t.
For </>, A/r having limited variation,
where the functions on the right are continuous monotone increas-
ing functions of t in the interval 21 = (#< b*).
For a division J) of norm d of the interval A21 = (£, £ + A) we
have . _
PD = 2V Ax2 f A#2
where S^j = ^(^ + A) — </>(0' an(i similarly for the other func-
tions. As ^ is continuous, S^ = 0, etc., as A=0. We may
therefore take rj > 0 so small that 8^ , 8<f>2 , B-^1 , Si/r2 < e/4, if A < 77.
Hence As = s(t + h) — s(t) < Max P^, < e , if 0 < h > 77.
Thus s is continuous.
6. The length s of the rectifiable arc C corresponding to the inter-
val (a < f) is a monotone increasing function of t.
This follows from 4.
7. If x, y do not have simultaneous intervals of invariability, s(t)
is an increasing function of t. The inverse function is one-valued
and increasing and the coordinates x, y are one-valued functions of s.
That the inverse function t («) is one-valued follows from I, 214.
We can thus express t in terms of «, and so eliminate t in 1).
570. 1. If <£>', -fy' are continuous in the interval 51,
s = j dt\/<f>'z + i^'2. (1
31
For
s = lim 2 VA<£2 + A^2 . (2
586
Now
GEOMETRIC NOTIONS
(3
where ^, £« lie in the interval A««.
As <£', i/r' are continuous they are uniformly continuous. Hence
for any division D of norm < some <?0,
where j «« | , | &K \ < some 77, small at pleasure, for any K. Thus
and we may take
Thus
I
Hence
s = lim
d=0
, /c = l, 2...
a + 'Oa + lim
« —
which establishes 1).
For simplicity we have assumed <£', -\/r' to be continuous in §1.
This is not necessary, as the following shows.
2. Let ax, ••• an, 6j, ••• &n>0 but not all = 0.
Vof + .« +a2
For
n. (4
Hence
But
+(an -
m=l
Vaf + ... + VJf +
This in 5) gives 4).
PLANE CURVES 587
Let us apply 4) to prove the following theorem, more general
than 1.
3. (Baire.) If <f>', ty' are limited and R-integrable, then
8 =
For by 4),
+
(0 , in 8. = At.,
where 77,,', 77" are numerically <1. Thus
| SS^ - 28C¥. = 28.^' Osc </>' + 28X' Osc +> . (6
As ^>', i/r' are integrable, the right side = 0, as c? = 0. Now
lira 28^,
d=Q
Thus passing to the limit in 6), we have
lim
This with 2), 3) gives 1) at once.
571. Vblterra's Curve. It is interesting to note that there are
rectifiable curves for which £'(0» iKCO are no^ both R-integrable.
Such a curve is Volterra's curve, discussed in 503. Let its equa-
tion be y=f(x). Then f'(x) behaves as
1 1
2 x sm cos -
x x
in the vicinity of a non null set in 21 =(0, 1). Hence /'(#) is
not ^-integrable in 31. But then it is easy to show that
jTVl
does not exist. For suppose that
588 GEOMETRIC NOTIONS
were 72-integrable. Then gz = 1 +/'(a02 is -R-integrable, and
hence /'(x)2 also. But the points of discontinuity of /'2 in 21 do
not form a null set. Hence/'2 is not .fl-integrable.
On the other hand, Volterra's curve is rectifiable by 569, 2, and
528, 1.
572. Taking the definition of length given in 569, 1, we saw
that the coordinates
must have limited variation for the curve to be rectifiable. But we
have had many examples of functions not having limited variation
in an interval 21. Thus the curve defined by
y —x sin- , x^=Q
x (4
=0 , x=0
does not have a length in 21 = (— 1, 1) ; while
sin - , x =£ 0
x (5
, x=0
does.
It certainly astonishes the naive intuition to learn that the
curve 4) has no length in any interval B about the origin how-
ever small, or if we like, that this length is infinite, however small
B is taken. For the same reason we see that
No arc of Weierstrass' curve has a length (or its length is infinite)
however near the end points are taken to each other, when ab>~L.
573. 1. 6° Property. Space-filling Curves. We wish now to
exhibit a curve which passes through every point of a square, i.e.
which completely fills a square. Having seen how to define one
such curve, it is easy to construct such curves in great variety, not
only for the plane but for space. The first to show how this may
IMJ done was Peano in 1890. The curve we wish now to define is
due to Hilbert.
We start with a unit interval 21 = (0, 1) over which t ranges,
and a unit square 33 over which the point a;, y ranges. We define
PLANE CURVES
589
as one-valued continuous functions of t in 21 so that xy ranges over
53 as t ranges over 21. The analytic curve O defined by 1) thus
completely fills the square 53.
We do this as follows. We effect a division of 21 into four
equal segments 8J, 8'2, 8'3, 8±, and of 53 into equal squares 77^, r)'z,
r)'s,r)'i, as in Fig. 1.
We call this the first division or Dr The corre-
spondence between 21 and 53 is given in first
approximation by saying that to each point P in
8[ shall correspond some point Q in tj( .
We now effect a second division Z>2 by dividing
each interval and square of Dl into four equal
parts.
We number them as in Fig. 2,
As to the numbering of the T/'S we observe the
following two principles : 1° we may pass over the
squares 1 to 16 continuously without passing the
same square twice, and 2° in doing this we pass
over the squares of D1 in the same order as in " FIG. 2.
Fig. 1. The correspondence between 21 and 53 is
given in second approximation by saying that to each point P in
&[' shall correspond some point Q in 77". Iri this way we continue
indefinitely.
To find the point Q in 53 corresponding to P in 21 we observe
that P lies in a sequence of intervals
8' > 8" > 8'" > ... = 0, (2
to which correspond uniquely a sequence of squares
T,' > 11" > 1,"' > .-. =0. (3
The sequence 3) determines uniquely a point whose coordinates
are one-valued functions of £, viz. the functions given in 1).
The functions 1) are continuous in 21.
For let t' be a point near t ; it either lies in the same interval as
t in Dn or in the adjacent interval. Thus the point Q' corre-
590 GEOMETRIC NOTIONS
spending to t' either lies in the same square of Dn as the point Q
corresponding to £, or in an adjacent square. But the diagonal
of the squares = 0, as n = oo. Thus
Dist (#'<?)= 0 , asw = oo.
both = 0, as f = t.
As t ranges over 21, the point x, y range* over every point in the
square 53.
For let Q be a given point of 53. It lies in a sequence of
squares as 3). If Q lies on a side or at a vertex of one of the 77
squares, there is more than one such sequence. But having taken
such a sequence, the corresponding sequence 2) is uniquely de-
termined. Thus to each Q corresponds at least one P. A more
careful analysis shows that to a given Q never more than four
points P can correspond.
2. The method we have used here may obviously be extended
to space. By passing median planes through a unit cube we
divide it into 28 equal cubes. Thus to get our correspondence
each division Dn should divide each interval and cube of the pre-
ceding division Dn_l into 28 equal parts. The cubes of each divi-
sion should be numbered according to the 1° and 2° principles of
enumeration mentioned in 1.
By this process we define
as one-valued continuous functions of t such that as t ranges over
the unit interval (0, 1), the point a;, y, z ranges over the unit
cube.
574. 1. Hubert's Curve. We wish now to study in detail the
correspondence between the unit interval 21 and the unit square
53 afforded by Hilbert's curve defined in 573. A number of inter-
esting facts will reward our labor. We begin by seeking the
points P in 21 which correspond to a given Q in 53.
To this end let us note how P enters and leaves an rj square.
Let B be a square of Dn. In the next division B falls into four
PLANE CURVES 591
squares Bl ••• J54 and in the n + 2d division in 16 squares J5t>.
Of these last, four lie at the vertices of B ; we call them vertex
squares. The other 12 are median squares. A simple considera-
tion shows that the 77 squares of Dn+z are so numbered that we
always enter a square B belonging to Dn, and also leave it by a
vertex square.
Since this is true of every division, we see on passing to the
limit that the point Q enters and leaves any 77 square at the ver-
tices of 77. We call this the vertex law.
Let us now classify the points P, Q.
If P is an end point of some division Dn > we call it a terminal
point, otherwise an inner point, because it lies within a sequence
of 8 intervals B' > B" > ••• =0.
The points Q we divide into four classes :
1° vertex points, when Q is a vertex of some division.
2° inner points, when Q lies within a sequence of squares
77' >7/'> - =0.
3° lateral points, when Q lies on a side of some 77 square but
never at a vertex.
4° points lying on the edge of the original square 93. Points
of this class also lie in 1°, 3°.
We now seek the points P corresponding to a Q lying in one of
these four classes.
Class 1°. Q a Vertex Point. Let Dn be the first division such
that Q is at a vertex. Then Q lies in four squares T;O 77,-, rjK, 77, of
I>n-
There are 5 cases : •
a) i j k I are consecutive.
£) ij k are consecutive, but not I.
7) tj are consecutive, but not k I.
8) ij, also k I, are consecutive,
e) no two are consecutive.
A simple analysis shows that a), $) are not permanent in the
following divisions ; 7), 8) may or may not be permanent ; e) is
permanent.
<;i:o.MKTUIC NOTIONS
Now, whenever a case is permanent, we can enclose Q in a se-
quence of T) squares whose sides = 0. To this sequence corre-
sponds uniquely a sequence of 8 intervals of lengths = 0. Thus
to two consecutive squares will correspond two consecutive inter-
vals which converge to a single point P in 21. If the squares are
not consecutive, the corresponding intervals converge to two dis-
tinct points in 21. Thus we see that when 7) is permanent, to Q
correspond three points P. When 8) is permanent, to Q corre-
spond two points P. While when Q belongs to e), four points P
correspond to it.
Class 2°. Q an Inner Point. Obviously to each Q corresponds
one point P and only one.
Class 3°. Q a Lateral Point. To fix the ideas let Q lie on a ver-
tical side of one of the T/'S. Let it lie between 7;t, 77,- of Dn. There
are two cases :
a) / = t + 1.
We see easily that a) is not permanent, while of course /3) is.
Thus to each Q in class 3°, there correspond two points P.
Class 4°. Q lies on the edge of 33. If Q is a vertex point, to it
may correspond one or two points P. If Q is not a vertex point,
only one point P corresponds to it.
To sum up we may say :
To each inner point Q corresponds one inner point P.
To each lateral point Q correspond two points P.
To each edge point Q correspond one or two points P.
To each vertex point Q, correspond two, three, or four points P.
2. As a result of the preceding investigation we slum easily
that:
To the points on a line parallel to one of the sides of $8 correspond
in 21 an apantactic perfect set.
3. Let us now consider the tangents to Hilbert's curve which
we denote by H.
PLANE CURVES
593
Let Q be a vertex point. We saw there were three permanent
cases 7), 3), e).
In cases 7), 8) we saw that to two consecutive B intervals cor-
respond permanently two contiguous ver-
tical or horizontal squares.
Thus as t ranges over "— r ' — ^ — ' Q
St, £i+1, the point x, y ranges
over these squares, and the secant line
joining Q and this variable point x, y oscillates through 180°.
There is thus no tangent at Q. In case e) we see similarly that
the secant line ranges through 90°. Again there is no tangent
at Q.
In the same way we may treat the three other classes. We find
that the secant line never converges to a fixed position, and may
oscillate through 360°, viz. when Q is an inner point. As a result
we see that Hubert's curve has at no point a tangent, nor even a
unilateral tangent.
4. Associated with Hilbert's curve H are two other curves,
x =
and y =
The functions </>, ty being one-valued and continuous in 31, these
curves are continuous and they do not have a multiple point. A
very simple consideration shows that they do not have even a
unilateral tangent at a pantactic set of points in 21.
575. Property 7°. Equations of a Curve. As already remarked,
it is commonly thought that the equation of a curve may be
written in any one of the three forms
(2
and if these functions are continuous, these equations define con-
tinuous curves.
Let us look at the Hilbert curve H. We saw its equation
could be expressed in the form 3). IT cuts an ordinate at every
point of it for which 0 < y < 1. Thus if we tried to define H by
GEOMETRIC NOTIONS
an equation of the type 1), /(#) would have to take on every
value between 0 and 1 for each value of x in 21 = (0, 1). No such
functions are considered in analysis.
Again, we saw that to any value x = a in 21 corresponds a perfect
apantactic set of values \ta\ having the cardinal number c- Thus
the inverse function of x = </>(£) is a many-valued function of x
whose different values form a set whose cardinal number is c.
Such functions have not yet been studied in analysis.
How is it possible in the light of such facts to say that we may
pass from 3) to 1) or 2) by eliminating t from 3). And if we
cannot, how can we say a curve can be represented equally well
by any of the above three equations, or if the curve is given by
one of these three equations, we may suppose it replaced by one
of the other two whenever convenient. Yet this is often done.
In this connection we may call attention to the loose way
elimination is treated. Suppose we have a set of equations
We often see it stated that one can eliminate ^ ••• tn and obtain
a relation involving the #'s alone. Any reasoning based on such
a procedure must be regarded as highly unsatisfactory, in view of
what we have just seen, until this elimination process has been
established.
576. Property 8°. Closed Curves. A circle, a rectangle, an
ellipse are examples of closed curves. Our intuition tells us that
it is impossible to pass from the inside to the outside without
crossing the curve itself. If we adopt the definition of a closed
curve without multiple point given in I, 362, we find it no easy
matter to establish this property which is so obvious for the simple
closed curves of our daily experience. The first to effect the
demonstration was Jordan in 1892. We give here* a proof due
to de la Vallte- Pouasin.-^
Let us call for brevity a continuous curve without double point
• The reader is referred to a second proof due to Brouwer and given in 598 seq.
t Cours cT Analyse, Paris, 1903, Vol. 1, p. 307.
PLANE CURVES 595
a Jordan curve. A continuous closed curve without double point
will then be a closed Jordan curve. Cf . I, 362.
577. Let G be a closed Jordan curve. However small <r > 0 is
taken, there exists a polygonal ring R containing O and such that
1° Each point of R is at a distance < a from 0.
2° Each point of O is at a distance < a from the edges of R.
For let x = </>(£) , y = ^(0 (1
be continuous one-valued functions of t in T=(a< J) defining C.
Let D = (a, av a2 ••• 6) be a division of T of norm d. Let
a, etj, Og ••• be points of O corresponding to a, al ••• If d is suffi-
ciently small, the distance between two points on the arc
(7t = (at_!, at) is <e', small at pleasure. Let A be a quadrate
division of the a;, y plane of norm 8. Let us shade all cells con-
taining a point of 0,. These form a connected domain since Ct is
continuous. We can thus go around its outer edge without a
break.* If this shaded domain contains unshaded cells, let us
shade these too. We call the result a link A, . It has only one
edge EI, and the distance between any two points of E^ is ob-
viously < e' + 2 V2 8. We can choose c?, 8 so small that
e' + 2V2 8 < o-, arbitrarily small. (1
Then the distance between any two points of A,, is < a-. Let e"
be the least distance between non-consecutive arcs (7t. We take
& so small that we also have
V28<y' (2
Then two non-consecutive links A^ Aj have no point in common.
For then their edges would have a common point P. As P lies
on E, its distance from (7t is < V2 8. Its distance from C3- is also
< V2 8. Thus there is a point P, on (7, , and a point P, on C} such
that
* Here and in the following, intuitional properties of polygons are assumed as
known.
GEOMETRIC NOTIONS
But by hypothesis e" <y. Hence
e"<2V28,
which contradicts 2).
Thus the union of these links form a ring R whose edges are
polygons without double point. One of the edges, say 6rt, lies
\\ithin the other, which we call Gre . The curve C lies within A*.
The inner polygon Gf-t must exist, since non-consecutive links have
no point in common.
578. 1. Interior and Exterior Points. Let a~1 > a2 > ••• = 0.
Let R!, Rz-" be the corresponding rings, and let
be their inner and outer edges. A point P of the plane not on
C which lies inside some 6rt we call an interior or inner point of C.
HP lies outside some (re, we call it an exterior or outer point of C.
Each point P not on C must belong to one of these two classes.
For let p = Dist (P, (7); then p is > some a-n. It therefore lies
within 6r[n) or without 6r<n), and is thus an inner or an outer point.
Obviously this definition is independent of the sequence of rings
\Rn] employed. The points of the curve C are interior to each
G(?} and exterior to each 6rt(n).
Inner points must exist, since the inner polygons exist as al-
ready observed. Let us denote the inner points by $ and the
outer points by £). Then the frontiers of 3 and D are the curve C.
2. We show now that
1° Two inner points can be joined by a broken line L, lyiny in 3f.
2° Two outer points can be joined by a broken line Le l>/i»</ in O.
8° Any continuous curve ft joining an inner point i and an outer
point e has a point in common with C.
To prove 3°, let
be the equations of $, the variable t ranging over an interval
T— (<*<£), t=a corresponding to i and t= ft to e. Let t' be
PLANE CURVES 597
such that a<t<tf gives inner points, while t = t' does not give an
inner point. Thus the point corresponding to t = t' is a frontier
point of 3 and hence a point of O.
To prove 1°. If A, B are inner points, they lie within some G\ .
We may join A, B, G\ by broken lines La, L,, meeting #t at the
points A', B', say. Let Gr^ be the part of 6rt lying between A1 ',
B'. Then
-£<. + &<*> + Lb
is a broken line joining A to B.
The proof of 2° is similar.
579. 1. Let P', P" correspond to t = tf, t = t", on the curve C
denned by 577, 1). If t' <t", we say P' precedes P" and write
Any set of points on O corresponding to an increasing set of
values of t is called an increasing set.
As t ranges from a to 5, the point P ranges over 0 in a direct
sense.
We may thus consider a Jordan curve as an ordered set, in the
sense of 265.
2. (JDe la Valle"e-Poussin.} On each arc O, of the curve (7, there
exists at least one point P} such that
P1<P2<P3<... (1
may be regarded as the vertices of a closed polygon without double
point and whose sides are all < e.
For in the first place we may take 8 > 0 so small that no square
of A contains a point lying on non-consecutive arcs (7t of C. Let
us also take A so that the point a corresponding to t = a lies
within a square, call it 8^ of A. As t increases from t = a, there
is a last point Pl on C where the curve leaves S^. The point Pl
lies in another square of A, call it $2, containing other points of
C. Let P2 be the last point of O in tS%. In this way we may
continue, getting a sequence 1).
There exists at least one point of 1) on each arc (7t . For other-
wise a square of A would contain points lying on non-consecutive
arcs 0K . The polygon determined by 1) cannot have a double
598 GEOMETRIC NOTIONS
point, since each side of it lies in one square. The sides are < e,
provided we take B V2 < e, since the diagonal is the longest line
we can draw in a square of side S.
580. Existence of Inner Points. To show that the links form a
ring with inner points, Schonfliess* has given a proof which may
be rendered as follows :
Let us take the number of links to be even, and call them Z^,
Za, ••• Z2n. Then L^ X3, -Z/5"- lie entirely outside each other.
Since L^ L% overlap, let P be an inner common point. Simi-
larly let Q be an inner common point of Lz, Ly Then P, Q
lying within L2 niay be joined by a finite broken line b lying
within Lv Let 62 be that part of it lying between the last point
of leaving L± and the following point of meeting Ly In this
way the pairs of links
A^s 5 L3L5 ; •••
define finite broken lines
No two of these can have a common point, since they lie in
non-consecutive links. The union of the points in the sets
we call a ring, and denote i.t by 9?. The points of the plane not
in 9? fall into two parts, separated by 9?. Let £ denote the part
which is limited, together with its frontier. We call Z the inte-
rior of 9?. That X has inner points is regarded as obvious since
it is defined by the links
which pairwise have no point in common, and by the broken lines
/>2 , 64 , J6 •••
each of which latter lies entirely within a link.
Let . 82m = Dv (£2ro, £) , m = 1, 2, ...
• Die Entwickeluny der Lehre von den Punktmnnnigfaltigkeiten. Leipzig, 1908,
Part 2, p. 170.
. PLANE CURVES 599
Then these ? have pairwise no point in common since the LZm
have not.
Let £ = £ + ?+
Then $ > 0. For let us adjoin Lz to $ft, getting a ring 9?2 whose
interior call 3^. That £2 has inner points follows from the fact
that it contains ?4, £6 • •• Let us continue adjoining the links
L^ LQ ••• Finally we reach -Z/2n, to which corresponds the
ring 9J2n, whose interior, if it exists, is X^n. If £2n does not exist,
£2n_2 contains only £2n. This is not so, for on the edge of Ll
bounding £, is a point P, such that some _Z)p(P) contains points
of no L except Lr In fact there is a point P on the edge of Ll
not in either L% or L2n, as otherwise these would have a point in
common. Now, if however small p > 0 is taken, DP(P) contains
points of some L other than L^ the point P must lie in LK which
is absurd, since Ll has only points in common with Z2, Z2n, and
P is not in either of these. Thus the adjunction of Lz, L±, •••
L2n produces a ring 9?2n whose interior £2n does not reduce to 0 ;
it has inner points.
581. Property 9°. Area. That a figure defined by a closed
curve without double point, i.e. the interior of a Jordan curve,
has an area, has long been an accepted fact in intuitional geometry.
Thus Lindemann, Vorlesungen uber Greometrie, vol. 2, p. 557, says
" einer allseitig umgrenzten Figur kommt ein bestimmter Flachen-
inhalt zu." The truth of such a statement rests of course on
the definition of the term area. In I, 487, 702 we have given a
definition of area for any limited plane point set 21 which reduces
to the ordinary definition when 21 becomes an ordinary plane figure.
In our language 21 has an area when its frontier points form a
discrete set. Let
define a Jordan curve (£, as t ranges over T=(a<b). The
figure 21 defined by this curve has the curve as frontier. In I,
708, 710, we gave various cases in which (£ is discrete. The
reasoning of I, 710, gives us also this important case :
If one of the continuous functions 0, ty defining the Jordan curve
(5, has limited variation in T, then (£ is discrete.
600
(.10. METRIC NOTIONS
It was not known whether & would remain discrete if the con-
dition of limited variation was removed from both coordinates,
until Osgood * exhibited a Jordan curve which is not discrete.
This we will now discuss.
582. 1. Osgood' 8 Curve. We start with a unit segment
T = (0, 1) on the t axis, and a unit square S in the xy plane.
We divide Tinto 17 equal parts
Tv
(1
rjl rn
•*li -!-%•> ••• J-ni
and the square S into 9 equal
squares
cr o a o ff\
»li »g» #6 '" »1T'
by drawing 4 bands J5j which
are shaded in the figure. On
these bands we take 8 segments,
marked heavy in the figure.
Then as t is ranging from left
to right over the even or black
intervals T^, T±, ••« Tu marked heavy in the figure, the point a;, y
on Osgood's curve, call it £), shall range univariantly over the
segments 3).
While t is ranging over the odd or white intervals T^ Tz--- T17
the point xy on £) shall range over the squares 2) as determined
below.
Each of the odd intervals 1) we will now divide into 17 equal
intervals T^ and in each of the squares 2) we will construct
horizontal and vertical bands -B2 as we did in the original square
8. Thus each square 2) gives rise to 8 new segments on O
corresponding to the new black intervals in T, and 9 new squares
S^ corresponding to the white intervals. In this way we may
continue indefinitely.
The points which finally get in a black interval call & the
others are limit points of the /S's and we call them X. The point
* Trans. Am. Math. Soc., vol. 4 (1903), p. 107.
PLANE CURVES 601
on O corresponding to a & point has been defined. The point of
O corresponding to a point X is defined to be the point lying in
the sequence of squares, one inside the other, corresponding to the
sequence of white intervals, one inside the other, in which \ falls,
in the successive divisions of T.
Thus to each t in T corresponds a single point #, y in S. The
aggregate of these points constitutes Osgood's curve. Obviously
the #, y of one of its points are one- valued functions of t in T, say
* = <KO , y = •*•(«)• (4
The curve £) has no double point. This is obvious for points of
£) lying in black segments. Any other point falls in a sequence
of squares
Si > &tj > S&t ' • '
to which correspond intervals
T •> T .~> T
J. t ^> J. ,j ; ^* J. ,JK
in which the corresponding £s lie. But only one point t is thus
determined.
The functions 4) are continuous. This is obvious for points /8
lying within the black intervals of T. It is true for the points \.
For X lies within a sequence of white intervals, and while t ranges
over one of these, the point on £) ranges in a square. But these
squares shut down to a point as the intervals do. Thus <£, ty are
continuous at t = \. In a similar manner we show they are con-
tinuous at the end points of the black intervals.
We note that to t = 0 corresponds the upper left-hand corner
of $, and to t = 1, the diagonally opposite point.
2. Up to the present we have said nothing as to the width of
the shaded bands D D
J*i , •»»"
introduced in the successive steps. Let
be a convergent positive term series whose sum ^1<^1. We
choose Bl so that its area is a1? B^ so that its area is aa, etc.
Then O = 0 , O = l-^l, (5
602 GEOMETRIC NOTIONS
as we now show. For O has obviously only frontier points ;
hence O = 0. Since O is complete, it is measurable and
6-5.
Let 0= S- O, and B = \Bn\. Then 0 < B. For any point
which does not lie in some Bn lies in a sequence of convergent
squares S. > *STi;- > ••• which converge to a point of £). Now
£= ^+#2 + ••• = A.
On the other hand, B contains a null set of points of O, viz. the
black segments. Thus
d = £ = A , and hence O = 1 — A
and 5) is established.
Thus Osgood's curve is continuous, has no double point, and its
upper content is \ — A.
3. To get a continuous closed curve 0 without double point
we have merely to join the two end points «, /3 of Osgood's curve
by a broken line which does not cut itself or have a point in com-
mon with the square S except of course the end points a, /3.
Then G bounds a figure $• whose frontier is not discrete, and g
does not have an area. Let us call such curves closed Osgood
curves.
Thus we see that there exist regions bounded by Jordan curves
which do not have area in the sense current since the Greek
geometers down to the present day.
Suppose, however, we discard this traditional definition, and
employ as definition of area its measure. Then we can say :
A figure ^ formed of a closed Jordan curve J and its interior ^
has an area, viz. Meas $.
For Front % = J. Hence % is complete, and is therefore meas-
ureable.
We note that a
We have seen there are Jordan curves such that
DETACHED AND CONNECTED SETS 603
We now have a definition of area which is in accordance with the
promptings of our geometric intuition. It must be remembered,
however, that this definition has been only recently discovered,
and that the definition which for centuries has been accepted leads
to results which flatly contradict our intuition, which leads us to
say that a figure bounded by a continuous closed curve has an
area.
583. At this point we will break off our discussion of the
relation between our intuitional notion of a curve, and the con-
figuration determined by the equations
where <£, ty are one-valued continuous functions of t in an interval
T. Let us look back at the list of properties of an intuitional
curve drawn up in 563. We have seen that the analytic curve
1) does not need to have tangents at a pantactic set of points on
it ; no arc on it needs have a finite length ; it may completely fill
the interior of a square ; its equations cannot always be brought
in the forms y=f(x) or F(xy}=0, if we restrict ourselves to
functions for F employed in analysis up to the present; it does
not need to have an area as that term is ordinarily understood.
On the other hand, it is continuous, and when closed and with-
out double point it forms the complete boundary of a region.
Enough in any case has been said to justify the thesis that
geometric reasoning in analysis must be used with the greatest
circumspection.
Detached and Connected Sets
584. In the foregoing sections we have studied in detail some
of the properties of curves defined by the equations
* = <KO , y = *(*)•
Now the notion of a curve, like many other geometric notions, is
independent of an analytic representation. We wish in the fol-
lowing sections to consider some of these notions from this point
of view.
i iii I GEOMETRIC NOTIONS
585. 1. Let 21, 53 be point sets in w-way space 9?m. If
Dist (21, 53) >0,
we say 2(, 53 are detached. If 21 cannot be split up into two parts
SB, S such that they are detached, we say 21 has no detached part*.
If 21 = 33 + 6 and Dist (53, (£)> 0, we say 53, (5 are detached parts
of 31.
Let the set of points, finite or infinite,
a, ar a,j, ••• 6 (1
be such that the distance between two successive ones is < e. We
call 1) an e-sequence between a, b ; or a sequence with segments
0*4i «t+i) of length <e. We suppose the segments ordered so
that we can pass continuously from a to b over the segments without
retracing. If 1) is a finite set, the sequence is finite, otherwise
infinite.
2. Let 21 have no detached parts. Let a, b be two of its points.
For each e > 0, there exists a finite e-sequence between a, b, and lying
in 21.
For about a describe a sphere of radius e. About each point of
21 in this sphere describe a sphere of radius e. About each point
of 21 in each of these spheres describe a sphere of radius e. Let
this process be repeated indefinitely. Let 53 denote the points of
21 made use of in this procedure. If 53 < 21, let 6 = 21 - 53. Then
Dist (53, £)>e, and 21 has detached parts, which is contrary to
hypothesis. Thus there are sets of e-spheres in 21 joining a and b.
Among these sets there are finite ones. For let $ denote the
set of points in 21 which may be joined to a by finite sequences ; let
© = 2f - ft. Then Dist (ft, ©) > e. For if < e, there is a point /
in ft, and a point g in © whose distance is < e. Then a and g can
be joined by a finite e-sequence, which is contrary to hypothesis.
3. If 21 has no detached parts, it is dense.
For if not dense, it must have at least one isolated point a.
But then a, and 21 — a are detached parts of 21, which contradicts
the hypothesis.
4. Let 21, 53, G be complete and 21 = (53, 6). If % has no de-
tached parts, 53, (5 have at least one common point.
IMAGES 605
For if 53, (£ have no common point, 8 = Dist (53, QT) is > 0.
But 8 cannot > 0, since 53, G would then be detached parts of SI.
Since 8 = 0 and since 53, (£ are complete, they have a point in
common.
5. If SI is such that any two of its points may be joined by an
e-sequence lying in SI, where e > 0 is small at pleasure, SI has no
detached parts.
For if SI had 53, 6 as detached parts, let Dist (53, 6) = 8. Then
S > 0. Hence there is no sequence joining a point of 53 with a
point of (£ with segments < 8.
6. If SI is complete and has no detached parts, it is said to be
connected. We also call SI a connex.
As a special case, a point may be regarded as a connex.
7. If SI is connected, it is perfect.
For by 3 it is dense, and by definition it is complete.
8. If SI is a rectilinear connex, it has a first point a and a last
point ft, and contains every point in the interval (a, /3).
For being limited and complete its minimum and maximum
lie in SI and these are respectively « and ft. Let now
ei>62> '•• = °-
There exists an ersequence Ol between a, ft. Each segment has
an e2-sequence (72. Each segment of (72 has an e3-sequence (73,
etc. Let O be the union of all these sequences. It is pantactic
in (a, #). As SI is complete,
SI = («, ft.
Images
586. Let *! =/!(«! -O ••• xn =fn(tl ... U (1
be one-valued functions of t in the point set £. As t ranges over
£, the point x = (xl ••• xn) will range over a set SI in an n-way
space $„. We have called 31 the image of £. Cf. I, 238, 3.
If the functions /are not one- valued, to a point t may correspond
several images x', x" ••• finite or infinite in number. Conversely
»;0i5 GEOMETRIC NOTIONS
to the point x may correspond several values of t. If to each
point t correspond in general r values of #, and to each x in
general « values of £, we say the correspondence between £, 31 is
r to «. If r = * = 1 the correspondence is 1 to 1 or unifold ; if
r > 1, it is manifold. If r = 1, 21 is a simple image of £, other-
wise it is a multiple image. If the functions 1) are one-valued
and continuous in £, we say 21 is a continuous image of !£.
587. Transformations of the Plane. Example 1. Let
u = x sin y , v = x cos y. (1
We have in the first place
u? + v2 = x2.
This shows that the image of a line x = a, a =£ 0, parallel to the
y-axis is a circle whose center is the origin in the w, v plane, and
whose radius is a. To the «/-axis in the #, y plane corresponds
the origin in the w, v plane.
From 1) we have, secondly,
- = tan y.
v
This shows that the image of a line y = 5, is a line through the
origin in the w, v plane.
From 1) we have finally that w, v are periodic in y, having the
period 2 TT. Thus as rr, y ranges in the band J?, formed by the
two parallels y= ± TT, or — TT < y < TT, the point w, v ranges over
the entire w, v plane once and once only.
The correspondence between B and the w, v plane is unifold,
except, as is obvious, to the origin in the u, v plane corresponds
the points on the #-axis.
Let us apply the theorem of I, 441, on implicit functions. The
determinant A is here
= — x.
sin y, cos y
x cos y, — x sin y
As this is =£ 0 when x, y is not on the y-axis, we see that the
correspondence between the domain of any such point and its
image is 1 to 1. This accords with what we have found above.
IMAGES
607
It is, however, a much more restricted result than we have found ;
for we have seen that the correspondence between any limited
point set 31 in B which does not contain a point of the y-axis and
its image is unifold.
588. Example 2. Let
u =
the radical having the positive sign. Let us find the image of the
first quadrant Q in the #, y plane.
From 1 ) we have at once
0 <_u<l , v > 0.
Hence the image of Q is a band B parallel to the v-axis.
From 1) we get secondly
y = uv , x = vVl — w2. (2
Hence
Thus the image of a circle in Q whose center is the origin and
whose radius is a is a segment of a right line v = a.
When x = y = 0, the equations 1) do not define the correspond-
ing point in the w, v plane. If we use 2) to define the corre-
spondence, we may say that to the line v = 0 in B corresponds the
origin in the x, y plane. With this exception the correspondence
between Q and B is uniform, as 1), 2) show.
The determinant A of 1) is, setting
r =
— x
3Q, tO _
for any point a;, y different from the origin.
589. Example 3. Reciprocal Radii. Let 0 be the origin in the
z, y plane and fl the origin in the w, v plane. To any point
P = (x, y) in the x, y plane different from the origin shall cor-
respond a point Q = (w, v) in the w, v plane such that £IQ has
GEO.MKIKIC NOTIONS
the same direction as OP and such that OP • £IQ = 1. Analyti-
cally we have
x = \y , u = \v , X > 0,
and
(u* +
From these equations we get
and also
u v f+
/>• — _ fit — _ fl
a . 9 ' " ~ •> i 9 >.•*•
U2 + V* U? + VZ
& + y2
The correspondence between the two planes is obviously unifold
except that no point in either plane corresponds to the origin in
the other plane. We find for any point #, y different from the
origin that
A — ^(wi u) 1
d (x, y) (x2 + V2)2
^ > t/ S \ * *s s
Obviously from the definition, to a line through the origin in
the #, y plane corresponds a similar line in the w, v plane. As xy
moves toward the origin, w, v moves toward infinity.
Let x, y move on the line x = a ^ 0. Then 1) shows that w, v
moves along the circle
a (w2 + V2) — u = 0
which passes through the origin. A similar remark holds when
a;, y moves along the line y = b =£ 0.
590. Such relations between two point sets 21, S3 as defined in
586 may be formulated independently of the functions /. In fact
with each point a of 21 we may associate one or more points Jj, 52 •••
of S3 according to some law. Then S3 may be regarded as the
image of 21. We may now define the terms simple, manifold, etc.,
as in 586. When b corresponds to a we may write b ~ a.
We shall call S3 a continuous image of 21 when the following con-
ditions are satisfied. 1° To each a in 21 shall correspond but one
b in S3, that is, S3 is a simple image of 21. 2° Let b ~ a, let at, a2 •••
be any sequence of points in 21 which = a. Let bn ~ an. Then
bn must == 1} however the sequence {an| is chosen.
IMAGES 609
When S3 is a simple image of SI, the law which determines
which b of S3 is associated with a point a of SI determines obviously
n one- valued functions as in 586, 1), where tl ••• tm are the m co-
ordinates of a, and xl ••• xn are the n coordinates of b. We call these
functions 1) the associated functions. Obviously when S3 is a
continuous image, the associated functions are continuous in 31.
591. 1. Let S3 be a simple continuous image of the limited complete
set 31. Then 1° S3 is limited and complete. If 2° SI is perfect and
only a finite number of points 0/31 correspond to any point 0/S3, then
SB is perfect. -^3° 31 is a connex, so is S3.
To prove 1°. The case that S3 is finite requires no proof. Let
PJ, 02 ••« be points of S3 which = ft. We wish to show that ft lies
in S3. To each bn will correspond one or more points in SI; call
the union of all these points a. Since S3 is a simple image, a is an
infinite set. Let av a^-" be a set of points in a which = a, a
limiting point of SI. As SI is complete, a lies in SI. Let b ~ a.
Let PIW ~ an. As an = a, btn = ft. But S3 being continuous, ot
must = b. Thus ft lies in S3. That S3 is limited follows from the
fact that the associated functions are continuous in the limited
complete set 31. To prove 2°. Suppose that S3 had an isolated
point b. Let b ~ a. Since SI is perfect, let a1? «2 .•- = a. Let
bn ~ an. Then as S3 is continuous, bn = 5, and b is not an isolated
point. To prove 3°. We have only to show that there exists
an e-sequence between any two points a, ft of S3, e small at pleasure.
Let a ~ a, ft ~ b. Since SI is connected there exists an ^-sequence
between a, b. Also the associated functions are uniformly con-
tinuous in 31, and hence i) may be taken so small that each segment
of the corresponding sequence in S3 is > e.
2. Let f(t^ ••• fTO) be one- valued and continuous in the connex SI,
then the image of SI is an interval including its end points.
This follows from the above and from 585, 8.
3. Let the correspondence between SI, S3 be unifold. If S3 is a
continuous image of SI, then 31 is a continuous image of S3.
For let \bn\ be a set of points in S3 which = b. Let an ~ 5B,
a ~ b. We have only to show that an = a. For suppose that it
does not, suppose in fact that there is a sequence atl, att ••• which
610 GEOMETRIC NOTIONS
= a =£ a. Let ft ~ a. Then 6ti, fiit • •• = /3. But any partial se-
qm-nce of \bn\ must = b. Thus £> = /3, hence a = a, hence an = a.
4. v4 Jordan curve J is a unifold continuous image of an interval
T. Conversely if J is a unifold continuous image of an interval T,
there exist two one-valued continuous functions
such, that as t ranges over T, the point x, y ranges over J. In case
J is closed it may be regarded as the image of a circle F.
All but the last part of the theorem has been already established.
To prove the last sentence we have only to remark that if . we set
x = r cos t , y — r sin t
we have a unifold continuous correspondence between the points
of the interval (0, 2 TT*) and the points of a circle.
5. The first part of 4 may be regarded as a geometrical definition
of a Jordan curve. The image of a segment of the interval T or
of the circle F, will be called an arc of J.
592. Side Lights on Jordan Curves. These curves have been
defined by means of "the equations
As t ranges over the interval T = (a < 6), the point P = (#, #)
ranges over the curve J. This curve is a certain point set in the
#, y plane. We may now propose this problem : We have given
a point set (£ in the #, y plane ; may it be regarded as a Jordan
curve ? That is, do there exist two continuous one-valued func-
tions 1) such that as t ranges over some interval T, the point P
ranges over the given set S without returning on itself, except
possibly for t= a, £= 6, when the curve would be closed?
Let us look at a number of point sets from this point of view.
593. Example 1.
y = sin - , x in the interval 31 = (— 1, 1), but =£ 0
X
= 0 for x = 0.
IMAGES 611
Is this point set (£ a Jordan curve ? The answer is, No. For a
.Ionian curve is a continuous image of an interval 21. By 591, 1,
it is complete. But (£ is not complete, as all the points on the
y axis, — 1 < y < 1 are limiting points of (£, and only one of them
belongs to (5, viz. the origin.
2. Let us modify (5 by adjoining to it all these missing limiting
points, and call the resulting point set (7. Is C a Jordan curve ?
The answer is again, No. For if it were, we can divide the inter-
val T into intervals 8 so small that the oscillation of </>, i/r in any
one of them is < &>. To the intervals Bt will correspond arcs CL on
the curve, and two non-consecutive arcs Ot are distant from each
other by an amount > some e, small at pleasure. This shows that
one of these arcs, say CK, must contain the segment on the y-axis
- 1 < y < 1- But then Osc i/r = 2 as t ranges over the correspond-
ing 8K interval. Thus the oscillation of ^ cannot be made < e,
however small BK is taken.
3. Let us return to the set S defined in 1. Let A, £ be the
two end points corresponding to x = — 1, x = 1. Let us join them
by an ordinary curve, a polygon if we please, which does not cut
itself or £. The resulting point set $ divides all the other points
of the plane into two parts which cannot be joined by a contin-
uous curve without crossing $. For this point of view $ must be
regarded as a closed configuration. Yet $ is obviously not complete.
On the other hand, let us look at the curve formed by removing
the points on a circle between two given points a, b on it. The
remaining arc 8 including the end points a, b is a complete set, but
as it does not divide the other points of the plane into two sepa-
rated parts, we cannot say 8 is a closed configuration.
We mention this circumstance because many English writers
use the term closed set where we have used the term complete.
Cantor, who first introduced this notion, called such sets abge-
schlossen, which is quite different from geschlossen = closed.
_i
594. Example 2. Let p = e ", for 0 in the interval 21 = (0, 1)
except 6 = 0, where p = Q. These polar coordinates may easily be
replaced by Cartesian coordinates
_ I. _ 1
x— <#>(#)= « * cos 0 , y = e e sin 6 , in 21,
t.KOMKTKIC NOTIONS
except 6 = 0, when x, y both = 0. The curve thus defined is a
.Ionian curve.
Let us take a second .Ionian curve
with p = 0 for 0 = 0. If we join the two end points on these
curves corresponding to 6 = 1 by a straight line, we get a closed
Jordan curve J", which has an interior $, and an exterior £)•
The peculiarity of this curve J is the fact that one point of it,
vi/,. the origin x = y = Q, cannot be joined to an arbitrary point
of 3 by a finite broken line lying entirely in $ ; nor can it be
joined to an arbitrary point in £) by such a line lying in £)•
595. 1. It will be convenient to introduce the following terras.
Let SI be a limited or unlimited point set in the plane. A set
of distinct points in 21
«i > #2 > az'" 0-
determine a broken line. In case 1) is an infinite sequence, let an
converge to a fixed point. If this line has no double point, we call
it a chain, and the segments of the line links. In case not only the
points 1) but also the links lie in 21, we call the chain a path. If
the chain or path has but a finite number of links, it is called
finite.
Let us call a precinct a region, i.e. a set all of whose points are
inner points, limited or unlimited, such than any two of its points
may be joined by a finite path.
2. Using the results of 578, we may say that, —
A closed Jordan curve J divides the other points of the plane into
two precincts, an inner $ and an outer £)• Moreover, they have a
common frontier which is J.
3. The closed Jordan curve considered in 594 shows that not
every point of such a closed Jordan curve can always be joined to
an arbitrary point of 3 or O by a finite path.
Obviously it can by an infinite path. For about this point, call
it P, we can describe a sequence of circles of radii r = 0. Between
any two of these circles there lie points of $ and of O, if f is suf-
IMAGES
ficiently small. In this way we may get a sequence of points in 3,
7j, /2 ... = P. Any two of these J1^,, Im+l may be joined by a
path which does not cut the path joining /j to Im. For if a loop
were formed, it could be omitted.
4. Any arc $ of a closed Jordan curve J can be joined by a path
to an arbitrary point of the interior or exterior, which call SI.
For let J= $ 4- £• Let k be a point of $ not an end point.
Let B = Dist (&, £), let a be a point of 51 such that Dist (a, &)
< £ 8. Then T.. , ->
77 = Dist (a, £) > | B.
Hence the link I = (a, &) has no point in common with £. Let
b be the first point of I in common with $. Then the link
m = (a, 6) lies in SI. If now a is any point of SI, it may be joined
to a by a path p. Then JP -f m is a path in SI joining the arbi-
trary point a to a point b on the arc $.
596. Example 3. For <9 in 31 = (0*, 1) let
and -(*+i)x
p = a(l +e v fl/).
These equations in polar coordinates define two non-intersecting
spirals Sl, Sz which coil about p = a as an asymptotic circle F.
Let us join the end points of the spirals corresponding to 0 = 1
by a straight line L. Let (5 denote the figure formed by the
spirals S1, Sz, the segment L and the asymptotic circle F. Is (£
a closed Jordan curve ? The answer is, No. This may be seen
in many ways. For example, (S does not divide the other points
into two precincts, but into three, one of which is formed of points
within F.
Another way is to employ the reasoning of 593, 2. Here the
circle F takes the place of the segment on the y-axis which figures
there.
Still another way is to observe that no point on F can be joined
to a point within & by a path.
597. Example 4. Let (£ be formed of the edge (S of a unit
square, together with the ordinates o erected at the points
tilt GEOMETRIC NOTIONS
1
r = -, of length — , w= 1, 2 ••• Although (S divides the other
points of the plane into two precincts $ and O, we can say that
§ is not a closed Jordan curve.
For if it were, 3 **nd £) would have to have (E as a common
frontier. But the frontier of O is (5, while that of $ is (£.
That (§ is not a Jordan curve is seen in other ways. For
example, let 7 be an inner segment of one of the ordinates o.
Obviously it cannot be reached by a path in O.
Brouwer's Proof of Jordan's Theorem
598. We have already given one proof of this theorem in 577
seq., based on the fact that the coordinates of the closed curve are
expressed as one-valued continuous functions
Brouwer's proof* is entirely geometrical in nature and rests
on the definition of a closed Jordan curve as the unifold continu-
ous image of a circle, cf. 591, 5.
If 31, 33, ••• are point sets in the plane, it will be convenient to
denote their frontiers by g-jp $% ••• so that
ga = Front 21 , etc.
We admit that any closed polygon ty having a finite number of
sides, without double point, divides the other points of the plane
into an inner and an outer precinct ^J3t, ^3e respectively. In the
following sections we shall call such a polygon simple, and usu-
ally denote it by *$.
We shall denote the whole plane by (5.
Then <£ = $ + $. + $t.
Let 51 be complete. The complementary set A is formed, as
we saw in 328, of an enumerable set of precincts, say A = \An\.
* Math. Annalen, vol. 69 (1910), p. 109.
BROUWER'S PROOF OF JORDAN'S THEOREM 615
599. 1. If a precinct 51 and its complement* A each contain a
point of the connex (S, then 5g contains a point of (£.
For in the contrary case c = Dv(2l, (S) is complete. In fact
S3 = SI + 5a is complete. As (5 is complete, _Z)v(93, (£) is com-
plete. But if 5a does no^ contain a point of (5, c = Z)v(93, (£).
Thus on this hypothesis, c is complete. Now c = Dv{A, (5) is
complete in any case. Thus (5 = c + c, which contradicts 585, 4.
2. //^Ji, $,., tAe interior and exterior of a simple polygon ^ each
contain a point of a connex (5, then ty contains a point of (£.
3. Let $ be complete and not connected. There exists a simple
polygon ty such that no point of & lies on $, while a part of $t lies in
tyt and another part in tye .
For let £j, $2 be two non-connected parts of $ whose distance
from each other is p > 0. Let A be a quadrate division of the
plane of norm S, so small that no cell contains a point of $j and
$2. Let AJ denote the cells of A containing points of $j. It is
complete, and the complementary set A2 = (S — Aj is formed of one
or more precincts. No point of $j lies in A2 or on its frontier.
Let Pj, P2 be points in $j, $2 respectively. Let D be that
precinct containing P2. Then ^D embraces a simple polygon 1p
which separates P1 and P2 .
4. Let $j, $2 be two detached connexes. There exists a simple
polygon ty which separates them. One of them is in $t, the other in
•JP,,, and no point of either connex lies on ty.
For the previous theorem shows that there is a simple polygon
$ which separates a point Pj in $j from a point P2 in $2 and no
point of $j or $2 lies on $. Call this fact F.
Let now Pl lie in $t . Then every point of ^1 lies in %. For
otherwise <ipl and ^ each contain a point of the connex $x . Then
2 shows that a point of $j lies on ^3, which contradicts F.
5. Let 53 be a precinct determined by the connex (5. Then
b = Front 53 is a connex.
* Since the initial sets are all limited, their complements may be taken with ref-
erence to a sufficiently large square O ; and when dealing with frontier points, points
on the edge of O may be neglected.
616 GEOMETRIC NOTIONS
For suppose b is not a connex. Then by 3, there exists a simple
polygon <$ which contains a part of b in $t and another in s]3, ,
while no point of b lies on ^J. Hence a point ft' of b lies in tyt,
and another point ft" in ty,. As 33 is a precinct, let us join ft' ,
ft" by a path v in S3. Thus ty contains at least one point of v,
that is, a point of S3 lies on 1p. As b and ^ have no point in
common, and as one point of ty lies in S3, all the points of ty lie
in S3. Hence j)v = 0>
As b is a part of (£ and hence some of the points of (£ are in <$„
and some in tyt, it follows from 2 that a part of ty lies in (£. This
contradicts 1).
6. Let $j, $2 be two connexes without double point. By 3
there exists a simple polygon ty which separates them and has
one connex inside, the other outside ^3.
Now $ = $j + $2 is complete and defines one or more precincts.
One of these precincts contains *$.
For say ty lay in two of these precincts as $ and S3. Then the
precinct 21 and its complement (in which S3 lies) each contain a
point of the connex $. Thus $% contains a point of ty. But $a
is a part of ®, and no point of $ lies on ty.
That precinct in Comp $ which contains $ we call the inter-
mediate precinct determined by $j, $2, or more shortly the pre-
cinct between $x, $2 and denote it by Inter ($r $2).
7. Let $j, $2 be two detached connexes, and let t = Inter ($r $2).
Then $j, $2 can be joined by a path lying in f, except its end points
which lie on the frontiers of $r $2 respectively.
For by hypothesis p = Dist^j, $2)>0. Let P1 be a point of
5#! such that some domain b of Pl contains only points of ^1 and
of f. Let Q1 be a point of f in b. Join Pj, Ql by a right line, let
it cut g#j first at the point P' . In a similar way we may reason
on $2, obtaining the points P", Qz. Then P'Q^P" is the path
in question. If we denote it by v, we may let v* denote tins
path after removing its two end points.
8. Let .ft'j, $2 be two detached connexes. A path v joining $j,
&a and lying in f = Inter (j?^, $2)> end points excepted, determine
one and only one precinct in I.
BROUWER'S PROOF OF JORDAN'S THEOREM 617
For from an arbitrary point P in f, let us draw all possible
paths to v. Those paths ending on the same side (left or right)
of v certainly lie in one and the same precinct fr or ft in f. Then
since one end point of v is inside, the other end point outside $,
there must be a part of ty which is not met by v and which joins
the right and left sides of v. We take this as an evident property
of finite broken lines and polygons without double points.
Thus fj and fr are not detached ; they are parts of one precinct.
9. Two paths v1, v2 without common point, lying in I and joining
$! , $2 , split f into two precincts.
Let i = f — vl ; this we have just seen is a precinct. From any
point of it let us draw paths to vz. Those paths ending on the
same side of v2 determine precincts tj, ir which may be identical.
Suppose they are. Then the two sides of v2 can be joined by a
path lying in !, which does not touch vz (end points excepted),
has no point in common with v^, and together with a segment of
v2 forms a simple polygon ty which has one end point of vl in i)3t,
the other end point in tye. Thus by 2, ty contains a point of the
connex v^ . This is contrary to hypothesis.
Similar reasoning shows that
10. The n paths v1 • • • v „ pairwise without common point, lying in
f , and joining the connexes $x , $2 split f into n precincts.
Let us finally note that the reasoning of 595, 4, being independ-
ent of an analytic representation of a Jordan curve, enables us to
use the geometric definition of 591, 5, and we have therefore the
theorem
11. Let 21 be a precinct whose frontier ^ *'* # Jordan curve. Then
there exists a path in 21 joining an arbitrary point of 21 with any arc
Having established these preliminary theorems, we may now
take up the body of the proof.
600. 1. Let 21 be a precinct determined by a closed Jordan curve
J. Then g = Front 21 is identical with J.
If J determines but one precinct 21 which is pantactic in (g, we
have obviously g = J.
618 GEOMETRIC NOTIONS
Suppose then that 21 is a precinct, not pantactic in @. Let 93
be a precinct ^ 21 determined by ^. Let b = Front 93. Then
b <^ g <_ J. Suppose now b < J. As J is a connex by 591, l, g is a
connex by 599, 6. Similarly since 5 is a connex, b is a connex.
Since b < J, let b ~ b on the circle F whose image is J. We
divide b into three arcs ftt, 52, bB to which ~ bx, b2, b3 in b.
£= Inter (bx, b3).
Then by 599, H, we can join bx, b3 by a path vl in 21, and by a
path v2 in 93. By 599, 9, these paths split /3 into two precincts
/Sj, /92- We can join vx, va by a path u± lying in /3X, and by a
path 1/2 lying in /82 .
Now the precinct S3 and its complement each contain a point of
the connex wr Hence by 599, l, b contains a point of ur Simi-
larly b contains a point of u2 . Thus Wj , u2 cut b, and as they
do not cut bj, b3 by hypothesis, they cut b2. Thus at least one
point of /3j and one point of $2 lie in b2 •
Let p be a point of /3X lying in b2, let p ~ p on the circle. Let
b' be an arc of Z>2 containing p. Let b' ~ b'. As the connex b'
has no point in common with Front /8j, b' must lie entirely in ^1
by 599, 1. This is independent of the choice of b', hence the
connex b2, except its end points, lies in /3V Thus /32 can contain
no point of ba, which contradicts the result in italics above.
Thus the supposition that b < J is impossible. Hence b = J,
and therefore % = J.
As a corollary we have :
2. A Jordan curve is apantactic in (§.
3. A closed Jordan curve J cannot determine more than two
precincts.
For suppose there were more than two precincts
2lx, 2T2, 2t3 .- (1
Let us divide the circle F into four arcs whose images call J±, Jz<>
J§»«Ji'
Then by 1, the frontier of each of the precincts 1) is J. Thus
by 599, 9, there is a path in each of the precincts 2lj, 2^ ••• join-
ing Jl and JB. These paths split
DIMENSIONAL INVARIANCE 619
f = Inter (Jj, <73)
into precincts fj, !2 • ••
Now as in 1, we show on the one hand that each ft must contain
a point of </2 or J±, and on the other hand neither Jz nor J"4 can
lie in more than one ft.
4. A closed Jordan curve J must determine at least two precincts.
Suppose that J determines but a single precinct 21. From a
point a of SI we may draw two non-intersecting paths MJ, w2 to
points 6j, b2 of J.
Since the point a may be regarded as a connex, a and J"are two
detached connexes. Hence by 599, 9, the paths MJ, w2 split 21 into
two precincts 2^, Slg. Let j = (wx, %2, J"). The points b^ bz
divide J"into two arcs «7j, J"2, and
are closed Jordan curves. Regarding a and Jl as two detached
connexes, we see^'j determines two precincts, a^ a^. By 599, 1, a
path which joins a point al of a^ with a point «2 of Og must cut ^'j
and hence./. It cannot thus lie altogether in ^ or in 2(2. Thus
both «j, a2 do not lie in Slj, nor both in 212. Let us therefore
say for example that 2lj lies in ax, and 2^ in o^. Hence by 2,
2lj is pantactic in ctj, and 212 in «2. By 1, each point of jl is com-
mon to the frontiers of «x and of o^ and hence of ?lj and of 212,
as these are pantactic.
Let P be a point of Jz . It lies either in etj or a%> Suppose it
lies in ccj. Then it lies neither in a^ nor on Front o,j, and hence
neither in 212 nor on Front 2^ . But every point of /2 and also
every point of j\ lies on Front 2^ . We are thus brought to a
contradiction. Hence the supposition that J determines but a
single precinct is untenable.
Dimensional Invariance
601. 1. In 247 we have seen that the points of a unit interval
J, and of a unit square S may be put in one to one correspondence.
This fact, due to Cantor, caused great astonishment in the mathe-
matical world, as it seemed to contradict our intuitional views
CKO.MKTKIC NOTI()N>
regarding the number of dimensions necessary to define a figure.
Thus it \vas thought that a curve required one variable to deline
nrface two, and a solid three.
The correspondence set up by Cantor is not continuous. On
the other hand the curves invented by Peano, Hilbert, and others
(cf. 573) establish a continuous correspondence between Zand >Sr,
but this correspondence is not one to one. Various mathemati-
cians have attempted to prove that a continuous one to one corre-
spondence between spaces of m and n dimensions cannot exist.
We give a very simple proof due to Lebesgue.*
It rests on the following theorem :
2. Let 21 be a point set in 9tro . Let O < 21 be a standard cube
aL<'2<r , 4=1, 2 •••m.
Let (Sj, (£2"' be a finite number of complete sets so small that each
lies in a standard cube of edge <r. If each point of 21 lies in one of
the (Ts, there is a point of 21 ivhich lies in at least m + 1 of them.
Suppose first that each &t is the union of a finite number of
standard cubes. Let (Sj denote those GTs containing a point of
the face fx of O lying in the plane xl = ar The frontier- ^i of (^
is formed of a part of the faces of the GTs. Let Fl denote that
part of ^i which is parallel to fj. Let Ox = Dv(G, F^). Any
point of it lies in at least two (£' s.
Let (§2 denote those of the Of s not lying altogether in (S1 and
containing a point of the face f2 of O determined by xz = «2. Let
Fz denote that part of Front (?2 which is parallel to f2. Let
G2 = Dv(Oj, F^). Any point of it lies in at least three of the (S's.
In this way we may continue, arriving finally at OTO, any point
of which lies in at least m + 1 of the (Ts.
Let us consider now the general case. We effect a cubical
division of space of norm d<<r. Let (7t denote those cells of D
which contain a point of (St. Then by the foregoing, there is a
point of 21 which lies in at least m + 1 of the <7's. As this is true,
however small d is taken, and as the GTs are complete, there is at
least one point of 2( which lies in m + 1 of the (Ts.
* Math, Annalen, vol. 70 (1911), p. 166.
DIMENSIONAL INVARIANCE 621
3. We now note that the space 9?m may be divided into congruent
cells so that no point is in more than m + 1 cells.
For m = 1 it is obvious. For m = 2 we may
use a hexagonal pattern. We may also use
a quadrate division of norm B of the plane.
These squares may be grouped in horizontal
bands. Let every other band be slid a distance
^ 8 to the right. Then no point lies in more
than 3 squares. For m = 3 we may use a
cubical division of space, etc.
In each case no point of space is in more than m + 1 cells.
Let us call such a division a reticulation of 9?m .
4, Let 21 be a point set in 9?m having an inner point a. There is
no continuous unifold image 33 of 31 in 9fn, w=£w, such that i~a is
an inner point of 93.
For let n > m. Let us effect a reticulation R of 9?OT of norm p.
If 8 > 0 is taken sufficiently small A = Z>25(a) lies in 51. Let
E = -Z?s(a) ; if p is taken sufficiently small, the cells
^1' ^2 '" ^» (1
of H which contain points of E, lie in A. Let the image of E be
(£, and that of the cells 1) be
^,6, •••«.. (2
These are complete. Each point of (§: lies in one of the sets 2).
Hence by 2, they contain a point /3 which lies in n + 1 of them.
Then «~/3 lies in n + 1 of the cells 1). But these, being part of
the reticulation jR, are such that no point lies in more than m -f 1
of them. Hence the contradiction.
602. 1. Schonfliess" Theorem. Let
be one-valued and continuous in a unit square A whose center is
the origin. These equations define a transformation T. If T is
regular, we have seen in I, 742, that the domain Z>P(P) of a point
P =4%, y) within A goes over into a set E such that if Q~P
then _£)<,($) lies in E, if a >0 is sufficiently small.
r>i>:! GEOMETRIC NOTIONS
These conditions on /, g which make T regular are sufficient,
but they are much more than necessary as the following theorem
due to Scho'nfliess * shows.
2. Let A = B + c be a unit square in the x, y plane* whose center
is the origin and whose frontier is c.
u =/O, y) , v = g(x, y)
be one-valued continuous functions in A. As (z, «/) ranges over A,
let (w, v) range over 51 = 33 + c where c ~ c. Let the correspondence
between A and 21 be uniform. Then c is a closed Jordan curve and
the interior c, of c is identical with 93.
That c is a closed Jordan curve follows from 576 seq., or 598
seq. Obviously if one point of 33 lies in ct, all do. For if /3t, /3e
are points of 53, one within c and the other without, let 6, ~/3,,
^«~&. Then ft,, be lying in B can be joined by a path in B
which has no point in common with c. The image of this path is
a continuous curve which has no point in common with c, which
contradicts 578, 2.
Let j./-a\
p = <K#)
be the equation of c in polar coordinates.
If 0 < fi < 1, the equation
P = /**(*)
defines a square, call it <?M, concentric with c and whose sides are
in the ratio /* : 1 with those of c. The equations of CM ~ c^ are
These CM curves have now the following property :
If a point (p, q) is exterior (interior) to cMo, it is exterior (in-
terior) to c^ , for all fi such that
I A1 ~~ /*<) I ^ some e > 0.
For let PH be the distance of (/?, q) from a point (w, v) on CM.
Then
*Qoettingen Nachrichten, 1899. The demonstration here given is due to Osgood,
Goett. Nachr., 1900.
AREA OF CURVED SURFACES 623
is a continuous function of 0, /x which does not vanish for /* = j*0,
when 0<0<27r. But being continuous, it is uniformly con-
tinuous. It therefore does not vanish in the rectangle
-« + /*o</*</*o + « ' 0 < 0 < 2 TT.
We can now show that if $8<ct, it is identical with c, . To this
end we need only to show that any point /3 of c, lies on some CM.
In fact, as p = 0, c^ contracts to a point. Thus @ is an outer point
of some c^, and an inner point oi: others. Let /*0 be the maximum
of the values of p such that $ is exterior to all CB, if /U,</AO.
Then $ lies on cMo. For if not, /8 is exterior to cMo+«, by what we
have just shown, and /*0 is not the maximum of /*.
Let us suppose that 93 lay without c. We show this leads to a
contradiction. For let us invert with respect to a circle f, lying
in ct. Then c goes over into a curve f, and 21 goes over into
£> = (£ + f . Then (£ lies inside f . Let £, rj be coordinates of a
point of 3). Obviously they are continuous functions of z, y in
A^Q , c~f, uniformly.
By what we have just proved, (S must fill all the interior of f.
This is impossible unless 51 is unlimited.
3. We may obviously extend the theorem 2 to the case
U\ =/l(*l "• O •" U»> =/mOl — *»)
and A is a cube in w-way space 9?TO, provided we assume that c, the
image of the boundary of A, divides space into two precincts
whose frontier is c-
Area of Curved Surfaces
603. 1. The Inner Definition. It is natural to define the area of a
curved surface in a manner analogous to that employed to define
the length of a plane curve, viz. by inscribing and circumscrib-
ing the surface with a system of polyhedra, the area of whose
faces converges to 0. It is natural to expect that the limits of
the area of these two systems will be identical, and this common
limit would then forthwith serve as the definition of the area of
the surface. The consideration of the inner and the outer sys-
GEOMETRIC NOTIONS
terns of polyhedra afford thus two types of definitions, which
may be styled the inner and the outer definitions. Let us look
first at the inner definition.
Let the equations of the surface S under consideration be
x - <f>(u, w
y — -«/r(w, y
2 =
(1
the parameters ranging over a complete metric set 21, and #, y, z
being one- valued and continuous in 21.
Let us effect a rectangular division D of norm d of the w, v
plane. The rectangles fall into triangles tK on drawing the
diagonals. Such a division of the plane we call quasi rectangular.
PQ = O0, t»0) , Pl = O0 + 8, i;) , P2 = (MO, VQ + 77)
be the vertices of tK. To these points in the w, v plane corre-
spond three points $4 = (#t, yt, zt), t=l, 2, 3, of S which form the
vertices of one of the triangular faces TK of the inscribed polyhe-
dron n^ corresponding to the division D. Here, as in the follow-
ing sections, we consider only triangles lying in 21. We may do
this since 21 is metric.
Let J5T,, y,, ZK be the projections of rK on the coordinate planes.
Then, as is shown in analytic geometry,
where
7* + Z\
and similar expressions for YK, ZK.
Thus the area of II n is
the summation extending over all the triangles tK lying in the
set 21.
Let x, y, z have continuous first derivatives in 21- Then
A'* = *!-*„=
AREA OF CURVED SURFACES
625
with similar expressions for the other increments. Let
A =
Then
du
dy
dv
dz
du
dz
dv
B =
du
dz
dv
dz
du
dz
dv
dx
du
dx
dv
du
dy
dv
(2
where aK f3K yK are uniformly evanescent with d in 51. Thus if
A, B, C do not simultaneously vanish at any point of 51, we have
as area of the surface S
lim SD = f
d=0 •**
(3
2. An objection which at once arises to this definition lies in
the fact that we have taken the faces of our inscribed polyhedra
in a very restricted manner. We cannot help asking, Would we
get the same area for S if we had chosen a different system of
polyhedra ?
To lessen the force of this objection we observe that by replac-
ing the parameters w, v by two new parameters w', v' we may
replace the above quasi rectangular divisions which correspond to
the family of right lines u = constant, v = constant by the infinitely
richer system of divisions corresponding to the family of curves
u' = constant, v' = constant. In fact, by subjecting w', v' to cer-
tain very general conditions, we may transform the integral 3)
to the new variables w', v' without altering its value.
But even this does not exhaust all possible ways of dividing 21
into a system of triangles with evanescent sides. Let us there-
fore take at pleasure a system of points in the w, v plane having
no limiting points, and join them in such a way as to cover the
plane without overlapping with a set of triangles tK. If each
triangle lies in a square of side rf, we may call this a triangular
division of norm d. We may now inquire if SD still converges
to the limit 3). as d = 0, for this more general system of divisions.
It was generally believed that such was the case, and standard
treatises even contained demonstrations to this effect. These
demonstrations are wrong; for Schwarz * has shown that by
* We.rke, vol. 2, p. 309.
GEOMETRIC NOTIONS
properly choosing the triangular divisions D, it is possible to
make So converge to a value large at pleasure, for an extensive
class of simple surfaces.
604. 1. Schwarzs Example. Let C be a right circular cylin-
der of radius 1 and height 1. A set of planes parallel to the base
at a distance - apart cuts out a system of circles I\, l\ ••• Let
71
us divide each of these circles into m equal
arcs, in such a way that the end points of
the arcs on Fj, F8, F5 ••• lie on the same
vertical generators, while the end points of
F2, F4, F6 ••• lie on generators halfway
between those of the first set. We now
inscribe a polyhedron so that the base of
one of the triangular facets lies on one
circle while the vertex lies on the next circle above or below, as
in the figure.
The area t of one of these facets is
I r* • 7T
0 = 2 sin —
m
-VitO
' in" \
7T\2
COS — .
mJ
Thus
. 7T /I
in -\-=
/yyt » ftnA
+ 4 sin4
7T
m * n" 2m
There are 2 m such triangles in each layer, and there are n
layers. Hence the area of the polyhedron corresponding to this
triangular division D is
S,> = 2k = 2 mn sin --V/4 + 4 sin4 £- .
m^nr 2m
Since the integers w, n are independent of each other, let us
consider various relations which may be placed on them.
Case 1°. Let n—\m. Then
>'/,= 2
m
4 sii
"2 m
1
SUlW / 1 7T4
/ H~ A
7T
Sill
2 w
nm *rr I ~\ ™YYI * M* "iw^
//t 7T / A, //t — f/l
7T
m V
as »n = QO.
2m
AREA OF CURVED SURFACES
Case 2°. Let n = Xm2. Then
627
.O 9 \ «j3 .
sin^
/ * 1 \ **
sin-^
2m
4
m
7T
X2™4 ' 24m4
V
7T
2m
as m = oo.
3°. Let n = Xm3. Then
sin^
/
sin^^1
m
/ 7T4
2m
7T
l + 92™*
7T
W
V
2m
, as m = oo.
= + oo
2. Thus only in the first case does SD converge to 2 TT, which
is the area of the cylinder O as universally understood. In the
2° and 3° cases the ratio h/b = 0. As equations of C we may
take
x = cos u , y = sm w , z = v.
Then to a triangular facet of the inscribed polyhedron will cor-
respond a triangle in the w, v plane. In cases 2° and 3° this tri-
angle has an angle which converges to TT as m = oo. This is not
so in case 1°. Triangular divisions of this latter type are of great
importance. Let us call then a triangular division of the M, v
plane such that no angle of any of its triangles is greater than
TT — e, where e > 0 is small at pleasure but fixed, positive triangur
lar divisions. We employ this term since the sine of one of the
angles is > some fixed positive number.
605. The Outer Definition. Having seen one of the serious diffi-
culties which arise from the inner definition, let us consider briefly
the outer definition. We begin with the simplest case in which
the equation of the surface S is
=/(*,
(1
/ being one-valued and having continuous first derivatives. Let
us effect a metric division A of the a;, y plane of norm S, and on
GEOMETRIC NOTIONS
each cell dg as base, we erect a right cylinder (7, which cuts out an
element of surface Bx from S. Let $, be an arbitrary point of 8K
and £« the tangent plane at this point. The cylinder O cuts out
of ZK an element &SK . Let VK be the angle that the normal to ZK
makes with the z-axis. Then
1
cos vx =
and
COS J/
The area of S is now defined to be
lira SAtf, (2
8=0
when this limit exists. The derivatives being continuous, we have
at once that this limit is
which agrees with the result obtained by the inner definition in
603, 3).
The advantages of this form of definition are obvious. In the
first place, the nature of the divisions A is quite arbitrary ; however
they are chosen, one and the same limit exists. Secondly, the most
general type of division is as easy to treat as the most narrow, viz.
when the cells dK are squares.
Let us look at its disadvantages. In the first place, the elements
A/S^ do not form a circumscribing polyhedron of S. On the con-
trary, they are little patches attached to $at the points $*, and
having in general no contact with one another. Secondly, let us
suppose that S has tangent planes parallel to the z-axis. The de-
rivatives which enter the integral 603, 3) are no longer continuous,
and the reasoning employed to establish the existence of the limit
2) breaks down. Thirdly, we have the case that z is not one-
valued, or that the tangent planes to S do not turn continuously,
or do not even exist at certain points.
AREA OP CURVED SURFACES 629
To get rid of these disadvantages various other forms of outer
definitions have been proposed. One of these is given by Groursat
in his Cours d'Analyse. Instead of projecting an arbitrary
element of surface on a fixed plane, the xy plane, it is projected on
one of the tangent planes belonging to that element. Hereby the
more general type of surfaces defined by 603, 1) instead of those
defined by 1) above is considered. The restriction is, however,
made that the normals to the tangent planes cut the elements of
surface but once, also the first derivatives of the coordinates are
assumed to be continuous in SI. Under these conditions we get
the same value for the area as that given in 603, 3).
When the first derivatives of x, y, z are not continuous or do
not exist, this definition breaks down. To obviate this difficulty
de la VallSe-Poussin has proposed a third form of definition in his
Cours d' Analyse, vol. 2, p. 30 seq. Instead of projecting the
element of surface on a tangent plane, let us project it on a plane
for which the projection is a maximum. In case that S has a con-
tinuously turning tangent plane nowhere parallel to the 2-axis, de
la Vallee-Poussin shows that this definition leads to the same
value of the area of S as before. He does not consider other cases
in detail.
Before leaving this section let us note that Jordan in his Cours
employs the form of outer definition first noted, using the paramet-
ric form of the equations of 8. In the preface to this treatise the
author avows that the notion of area is still somewhat obscure, and
that he has not been able " a de"finir d'une manie're satisfaisante
1'aire d'une surface gauche que dans le cas ou la surface a un plan
tangent variant suivant une loi continue."
606. 1. Regular Surfaces. Let us return to the inner definition
considered in 603. We have seen in 604 that not every system of
triangular divisions can be employed. Let us see, however, if we
cannot employ divisions much more general than the quasi rec-
tangular. We suppose the given surface is defined by
the functions <£>, -«/r, ^ being one-valued, totally differentiable func-
tions of the parameters w, v which latter range over the complete
680
GEOMETRIC NOTIONS
metric set SI. Surfaces characterized by these conditions we
shall call regular. Let
be the vertices of one of the triangles £„, of a triangular division
D of norm d of SI. As before let ^J0, $j, $2 be the corresponding
points on the surface $. Then
and similar expressions hold for the other increments. Also
where JP, denotes the sum of several determinants, involving the
infinitesimals
Similar expressions hold for YK, ZK. We get thus
where A, B, C are the determinants 2) in 603. Then the area of
the inscribed polyhedron corresponding to this division D is
Let us suppose that
Az + B2+Cz>q , q>0
as w, v ranges over SI. Also let us assume that
(2
AREA OF CURVED SURFACES
631
remain numerically <e for any division D of norm rf<^0, e small
at pleasure, except in the vicinity of a discrete set of points, that
is, let 3) be in general uniformly evanescent in 21, as d = 0. Then
where m general
<J\
If now
once
as in 603.
L, B, O are limited and ^-integrable in 31, we have at
lira SD = Cdudv^A2+&+ (72
j—n */9t
2. We ask now under what conditions are the expressions 3)
in general uniformly evanescent in 31 ? The answer is pretty evi-
dent from the example given by Schwarz. In fact the equation
of the tangent plane X at ^ is
A(x - *0) + B(y - */0) + (7(2 - z0) = 0.
On the other hand the equation of the plane T= ($0, $j, ty^)
is
x y
y\
or
or finally
Thus for 3) to converge in general uniformly to zero, it is nec-
essary and sufficient that the secant planes T converge in general
uniformly to tangent planes. Let us call divisions such that the
faces of the corresponding inscribed polyhedra converge in general
uniformly to tangent planes uniform triangular divisions. For
such divisions the expressions 3) are in general uniformly evanes-
cent, as d = 0. We have therefore the following theorem :
3. Let 21 be a limited complete metric set. Let the coordinates
x, y, z be one-valued totally differentiate functions of the parame-
632 GEOMETRIC NOTIONS
ters w, v in 21, such that A2 + IP + C2 is greater than some positive
constant, and is limited and R-integrable in 21. Then
P + C2dudvt
D denoting the class of uniform triangular divisions of norms d.
This limit we shall call the area of S. From this definition \v<>
have at once a number of its properties. We mention only the
following :
4. Let 2lj, ••• 2lm be unmixed metric sets whose union is 21. Let
Sl, •" Sm be the pieces of S corresponding to them. Then each SK
has an area and their sum is S.
5. Let 21* be a metric part of 21, depending on a parameter \ = 0,
such that 21A = 21. Then
lim Sk = S.
A = 0
6. The area of S remains unaltered when S is subjected to a dis-
placement or a transformation of the parameters as in I, 744 seq.
607. 1. Irregular Surfaces. We consider now surfaces which
do not have tangent planes at every point, that is, surfaces for
which one or more of the first derivatives of the coordinates x, y, z
do not exist, and which may be styled irregular surfaces. We
prove now the theorem :
Let the coordinates x, y, z be one-valued functions of u, v having
limited total difference quotients in the metric set 21. Let D be a
positive triangular division of norm d<d0. Then
Max S0
is finite and evanescent with 21.
For let the difference quotients remain </*. We have
But
', - Pt)P2 = 2 /ft. | cosec
ARKA OF CURVED SURFACES 633
where 8K is the angle made by the sides PQPi, -^o-^V As D is a
positive division, one of the angles of tK is such that cosec BK is
numerically less than some positive number M. Thus
where /x, M are independent of K and d. Similar relations hold
for 7,, Z.. Hence
SD< 2 6 p*M> tK = 6 /i2Jtf(a + 17)
where rj > 0 is small at pleasure, for c#0 sufficiently small.
2. Let 31 and x, y, z be as in 606, 3, except at certain points form-
ing a discrete set a, the first partial derivatives do not exist. Let
their total difference quotients be limited in 31. Then
lira
lim SD = f V^L2 + & + Czdudv,
d=0 J
tvhere D denotes a positive triangular division of norm d.
Let us first show that the limit on the left exists. We may
choose a metric part 53 of 31 such that (5 = 31 — 53 is complete and
exterior to 31 and such that 53 is as small as we please. Let S$
denote the area of the surface corresponding to (5. The triangles
tK fall into two groups : Cr1 containing points of 53 ; 6r2 containing
only points of (£. Then
But 53 may be chosen so small that the first sum is < e/4 for
any d<dQ. Moreover by taking dQ still smaller if necessary, we
have
|^-
Similarly for any other division D' of norm d',
\S0-8t\<€/2 , d'<d0
decreasing d0 still farther if necessary. Thus
\SD,-SD\<e , rf, d'<d0.
GEOMETRIC NOTIONS
Hence lim SD exists, call it S. Since S exists we may take dQ
so small that
\8-Sj,\<e/'2 , d<d0.
This with 1) gives
\S
that is.
ASr=liniA% = lim f V42 + &+ C2dudv
*/g
by I, 724.
608. 1. The preceding theorem takes care of a large class of
irregular surfaces whose total difference quotients are limited.
In case they are not limited we may treat certain cases as follows:
Let us effect a quadrate division of the w, v plane of norm d,
and take the triangles tK so that for any triangular division D
associated with c£, no square contains more than n triangles, and
no triangle lies in more than v squares ; w, v being arbitrarily
large constants independent of d. Such a division we call a
quasi quadrate division of norm d. If we replace the quadrate by
a rectangular division, we get a quasi rectangular division.
We shall also need to introduce a new classification of functions
according to their variation in 31, or along lines parallel to the
u, v axes. Let D be a quadrate division of the w, v plane of norm
d<d0. Let
a>K = Osc/(w, v) , in the cell dK.
Then Max 2ovZ
is the variation of / in 51. If this is not only finite, but evanes-
cent with 31, we say/ has limited fluctuation in 31. Obviously this
may be extended to any limited point set in w-way space.
Let us now restrict ourselves to the plane. Let a denote the
points of 31 on a line parallel to the w-axis. Let us effect a divi-
sion D' of norm d'. Let to'K = Osc/(w, v) in one of the intervals
of D1. Then
7)a = Max 2o>£
is the variation of /in a-
AREA OF CURVED SURFACES 635
Let us now consider all the sets o lying on lines parallel to the
w-axis, and let
&<<T , er = 0.
If now there exists a constant G- independent of a such that
that is, if r)a is uniformly evanescent with <r, we say that/(w, v)
has limited fluctuation in 21 with respect to u.
With the aid of these notions we may state the theorems :
2. Let the coordinates x, y, z be one-valued limited functions in
the limited complete set 21. Let x, y have limited total difference
quotients, while z has limited variation in 21. Let D denote a quasi
quadratic division of norm d<dQ. Then
Max SD
D
is finite.
For, as before,
But IJL denoting a sufficiently large constant,
| A[, |, | Ay I are < pd.
Let G\=Osc2 in the square *t. If the triangle tK lies in the
squares «,t, — «tfc,
I A; |, | A? | <«„+••• +*v
Thus, n denoting a sufficiently large constant,
21 v i
-A* •
the summation extending over those squares containing a triangle
of D. But z having limited variation,
2o)tc? < some M.
JT6HCC ^» I XT' I ^C* I T7" I
2 I XK \ , 2 I YK \ are <
Finally, as in 607,
2 Z | < some M'.
The theorem is thus established.
636 GEo.MKiurc NOTIONS
'.. The coordinates x, y, 2, being as in 2, except that z has limited
fluctuation in 21, and D denoting a quasi quadrate division of
norm d < <70,
.Max SD
D
is finite and evanescent with 21.
The reasoning is the same as in 2 except that now M, M' are
evanescent with 21.
4. Let the coordinates x, y, z have limited total difference quo
tit' tits in 21, while the variation of z along any line parallel to the u
or v axis is < M. Let 21 lie in a square of side s = 0. Then
Max&o < sGr,
D
where Gr is some constant independent of «, and D is a quasi rectan-
gular division of norm d < dQ .
For here
22 X<Z&' • A"z + 2 A' • A'z
where M' denotes a sufficiently large constant ; du, dv denote the
length of the sides of one of the triangles tK parallel respectively
to the M, v axes, and &>u, cov the oscillation of z along these sides.
Since the variation is < M in both directions,
Ms.
Similarly
2ov*u < M..
The rest of the proof follows as before.
5. The symbols having the same meaning as before, except that z
has limited fluctuation with respect to M, y,
The demonstration is similar to the foregoing. Following the
line of proof used in establishing 607, 2 and employing the
theorems just given, we readily prove the following theorems :
AREA OF CURVED SURFACES 637
6. Let 21 be a metric set containing the discrete set a. Let b be
a metric part of 21, containing a such that 53 = 21 — b is exterior to a,
and b == 0. Let the coordinates x, ;/, z be one-valued totally differ-
entiable functions in 53, such that Az + BP + (T2 never sinks below a
positive constant in any 53, is properly R-integrable in any 53, and
improperly integrable in 21. Let x, y have limited total difference
quotients, and z limited fluctuation in b. Then
02dudv
where A^ jB, 0 are the determinants in 603, 2), and D is any quasi
quadrate division of norm d.
7. Let the symbols have the same meaning as in 6, except that
1° Q reduces to a finite set.
2° z has limited variation along any line parallel to the w, v axes.
3° D denotes a uniform quasi rectangular division. Then
lira SD = V^2 + ^2 + C*dudv.
d=0 JW.
8. The symbols having the same meaning as in 6, except that
1° z has limited fluctuation with respect to w, v in b-
2° D denotes a uniform quasi rectangular division. Then
d=0
lim Sj, = I V^a + B2 + C2dudv.
9. If we call the limits in theorems 6, 7, 8, area, the theorems
606, 3, 4, 5 still hold.
INDEX
(Numbers refer to pages)
Abel's identity, 87
series, 87
.1 lisolutely convergent integrals, 31
series, 79
products, 247
Addition of cardinals, 292
ordinals, 312
series, 128
Adherence, 340
Adjoint product, 247
series, 77, 139
set of intervals, 337
Aggregates, cardinal number, 278
definition, 276
distribution, 295
enumerable, 280
equivalence, 276
eutactic, 304
exponents, 294
ordered, 302
power or potency, 278
sections, 307
similar, 303
transfinite, 278
uniform or 1-1 correspondence, 276
Alternate series, 83
Analytical curve, 582
Apantactic, 325
Area of curve, 599, 602
surface, 623
Arzela, 365, 555
Associated simple series, 144
products, 247
multiple series, 145
normal series, 245
logarithmic series, 243
inner sets, 365
Associated, outer sets, 365
non-negative functions, 41
Baire, 326, 452, 482, 587
Bernouillian numbers, 265
Bertram's test, 104
Bessel functions, 238
Beta functions, 267
Binomial series, 110
Backer, 165
Bonnet's test, 121
Borel, 324, 542
Brouwer, 614
Cohen's test, 340
Cantor's 1° and 2° principle, 316
theorem, 450
Category of a set, 326
Cauchy's function, 214
integral test, 99
radical test, 98
theorem, 90
Cell of convergence, 144
standard rectangular, 359
Chain, 612
Class of a function, 468, 469
Conjugate functions, 238
series, 147
products, 249
Connex, 605
Connected sets, 605
Contiguous functions, 231
Continuity, 452
infra, 487
semi, 487
supra, 487
Continuous image, 608
639
640
INDEX
( 'ontractiim, 287
Convergence, infra-uniform. .~>(i2
monotone, 176
uniform, lf>i;
at a point, \~>7
in segments, 556
sub-uniform, 555
Co-product, 242
Curves, analytical, 582
area, 599, 602
Faber, 546
Jordan, 595, 610
Hilbert, 590
length, 579
non-intuitional, 537
Osgood, 600
Pompeiu, 542
rectifiable, 583
space-filling, 588
D'Alembert, 96
Deleted series, 139
Derivales, 494
Derivative of a set, 330
order of, 331
Detached sets, 604
Dilation, 287
Dini, 176, 185, 438, 538
series, 86
Discontinuity, 452
at a point, 454
of 1° kind, 416
of 2° kind, 455
pointwise, 457
total, 1.77
Displacement, 286
Distribution, 295
Divergence of a series, 440
Division, complete, 30
separated, 366, 371
unmixed, 2
of series, 196
of products, 253
Divisor of a set, 23
quasi, 390
Divisor, semi, 390
Du Bois Keymonfl, in:>
lSe, ee = osets, 473
Eliininalion, .">!( 1
Enclosures, complementary c-, 355
deleted, 452
distinct, 311
divisor of, 344
e-, 355
measurable, 356
non-overlapping, 344
null, 366
outer, 343
standard, 359
Enumerable, 280
Equivalent, 276
Essentially positive series, 78
negative series, 78
Euler's constant, 269
Eutactic, 304
Exponents, 294
Exponential series, 96
Extremal sequence, 374
Faber curves, 546
Fluctuation, 634, 635
Fourier's coefficient, 416
constants, 416
series, 416
Function, associated non-negative func-
tions, 41
Bessel's, 238
Beta, 267
Cauchy's, 214
class of, 468, 469
conjugate, 233
contiguous, 231
continuous, 452
infra, 487
semi, 487
supra, 487
discontinuous, 452
of 1° kind, 416
of 2° kind, 455
INDEX
641
/•"unctinn, Gamma, 267
Gauss' U(x), 238
hy|M'rbolir, 22 S
hvpergeometric, 228
liueo-oscillating, 528
maximal, 488
inrasurablr, 338
ininiiiial. 488
monotone, 137
null, 385
oscillatory, 488
pointwise discontinuous, 457
residual, 561
Riemann's, 459
totally discontinuous, 457
truncated, 27
uniformly limited, 160, 567
Volterra's, 501, 583
Weierstrass', 498, 523, 581, 588
Gamma function, 267
Gauss' function U(x), 238
test, 109
Geometric series, 81, 139
Harnack, divergence of series, 440
sets, 354
Hermite, 300
Hubert's curves, 590
Hobson, 389, 412, 555
Hyperbolic functions, 228
Hyper complete sets, 472
Hyper geometric functions, 229
series, 112
Images, simple, multiple, 606
unifold, manifold, 006
continuous, 606, 608
Integrals, absolutely convergent, 31
L- or Lebesgue, proper, 372
improper, 403, 405
improper, author's, 32
classical, 26
de la Valle'e-Poussin, 27
inner, 20
Integrals, R- or Riemannian, 372
Integrand set, 385
Intervals, of convergence, 90
adjoint set of, 337
set of, belonging to, 337
Inversion, geometric, 287
of a series, 204
Iterable sets, 14
Iterated products, 251
series, 149
Jordan curves, 595, 610
variation, 430
theorem, 436
Konig, 527
Rummer's test, 106, 124
Lattice points, 137
system, 137
Law of Mean, generalized, 505
Layers, 555
deleted, 563
Lebesque or L- integrals, 372
theorems, 413, 424, 426, 452, 475,
520, 619
Leibnitz's formula, 226
Length of curve, 579
Lindermann. 300, 599
Lineo-oscillating functions, 528
Link, 612
Lioucille numbers, 301
Lipschitz, 438
Logarithmic series, 97
Luroth, 448
Maclaurin's series, 206
Maximal, minimal functions, 488
Maximum, minimum, 521
at a point, 485
Measure, 348
lower, 348
upper, 343
Mertens, 130
Metric sets, 1
INDEX
Monotone convergence, 176
functions, 137
Moore-Osgood theorem, 170
Motion, 579
Multiplication of series, 129
cardinals. L'!I:>
ordinals, :J14
infinite products, 253
Normal form of infinite product, 245
Null functions, 385
sets, 348
Numbers, Bernouillian, 265
cardinal, 278
class of ordinal numbers, 318
limitary, 314.
Liouville, Ml
ordinal, 310
rank of limitary numbers, 331
Ordered sets, 302
Order of derivative of a set, 331
Oscillation at a point, 454
Oscillatory function, 488
Osgood curves,^600
-Moore theorem, 170
theorems, etc., 178, 555, 622
Pantactic, 325
Path, 612
Peaks, 179
infinite, 566
Polyant, 153
Point sets, adherence, 340
adjoint set of intervals, 337
apantactic, 325
associated inner set, 365
outer set, 365
Baire sets, 326
category 1° and 2°, 326
coherence, 340
conjugate, 51
connected, 605
convex, 605
detached, 604
Point nets, divisor, 23
(ge, e =0 sets» 473
Harnack sets, 354
hypercoinplete, 472
images, 605, 606
integrand sets, 385
iterable, 14
measurable, 343, 348
metric, 1
negative component, 37
null, 348
pautactic, 325
positive component, 37
potency or power, 278
projection, 10
quasidivisor, 390
reducible, 335
reticulation, 621
semidivisor, 390
separated intervals, 337
sum, 22
transfinite derivatives, 330
union, 27
well-ordered, 304
Pointwise discontinuity, 457
Pompeiu, curves, 542
Potency or power of a set, 278
Power series, 89, 144, 187, 191
Precinct, 612
Pringsheim, theory of convergence, 113
theorems, etc., 141, 215, 216, 217,
220, 273
Projection, 10
Products, absolute convergence, 247
adjoint, 247
associate simple, 247
conjugate, 249
co-product, 242
iterated, 251
normal form, 245
Quasidivisor, 390
Radbe's test, 107
Rank of limitary numbers, 331
INDEX
643
Rate of convergence or divergence, 102
Rntio test, 96
Reducible sets, 335
Ili'inninder series, 77
of Taylor's series, 209, 210
Rectifiable curves, 583
Regular points, 428
l!'-*idual function, 561
Reticulation, 621
Richardson, 32
Riemann's function, 459
theorem, 444
R- or Riemann integrals, 372
Rotation, 286
Scheefer, theorem, 516
Schonfliess, theorems, 598, 621
Schwarz, theorem, etc., 448, (»2(5
Section of an aggregate, 307
Segment, constant, or of in variability,
521
Semidivisor, 390
Separated divisions, 366, 371
functions, 403
sets, 366
of intervals, 337
Sequence, extremal, 374
m-tuple, 137
Series, Abel's, 87
absolute convergent, 79
adjoint, 77, 139
alternate, 83
associate logarithmic, 243
normal, 245
simple, 144
multiple, 144
Bessels, 238
binomial, 110
cell of convergence, 144
conjugate, 147
deleted, 139
Dini's, 86
divergence of, 440
essentially positive or negative, 78
exponential, !HJ
Series, Fourier's, IK!
geometric, 81, 139
harmonic, 82
general of exponent p., .vj
hypergeometric, 112
interval of convergence, 90
inverse, 204
iterated, 149
logarithmic, 97
Maclaurin's, 206
power, 89, 144, 187
rate of convergence or divergence,
102
remainder, 77
simple convergence, 80
Taylor's, 206
tests of convergence, see Tests
telescopic, 85
trigonometric, 88
two-way, 133
Similar sets, 303
Similitude, 287
Simple convergence of series, 80
Singular points, 26
Space-filling curves, 588
Steady convergence, 176
Submeasurable, 405
Sum of sets, 22
Surface, area, 623
irregular, 632
regular, 629
Taylor's series, 206
Telescopic series, 85
Tests of convergence, Bertram, 104
Bonnet, 121
Cahen, 108
Cauchy, 98, 99
d'Alembert, 96
Gauss, 109
Kwnmer, 106, 121
Pringsheim, 123
Raabe, 107
radical, 98
ratio, 96
lilt INDKX
- of convergence, tests of 1 ami _' Uniformly limited function, KiO, .".(17
kind, l-jo Union of sets, 22
\Veierstrass. 12 H
Theta fund ions, !:;:>. isl, L'.M! . Vall<:<'-r<>ux*m (<!<• la), '27, 594
discontinuity, 457 Van Vleck sets, :!(il
itr cardinals. 278 Variation, limited or finite, 42!), 5:50
derivatives, :;:',() positive and negative, 430
Translation, 2Sfi Volterra curves, 501, 587
Trigonomi-trii' series, 88
Truncated function, 27 Wnllis formula, 260
Two-way series, l:i:J Weierstras*' function, l!»s. .Vj:;. 588
test, 120
Undetermined coefficients, 1<>7 Well-ordered set s, :',(» \
Unfold image. 606 Wilson, W. A, vii, 395, 401
Uniform convergence. 15(5 }-^m/ w H theorems, m :,,;:,
at a point, 157
correspondence, 276 Zeros of power series, l!)l
SYMBOLS EMPLOYED IN VOLUME II
^'umbers refer to pages)
Front «, 1. % 614 KP K2 ••• , 318, 323
* 90 ^i) ^2 ••• > sis
' »(«-) = 21-, 330 ; a<«> = ^ta. "»:'.l
^l. 1 1 = Meas 2t, 343; 1 = Aleas -'I. :',js
^i *'22 1 = Meas «, 348
ni-,'2'2 /»/»/*
Ad,/,«i J- j- ],««, 408,406 _
/A.M':l1 Sdv, Qdv, 390
|i, FB, 429 ; Var / = V,, 429
'-ly -'l-a, 84 Qgg y _ oscillation in a given set,
I .1,,. Adj .1. 77. .I,,,,,. 7S Osc/, 454
I, .1, , . loS; .!,, = .1, ., , 139 «s=«
Disc/; 454
' "
» ~ 5^. 271; ; •}( ~ », 303 ee, etto, 47;;
Card «, 278 r(x),/(x), 488
Ord -.'I. :!11 R(a). l!U
.... .".11 : 12. 818 A(a, 0), 494
INDEX
645
The following symbols are defined in Volume I and are repeated here for
the coiivt'iiieuce of the reader.
Pist(a, x) is the distance between
a and x
D6(a), called the domain of the point
a of norm 8 is the set of points x,
such that Dist (a, z) < 8
Fa(a), called the vicinity of the point
a of norm 8, refers to some set 2t,
and is the set of points in D^(n)
which lit' in "ft
£>6*(«), V&*(a) are the same as the
above sets, omitting a. They are
called deleted domains, deleted vi-
cinities
o» = a means an converges to a
/(z)m= a, means /(r) converges to a
A line of symbols as:
e < 0, »i, | « — an j < e, n > TO
is of constant occurrence, and is to
be read : for each e > 0, there exists
an index m, such that | « — an j <e,
for every n > ;n
•Similarly a line of symbols as:
>0, |/(*)- o|<e,* in Fs*(a)
is to be read : for each e > 0, there
exists a 8 > 0, such that
[/(*)- al<«,
for every x in V&*(a)
ft
PLEASE DO NOT REMOVE
CARDS OR SLIPS FROM THIS POCKET
UNIVERSITY OF TORONTO LIBRARY
Live Music Archive
Librivox Free Audio
Metropolitan Museum
Cleveland Museum of Art
Internet Arcade
Console Living Room
Books to Borrow
Open Library
TV News
Understanding 9/11